INSTRUCTIONS FOR USE

IntelliVue Patient Monitor

MP5
Rele ase G . 0 w i th Softwa r e R e v i s i o n G . 0 x . x x

Pa tie n t Monit o ring

Part Number M8105-9001C
Printed in Germany 09/08
4512 610 29031

*M8105-9001C*
M8105-9001C

1Table Of Contents
1 Installation 1

Installation Checklist 1
Unpacking and Checking the Shipment 2
Mounting the Monitor 3
Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains 3
Checking Out The Monitor 3
Loading Paper 4
Operating the Monitor 5
Setting the Date and Time 6
Checking Country-Specific Default Settings 6
Handing Over the Monitor 6

2 Basic Operation 9

Introducing the Monitor 9

Operating and Navigating 13
Operating Modes 19
Understanding Screens 20
Using the XDS Remote Display (not MP5T) 21
Using the Visitor Screen 21
Understanding Profiles 22
Understanding Settings 24
Adjusting a Measurement Wave 25
Freezing Waves 26
Using Labels 27
Entering Measurements Manually 29
Changing Monitor Settings 29
Checking Your Monitor Revision 30
Getting Started 30
Disconnecting from Power 32
Networked Monitoring 32
Using the MP5 with a Host Monitor 33

3 What’s New? 35

What’s New in Release G.0? 35

What’s New in Release F.0? 36

4 Alarms 39

Visual Alarm Indicators 40

Audible Alarm Indicators 41
Acknowledging Alarms 43
Pausing or Switching Off Alarms 44
Alarm Limits 45
Reviewing Alarms 50

i
Latching Alarms 52
Testing Alarms 52
Alarm Behavior at On/Off 53
Alarm Recordings 53

5 Patient Alarms and INOPs 55

Patient Alarm Messages 55

Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 61

6 Managing Patients 85

Admitting a Patient 85
Quick Admitting a Patient 87
Editing Patient Information 87
Discharging a Patient 88
Transferring Patients 89
Care Groups 92

7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring 99

Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement 99

Connecting ECG Cables 99
Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads 100
Checking Paced Status 100
Understanding the ECG Display 100
Monitoring Paced Patients 101
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave 103
Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone 103
Changing the ECG Filter Settings 104
Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6-lead placement) 104
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement 105
About ECG Leads 105
ECG Lead Fallback 106
ECG Lead Placements 106
Capture 12-Lead 110
EASI ECG Lead Placement 111
ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview 112
Using ECG Alarms 113
ECG Safety Information 114
About Arrhythmia Monitoring 115
Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off 116
Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring 116
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display 117
Arrhythmia Relearning 120
Arrhythmia Alarms 121
About ST Monitoring 127
Switching ST On and Off 127
Understanding the ST Display 128

ii
Updating ST Baseline Snippets 129
Recording ST Segments 130
About the ST Measurement Points 130
ST Alarms 132
Viewing ST Maps 133
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring 137
QT Alarms 140
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off 141

8 Monitoring Pulse Rate 143

Entering the Setup Pulse Menu 143

System Pulse Source 143
Switching Pulse On and Off 144
Using Pulse Alarms 144

9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp) 147

Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp 147

Understanding the Resp Display 148
Changing Resp Detection Modes 148
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave 149
Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave 150
Using Resp Alarms 150
Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay 150
Resp Safety Information 150

10 Monitoring SpO2 153

SpO2 Sensors 153

Applying the Sensor 153
Connecting SpO2 Cables 154
Measuring SpO2 154
SpO2 Signal Quality Indicator (Fast SpO2 only) 155
Assessing a Suspicious SpO2 Reading 155
Changing the Averaging Time 156
Setting the Measurement Mode 156
Understanding SpO2 Alarms 156
Pleth Wave 157
Perfusion Numeric 158
Perfusion Change Indicator 158
Setting SpO2/Pleth as Pulse Source 158
Setting Up Tone Modulation 158
Setting the QRS Volume 159

11 Monitoring NBP 161

Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement 161

Preparing to Measure NBP 162
Starting and Stopping Measurements 164

iii
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition Time 165
Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The Sequence 165
Choosing the NBP Alarm Source 166
Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off 166
Assisting Venous Puncture 167
Calibrating NBP 167

12 Measuring Predictive Temperature 169

Making a Temperature Measurement 169

13 Monitoring Temperature 173

Making a Temp Measurement 173

Calculating Temp Difference 174

14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure 175

Setting up the Pressure Measurement 175

Zeroing the Pressure Transducer 176
Adjusting the Calibration Factor 178
Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only 178
Changing the Pressure Wave Scale 178
Optimizing the Waveform 179
Using the Wave Cursor 179
Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression 179
Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source 179
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6 181
Calculating Cerebral Perfusion 182
Calculating Pulse Pressure Variation 182

15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide 185

Using the CO2 Measurement 186

Measuring Microstream CO2 189
Setting up all CO2 Measurements 190

16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient 195

How Can You Combine Devices? 195

Functions Available When the Telemetry Data Window is Displayed 199
Functions Available For Devices Connected Via SRR 200
General Telemetry-related Functions 201
Use Models With Telemetry 202

17 Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the Monitor 205

18 Trends 207

Viewing Trends 207

Setting Up Trends 210
Documenting Trends 213

iv
Trends Databases 214
Screen Trends 215

19 High Resolution Trend Waves 219

OxyCRG 219
Printing Hi-Res Trend Wave Reports 219
Hi-Res Trend Wave Recordings 220

20 Event Surveillance 221

Event Episodes 221

Events Pop-Up Keys 222
Event Triggers 222
The Events Database 224
Viewing Events 224
Annotating Events 226
Documenting Events 226

21 ProtocolWatch 231

Severe Sepsis Screening 231

22 Recording 237

Starting and Stopping Recordings 237

Overview of Recording Types 238
All ECG Waves Recordings 239
Creating and Changing Recordings Templates 239
Changing ECG Wave Gain 240
Recording Priorities 241
Sample Recording Strip 241
Reloading Paper 243
Recorder Status Messages 243

23 Printing Patient Reports 245

Starting Report Printouts 245

Stopping Reports Printouts 246
Setting Up Reports 246
Setting Up Individual Print Jobs 248
Checking Printer Settings 249
Printing a Test Report 249
Switching Printers On Or Off for Reports 249
Dashed Lines on Reports 249
Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports 249
Checking Report Status and Printing Manually 250
Printer Status Messages 251
Sample Report Printouts 252

v
 24 Using the Drug Calculator 257

Accessing the Drug Calculator 257

Performing Drug Calculations 258
Charting Infusion Progress 260
Using the Titration Table 260
Documenting Drug Calculations 260

25 Using the Timer 261

Viewing the Timer 261

Timer Setup Pop-up Keys 261
Setting Up Timers 262
Displaying a Timer On The Main Screen 263
Displaying A Clock On The Main Screen 264

26 Laboratory Data 265

Viewing Received Data 265

27 Care and Cleaning 267

General Points 267

Cleaning the Monitor 268
Disinfecting the Monitor 268
Sterilizing the Monitor 268
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories 269
Cleaning and Disinfecting the Predictive Temperature Accessories 269
Cleaning Batteries and the Battery Compartment 269

28 Using Batteries 271

Battery Power Indicators 271

Checking Battery Charge 274
Replacing a Battery 274
Optimizing Battery Performance 274
Battery Safety Information 275

29 Maintenance and Troubleshooting 277

Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories 277

Inspecting the Cables and Cords 277
Maintenance Task and Test Schedule 278
Troubleshooting 279
Disposing of the Monitor 279
Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders 279

30 Accessories 281

ECG/Resp Accessories 281

NBP Accessories 285
Invasive Pressure Accessories 286
SpO2 Accessories 287

vi
Temperature Accessories 291
Predictive Temperature Accessories 291
Mainstream CO2 Accessories 292
Sidestream CO2 Accessories 292
Microstream CO2 Accessories 292
Recorder Accessories 293
Cable for Direct Connection of a Telemetry Device 294
Battery Accessories 294

31 Installation and Specifications 295

Intended Use 295

Manufacturer’s Information 296
Symbols 296
Installation Safety Information 298
Altitude Setting 300
Monitor Safety Specifications 300
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance 301
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance 302
Monitor Performance Specifications 304
M4605A Battery Specifications 308
Measurement Specifications 309
Safety and Performance Tests 321

32 Default Settings Appendix 327

Country-Specific Default Settings 327

Alarm and Measurement Default Settings 333
Alarm Default Settings 333
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings 334
Pulse Default Settings 337
Respiration Default Settings 337
SpO2 Default Settings 338
NBP Default Settings 339
Temperature Default Settings 339
Predictive Temperature Default Settings 340
Invasive Pressure Default Settings 340
CO2 Default Settings 342

vii
viii
 1

1Installation
Installation should be carried out by qualified service personnel, either by the hospital’s biomedical
department, or by Philips Support.
If you have purchased a “customer-installable bundle”, it is assumed that your own hospital personnel
will install and, if necessary, configure the monitor. You can contact Philips Support for assistance if
required; any assistance will be associated with additional costs.
For mechanical and electrical installation, you need technically qualified personnel with a knowledge of
english. Additionally, for monitor configuration, you need clinically qualified personnel with a
knowledge of the use environment. For further information on Installation, refer to the Service Guide.

WARNING • Monitor configuration settings must be specified by authorized hospital personnel.

• For installation of the monitor as part of a system, always refer to the Service Guide.
• As the first step in preparing the monitor for use, follow the installation instructions given in this
chapter.

Installation Checklist
Use this checklist to document your installation.

Step Task Check Box

when Task
Done
1 Perform initial inspection of delivery, unpack and check the shipment (see ❏
“Unpacking and Checking the Shipment” on page 2)
2 Mount the monitor as appropriate for your installation (see “Mounting the ❏
Monitor” on page 3)
3 Connect the monitor to AC mains using the supplied power cord (see ❏
“Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains” on page 3)
4 Perform Visual, Power On and Functional test blocks (see “Checking Out ❏
The Monitor” on page 3)
5 Perform Safety Tests, if required by local laws and regulations (see “Checking ❏
Out The Monitor” on page 3)
6 Load paper into the recorder, if present (see “Loading Paper” on page 4) ❏

1
1 Installation Unpacking and Checking the Shipment

Step Task Check Box

when Task
Done
7 Check/set the time and date (see “Setting the Date and Time” on page 6) ❏
8 Check that the country-specific default settings are appropriate (see ❏
“Checking Country-Specific Default Settings” on page 6)
9 Perform System Test as necessary (see the Service Guide) ❏

Unpacking and Checking the Shipment

The monitor and any supporting options ordered are supplied packed in protective shipping cartons.

Initial Inspection
Before unpacking, check the packaging and ensure that there are no signs of mishandling or damage.
Open the package carefully and remove the monitor and accessories.
Check that the contents are complete and that the correct options and accessories have been delivered.

System Components, Accessories and Supplies Comments

Monitor with options as ordered 1
ECG accessories optional
NBP accessories 1
SpO2 accessories optional
Pressure accessories optional
Temperature accessories optional
Predictive Temperature accessories optional
CO2 Accessories optional
Recorder paper optional
Powercord 1
Telemetry Interface cable optional
Measurement Link (MSL) cable optional
Instructions for Use 1
Quick Guide 1
Documentation CD-ROM (includes Service Guide and Instructions 1
for Use)

Claims for Damage

If the shipping cartons are damaged, contact the carrier.
If any of the equipment is damaged, contact both the carrier and your local Philips service organization
for repair or replacement arrangements.

2
Mounting the Monitor 1 Installation

Repacking
Retain the original packing carton and material, in case you need to return equipment to Philips for
service. If you no longer have the original packing materials, Philips can advise you on alternatives.

Mounting the Monitor

The monitor can be rested on a flat surface, hung on the bed rail, or mounted on a wall. See the Service
Guide for details.

Connecting the Monitor to AC Mains

The monitor has a wide-range power supply that allows you to operate the monitor from an AC
(alternating current) power source of 100 V to 240 V (± 10%) and 50 to 60 Hz (± 5%).

WARNING • Always use the supplied power cord with the earthed mains plug to connect the monitor to an
earthed AC mains socket. Never adapt the mains plug from the power supply to fit an unearthed AC
mains socket.
• Do not use AC mains extension cords or multiple portable socket-outlets. If a multiple portable
socket-outlet without an approved isolation transformer is used, the interruption of its protective
earthing may result in enclosure leakage currents equal to the sum of the individual earth leakage
currents, so exceeding allowable limits.
• Do not connect any devices that are not supported as part of a system.
• Any non-medical device placed and operated in the patient’s vicinity must be powered via an
approved isolation transformer that ensures mechanical fixing of the power cords and covering of
any unused power outlets.

Checking Out The Monitor

The following table defines which tests and inspections need to be performed, and when they are
required.

Test Test or Inspection to be Performed

Visual Inspect the monitor, measurement accessories and cables for any damage.
Are they free of damage?
Power On Power on the monitor. Does it start up successfully without errors? Do all alarm
lamps light up during power up?
After start up the monitor sounds a tone, and you can see the monitoring main
screen (normally with measurement wave channels and numeric positions).
Functionality Test After power up, touch the blue Main Screen key at the bottom right of the
screen to test the Touchscreen. The key should turn light blue then after several
seconds return to its standard blue color.

3
1 Installation Loading Paper

Test Test or Inspection to be Performed

Safety Tests (1) to (4) Perform safety tests (1) to (4), as described in the Service Guide, for standalone
devices if required by local laws and regulations, and each time you combine
equipment to form a system, or exchange system components. Details of the
safety tests and procedures are described in the Service Guide. These safety
tests are derived from international standards but may not always be
sufficient to meet local requirements.
System Perform the system test according to IEC 60601-1-1, if applicable, after
combining equipment to form a system (see the Service Guide).

For test and inspection information regarding repairs, upgrades and all other service events, refer to the
Service Guide.

Loading Paper
1 Use the latch on the right side of the recorder door to pull the door open.
2 Remove the empty core.

3 Insert a new roll and secure it in place on the paper holder. The paper
feeds from the bottom of the roll and over the top of the recorder door.
Recommended paper: M4816A and M4817A.
4 With at least one inch of paper extending beyond the edge of the door,
swing the recorder door up and push it firmly closed.
5 To test if paper is loaded correctly, start a recording. If no printing appears, paper may be loaded
backwards. Try reloading the paper.

4
Operating the Monitor 1 Installation

Operating the Monitor

To complete installation you will need to operate the monitor. Here is a short introduction for those
not experienced with IntelliVue monitors.

1 Switch on the monitor. After start-up the 2 Touch something on the screen to enter a
monitor display will become active. You operate menu. Touching the time, as shown here,
the monitor using the touch screen. brings you to the date and time menu
needed for the next section.

3 Touch again to select an item on the menu and 4 You can touch numerics, waves and any
work through the menu activities. item on the screen, to get you to the
corresponding menu.

5 If you cannot find a menu by touching the

screen you can always use the Main Setup
key which will get you to all menus on the
monitor

5
1 Installation Setting the Date and Time

Setting the Date and Time

To set the date and time:
1 Select the Date, Time screen element from the monitor’s info line to enter the Date, Time
menu.
2 Select, in turn, the Year, Month, Day, Hour (in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as
necessary. Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
3 Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from
this.
Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.

Checking Country-Specific Default Settings

Some settings are made in the factory to match the typical requirements in a specific country. Line
frequency, units for weight and height, and ECG cable colors (AAMI or IEC) have been set to
appropriate values. If you suspect that these settings may not match your institution’s requirements,
check the settings and change them if necessary as described in the Configuration Guide.

WARNING Before starting monitoring, check that the current configuration meets your requirements, especially
patient category, alarm limits and paced setting.

If you need to enter configuration mode:

1 In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes.
2 Select Config and enter the passcode.
The passcode for configuration mode is given in the monitor’s service documentation.
The monitor displays Config at the right hand side of the status line and in the center of the Screen
while you are in configuration mode.
Before you leave configuration mode, always be sure to store any changes you made. You must store
changes made to each Settings Block and to each Profile, individually. As it may be difficult to
remember whether the settings you changed belong to a Monitor Settings block or a Measurement
Settings block, we recommend that you store each block before you leave configuration mode.
To leave configuration mode:
♦ In the Main Setup menu, select Operating Modes and then select Monitoring.

Handing Over the Monitor

If you are handing over the monitor to the end-users directly after configuration, make sure that it is in
Monitoring mode.
Ensure that the users have access to the following documentation delivered with the monitor:
• Instructions for Use (this book) - for more detailed questions during use
• Quick Guide - for quick reminders during use

6
Handing Over the Monitor 1 Installation

Additionally, we recommend working through the Training Guide for self-training on the monitor
before use (not available in all languages). The part number is M8105-944XB, where X is a digit
dependent on the language. The English training guide is M8105-9441B. An English training video,
M8000-9451E, is also available.

7
1 Installation Handing Over the Monitor

8
 2

2Basic Operation
These Instructions for Use are for clinical professionals using the IntelliVue MP5 and MP5T
(M8105A and M8105AT) patient monitors.
This basic operation section gives you an overview of the monitor and its functions. It tells you how to
perform tasks that are common to all measurements (such as entering data, switching a measurement
on and off, setting up and adjusting wave speeds, working with profiles). The alarms section gives an
overview of alarms. The remaining sections tell you how to perform individual measurements, and how
to care for and maintain the equipment.
Familiarize yourself with all instructions including warnings and cautions before starting to monitor
patients. Read and keep the Instructions for Use that come with any accessories, as these contain
important information about care and cleaning that is not repeated here.
This guide describes all features and options. Your monitor may not have all of them; they are not all
available in all geographies. Your monitor is highly configurable. What you see on the screen, how the
menus appear and so forth, depends on the way it has been tailored for your hospital and may not be
exactly as shown here. In particular for the MP5T, refer to the table on the following page to see which
sections of this guide are applicable to your monitor.
In this guide:
• A warning alerts you to a potential serious outcome, adverse event or safety hazard. Failure to
observe a warning may result in death or serious injury to the user or patient.
• A caution alerts you to where special care is necessary for the safe and effective use of the product.
Failure to observe a caution may result in minor or moderate personal injury or damage to the
product or other property, and possibly in a remote risk of more serious injury.
• Monitor refers to the entire patient monitor. Display refers to the physical display unit. Display
Screen and Screen refer to everything you see on monitor’s display, such as measurements, alarms,
patient data and so forth.

Introducing the Monitor

The MP5 monitor provides a comprehensive set of basic physiological measurements: NBP, SpO2,
and optionally ECG, invasive blood pressure, predictive temperature, standard temperature and CO2.
Through networking it provides information integration, documentation and information access. The
MP5 can be used with adult, pediatric and neonatal patients in a hospital and transport environment.

9
2 Basic Operation Introducing the Monitor

The monitor stores data in trend and event databases. You can see tabular trends (vital signs) and
document them on a central printer. You can view measurement trend graphs, with up to three
measurements combined in each graph, to help you identify changes in the patient’s physiological
condition. You can view fast-changing measurement trends with beat to beat resolution and see up to
four high resolution trend segments.
The MP5 monitor can also be connected to another IntelliVue patient monitor (MP20 to MP90),
where it acts as a multi-measurement module (MMS), acquiring measurements for the host monitor.
When connected to a host monitor, the host controls the MP5 including all alarm functionality. No
alarms are available on the MP5, and the alarm lamps are controlled by the host. You can recognize
when an MP5 is connected to a host monitor by the following indication on the screen:
Companion ModeCompanion Mode
No Alarm Display

When the MP5 is disconnected from the original host monitor, it continues to monitor the patient as
a stand-alone monitor with all settings and data. On connection to a new host monitor, the MP5
resumes its role as MMS, transferring all settings and data, ensuring fully continuous monitoring.
When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor it still requires batteries or AC power; it also cannot
charge its batteries via the host monitor’s AC connection.

The MP5T monitor is intended for use together with a telemetry device. It has no ECG measurement
of its own but does have NBP and optionally SpO2 and predictive temperature. When the telemetry
device is directly connected to the MP5T, the measurements from the MP5T are transmitted with
those from the telemetry device (ECG and optionally SpO2) to the Information Center. The MP5T
alone has no network capability (no direct wired or wireless connection to the Information Center).
The following comparison table shows in detail the differences between MP5 and MP5T:

Functionality (including optional features) MP5 MP5T

ECG 3
SpO2 3 3
NBP 3 3
Predictive Temperature 3 3
Temperature 3
Invasive Pressure 3
Carbon Dioxide 3
Direct Telemetry Connection 3 3
ECG Output signal 31
LAN networking capability 3
WLAN networking capability 3
Short range radio interface 3
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry networking capability 3
Severe Sepsis Screening 3
OxyCRG high resolution trend 3
Neonatal event review 3
Integrated recorder 3 3
Drug Calculator 3 3

10
Introducing the Monitor 2 Basic Operation

Functionality (including optional features) MP5 MP5T

Gas monitor support 3
Connection to a host monitor (companion mode) 3
Connection to an external display 3
Nurse call capability 3
1.MP5 options without ECG do not have an ECG output signal

The MP5/MP5T patient monitor has an 8.4-inch

TFT LCD flat panel SVGA display. You operate the
monitor with the Touchscreen. There is an optional
built-in recorder.

11
2 Basic Operation Introducing the Monitor

MP5/MP5T Major Parts and Keys

1 Color-coded alarm lamps
1 2
2 Alarms off lamp
3 Measurement connectors (see
below)
4 Predictive Temperature Unit
5 ECG out (not MP5T and MP5
3
options without ECG)
6 On/Standby Switch
7 Indicator LEDs

7
4 5 6

US measurement connectors

Pressure Noninvasive SpO2 ECG/ Telemetry CO2

and Temp Pressure Respiration device

International measurement connectors

Pressure Noninvasive SpO2 ECG/ Telemetry

and Temp Pressure Respiration device

MP5(T) front panel

1 On/Standby switch
2 On/Standby/Error LED - green when monitor is
switched on, red if there is a problem with the monitor
3 Battery status LED - green, yellow or red, see Battery
section for details
4 AC power operation LED - green when the monitor is
connected to AC power (mains)

1 2 3 4

12
Operating and Navigating 2 Basic Operation

Operating and Navigating

Everything you need to operate the monitor is contained on its screen. Almost every element on the
screen is interactive. Screen elements include measurement numerics, waveforms, screen keys,
information fields, alarms fields and menus:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Bed 3 Doe, John Adult 3 Waves A

ALARMS PAUSED 2:59
II HR Pulse

1mv

Pleth SpO2 Temp

Resp RR

1Ohm

NBP Auto 10 min NBP

Sys. mmHg

Local Recorder out of paper

hrs
10
Silence Pause Start/ Repeat Delayed Vitals Default End Case Main Main
Alarms Stop Time Record Trend Profile Setup Screen

17 16 15 14 13 12 11

Monitor information line Other screen elements

1 network connection indicator 10 status line - shows information and messages prompting you for action
(documented in Information
Center Instructions for Use)
2 bed label 11 close all open menus and windows and return to main screen
3 patient identification 12 enter Main Setup menu
4 patient category 13 scroll right to display more SmartKeys
5 paced status 14 SmartKeys - these change according to your monitor’s configuration
6 date and time 15 scroll left to display more SmartKeys
7 current screen name/enter 16 Pause Alarms - pauses alarm indicators. Pause duration depends on monitor
change screen menu configuration. If pause duration is infinite, this key is labeled Alarms Off. Select again
to immediately re-enable alarm indicators.

13
2 Basic Operation Operating and Navigating

Monitor information line Other screen elements

8 adjust alarm volume/level 17 Silence - acknowledges all active alarms by switching off audible alarm indicators and
indicator lamps permanently or temporarily, if alarm reminder (ReAlarm) is configured on.
9 alarm status area - shows active
alarm messages

Selecting Screen Elements

Touch a screen element to get to the actions linked to that element. For example, touch the Patient
Identification element to call up the Patient Demographics window, or touch the HR numeric
to call up the Setup ECG menu. Touch the ECG wave segment to call up the ECG lead menu.

Using the Setup Menu

Setup The elements at the top of the Screen are grouped together
for ease of navigation. Touch any item at the top of the
Alarm Messages
Screen to open the Setup menu; then touch the element
Alarm Limits you want.
Alarm Volume
My Care Group
Change Screen
Profiles
Admit/Dischrg
Paced No
Network
Bed Information
Date, Time

Disabling Touchscreen Operation

♦ To temporarily disable touchscreen operation of the monitor, press and hold the
Main Screen permanent key. A padlock will appear on the Main Screen
permanent key.
♦ Press and hold the Main Screen permanent key again to re-enable the touchscreen operation.

Moving Windows
You can move windows and menus using the Touchscreen. To move a window
1 Select the title of the window and keep your finger on the title.
2 Move your finger on the Touchscreen to move the window.
3 Take your finger off the screen to place the window in the final position.
Not all locations on the screen can be a target position, a window cannot overlap the monitor info line,
the alarms and INOPs or the status line.

14
Operating and Navigating 2 Basic Operation

Using Keys
The monitor has three different types of keys.

Permanent Keys
A permanent key is a graphical key that remains on the screen all the time to give you fast access to
functions.

Pause Alarms - pauses alarm indicators. Pause duration depends on monitor

configuration. If pause duration is infinite, this key is labeled Alarms Off.
Select again to immediately re-enable alarm indicators.
Silence - acknowledges all active alarms by switching off audible alarm indicators
and lamps.

Main Screen - close all open menus and windows and return to the main screen.

Main Setup - enter main setup menu.

SmartKeys
A SmartKey is a configurable graphical key, located at the bottom of the main screen. It gives you fast
access to functions. The selection of SmartKeys available on your monitor depends on your monitor
configuration and on the options purchased.

enter profile menu, or change Screen, or

revert to default profile revert to default screen

access timers previous Screen

freeze waves quick admit a patient

set alarm limits enter patient identification menu to

admit/discharge/transfer

change alarm volume end case to discharge a patient

change QRS volume view information for patients in other

beds

15
2 Basic Operation Operating and Navigating

enter standby mode - suspends patient

monitoring. All waves and numerics change screen brightness (not for
disappear from the display. All settings independent displays)
and patient data information are
retained.

review beat labels (annotate re-learn arrhythmia

arrhythmia wave)

change amplitude (size) of ECG wave access wedge procedure window

- start/stop manual NBP measurement

- start auto series
start/stop NBP STAT measurement
- stop current automatic measurement
within series
stop automatic or STAT NBP
measurement and measurement series

start NBP measurement and stop current NBP measurement

measurement series

start veni puncture (inflate cuff to start NBP STAT measurement

subdiastolic pressure)

set the NBP repeat time zero invasive pressure transducer

start a delayed recording access pop-up recording keys

access Vital Signs recording key access Select Waves recording key

set wide automatic alarm limits set narrow automatic alarm limits

switch CO2 pump off access neonatal event review

review vital signs trend review graph trend

access the calculator access the Drug Calculator

gas analyzer - exit standby mode suppress zero for all gas measurements

16
Operating and Navigating 2 Basic Operation

unpair equipment and continue unpair equipment and continue central

central monitoring with the monitor monitoring with the telemetry device

start 12-Lead Capture (only available access ST Map application

if Information Center is connected)

set standard or EASI lead placement access patient reports

new lead setup manual data entry

access ProtocolWatch start/stop car seat assessment record

open the histogram window open unit conversion window

Pop-Up Keys
Pop-up keys are task-related graphical keys that appear automatically on the monitor screen when
required. For example, the confirm pop-up key appears only when you need to confirm a change.

Using the On-Screen Keyboard

Use this as you would a conventional keyboard. Enter the information by selecting one character after
another. Use the Shift and capital Lock keys to access uppercase letters. Use the Back key to delete
single characters, or use the Clr key to delete entire entries. Select Enter to confirm what you have
entered and close the on-screen keyboard.

17
2 Basic Operation Operating and Navigating

Using the On-Screen Calculator

You can use the on-screen calculator to perform any of Calculator
the standard operations for which you would normally
use a handheld calculator.
♦ To access the on-screen calculator, select the
Calculator SmartKey, or select Main Setup
-> Calculations -> Calculator. MC MR M+ Back

√ C/CE

18
Operating Modes 2 Basic Operation

Operating Modes
When you switch the monitor on, it starts up in monitoring mode. To change to a different mode:
1 Select the Main Setup menu.
2 Select Operating Modes and choose the mode you require.
Your monitor has four operating modes. Some are passcode protected.
• Monitoring Mode: This is the normal, every day working mode that you use for monitoring
patients. You can change elements such as alarm limits, patient category and so forth. When you
discharge the patient, these elements return to their default values. Changes can be stored
permanently only in Configuration Mode. You may see items, such as some menu options or the
altitude setting, that are visible but ‘grayed out’ so that you can neither select nor change them.
These are for your information and can be changed only in Configuration Mode.
• Demonstration Mode: Passcode protected, this is for demonstration purposes only. You must not
change into Demonstration Mode during monitoring. In Demonstration Mode, all stored trend
information is deleted from the monitor’s memory.
• Configuration Mode: Passcode protected, this mode is for personnel trained in configuration tasks.
These tasks are described in the Configuration Guide. During installation the monitor is configured
for use in your environment. This configuration defines the default settings you work with when
you switch on, the number of waves you see and so forth.
• Service Mode: Passcode protected, this is for trained service personnel.

Config
When the monitor is in Demonstration Mode, Configuration Mode, or
Service Mode, this is indicated by a box with the mode name in the center
of the Screen and a symbol in the bottom right-hand corner. Select this
field to change to a different mode.
When an MP5 is connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode is indicated):
• The MP5 will adopt the operating mode of the host monitor:
• You cannot change the operating mode at the MP5.

Standby Mode
Standby mode can be used when you want to temporarily interrupt monitoring.
To enter Standby mode,
♦ select the Monitor Standby SmartKey or
♦ select Main Setup, followed by Monitor Standby.
The monitor enters Standby mode automatically after the End Case function is used to discharge a
patient.
Standby suspends patient monitoring. All waves and numerics disappear from the display but all
settings and patient data information are retained. A special Standby screen is displayed. This can be
configured to a moving image or a blank screen. If a patient location is entered at the Information
Center, this will also be displayed on the Standby screen (availability depends on Information
Center revision).
To resume monitoring,

19
2 Basic Operation Understanding Screens

♦ Select anything on the screen or press any key.

If you connect an MP5 that is powered on (and not in Standby) to a host monitor in Standby mode,
the host will leave Standby mode. When connected to a host monitor, with both the host and the MP5
in Standby mode, leaving Standby on the MP5 will also make the host leave Standby.

Understanding Screens
Your monitor comes with a set of preconfigured Screens, optimized for common monitoring scenarios
such as OR adult, or ICU neonatal. A Screen defines the overall selection, size and position of waves,
numerics and SmartKeys on the monitor screen when you switch on. You can easily switch between
different Screens during monitoring. Screens do NOT affect alarm settings, patient category and so
forth.

Switching to a Different Screen

1 To switch to a different Screen, select the monitor info line and then Change
Screen in the Setup Menu, or select the Change Screen SmartKey.
2 Choose the new Screen from the pop-up list.

Changing a Screen’s Content

If you do not want to change the entire Screen content, but only some parts of it, you can substitute
individual waves, numerics, high-res waves, or trends. Be aware that these changes cannot be stored
permanently in Monitoring Mode.
To change the selection of elements on a Screen,
1 Select the element you want to change.
2 From the menu that appears, select Change Wave, Change Numeric, or
Change HiResTrend, and then select the wave or numeric you want, or select the high-
resolution trend wave you want from the list of available waves.
If you do not see Change Numeric in the menu, this Screen may be configured to always
display the numeric beside its wave. Changing the wave will automatically change the numeric.
The changed Screen is shown with an asterisk in the monitor info line.

20
Using the XDS Remote Display (not MP5T) 2 Basic Operation

In the Change Screen menu, the changed Screen is Change Screen

shown linked to the original Screen and marked with an
asterisk.
Up to three modified Screens can be accessed via the
Change Screen menu. 3 Waves A
To recall Screens, either
Split Screen A
♦ select the name of the Screen in the
Change Screen menu Graph Trends
or Vital Signs B
♦ use the previous/next arrows at the top of the Vital Signs A
Change Screen menu to move back and forth in the
Screen history. The ten most recently-used Screens
Vital Signs A*
including up to three modified Screens can be
accessed.
After a patient discharge, the monitor’s default Screen is
shown. Modified Screens are still available in the
Change Screen menu.
If the monitor is switched off and then on again, modified Screens are erased from the monitor’s
memory and cannot be recalled. If a modified Screen was the last active Screen when the monitor was
switched off, it is retained (unless Automat. Default is configured to Yes).

Using the XDS Remote Display (not MP5T)

Using the IntelliVue XDS solution it is possible to view an independent monitor screen on an external
display. The XDS solution consists of a medical grade PC-based hardware platform, XDS application
software and the XDS connectivity option on the monitor. Depending on the configuration you can
also operate the monitor from the external display. The XDS must be connected to the same Local
Area Network (LAN) as the monitor.
It is also possible to use an existing PC, connected to the same LAN, to host the XDS Application
software.
For more details, including limitations and restrictions, refer to the Instructions for Use for the XDS
Application.

Using the Visitor Screen

If a visitor Screen is configured for your monitor, you can use it to clear the screen of all waves and
numerics but continue to monitor the patient with active alarms and trend storage at the bedside and
Information Center. You can change the name of the visitor Screen in Configuration Mode.
To activate this Screen,
1 Select the monitor info line to open the Setup menu
2 Select Change Screen
3 Select the name of the visitor Screen configured for your monitor from the list of available Screens.
To select a Screen with waves and numerics again,

21
2 Basic Operation Understanding Profiles

♦ Select any element on the Screen to open the Screen menu and select a screen from the list.

Understanding Profiles
Profiles are predefined monitor configurations. They let you change the configuration of the whole
monitor so you can adapt it to different monitoring situations. The changes that occur when you
change a complete profile are more far reaching than those made when you change a Screen. Screens
affect only what is shown on the display. Profiles affect all monitor and measurement settings.
The settings that are defined by Profiles are grouped into three categories. Each category offers a choice
of ‘settings blocks’ customized for specific monitoring situations. These categories are:
Display (screens)
– Each profile can have a choice of many different predefined screens. If you are using a second
display, each display can have its own individual screen selection. When you change the profile,
the screen selection configured for the new profile becomes active.
• Measurement Settings
– Each profile can have a choice of different predefined measurement settings. These relate directly
to individual measurements, for example, measurement on/off, measurement color, alarms limits,
NBP alarm source, NBP repeat time, temperature unit (°F or °C), pressure unit (mmHg or kPa).
• Monitor Settings
– Each profile can have a choice of different predefined monitor settings. These relate to the
monitor as a whole; for example, display brightness, alarms off/paused, alarm volume, QRS tone
volume, tone modulation, prompt tone volume, wave speed, resp wave speed, pulse source.

Profiles
Profile : Profile A

Patient Category: Adult

Measurement A
Paced : No Measurement B

Display : S-014 Measurement C

Measmt. Settings:Measurement A Measurement D

Monitor Settings: Monitor A

Available choices in measurement

Profiles Menu, showing current settings menu

You can change from one complete profile to another or swap individual settings blocks (display
screen/monitor settings/measurement settings) to change a subset of a profile. Changes you make to
any element within the settings blocks are not saved when you discharge the patient, unless you save
them in Configuration Mode.
Depending on your monitor configuration, when you switch on or discharge a patient the monitor
either continues with the previous profile, or resets to the default profile configured for that monitor.

22
Understanding Profiles 2 Basic Operation

WARNING If you switch to a different profile, the patient category and paced status normally change to the setting
specified in the new profile. However some profiles may be setup to leave the patient category and
paced status unchanged. Always check the patient category, paced status, and all alarms and settings,
when you change profiles.

When you leave Demonstration Mode, the monitor uses the default profile.

23
2 Basic Operation Understanding Settings

Swapping a Complete Profile

1 Select the monitor info line and then Profiles in the Setup menu, or select the
Profiles SmartKey.
2 In the Profiles menu, select Profile.
3 Chose a profile from the pop-up list.
4 Confirm your selection.

Swapping a Settings Block

1 Select the monitor info line and then Profiles in the Setup menu, or select the
Profiles SmartKey.
2 In the Profiles menu, select Display or Measmnt. Settings or
Monitor Settings to call up a list of the settings blocks in each category.
3 Choose a settings block from the pop-up list.
4 Confirm your selection.

Default Profile
Your monitor has a default profile that it uses when you leave Demonstration, or Service modes, or
when you discharge a patient. This profile is indicated by a diamond .

Locked Profiles
Some profiles are locked, so that you cannot change them, even in Configuration Mode. These are
indicated by this lock symbol.

Understanding Settings
Each aspect of how the monitor works and looks is defined by a setting. There are a number of
different categories of settings, including,
Screen Settings, to define the selection and appearance of elements on each individual Screen
Measurement settings, to define settings unique to each measurement, for example, high and low
alarm limits
Monitor settings, including settings that affect more than one measurement or Screen and define
general aspects of how the monitor works, for example, alarm volume, reports and recordings, and
display brightness.
You must be aware that, although many settings can be changed in Monitoring Mode, permanent
changes to settings can only be done in the monitor’s Configuration Mode. All settings are reset to the
stored defaults:
• when you discharge a patient
• when you load a Profile

24
Adjusting a Measurement Wave 2 Basic Operation

• when the monitor is switched off for more than one minute (if Automat. Default is set to
Yes).

Changing Measurement Settings

Each measurement has a setup menu in which you can adjust all of its settings. You can enter a setup
menu:
• via the measurement numeric - select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu. For
example, to enter the Setup ECG menu, select the HR (heart rate) numeric.
• via the Main Setup permanent key- if you want to setup a measurement when the measurement
is switched off, use the Main Setup permanent key and select Measurements. Then select the
measurement name from the popup list. With this permanent key you can access any setup menu in
the monitor.
• via the Measurement Selection key.

Switching a Measurement On and Off

When a measurement is off, its waves and numerics are removed from the monitor’s screen. The
monitor stops data acquisition and alarming for this measurement.
1 Enter the measurement’s setup menu and select the measurement.
2 Select the measurement name to toggle between on and off. The screen display indicates the active
setting.

Adjusting a Measurement Wave

♦ To quickly adjust wave-related measurement settings (such as speed or size), select the
measurement wave itself. This displays the measurement Wave menu, which has only wave-related
measurement settings.

Changing Wave Speeds

Lowering the wave speed compresses the wave and lets you view a longer time period. Increasing the
speed expands the waveform, giving you a more detailed view.
The monitor distinguishes two groups of wave speed settings,
• RespiratorySpeed, for all respiratory waves: CO2, Resp. anesthetic agents and O2
• Global Speed, for all waves not included in the other group.

Changing the Wave Group Speed

The wave speed group setting defines the speed of all the waves in the group.
To change the wave speed of a wave speed group,
1 Select Main Setup -> User Interface
2 Select Global Speed or RespiratorySpeed, as required
3 Select a value from the list of available speeds.

25
2 Basic Operation Freezing Waves

Changing Wave Speed for a Channel

To change the wave speed of an individual wave channel,
1 Enter the Wave menu for a measurement by selecting its wave.
2 Select Change Speed.
3 To set the speed to the wave group speed, select RespiratorySpeed or Global Speed.
To set an individual channel speed, select a numeric value from the list of available speeds. This
overrides the wave group speed setting and sets the speed for the individual wave channel on the
monitor Screen. The wave channel speed is independent of the wave (label) depicted in the
channel, if you change the wave, the new wave will retain the set channel speed.

Freezing Waves
You can freeze waves on the screen and measure parts of the wave using cursors. The waves are frozen
with a history of 20 seconds so that you can go back and measure what you have seen.

Freezing An Individual Wave

To freeze a wave,
1 Enter the Wave menu for the measurement by selecting the wave on the screen.
2 Select Freeze Wave.
The realtime wave is replaced with the frozen wave.

Freezing All Waves

To freeze all waves on the screen,
1 Select the Freeze Waves SmartKey.
All realtime waves are replaced with frozen waves.

Measuring Frozen Waves

To measure a frozen wave,
1 Select the frozen wave.
This automatically positions the vertical cursor. The cursor can be repositioned by touching the
required point on the wave, or
2 Use the up/down arrow keys to activate and move the horizontal cursor.
The horizontal cursor measures the wave value, which is displayed above the cursor line. If the
wave is a pressure wave, the cursor value can be stored as a systolic, diastolic or mean pressure value
and if the pressure wave is a PAP wave, it can also be stored as a PAWP value. The stored value
appears in the trend database as a manually entered value. To return to the vertical cursor use the
<> pop-up key.

Changing The Wave Speed

Lowering the wave speed compresses the wave and lets you view a longer time period. Increasing the
speed expands the waveform, giving you a more detailed view.

26
Using Labels 2 Basic Operation

To change the wave speed:

1 Select the frozen wave.
2 Select Change Speed.
3 Select a speed from the list.

Updating The Frozen Wave

To update the wave, that is freeze the current wave:
1 Select the frozen wave.
2 Select Freeze Again.

Releasing Frozen Waves

To release frozen waves,
1 Select a frozen wave.
2 Select Unfreeze Waves.
All frozen waves are released.

Using Labels
Depending on the monitor options purchased, you may be able to measure two invasive pressures and
temperatures simultaneously. The monitor uses labels to distinguish between them. The default
settings defined in the profile (such as measurement color, wave scale, and alarm settings) are stored
within each label. When you assign a label to a measurement, the monitor automatically applies these
default settings to the measurement. The labels assigned are used throughout the monitor, in reports,
recordings, and in trends.

Changing Measurement Labels (e.g. Pressure)

To change a measurement label of a measurement with multiple labels (invasive pressure or
temperature),
1 Enter the Wave menu of the measurement.
2 Select Label.
3 Choose a label from the list.
The monitor automatically applies the scale, color, etc. settings stored in the Profile for the label you
select. You can change scale settings in Monitoring Mode, but color can only be changed in the
monitor’s Configuration Mode.
Any labels already being used in the monitor are shown “grayed-out” in the list and cannot be selected.

Resolving Label Conflicts

Each label must be unique, that is, it can only be assigned once. If you have a gas monitor connected to
the monitor there is a potential conflict with the CO2 label.
Depending on your configuration, the monitor will either

27
2 Basic Operation Using Labels

• display the Measurement Selection window automatically

for you to resolve the conflict
• take no action, you must enter the Measurement
Selection window and resolve the conflict measurement selection key
All the currently available measurements are depicted in the
Measurement Selection window. If a measurement label is
causing a label conflict it is shown in red.

WARNING When an MP5 with an active measurement, say SpO2, is connected to a host monitor with the same
measurement already active, the SpO2 measurement on the MP5 is deactivated and the
Meas. DEACTIVATED INOP is displayed. The measurement can only be reactivated if the MP5 is
disconnected from the host monitor. The label conflict can be resolved on the host monitor like any
other label conflict.

When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor, the Measurement Selection window can be
opened, but only the measurement Setup key is functional. Derived measurements are not active and
cannot be activated, but become active again when the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor.
Resolve any label conflicts at the host monitor.
To resolve a label conflict,
1 Select the measurement selection key or select Main Setup -> Measurement Selection
to display the Measurement Selection window.
2 Select the measurement to be deactivated.
3 Select the De-activate pop-up key to disable the conflicting measurement. When the
measurement has been deactivated the question marks under the measurement selection key will be
replaced by XXX.

Label Compatibility
When a new measurement is introduced, or new labels for an existing measurement, these labels will
not be shown on older Information Centers, and consequently not on the Overview screen sourced
from the Information Center.
When a patient is transferred from a monitor with these new labels to one with an older software
revision, the labels will be replaced with a generic label for that measurement. The settings for that
generic label will then be used.

28
Entering Measurements Manually 2 Basic Operation

If it is critical that the measurement labels are available at the Information Center and after transfers,
the older monitors and the Information Center must be upgraded to the appropriate software revision.

Entering Measurements Manually

You can enter values into the monitor that have been measured with other equipment or manually (for
example, manual temperatures, lab values). These values are then stored in the database, included in
trends and reports, and passed on to the Information Center and central charting systems. There is no
alarm functionality for manually entered measurements.
To enter values,
1 Select the Enter Values SmartKey or select Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues
2 Select the measurement you want to enter values for. The Edit <Measurement> window will
open.
3 If the measurement is switched off, switch it on by selecting the label.
4 Select Value and enter the value.
5 Select Date/Time to enter the date and time for the value. The default is always the current date
and time.
6 For compound labels, for example ABPs, ABPd and ABPm, select the Format field to select
whether all values are required or a single value.
7 Select Confirm.
When a manually entered value has been configured to display as a numeric on the screen, you can also
enter a new value for this measurement by selecting the numeric, then selecting Enter
MeasValues.
Manually entered measurement values are marked with a * on the display, in trends, and so forth.
Each measurement has a defined measurement interval after which a value becomes invalid (no value is
then displayed). Values can be entered up to two hours after they have been measured or up to the
measurement interval, if this is shorter.
The list of measurement labels which appears in the Manual Entry window is set in Configuration
Mode.
No values can be entered manually on the MP5 when it is connected to a host monitor.

Switching Manually Entered Measurements On and Off

To switch a manually entered measurement on or off,
1 Select the Enter Values SmartKey or select Main Setup -> Enter MeasValues
2 Select the measurement you want to switch on or off.
3 Select the measurement label field to switch between On and Off

Changing Monitor Settings

♦ To change monitor settings such as brightness, or QRS tone volume, select the Main Setup
permanent key and then select User Interface to enter a submenu where you can change
these settings.

29
2 Basic Operation Checking Your Monitor Revision

Adjusting the Screen Brightness

1 Select the Brightness SmartKey.
2 Select the appropriate setting for the screen brightness. 10 is the brightest, 1 is the least
bright. Optimum is suitable for most monitoring locations and optimizes power usage
for battery powered monitors.
Your monitor may be configured with a lower brightness for Standby mode and also for transport to
conserve battery power. These settings can only be changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.

Adjusting Touch Tone Volume

The touch tone volume is the tone you hear when you select any field on the monitor screen. To adjust
the touch tone volume,
1 In the Main Setup menu, select User Interface
2 Select Touch ToneVolume, then select the appropriate setting for the touch tone volume: 10 is
the loudest and 1 is the quietest. Selecting zero switches the touch tone volume off.

Setting the Date and Time

If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the date and time are automatically taken from
this. Once it is set, the internal clock retains the setting even when you switch off the monitor.
1 Select the Date, Time screen element from the monitor’s info line to enter the Date, Time
menu.
2 Select, in turn, the Year, Month, Day, Hour (in 24 hour format, only) and Minute as
necessary. Select the correct values from the pop-up list.
3 Select Store Date, Time to change the date and time.

Checking Your Monitor Revision

1 Select Main Setup -> Revision to open the Monitor Revision menu.
2 From the Monitor Revision menu, select the monitor component for which you need
revision information.

Getting Started
Once you understand the basic operation principles and have completed the Training Program, you
can get ready for monitoring.

Inspecting the Monitor

WARNING If the monitor is mechanically damaged, or if it is not working properly, do not use it for any
monitoring procedure on a patient. Contact your service personnel.

1 Before you start to make measurements, carry out the following checks on the monitor.
– Check for any mechanical damage.

30
Getting Started 2 Basic Operation

– Check all the external cables, plug-ins and accessories.

2 Plug the power cord into the AC power source. If you are using battery power, ensure that the
battery has sufficient power for monitoring. When you use a battery for the first time, you must
charge it, following the instructions given in the section on Charging Batteries.
3 Check all the functions of the instrument that you need to monitor the patient, and ensure that the
instrument is in good working order.

Switching On
♦ Press the on/off switch on the monitor for one second. The monitor performs a self test and is then
ready to use. If you see a message such as CO2 SENSOR WARMUP wait until it disappears before
starting monitoring that measurement.

Power On/Power Off Behavior

The general rules determining the behavior of the monitor when connected to, or disconnected from
power are as follows:
• A monitor that was switched on prior to a temporary power loss switches on again when power is
restored.
• A monitor that was switched off prior to a temporary power loss remains off when power is restored.
• When AC mains power is lost, a battery powered monitor continues to run without interruption on
battery power.
• The MP5 switches on automatically when connected to a running host monitor.
• When the MP5 is disconnected from a running host monitor, it continues to run without
interruption on battery power.

Setting up the Measurements

1 Decide which measurements you want to make.
2 Connect the required patient cables and sensors. The connectors are color-coded to the patient
cables and sensors for easy identification.

WARNING When connecting devices for acquiring measurements, always position cables and tubing carefully to
avoid entanglement or potential strangulation.

Starting Monitoring
After you switch on the monitor,
1 Admit your patient to the monitor.
2 Check that the profile, alarm limits, alarm and QRS volumes, patient category and paced status
and so forth are appropriate for your patient. Change them if necessary.
3 Refer to the appropriate measurement section for details of how to perform the measurements you
require.

31
2 Basic Operation Disconnecting from Power

WARNING During MR imaging, remove all transducers, sensors and cables from the patient. Induced currents
could cause burns.

Disconnecting from Power

The On/Standby switch does not disconnect the monitor from the ac power source. To disconnect,
unplug the power cable.

Monitoring After a Power Failure

If the monitor is without power for less than one minute, monitoring will resume with all active
settings unchanged. If the monitor is without power for more than one minute, the behavior depends
on your configuration. If Automat. Default is set to Yes, the default profile will be loaded
when power is restored. If Automat. Default is set to No, all active settings are retained, if power
is restored within 48 hours. The Automat. Default setting is made in Configuration Mode.

Networked Monitoring
You can connect your monitor to an Information Center on a network. This can be done using one of
the optional interfaces:
• Standard wired LAN
• Wireless LAN
• IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry System (IIT)

WARNING Do not connect patient monitors to the standard hospital network.

Additionally, when the MP5 is equipped with IIT and declared at the Information Center as a
telemetry device, it allows data continuity when paired to a host monitor. After disconnection from the
host monitor, it continues to monitor the patient during transport and provides continuous data to the
same sector on the Information Center. (See the Instructions for Use for your host monitor for viewing
telemetry data on the host.)
If your monitor is connected to a network, a network symbol is displayed in the upper left corner next
to the bed label. To see details about the Care Group, the monitoring equipment, and technical
information about the network, select the monitor info line to enter the Setup menu, then select
Bed Information.
Be aware that some network-based functions may be limited for monitors on wireless networks in
comparison to those on wired networks.
Printout functionality and data export are not guaranteed when using a standard hospital network.

32
Using the MP5 with a Host Monitor 2 Basic Operation

Using the MP5 with a Host Monitor

Host monitors that can support the MP5 as a multi-measurement module require software revision
F.00.00 or higher. When you connect an MP5 to a host monitor, an integrated system is formed for
monitoring a single patient. The following general observations and considerations apply to such a
system:
• The host monitor is the “master” of the system, and you have full control over all the system’s
operation only from the host monitor.
• Functions you can operate on the MP5 are restricted to measurements originating in that device. If
you try to operate controls that are disabled, you are prompted by the message “Not available
in Companion Mode”.
• Depending on how it is configured, your host monitor can determine whether the user interface of a
connected MP5 is completely disabled or not, and what is displayed (a standard main screen, or a
blank screen similar to the Standby screen indicating “Companion Mode”).
This is controlled by two monitor settings that are applied to the MP5 on connection. You can
change the settings in Configuration Mode.
• Some general settings, such as line frequency, QRS sound, ECG lead colors, from the host monitor
are applied to the MP5 on connection. When disconnected from the host, the MP5 applies its own
settings again.
• No audible alarms are available on an MP5 when connected to a host monitor. The only visual
alarm indication is provided by the alarm lamps which are controlled by the host monitor. Alarms
become active again as soon as the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor.
• The host monitor is the master of all ADT information. ADT operations on the MP5 are disabled,
and any pending actions on the MP5 (for example, admit or end case) are cancelled.
• The date and time of the MP5 is synchronized with that of the host monitor.
• Event surveillance in the MP5 is disabled. Main Setup menu operations and SmartKeys are disabled.
While connected to host monitor, no new events are detected in the MP5, and no events are deleted.
There is no transfer of stored events from the MP5 to the host monitor. After disconnection from
the host monitor, event surveillance is enabled again in the MP5, and new events are detected.
The MP5 is connected to the host monitor using the measurement link (MSL) cable:

33
2 Basic Operation Using the MP5 with a Host Monitor

34
 3

3What’s New?
This section lists the most important new features and improvements to the monitor and its user
interface introduced with each release. Further information is provided in other sections of this book.
You may not have all of these features, depending on the monitor configuration purchased by your
hospital.

What’s New in Release G.0?

Short Range Radio Interface for MP5
A short range radio interface is now available for the MP5 monitor. This allows a telemetry transceiver
with a short range radio adapter to be assigned to the monitor resulting in a direct connection, as an
alternative to the cable connection. The measurement data from the telemetry transceiver appear
directly on the monitor screen with a minimal delay and are combined with the monitor data in one
sector at the Information Center.
Product Options Without ECG
The monitor now has several options, with varying measurement combinations, without an ECG
measurement.
Microstream CO2 in MP5
The Microstream CO2 measurement method is now available in MP 5 monitors.
Histogram Trend
Trended values can also be viewed in the form of a histogram. The SpO2 histograms can be trend
histograms or realtime histograms with 1 second samples.
Car Seat Assessment Record
In Event Surveillance, in the NER group, you can run a Car Seat Assessment Record (CAR). This is a
special period of event surveillance for neonates during a car seat test. During the CAR period a
realtime SpO2 histogram is also generated with 1 second samples.
IntelliVue XDS Solution
Using the IntelliVue XDS solution it is possible to view an independent monitor screen on an external
display. The XDS solution consists of a medical grade PC-based hardware platform, XDS application
software and the XDS connectivity option on the monitor. Depending on the configuration you can
also operate the monitor from the external display. The XDS must be connected to the same Local
Area Network (LAN) as the monitor.
It is also possible to use an existing PC, connected to the same LAN, to host the XDS Application
software.

35
3 What’s New? What’s New in Release F.0?

New Fields in the Admission Form

A Middle Name field is now available in the admission form - whether it appears is configurable. Two
additional ID fields, Lifetime Id and Encounter Id, can also be configured to appear and their names
can be customized to fit hospital requirements.
SpO2 Enhancements
• Additional SpO2 Labels - SpO2pr and SpO2po labels have been added.
• New manual measurement mode when telemetry devices are connected via a short range radio link.
• Signal Quality Indicator displayed with the SpO2 numerics.
ECG Enhancements
• New */**Afib yellow alarm when an atrial fibrillation waveform is detected.
• QT View window - shows current wave and baseline wave with Q and T points marked so that you
can verify that the QT algorithm detects correct Q and T points.

What’s New in Release F.0?

The SSC Sepsis protocol is now available on the MP5 in the form of the screening option. If a patient
has been screened on arrival with an MP5, then transferred to Intensive Care when Sepsis is confirmed,
the current state, the settings and the log from the SSC Sepsis Protocol can be transferred from the
MP5 by connecting it to the new monitor.
QT/QTc Interval Monitoring
QT interval monitoring is used to assist in the detection of prolonged QT interval syndrome. The QT
interval is measured and the heart-rate corrected QT value, QTc, is calculated. The monitor also
provides a ΔQTc value which tracks variation in the QT interval in relation to a baseline value. High
alarm limits can be set for QTc and ΔQTc enabling alarm notification.
Manual Data Entry
Measurement values (for example lab data or manually measured temperatures) can be entered
manually into the monitor and stored in the database. They can then be used for trends, reports and
also be displayed as a numeric on screen, if required.
Horizon Trend Enhancements
The trend indicator arrow indicates how the patient trend has developed in a set time period. This
period is now configurable and can be set to 10 minutes, 5 minutes or 2 minutes. The horizon (or
baseline) can now be set to a range or to a specific value.
Connecting an MP5 to a Monitor (Companion Mode is indicated)
The MP5 monitor can be connected to one of the MP20 to MP90 monitors (then called the host
monitor) and used like an MMS. This provides monitoring continuity in transport situations allowing
measurement data and patient demographics from the MP5 to be transferred to another monitor.
When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor, no alarms will be announced on the MP5.
Pairing MP5 with another IntelliVue Monitor
The MP5 (with IIT) can be declared as a telemetry device at the Information Center and paired with
another monitor. The data from the MP5 will then be shown on the same sector on the Information
Center as that from the other monitor.

36
What’s New in Release F.0? 3 What’s New?

Sending Data To An Information Center Via A Telemetry Device

For the MP5T monitor, or an MP5 monitor without a connection to an Information Center, a small
set of monitoring data can be sent from the monitor to the Information Center via a connected
telemetry device.
NBP - Programmable Measurement Sequence
Up to four measurement cycles can be set up which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can set
the number of measurements and the interval between them. By setting the last cycle to run
continuously you can have regular measurements continue after the sequence has run.
New Printing Options For Reports
Reports can now also be printed via an external PC-based print server or to an internal print database,
when no printer is available (for example, during transport). As soon as a printer becomes available, the
reports stored in the database will print automatically.
Manual Pairing At Monitor
Previously, devices could only be manually paired at the Information Center. You can now pair devices
at the monitor as long as the monitor is already connected to the Information Center.
Moving Windows And Menus
Windows and menus can now be moved on the monitor screen. Using touch or a mouse you can select
the title of a window and then “drag” it across the screen. Some positions on the screen are not allowed,
such as ones overlapping the alarm field or the monitor info line.
Invasive Pressure Changes
Wave cursor - A cursor is now available on the realtime pressure wave to allow you to define a position
and store the corresponding value.
Reduced alarm limit steps in lower ranges - The alarm limits setting in 2 mmHg steps is now possible
in ranges up to 50 mmHg (previously up to 30 mmHg).
New Patient Check
The monitor can be configured to ask you in certain situations: after a specified power-off period, after
a specified standby period and when no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO2, NBP) have been measured
for a specified period, whether a new patient is now being monitored. By selecting the Yes pop-up key
you can discharge the previous patient and reset settings.
New Smart Keys
A SmartKey is available for New Lead Setup when a new ECG lead set with fewer leads than
previously is being used.
Better Visibility Of Gridlines
The brightness of the gridlines on the realtime waves has been increased for better visibility.

37
3 What’s New? What’s New in Release F.0?

38
 4

4Alarms
The alarm information here applies to all measurements. Measurement-specific alarm information is
discussed in the sections on individual measurements.
The monitor has two different types of alarm: patient alarms and INOPs.

Patient Alarms are red and yellow alarms. A red alarm indicates a high priority patient alarm such as a
potentially life threatening situation (for example, asystole). A yellow alarm indicates a lower priority
patient alarm (for example, a respiration alarm limit violation). Additionally there are short yellow
alarms, most of which are specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions (for example, ventricular
bigeminy).

INOPs are technical alarms, they indicate that the monitor cannot measure or detect alarm conditions
reliably. If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection (for example, LEADS OFF), the
monitor places a question mark in place of the measurement numeric and an audible indicator tone
will be sounded. INOPs without this audible indicator indicate that there may a problem with the
reliability of the data, but that monitoring is not interrupted.
Most INOPs are light blue, however there are a small number of INOPS which are always yellow or
red to indicate a severity corresponding to red and yellow alarms. The following INOPs can also be
configured as red or yellow INOPs to provide a severity indication:
• ECG LEADS OFF
• ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF (yellow only, no red INOP)
• CUFF OVERPRESS
• CUFF NOT DEFLATED
• OCCLUSION
• TELE DISCONNECT.
• Replace TeleBatt
All monitors in a unit should have the same severity configured for these INOPs.
Alarms are indicated after the alarm delay time. This is made up of the system delay time plus the
trigger delay time for the individual measurement. See the specifications section for details.

If more than one alarm is active, the alarm messages are shown in the
↑ ** HR HIGH
alarm status area in succession. An arrow symbol next to the alarm
message informs you that more than one message is active.

39
4 Alarms Visual Alarm Indicators

The monitor sounds an audible indicator for the highest priority alarm. If more than one alarm
condition is active in the same measurement, the monitor announces the most severe. Your monitor
may be configured to increase alarm indicator volume automatically during the time when the alarm is
not acknowledged.

Visual Alarm Indicators

WARNING • No alarms are available on the MP5 when connected to a host monitor. Alarms become active again
as soon as the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor.
• Alarm fields and other visual alarm indicators are disabled on the MP5 when connected to a host
monitor. The only visual alarm indication is provided by the alarm lamps, which are controlled by
the host monitor. No Alarm Display is shown in the field for red alarms, Companion
Mode is shown in the yellow alarms field, and the INOPs field is blacked out.

Companion Mode No Alarm Display

Alarm message: An alarm message text appears in the alarm status area at the top of the screen
indicating the source of the alarm. If more than one measurement is in an alarm condition, the message
changes every two seconds, and has an arrow ( ) at the side. The background color of the alarm
message matches the alarm priority: red for red alarms, yellow for yellow alarms, light blue for standard
INOPs, red for red INOPs and yellow for yellow INOPs. The asterisk symbols (*) beside the alarm
message match the alarm priority: *** for red alarms, ** for yellow alarms, * for short yellow alarms.
Standard INOPs do not have a symbol, red and yellow INOPs have exclamation marks beside the
alarm message: !!! for red INOPs and !! for yellow INOPs.
Depending on how your monitor is configured, it may display alarm limit violation messages
• in text form, for example “**SpO2 LOW” or
• in numeric form, for example “**SpO2 94<96”, where the first number shows the maximum
deviation from the alarm limit, and the second number shows the currently set limit.

Flashing numeric: The numeric of the measurement in alarm flashes.

Bright alarm limits: If the alarm was triggered by an alarm limit violation, the corresponding alarm
limit on the monitor screen is shown more brightly if Show AlarmLimits is enabled and there is
sufficient room on the screen.

Alarm lamp: A lamp on the monitor’s front panel flashes. The alarm lamp is divided into two
sections. The right one flashes for a patient alarm, except for short yellow alarms where the lamp will
light for approximately six seconds. The color is yellow or red corresponding to the highest priority
patient alarm currently present. The left one lights continuously for a light blue INOP and flashes for
yellow or red INOPs as follows:

40
Audible Alarm Indicators 4 Alarms

Modulation (how long the lamp is on or off while flashing)

INOP Lamp
Color On Off
Yellow 1.0 seconds 1.0 seconds
Red 0.25 seconds 0.25 seconds

If only patient alarms are present, and no INOPs, the patient alarms will use both left and right
sections to flash (for red and yellow alarms) or light for approximately six seconds (for short yellow
alarms). If only INOPs are present, and no patient alarms, red and yellow INOPs will use both left and
right sections to flash but light blue INOPs will always light continuously in the left section only.

Nurse call systems: If configured to do so, red, yellow and light blue alarms are indicated on any
device connected to the nurse call relay.

Audible Alarm Indicators

The audible alarm indicators configured for your monitor depend on which alarm standard applies in
your hospital. Audible alarm indicator patterns are repeated until you acknowledge the alarm by
switching it off or pausing it, or until the alarm condition ceases (if audible alarm indication is set to
non-latching).

WARNING • Do not rely exclusively on the audible alarm system for patient monitoring. Adjustment of alarm
volume to a low level or off during patient monitoring may result in patient danger. Remember that
the most reliable method of patient monitoring combines close personal surveillance with correct
operation of monitoring equipment.
• No alarms are available on the MP5 when connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode is
indicated). Alarms become active again as soon as the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor.
• When connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode is indicated), no alarm tones are available
on the MP5.

Alarm Tone Configuration

The audible alarm indicators of your monitor are configurable. In the monitor’s Configuration Mode,
you can:
• increase the alarm volume of unacknowledged alarms at regular intervals
• change the interval between alarm sounds (ISO/IEC Standard alarms only)
• change the base volume of the red and yellow alarm tones and the INOP tones
• change the alarm sound to suit the different alarm standards valid in different countries.

Traditional Audible Alarms (HP/Agilent/Philips/Carenet)

• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched sound is repeated once a second.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched sound is repeated every two seconds.

41
4 Alarms Audible Alarm Indicators

• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow alarms,
but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: an INOP tone is repeated every two seconds.

ISO/IEC Standard Audible Alarms

• Red alarms and red INOPs: A high pitched tone is repeated five times, followed by a configurable
pause.
• Two-star yellow alarms and yellow INOPs: A lower pitched tone is repeated three times, followed by
a configurable pause.
• One-star yellow alarms (short yellow alarms): The audible indicator is the same as for yellow alarms,
but of shorter duration.
• Standard INOPs: a lower pitched tone is repeated twice, followed by a pause.

Changing the Alarm Tone Volume

♦ The alarm volume symbol at the top right of the monitor screen gives you an
indication of the current volume. To change the volume, select the volume symbol
and then select the required volume from the pop-up selection.

♦ If you want to see a numerical indication of the current alarm volume on a scale
from zero to 10, or change the setting, select the Alarm Volume SmartKey. The Alarm
volume scale pops up. The current setting is indented. To change the setting, select Volume
the required number on the scale. Any settings that are inactive (“grayed out”) have
been disabled in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.

When the alarm volume is set to zero (off), the alarm volume symbol reflects this. If you
switch the alarm volume off, you will not get any audible indication of alarm conditions.
There is no alarm volume indication on the MP5 screen when the MP5 is connected to a host monitor
(Companion Mode is indicated).

Minimum Volume for No Central Monitoring INOP

If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, and the connection is interrupted, the INOP
message No Central Monit. will appear within 30 seconds, accompanied by an INOP tone. To
help ensure that this INOP, and any other active alarm, is not overlooked, the INOP and alarm tones
may be configured to have a minimum volume. In this case, INOP and alarm tones will sound even if
the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.

Minimum Volume for Severe Yellow or Red INOPs

Severe yellow or red INOPs require action to ensure the well-being of the patient. Therefore the
minimum volume for the INOP tone is set to at least alarm volume 8, irrespective of the current alarm
volume setting. The INOP tone will sound even if the monitor alarm volume is set to zero.
The severe INOPs for which this applies are:
Cuff Not Deflated (configurable to yellow or red)

42
Acknowledging Alarms 4 Alarms

NBP Cuff Overpress (configurable to yellow or red)

Power Loss Tone

When power is lost - no power is available from the power cable or from a battery - a buzzer will sound,
if so configured. The tone can be silenced by pressing the On/Off power switch.

Acknowledging Alarms
To acknowledge all active alarms and INOPs, select the Silence permanent
key. This switches off the audible alarm indicators and alarm lamps.
Silence

A check mark beside the alarm message indicates that the alarm has been
acknowledged. If the monitor is configured to re-alarm, a dashed check mark will
be shown.

If the condition that triggered the alarm is still present APNEA

after the alarm has been acknowledged, the alarm message
stays on the screen with a check mark symbol beside it, except for NBP alarms. When an NBP alarm is
acknowledged the alarm message disappears.
If the alarm condition is no longer present, all alarm indicators stop and the alarm is reset.
Switching off the alarms for the measurement in alarm, or switching off the measurement itself, also
stops alarm indication.

Acknowledging Disconnect INOPs

Acknowledging an INOP that results from a disconnected transducer switches off the associated
measurement. The only exception is ECG/Resp: acknowledging a disconnect INOP for ECG leads
does not switch off the ECG and Resp measurements. Acknowledging a disconnect INOP at the
Information Center switches off the audible INOP indicator but does not switch off the measurement.

Alarm Reminder (ReAlarm)

If Alarm Reminder is configured on for your monitor, you will get an audible reminder of alarm
conditions that remain active after you have acknowledged the alarm. This reminder may take the form
of a repetition of the alarm tone for a limited time, or an unlimited repetition of the alarm tone (this is
the same as a new alarm). Alarm reminder is not available for standard, light blue INOPs but for yellow
and red INOPs.
In Configuration Mode, you can set the interval between silencing the alarm and sounding the
reminder tone to one, two, or three minutes.
The alarm reminder behavior at the Information Center is different to that at the monitor. Refer to the
Information Center Instructions for Use for further information.

43
4 Alarms Pausing or Switching Off Alarms

Pausing or Switching Off Alarms

If you want to temporarily prevent alarms from sounding, for example while you are moving a patient,
you can pause alarms. Depending on your monitor configuration, alarms are paused for one, two, or
three minutes, or infinitely.
To view the alarm pause setting chosen for your unit,
1 Select Main Setup -> Alarms -> Alarm Settings
2 Check the Alarms Off setting.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.

To Pause All Alarms

♦ Select the Pause Alarms permanent key. If your monitor is configured to
infinite pause time, the permanent key is labelled Alarms Off, and selecting it Pause
switches alarms off. Alarms
Depending on the configuration, you may need to select Confirm to complete the
change.

To Switch All Alarms Off

You can only switch alarms off permanently if your monitor is configured to allow infinite alarms
pause and the permanent key is labelled Alarms Off.

♦ Select the Alarms Off permanent key.

Depending on the configuration, you may need to select Confirm to complete the Alarms
change. Off
Pausing alarms infinitely is the same as switching them off.

To Switch Individual Measurement Alarms On or Off

1 Select the measurement numeric to enter its setup menu.
2 Select Alarms to toggle between On and Off.
The alarms off symbol is shown beside the measurement numeric.

While Alarms are Paused or Off

• The red Alarms Paused lamp on the monitor front panel is lit.

• In the alarm field, the monitor displays the message ALARMS PAUSED 1:28
ALARMS PAUSED or ALARMS OFF, together with
the alarms paused symbol and the remaining pause
time in minutes and seconds, or alarms off symbol.

44
Alarm Limits 4 Alarms

• No alarms are sounded and no alarm messages are

shown. ALARMS OFF

• INOP messages are shown but no INOP tones are

sounded.
The only exceptions are the INOPs CUFF NOT DEFLATED, CUFF OVERPRESS and INOPs
relating to empty, missing and malfunctioning batteries.
These INOPs switch the alarms on, and the INOP tones are sounded, even if alarms are paused or
off. You need to remove the INOP condition first before you can switch the alarm tones off again.
• The nurse call relay is not active.
If a NO SENSOR or NO TRANSDUCER INOP is present and alarms are paused or switched off, the
measurement in question is switched off.

Restarting Paused Alarms

♦ To manually switch on alarm indication again after a pause, select the permanent key
PAUSE ALARMS (or ALARMS OFF) again.
Alarm indication starts again automatically after the pause period expires. If the monitor is configured
to stay paused infinitely, you must select ALARMS OFF again to restart alarm indication.

Resetting Arrhythmia Alarm Timeouts

♦ To reset the arrhythmia alarm timeout period, select the ALARMS OFF or PAUSE ALARMS
permanent key and then reselect it.

Extending the Alarm Pause Time

If your monitor has extended alarm pause enabled, you can extend the alarm pause time. Use this to
prevent alarms being indicated, for example, while you are washing a patient or carrying out a
procedure. Only extend the alarm pause time when you are sure that clinical personnel are available to
monitor the patient’s condition closely.
To extend the alarm pause time to five or 10 minutes,
1 Select one of the alarm fields. This calls up the Alarm Messages window.
2 Select either the pop-up key Pause Al. 5 min or the pop-up key Pause Al. 10 min.
Each time you select one of these pop-up keys, the Alarm Pause Time is reset to five (or 10)
minutes.

Alarm Limits
The alarm limits you set determine the conditions that trigger yellow and red limit alarms. For some
measurements (for example, SpO2), where the value ranges from 100 to 0, setting the high alarm limit
to 100 switches the high alarm off. In these cases, the alarms off symbol is not displayed.

WARNING Be aware that the monitors in your care area may each have different alarm settings, to suit different
patients. Always check that the alarm settings are appropriate for your patient before you start
monitoring.

45
4 Alarms Alarm Limits

Viewing Individual Alarm Limits

HR
120
50
85 You can usually see the alarm limits set for each measurement next to the
measurement numeric on the main screen.
If your monitor is not configured to show the alarm limits next to the numeric,
Alarm limits you can see them in the appropriate measurement setup menu. Select the
measurement numeric to enter the menu and check the limits.

Viewing All Alarm Limits

The Alarm Limits overview window lists the currently set alarm limits for all measurements. If an
Apnea alarm delay time is set, this is also shown. The ALARMS OFF symbol is shown beside the
measurement label of any measurement whose alarm switched off.

To open the Alarm Limits window, either select any alarm field to open the Alarm
Messages window, then select the Alarm Limits pop-up key, or select the Alarm
Limits SmartKey, if configured.

Alarm Limits

ST-V4

ST-V5

ST-V6

SpO2

Pulse (SpO2) 3

NBPs

ABPs

PAPd

awRR Off

Apnea Time sec

1 2

46
Alarm Limits 4 Alarms

1 Measurement labels, with alarms off symbol where appropriate

2 Current alarm limits
3 Graphic view of current yellow and red alarm limits and currently monitored measurement value.
Off indicates the measurement is switched off

♦ Select Show ST Limits to expand the list of ST leads and view the currently set alarm limits.
Selecting Hide ST Limits hides the list again.
You can use the pop-up keys that open with the Alarm Limits window to perform common tasks:
– All Al. On/All Al. Off,
– All Lim. Narrow/All Lim. Wide to set narrow or wide alarm AutoLimits for all
measurements.
– Print Limits/Record Limits to print a list of all current alarm limit settings on a
connected printer or recorder.
These pop-up keys are not available in the window for changing individual alarm limits which you
access by selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.

Changing Alarm Limits

To change individual measurement alarm limits using the measurement’s Setup Menu,
1 In the measurement’s setup menu, select the alarm limit you want to change. This calls up a list of
available values for the alarm limit.
2 Select a value from the list to adjust the alarm limit.
Alternatively, you can use the keys in the measurement Change Limits window, which you access by
selecting the measurement label in the Alarm Limits window.

47
4 Alarms Alarm Limits

1
2

HR
3

Alarms
On/Off
5

10 9

1 Parameter label
2 High red alarm (view only)
3 High yellow alarm field. Select to open a pop-up list of high alarm limits
4 Alarms On/Off key - select to toggle between alarms on or off
5 Preview Alarm AutoLimits for a measurement before applying
6 Select to apply wide AutoLimits
7 Select to apply narrow AutoLimits
8 Low yellow alarm field. Select to open a pop-up list of low alarm limits
9 Low red alarm (view only)
10 Graphic view of alarm limits with currently measured value

To change alarm limits,

1 Enter the Alarm Limits window.
2 To set the high alarm limit, select the high yellow alarm field to open a pop-up list of high alarm
limits. Select a limit from the list. Repeat to set the low yellow alarm field.
If you set the yellow alarm limit outside the red alarm limit, the monitor will automatically set the red
alarm to the yellow alarm limit.
When an ST measurement is in the Change Limits window there are also two pop-up keys available
labeled All ST Narrow/All ST Wide. With these keys you can set Auto Limits for all ST
Leads.

48
Alarm Limits 4 Alarms

About Automatic Alarm Limits (AutoLimits)

The monitor can automatically set alarm limits suited to your individual patient, using the Automatic
Alarm Limits function. This tells the monitor to adapt the alarm limits of selected measurements to the
measured vital signs within a defined safe limit. The monitor calculates safe AutoLimits for each
patient based on the measured values from the last 12 seconds.
The wide and narrow limits have a fixed relationship to the measured value within the non-
pathological range. Outside of this range, no auto limits are calculated. To set values outside of the
non-pathological range, limits must be changed manually, based on the clinician’s judgement about the
specific patient.

1
2

3 2
1

1 Wide alarm limits

2 Narrow alarm limits
3 Alarm Limits
4 Measurement value

Limits Narrow sets limits close to the currently measured values for situations where it is critical
for you to be informed about small changes in your patient’s vital signs.
Limits Wide sets limits further away from the currently measured values for situations where small
changes are not so critical.
♦ Use the keys in the Change Limits window to apply AutoLimits for individual measurements.
These keys are not available if AutoLimits have been disabled for the measurement in the monitor’s
Configuration Mode.
AutoLimits are not available for all measurements. The list of measurements for which AutoLimits can
be used is defined in the monitor’s Configuration mode.
Use the Change Limits window to check AutoLimits before you apply them to ensure that they are
appropriate for your individual patient and their clinical condition. Once applied, AutoLimits are
shown on the monitor screen just like manually-set alarm limits. If the AutoLimits are not appropriate
for your patient, you must set alarm limits manually. The limits remain unchanged until you set them
again or change them manually.

Documenting Alarm Limits

The alarm limits pop-up keys appear with the Alarm Limits and Change Limits windows.
♦ Select the Print Limits pop-up key to print an overview of all alarm limits on a connected
printer.

49
4 Alarms Reviewing Alarms

♦ Select the Record Limits pop-up key to send a recording of the alarm limits to a recorder.

Reviewing Alarms
You can see which alarms and INOPs are currently active in the respective alarms and INOPs fields at
the top of the screen.
To see the currently active alarms and INOPs listed in one place, select any of the alarm status areas on
the monitor screen. The Alarm Messages window pops up.
All alarms and INOPs are erased from the Review Alarms window when you discharge a patient,
or if you change to Demonstration Mode.

Alarm Messages Window

The Alarm Messages window shows all the currently active alarms and INOPs sorted by priority,
beginning at the top with the most recent. INOPs are shown on the left hand side and patient alarms
are shown on the right hand side. Any active red alarms are shown first, followed by yellow alarms.
Acknowledged alarms or INOPs are shown with the check mark symbol.
The Alarm Messages window pop-up keys appear when the window is opened. If alarm pause
extension is disabled, the pause pop-up keys are inactive (“grayed-out”). Selecting the Review
Alarms pop-up key opens the Review Alarms window.

Alarm Messages
Resp LEADS OFF ** awRR LOW
LL LEAD OFF

Alarm Review Pause Al. Pause Al.

Limits Alarms 5 Min. 10 Min.

If you do not immediately understand an INOP or alarm message, refer to its help text.
• In the Alarm Messages window, select the INOP message. This calls up a help window with an
explanation of the INOP message and, where appropriate, a suggested solution for the problem.
• If the alarm or INOP was generated in a device other than the monitor (for instance, in an MMS or
FMS), this source is specified at the end of the help text (Source: FMS).

Review Alarms Window

50
Reviewing Alarms 4 Alarms

The Review Alarms window contains a list of the most recent alarms and INOPs with date and
time information.

Review Alarms
5 Apr 16:55:18 *** Apnea
5 Apr 16:55:18 ** ABPs HIGH (120 >95)
5 Apr 16:55:18 Alarms On
5 Apr 16:45:15 ** SpO2 NON-PULSAT.
5 Apr 16:44:57 Alarms Off
5 Apr 16:44:46 ** awRR LOW (14<15)
5 Apr 16:44:39 ** SpO2 LOW (95<99)
5 Apr 16:44:28 ** ABPs HIGH (120>95)

If configured to do so, each alarm is shown with the alarm limit active when the alarm was triggered
and the maximum value measured beyond this limit. The Review Alarms window also shows
when the monitor was switched on (after being switched off for longer than 1 minute) and any changes
made to the Alarms On/Off, Standby, Silence or ECG source.
No entries are made in the Review Alarms window of the MP5 while it is connected to a host
monitor, except the time when the MP5 was connected to the host (Companion Entered), and
when it was disconnected (Companion Left). Alarms can be reviewed on the host monitor.
When you select an item from the list, you can get additional information about that item. If you select
a high or low limit alarm in the list, the Graphical Trends window will open to provide further
data. If you select an alarm resulting from an event alarm notification, the Event Episode window
for that event will open. If you select an alert other than a high or low alarm, a help text window opens
with more information. This is the same as the help text window that opens in the Alarm
Messages window. Some items in the list are simply log items not related to a patient alert as such
(for example, Alarms On or Alarms Off). You cannot see any further information if you select one of
these items. When you close these windows you will return to the Review Alarms window.
The information in the Review Alarms window is deleted when a patient is discharged, and when you
leave Demonstration Mode.
The Review Alarms window pop-up keys appear when the window is opened. If alarm pause
extension is disabled, the pause pop-up keys are inactive. Selecting the Active Alarms pop-up key
opens the Alarm Messages window.

Alarm Active Pause Al. Pause Al.

Limits Alarms 5 Min. 10 Min.

51
4 Alarms Latching Alarms

Latching Alarms
The alarm latching setting for your monitor defines how the alarm indicators behave when you do not
acknowledge them. When alarms are set to non-latching, their indicators end when the alarm
condition ends. Switching alarm latching on means that visual and/or audible alarm indications are still
displayed or announced by the monitor after the alarm condition ends. The indication lasts until you
acknowledge the alarm.

Viewing the Alarm Latching Settings

To see the alarm latching setting for your monitor
1 In the monitor’s Main Setup menu, select Alarms.
2 Select Alarm Settings, and see the Visual Latching and Audible Latching
settings.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode. You should be aware of the settings chosen
for your unit. There are three possible choices each for visual and audible latching, Red, Red and
Yellow, and Off. These choices can be combined to give the following settings:

Visual Latching R&Y R&Y R&Y R R Off

Audible latching R&Y R Off R Off Off

R = red alarms, Y = yellow alarms

Alarm Latching Behavior

Red and Yellow Measurement Non-latching Visual and audible Visual latching,
Alarms alarms latching audible non-latching
Alarm has not been Alarm condition Alarm tone on. Alarm lamp on. Alarm message. Flashing numerics.
acknowledged. still present.
Alarm condition All audible and visual Alarm tone on. Alarm message. Flashing
no longer present. alarm indicators Alarm lamp on. numerics.
automatically stop. Alarm message. Audible alarm indicators
Flashing numerics. automatically stop.
Alarm has been Alarm condition Alarm tone off. Alarm lamp off. Alarm message. Flashing numerics. Audible
acknowledged. still present. alarm reminder (if configured).
Alarm condition Audible and visual alarm indicators automatically stop.
no longer present.

All INOPs are non-latching. See “Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms” on page 122 for information on one-star
yellow alarms latching behavior.

Testing Alarms
When you switch the monitor on, a selftest is started. You must check that the alarms lamps light, one
after the other, and that you hear a single tone. This indicates that the visible and audible alarm
indicators are functioning correctly. For further testing of individual measurement alarms, perform the
measurement on yourself (for example SpO2 or CO2) or use a simulator. Adjust alarm limits and check
that appropriate alarm behavior is observed.

52
Alarm Behavior at On/Off 4 Alarms

Alarm Behavior at On/Off

When you switch alarms on, the settings defined in the currently active Profile are used.
If the monitor is switched off for longer than one minute and then switched on again, or after a loss of
power lasting longer than one minute, or when a patient is discharged, the monitor can be configured
to restore either the alarm settings from the monitor's configured default Profile, or the most recently
used alarm settings. After any of these situations, you should check that the alarm settings are
appropriate for your patient, and if necessary, select the correct Profile and patient category.
If power is lost for less than one minute, the alarm settings prior to the power loss are restored.

Alarm Recordings
You can set up your monitor so that it automatically triggers alarm recordings at the Information
Center, or if configured, to a printer as a realtime report.
1 Press the Main Setup SmartKey.
2 Select Alarms from the Main Setup menu.
3 Select Alarm Recording from the Alarms menu to open the Alarm Recordings menu.
4 Select a measurement from those listed for which you want to change the alarm condition that
triggers an alarm recording. This opens a pop-up list.
5 For the desired measurement(s), choose the alarm condition to trigger an alarm recording:
Red Only: an alarm recording will automatically be triggered when the measurement enters a
red alarm condition.
Red&Yell: both yellow and red alarms will trigger an alarm recording.
Off: disables automatic alarm recording.
Refer to the chapter “Recording” for details of how to set up a recording.

53
4 Alarms Alarm Recordings

54
 5

5Patient Alarms and INOPs

This chapter lists patient alarms and technical alarms (INOPs) alphabetically, irrespective of their
priority. INOPs start on page 61. All alarms and INOPs are listed here; the ones which can appear on
your monitor will depend on the model and the individual options.
For information on alarms and INOPs from the gas module refer to your Gas Module Instructions for
Use.

Patient Alarm Messages

The measurement labels and abbreviations for pressure, temperature, SpO2, and anesthetic agent
alarms are explained in the individual chapters.
Some alarms may be shown at the Information Center in shortened form, when transferred through
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry. These shortened alarm texts are included in the list and identified
with the note “at Information Center”.
Note that yellow arrhythmia alarms may be shown with one or with two stars, depending on your
monitor configuration and the Information Center revision you are using.
Refer to your IntelliBridge Device Driver Instructions for Use for patient alarms from connected
external devices.
Refer to your Gas Module Instructions for Use for patient alarms and INOPs from the gas module.

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

*/**AFIB ECG/ Atrial fibrillation waveform detected yellow alarm lamp, short
Arrhythmia yellow audible alarm.
***APNEA or CO2, Resp, Respiration has stopped for longer than numeric flashes, red alarm
***APNEA mm:ss sec Spirometry the preset apnea time. “mm:ss” denotes lamp, alarm tone.
or the Apnea duration in minutes and
***APNEA >10min seconds.

***ASYSTOLE ECG No QRS detected for a period greater numeric flashes, red alarm
than the asystole threshold (in the lamp, alarm tone.
absence of Vfib or chaotic ECG).
**awRR HIGH CO2, Resp, The airway respiration rate has numeric flashes and high limit
AGM exceeded the high alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**awRR LOW CO2, Resp, The airway respiration rate has dropped numeric flashes and low limit
AGM below the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.

55
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Patient Alarm Messages

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

**BIS HIGH BIS The Bispectral Index value has numeric flashes and high limit
exceeded the high alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**BIS LOW BIS The Bispectral Index value has dropped numeric flashes and low limit
below the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
***BRADY/P xxx<yyy Press, SpO2 The heart rate from the Pulse signal has numeric flashes and alarm
or fallen below the bradycardia limit. xxx limit is highlighted, red alarm
***BRADY xxx<yyy denotes the lowest measured value; yyy lamp, alarm tone.
is the bradycardia limit.
**CCO/CCI HIGH CCO Continuous Cardiac Output or CC numeric flashes and high alarm
Index is above the high alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**CCO/CCI LOW CCO Continuous Cardiac Output or CC numeric flashes and low alarm
Index is below the low alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**CPP HIGH CPP The CPP value has exceeded the high numeric flashes and high limit
alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone
**CPP LOW CPP The CPP value has fallen below the low numeric flashes and low limit
alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
***DESAT or SpO2 The SpO2 value has fallen below the numeric flashes, red alarm
***DESAT xxx<yyy desaturation alarm limit. xxx denotes lamp, alarm tone.
the lowest measured value, and yyy is
the desaturation limit.
**etCO2 HIGH CO2, Resp, The end tidal CO2 high alarm limit has numeric flashes and high limit
AGM been exceeded. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**etCO2 LOW CO2, Resp, The end tidal CO2 value has fallen numeric flashes and low limit
AGM below the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**etO2 HIGH O2, AGM The end tidal O2 high alarm limit has numeric flashes and high limit
been exceeded. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**etO2 LOW O2, AGM The end tidal O2 value has fallen below numeric flashes, and low limit
the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
*/**/*** Event An event has occurred and the event event group name flashes,
EVENT:<GRP> surveillance notification is configured to alarm. yellow or red alarm lamp and
<GRP> is the event group alarm tone
*/**/*** EVENT Event An event has occurred and the event (on monitor) event group
at Information center surveillance notification is configured to alarm. name flashes, yellow or red
Check on the monitor for more details alarm lamp and alarm tone
on event group.
***EXTREME BRADY ECG The bradycardia limit has been numeric flashes and alarm
exceeded. limit is highlighted, red alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
***EXTREME TACHY ECG The tachycardia limit has been numeric flashes and alarm
exceeded. limit is highlighted, red alarm
lamp, alarm tone.

56
Patient Alarm Messages 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

**HR HIGH ECG The heart rate high alarm limit has numeric flashes and high limit
been exceeded. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone. If configured
to short yellow, the sound
switches off after 5 seconds if
Arrhythmia is On.
**HR LOW ECG The heart rate has fallen below the low numeric flashes and low limit
alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone. If configured
to short yellow, the sound
switches off after 5 seconds if
Arrhythmia is On.
*/**IRREGULAR HR ECG/ Consistently irregular heart rhythm. numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia lamp, short yellow audible
alarm.
*/**MISSED BEAT ECG/ No beat detected for 1.75*R-R interval, numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia or if HR>120bpm no beat detected for lamp, short yellow audible
one second (non-paced patients only). alarm.
*/**MULTIFORM PVCs ECG/ Two differently shaped Vs detected, numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia each occurring at least twice within the lamp, short yellow audible
last 300 beats and at least once within alarm.
the last 60 beats.
**NBP HIGH NBP The measured NBP value is above the numeric flashes and high limit
high alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
s, d, or m after the label indicates lamp, alarm tone.
whether the systolic, diastolic or mean
pressure has crossed the limit.
**NBP LOW NBP The measured NBP value is below the numeric flashes and low limit
low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
s, d, or m after the label indicates lamp, alarm tone.
whether the systolic, diastolic or mean
pressure has crossed the limit.
*/**NON-SUSTAIN VT ECG/ A run of Vs having a ventricular numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia HR>V-Tach HR limit, but lasting for lamp, short yellow audible
less than the V-Tach Run limit has been alarm.
detected.
*/**PACER NOT CAPT ECG/ A missed beat with a pace pulse was numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia detected. lamp, short yellow audible
(paced alarm.
patients only)
*/**PACER NT PACING ECG/ A missed beat without a pace pulse was numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia detected. lamp, short yellow audible
(paced alarm.
patients only)
*/**PAIR PVCs ECG/ A non-ventricular contraction, followed numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia by two ventricular contractions, lamp, short yellow audible
followed by a non-ventricular alarm.
contraction has been detected.
*/**PAUSE ECG/ No beat detected for a period greater numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia than the pause threshold. lamp, short yellow audible
alarm.

57
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Patient Alarm Messages

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

***<Pressure> PRESS The pressure is non-pulsatile and the numeric flashes, red alarm
DISCONNECT mean pressure is continuously less than lamp, alarm tone.
10mmHg (1.3kPa). This alarm occurs
only with arterial pressures (P, ABP,
ART, Ao, BAP, FAP, PAP, UAP, P1, P2,
P3, P4).
***<Pressure> HIGH PRESS The measured pressure value is above numeric flashes, high limit is
the extreme high alarm limit. s, d, or m highlighted, red alarm lamp,
after the label indicates whether the alarm tone.
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has
crossed the limit.
**<Pressure> HIGH PRESS The measured pressure value is above numeric flashes, high limit is
the high alarm limit. s, d, or m after the highlighted, yellow alarm
label indicates whether the systolic, lamp, alarm tone.
diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
***<Pressure> LOW PRESS The measured pressure value is below numeric flashes and low limit
the extreme low alarm limit. s, d, or m is highlighted, red alarm lamp,
after the label indicates whether the alarm tone.
systolic, diastolic or mean pressure has
crossed the limit.
**<Pressure> LOW PRESS The measured pressure value is below numeric flashes and low limit
the low alarm limit. s, d, or m after the is highlighted, yellow alarm
label indicates whether the systolic, lamp, alarm tone.
diastolic or mean pressure has crossed
the limit.
**Pulse HIGH PRESS The pulse rate has exceeded the high numeric flashes and high limit
SpO2 alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**Pulse LOW PRESS The pulse rate has dropped below the numeric flashes and low limit
SpO2 low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
*/**PVCs/min HIGH ECG/ More premature ventricular numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia contractions have been detected in a lamp, short yellow audible
minute than the limit. alarm.
**QTc HIGH ECG/QT QTc value has exceeded the QTc high numeric flashes, yellow alarm
limit for more than 5 minutes lamp, alarm tone.
**ΔQTc HIGH ECG/QT ΔQTc value has exceeded the ΔQTc numeric flashes, yellow alarm
high limit for more than 5 minutes lamp, alarm tone.
*/**R-ON-T PVCs ECG/ For HR <100, a PVC with R-R interval numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia < 1/3 the average interval followed by a lamp, short yellow audible
compensatory pause of 1.25 x average alarm.
R-R interval or two such Vs without
compensatory pause occurring within 5
minutes of each other. (When HR
>100, 1/3 R-R interval is too short for
detection.).
**RR HIGH RESP The respiration rate has exceeded the numeric flashes and high limit
high alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.

58
Patient Alarm Messages 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

**RR LOW RESP The respiration rate has dropped below numeric flashes and low limit
the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
*/**RUN PVCs HIGH ECG/ A run of PVCs greater than 2 was numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia detected. lamp, short yellow audible
alarm.
**<SO2 label> HIGH SvO2/SO2 The the measured intravascular oxygen numeric flashes and high alarm
saturation has exceeded the high limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**<SO2 label> LOW SvO2/SO2 The measured intravascular oxygen numeric flashes and low alarm
saturation has fallen below the low limit is highlighted, yellow
limit. alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**<SpO2 label> HIGH SpO2 The arterial oxygen saturation has numeric flashes and high limit
exceeded the high alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**<SpO2 label> LOW SpO2 The arterial oxygen saturation has numeric flashes and low limit
fallen below the low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**ST<n> HIGH ECG/ST The ST elevation in lead <n> is higher numeric flashes and high alarm
than the limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**ST<n> LOW ECG/ST The ST depression in lead <n> is lower numeric flashes and low alarm
than the limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**ST MULTI <n>,<n> ECG/ST The ST depression or elevation is numeric flashes, yellow alarm
outside of the limit in two or more lamp, alarm tone
leads <n> and <n>
**ST MULTI ECG/ST The ST depression or elevation is (on monitor) numeric flashes,
at Information Center outside of the limit in two or more yellow alarm lamp, alarm tone
leads. Check on the monitor for more
details about which leads are affected.
*/**SVT ECG/ A run of supraventricular beats greater numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia than the SVT run limit has been lamp, alarm tone.
detected and the HR has exceeded the
SVT HR limit.
***TACHY/P xxx>yyy Press, SpO2 The heart rate from the Pulse signal has numeric flashes, alarm limit is
or exceeded the tachycardia limit. xxx highlighted, red alarm lamp,
***TACHY xxx>yyy denotes the highest measured value; yyy alarm tone.
is the tachycardia limit.
**Tblood HIGH C.O. The blood temperature value has numeric flashes, high alarm
exceeded the high alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**Tblood LOW C.O. The blood temperature value has fallen numeric flashes, low alarm
below the low alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**tcpO2 HIGH/ tcGas The tcpO2 or tcpCO2 value has numeric flashes, high alarm
**tcpCO2 HIGH exceeded the high alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.
**tcpO2 LOW/ tcGas The tcpO2 or tcpCO2 value has fallen numeric flashes, low alarm
**tcpCO2 LOW below the low alarm limit. limit is highlighted, yellow
alarm lamp, alarm tone.

59
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Patient Alarm Messages

Alarm Message From Condition Indication

*/**/***TELE ALARM Telemetry This is a generic alarm from the yellow or red alarm lamp and
telemetry system. The specific alarm alarm tone
cause is indicated in the alarm message
in the Telemetry Data Window.
**<Temperature TEMP The temperature has exceeded the high numeric flashes and high limit
label> HIGH alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
**<Temperature TEMP The temperature has fallen below the numeric flashes and low limit
label> LOW low alarm limit. is highlighted, yellow alarm
lamp, alarm tone.
*/**VENT BIGEMINY ECG/ A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V (N = numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia supraventricular beat, V = ventricular lamp, short yellow audible
beat) was detected. alarm.
***VENT FIB/TACH ECG A fibrillatory waveform for 4 numeric flashes, red alarm
consecutive seconds was detected. lamp, alarm tone.
*/**VENT RHYTHM ECG/ A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs > numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia vent rhythm limit and ventricular HR < lamp, short yellow audible
VTach HR limit was detected. alarm.
*/**VENT TRIGEMINY ECG/ A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, numeric flashes, yellow alarm
Arrhythmia V (N = supraventricular beat, V = lamp, short yellow audible
ventricular beat) was detected. alarm.
***VTACH ECG, Ventricular tachycardia has been numeric flashes, red alarm
Arrhythmia detected (Consecutive PVCs exceed V- lamp, alarm tone.
Tach Run limit and HR exceeds V-Tach
HR limit).
**/***VueLink ALARM VueLink A yellow (**) or red (***) patient alarm (on monitor) yellow or red
at Information Center is present on the VueLink module. alarm lamp, alarm tone
Check the monitor display for more
detailed alarm information.

60
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

If an INOP interrupts monitoring and alarm detection, the measurement numeric will be replaced
by -?-. If an INOP may lead to unreliable measurement values, a ? appears next to the numeric.
The measurement labels and abbreviations for pressure, temperature and SpO2 INOP messages are
explained in the individual chapters.

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

ABP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
ALL ECG ALARMS OFF ECG/ All ECG alarms have been switched off, or the HR alarm
Arrhythmia source is not ECG. To resume ECG alarm generation, switch
ECG alarms on or select ECG as the alarms source.
Ao INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
ART INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
AWF CHANGE SCALE Spirometry Airway flow signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust scale
to display complete wave.
AWP CHANGE SCALE Spirometry Airway pressure signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust
scale to display complete wave
AWV CHANGE SCALE Spirometry Airway volume signal exceeds range of selected scale. Adjust
scale to display complete wave.
Bad Serverlink Monitor 1) An MMS with an incompatible software revision is
INOP tone connected to the monitor. This combination does not allow
monitoring, OR
2) You cannot use this combination of monitor, MMS and
cable. Switch off the monitor and contact your service
personnel.
BAP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
BATT EMPTY Battery The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time is less
INOP tone, battery LED flashes than 10 minutes. Replace the battery immediately.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to
paused or switched off. mains power, this INOP is re-issued two minutes after you
acknowledge it.
BATT INCOMPAT Battery The battery cannot be used with this monitor. Replace with the
INOP tone correct battery (M4607A).

BATT LOW Battery The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less
INOP tone than 20 minutes.

BATT MALFUNCTION Battery The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP
INOP tone, battery LED flashes persists, replace the faulty battery. If the condition persists and
During this INOP, alarms cannot be the monitor is not connected to mains power, this INOP is re-
paused or switched off unless the issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
monitor is connected to mains power. Place the battery in a different monitor or in a battery charger.
If the same INOP is shown, contact your service personnel.
BATTERIES EMPTY or BATT 1/ Batteries The estimated remaining battery-powered operating time of
BATT 2 EMPTY the indicated battery or batteries is less than 10 minutes.
INOP tone, battery LED flashes Replace the batteries immediately.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be If the condition persists and the monitor is not connected to
paused or switched off. mains power, this INOP is re-issued two minutes after you
acknowledge it.

61
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

BATTERIES INCOMP or BATT 1/ Batteries The indicated battery or batteries cannot be used with this
BATT 2 INCOMPAT monitor. Replace with the correct battery or batteries as
INOP tone specified in this book.

BATTERIES LOW or BATT 1/ Batteries The estimated battery-powered operating time remaining is less
BATT 2 LOW than 20 minutes.
INOP tone
BATTERIES MALFUNC. or Batteries The monitor cannot determine the battery status. If this INOP
BATT 1/BATT 2/ BATTERY persists, replace the faulty battery or batteries. If the condition
MALFUNCT. persists and the monitor is not connected to mains power, this
INOP tone, battery LED flashes INOP is re-issued two minutes after you acknowledge it.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be Place the batteries in a different monitor or in a battery charger.
paused or switched off unless the If the same INOP is shown, contact your service personnel.
monitor is connected to mains power.
BATTERY LOW T Telemetry The battery in the Telemetry device is low and must be
replaced soon.
BATT 1/BATT 2 MISSING Batteries The monitor requires two batteries but can detect only one
INOP tone. battery. Insert the missing battery immediately.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be
paused or switched off.
BIS CABLE INCOMPAT BIS The semi-reusable sensor cable connected is unknown or not
INOP tone. supported by your software revision. Replace it with a Philips-
supported sensor cable.
BIS CABLE USAGE BIS The semi-reusable sensor cable has exceeded the maximum
INOP tone. number of uses. Replace the cable.
BIS DSC DISCONN BIS DSC is not properly connected OR either DSC or BIS engine
INOP tone may be faulty.
Make sure that the DSC is properly connected to the BIS
Engine. If INOP persists, replace DSC with a known good one
of the same type.
If INOP persists replace BIS engine.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
BIS DSC INCOMPT BIS DSC is not supported by the BIS engine or new DSC
INOP tone connected to an old BIS engine. A software upgrade may be
required. Contact your service personnel.
BIS DSC MALFUNC BIS Electrocautery used during self-test OR malfunction in the
DSC hardware.
Make sure not to use electrocautery during the self-test
procedure. Disconnect and reconnect the DSC to the BIS
engine. If the INOP persists, replace the DSC or contact your
service personnel.
BIS DSC UPDATE BIS DSC update currently being carried out. This INOP will
INOP tone disappear when the DSC update is finished. Do not disconnect
the DSC during the update. No action is needed.
BIS ELECTR. DISC BIS One or more electrodes are not connected to the semi-reusable
INOP tone. sensor cable. Check all electrode connections.
BIS ENGINE DISCONN BIS BIS engine not connected OR Module Cable defective.
INOP tone Make sure that the Module Cable is properly connected. If
INOP persists, replace the Module Cable.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.

62
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

BIS ENGINE INCOMPT BIS BIS engine software is not supported. A software upgrade may
INOP tone be required. Contact your service personnel.
MP20/30 - BIS engine not supported.
BIS ENGINE MALFUNC BIS Malfunction in the BIS engine hardware. Disconnect and
INOP tone reconnect the BIS engine. If the INOP persists, replace BIS
engine.
BIS EQUIP MALF BIS There is a malfunction in the BIS hardware. Unplug and replug
INOP tone the BIS module. If the INOP persists, contact your service
personnel.
BIS HIGH IMPEDANCE BIS Impedance of one or more electrode(s) is above the valid range,
INOP tone may sound most often caused by bad skin preparation. Check the sensor
montage and press the electrode pads firmly. If this INOP
persists, replace the sensor(s) in question using correct skin
preparation.
If INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
BIS IMPEDANCE CHCK BIS The Cyclic Impedance check is running. It will stop
INOP tone may sound automatically if all impedances are within the valid range. If
any electrodes do not pass the impedance test, check the sensor
montage and press the electrode pads firmly.
To manually stop the Cyclic Impedance Check, select
Cyclic Check off in the Setup BIS menu.
BIS ISOELECTRC EEG BIS No discernible EEG activity is detected for longer than one
minute.
Check the patient. Check that the electrodes are properly
connected.
BIS LEAD OFF BIS One or more electrodes have no skin contact and therefore
INOP tone may sound impedances cannot be measured. Check the sensor montage
and press the electrode pads firmly.
If this INOP persists, replace the sensor(s) in question, using
correct skin preparation.
BIS OVERCURRENT BIS Unplug and replug the BIS module or, f or the MP20/MP30,
INOP tone disconnect and reconnect the BISx from the Interface board. If
the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
BIS SENSOR DISCONN BIS The sensor is not properly connected to the patient interface
INOP tone cable (PIC) and/or the PIC is not properly connected to the
DSC or BISx, or the sensor or PIC or DSC or BISx may be
faulty.
Check all the connections.
Disconnect and reconnect the sensor, PIC, DSC, BISx.
If the INOP persists, replace the sensor.
If the INOP persists, replace PIC. If INOP persists, contact
your service personnel.
Silencing this INOP switches the measurement off.
BIS SENSOR INCOMPT BIS Unsupported sensor connected or sensor type unknown or not
INOP tone supported by your software revision. Replace the sensor, using
only Philips supported sensors.

63
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

BIS SENSOR MALFUNC BIS Malfunction in the sensor hardware, most often caused by
INOP tone liquids permeating into the connectors OR patient interface
cable (PIC) or DSC or BISx may be faulty.
Replace the sensor. Manually initiate a Cyclic Impedance
Check. Make sure all electrodes pass the test. Make sure that
the both sides of the PIC connector (between PIC and sensor)
are dry. If you are not sure that the connector is dry, replace the
PIC until it has dried. If this INOP persists, contact your
service personnel.
BIS SENSOR USAGE BIS Excessive sensor usage. Replace sensor.
INOP tone A Cyclic Impedance Check will start automatically.

BIS SQI < 15% (INOP tone) BIS If the signal quality is below 50%, BIS numerics cannot be
OR reliably derived.
If the signal quality is below 15%, no BIS numerics can be
BIS SQI < 50% (no INOP tone) derived.
This may occur as a result of artifacts such as those generated
from motion or the presence of electrocautery devices. Make
sure the sensor is properly attached to the patient. Manually
initiate a Cyclic Impedance Check. Make sure all electrodes
pass the test. Make sure the patient is completely relaxed (even
small motions of the facial muscles affect the signal quality).
BIS UNPLUGGED BIS Plug in the BIS module. Silencing this INOP switches off the
INOP tone measurement.

BISx DISCONNECTED BIS The BISx is not connected to the BIS module or the BIS
INOP tone interface board. Silencing this INOP switches the measurement
off.
BISx INCOMPATIBLE BIS The BISx software is not compatible with the BIS module or
INOP tone with the MP20/MP30 monitor software. A software upgrade
may be required. Contact your service personnel.
BISx MALFUNCTION BIS The BISx is faulty. Disconnect and reconnect it to the module
INOP tone or BIS interface board. If the INOP persists, replace the BISx.
MP20/MP30 - Malfunction on interface board. If the INOP
persists, contact your service personnel.
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG ECG/ The arrhythmia algorithm cannot reliably analyze the ECG
Arrhythmia data. Check the ECG signal quality of the selected primary and
secondary leads. If necessary, improve lead position or reduce
patient motion.
If you have arrhythmia analysis on, and you are not getting a
reliable HR because the signal is below a minimum amplitude,
unstable, or contains artifact, and you have tried to improve the
system performance by choosing another lead and changing
electrodes, you should consider turning arrhythmia analysis off.
CANNOT ANALYZE QT QT The QT algorithm cannot generate a valid QT value for more
than 10 minutes, or 1 minute in the initial phase.
CANNOT ANALYZE ST ST The ST algorithm cannot generate a valid ST value. Possible
causes are large variations in the measured ST values for
consecutive beats, or ventricular paced beats. Review the ECG
signal quality and the ST measurement points.
If the patient has a ventricular pacemaker, ST analysis is not
possible.

64
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

CCI NO BSA C.O. CCI cannot be calculated because the patient's body surface
CCI numeric unavailable area is unknown. Enter the patient weight and height to
INOP tone provide the BSA for CCI calculation.
CCO BAD PRESS SIGN C.O. The arterial pressure wave can currently not be used for pulse
numeric is replaced by -?- contour calculation for CCO or CCI measurement. Possible
INOP tone causes are air bubbles in the tubing or a physiological
condition, for example severe arrhythmia.
CCO NO <Pressure label> C.O. CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure
numeric is replaced by -?- chosen in the Setup CCO menu under CCO From
INOP tone may sound matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for
CCO measurement. A pressure from an external device cannot
be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART,
BAP, FAP, or UAP.
CCO NO CALIBRATION C.O. The CCO measurement is currently not calibrated.
numeric is replaced by -?-
CCO NO PRESS C.O. CCO/CCI cannot be calculated. Make sure that the pressure
at Information Center chosen in the Setup CCO menu under CCO From
matches the pressure measured with the arterial catheter for
CCO measurement. A pressure from an external device cannot
be used. Select another pressure label, either ABP, Ao, ART,
BAP, FAP, or UAP.
CCO NOT SUPPORTED C.O. A catheter for transpulmonary C.O. measurements has been
numeric is replaced by -?- unplugged and replaced with a Right Heart C.O. catheter, or
INOP tone the measurement mode has been changed manually. Silencing
this INOP switches the measurement off.
CCO/CCI OVERRANGE C.O. The measured CCO or CCI value is not within the specified
numeric is replaced by -?- range for CCO/CCI measurement.
INOP tone
CCO <Pressure label> C.O. The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for
INVALID CCO is available but currently invalid. Make sure the pressure
numeric is replaced by -?- transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
INOP tone may sound
CCO PRESS INVALID C.O. The arterial pressure selected for pulse contour calculation for
at Information Center CCO is available but currently invalid. Make sure the pressure
transducer is connected and the zero calibration is valid.
CCO PRESS OVERRANG C.O. The mean value of the arterial pressure values used for pulse
numeric is replaced by -?- contour calculation for CCO is below 0 mmHg or above 300
INOP tone mmHg.
CCO PULSE OVERRANG C.O. The pulse rate of the pressure used for pulse contour
numeric is replaced by -?- calculation for CCO is below 30 bpm or above 240 bpm.
INOP tone
CCO/Tbl NO TRANSD C.O. No transducer attached to the module or catheter
Numeric is replaced by -?- disconnected.
INOP tone
CCO RECALIBRATE C.O. The most recent CCO or CCI calibration was made over 8
numeric is replaced by -?- hours ago or the arterial pressure measurement used for CCO
calculation has been zeroed after the CCO calibration was
performed. You should recalibrate CCO or CCI with
transpulmonary C.O. measurements at least every 8 hours or
when the hemodynamic condition of the patient has changed.
The pressure measurement must be zeroed before a CCO
calibration.

65
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

CENTRAL:TELE ONLY Monitor System connectivity via telemetry device is limited (No alarms,
INOP tone only local numerics) when in companion mode and host
monitor does not have system connectivity. Only telemetry
device parameters can be displayed at central station.
Charge BATT1/BATT2 now Batteries Battery must be charged. Connect the monitor to mains power
INOP tone or exchange the battery.
CHARGER MALFUNC Batteries There is a problem with the battery charger in the monitor.
INOP tone, battery LED may flash Connect the monitor to mains power and contact your service
personnel.
Check Alarm Lamps Monitor Perform a visual check of the alarm lamp to establish whether
INOP tone. there is a problem. Contact your service personnel to check the
internal connections to the alarm lamps.
CHECK BATT TEMP Battery The temperature of one or both batteries is too high. Check
INOP tone that ventilation openings (if applicable) are not blocked and
monitor is not exposed to heat.
Check DrugSettings Monitor There was a problem loading the drug settings. Check that the
INOP tone settings are complete and correct.
Check ECG Settings Telemetry Synchronization of ECG settings between the monitor and
INOP tone Information Center has failed. Check that the ECG settings in
use are appropriate.
!!CHECK ECG SOURCE Monitor The telemetry device and the monitor both have valid ECG
INOP tone signals. Unpair the telemetry device and the monitor if they are
no longer used for the same patient.
Check Flex Texts Monitor Check the names of the monitor menus, for example the labels
INOP tone for screens, profiles, event or trend group names, before you
resume monitoring. If they are unexpected, there may be a
problem with the monitor software. Contact your service
personnel.
CheckInternVoltage Monitor Potential problem with alarm lamps, display or interfaces
at Information Center detected. Contact your service personnel. This INOP will
appear on the monitor as Check Monitor Func.
Check Keyboard Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of the keyboard. Contact
INOP tone your service personnel.

Check Main Board 2 Monitor There is a problem with the second main board in the monitor.
INOP tone. Contact your service personnel.
Check Monitor Func Monitor Potential problem with alarm lamps, display or interfaces
INOP tone. detected. Contact your service personnel. This INOP may
appear on the Information Center as
CheckInternVoltage.
Check Monitor Temp Monitor The temperature inside the monitor is too high. Check that the
INOP tone monitor ventilation is not obstructed. If the situation
continues, contact your service personnel.
Check Mouse Device Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of the mouse input
INOP tone. device. Contact your service personnel.
Check MSL Voltage Monitor/ There is a problem with the voltage of the Measurement Link
INOP tone Multi- (MSL). Contact your service personnel.
Measuremt
Module

66
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

Check Network Conf Monitor The monitor is receiving network topology information from
INOP tone more than one source, e.g. the Database Server and an
Application Server. Contact your service personnel.
Check Nurse Relay Monitor There is a problem with the connection to the nurse relay.
INOP tone Contact your service personnel.
!!Check Pairing Monitor There is a problem with device pairing. Check that the monitor
INOP tone and telemetry device are correctly paired.
Check Screen Res Monitor The Screen you have selected uses a resolution which is not
INOP tone supported by the display. The monitor will show a generic
Screen instead until you select a different Screen.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted
from the Profile(s) to avoid this in future.
Check Settings Monitor If this INOP appears, check the monitor and patient settings
INOP tone before you resume monitoring. If the settings are unexpected,
there may be a problem with the monitor software. Contact
your service personnel.
Check SpeedPoint Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of the SpeedPoint input
INOP tone. device. Contact your service personnel.
Check Touch Input Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of the touch input
INOP tone device. Contact your service personnel.
Check Waves Monitor The options purchased with this monitor may not support the
INOP tone number of waves required to show the selected Screen, so some
waves or high resolution trends are missing from the Screen.
Select a different Screen with fewer waves.
Contact your service personnel if you want the Screen deleted
from the Profile(s) to avoid this in future.
CHK ECG Sync Cable Monitor The ECG Sync is detecting an invalid signal, or the ECG Sync
INOP tone cable is disconnected.
Chk IndepDsp Cable Monitor The monitor cannot communicate with the D80 Intelligent
Display. Check the MSL coupling cable. The end with the grey
connector must be connected to the Intelligent Display.
CHK MSL Connection Monitor Check that the MSL connector or cable are properly
INOP tone connected. Check the cable and connector for damage.
Chk SpO2T Settings Telemetry Synchronization of SpO2T settings between the monitor and
INOP tone Information Center has failed. Check that the SpO2T settings
in use are appropriate.
C LEAD OFF ECG The C electrode (AAMI: V electrode) has become detached
HR Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 from the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the
seconds. INOP tone. electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
CO2 AUTO ZERO CO2 The automatic zero calibration is in progress. This typically
Numeric is replaced by a -?- takes 10 seconds. During this time the CO2 values may not be
if the Autozero lasts >15 sec, INOP updated, or they may be replaced by -?-. Wait until the zero
tone sounds. calibration is complete to resume monitoring.
CO2 CAL MODE CO2 Currently no calibration is running. Accuracy can be checked
CO2 numeric displays current CO2 by placing the transducer on the two cells of the calstick and
value for accuracy check starting calibration. To start monitoring, leave Cal. Mode.
CO2 CAL RUNNING CO2 Wait until calibration is finished.
Numeric is replaced by a -?-

67
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

CO2 CHANGE SCALE CO2 The CO2 wave is clipped. Select a more appropriate wave scale
to display the whole wave.
CO2 CHK ADAPTER CO2 Check that the sensor is connected to the airway adapter, clean
Numeric is replaced by a -?- the airway adapter, if necessary. Perform a zero calibration. If
INOP tone. the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
CO2 CHECK CAL CO2 The CO2 value is outside the measurement range. Perform an
Numeric is replaced by a -?- accuracy check for both calstick cells and, if necessary,
INOP tone. recalibrate the transducer.
CO2 DEACTIVATED CO2 The CO2 measurement label in the measurement device has
INOP tone. been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears
from the display. To switch the measurement on again,
reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection
window.
C.O. DEACTIVATED C.O. The Cardiac Output measurement label in the measurement
INOP tone. device has been deactivated by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window. The measurement
automatically disappears from the display. To switch the
measurement on again, reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
C.O. EQUIP MALF C.O. There is a problem with the C.O. hardware. Contact your
Numeric is replaced by a -?- service personnel.
INOP tone.
CO2 EQUIP MALF CO2 The Measurement Extension is faulty. Unplug and replug the
Numeric is replaced by -?- Multi-Measurement Module with Extension. If you are using
INOP tone. the mainstream method, unplug and replug the transducer or
try another transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your
service personnel.
CO2 FAILED CAL CO2 Make sure that the Cal cell was changed between CAL1 and
Numeric is replaced by -?- CAL2. Repeat the calibration. If the INOP reappears, try
INOP tone. another transducer. If the INOP persists, contact your service
personnel.
CO2 NO SENSOR CO2 There is no CO2 sensor connected. If you silence this INOP
Numeric is replaced by -?- the CO2 measurement will be switched off.
INOP tone.
CO2 NO TRANSDUC CO2 There is no CO2 transducer connected. If you replace the
Numeric is replaced by -?- transducer, the new transducer must be calibrated. If you
INOP tone. silence this INOP the CO2 measurement will be switched off.
CO2 NO TUBING CO2 Either the sample line is disconnected, or an incorrect line is
Numeric is replaced by -?- attached. Check the connection. If necessary, connect another
INOP tone. sample line (Use only the approved accessories).
If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
(!!/!!!)CO2 OCCLUSION CO2 The sample line or exhaust tube is blocked. Check the tubing,
Numeric is replaced by a -?- then disconnect and reconnect the sample line. If the INOP
INOP tone. persists, connect a new sample line.
CO2 OVERRANGE CO2 The CO2 value is higher than the measurement range. If you
Numeric is replaced by -?- suspect a false high value, contact your service personnel.
INOP tone.
CO2 PUMP OFF CO2 The pump has been switched off for fifteen minutes. To switch
Numeric is replaced by a -?-. it on again, select Pump On in the Setup CO2 menu.

68
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

CO2 PURGING CO2 The Filterline is being purged to remove an occlusion in the
Numeric is replaced by a -?- line or airway adapter. If the occlusion is removed, the INOP
INOP tone. will disappear. If not, the INOP CO2 OCCLUSION is
displayed.
CO2 SENS. WARMUP CO2 Wait until the sensor reaches operating temperature and the
Numeric is displayed with a -?- INOP disappears.
Microstream CO2: INOP tone.
Mainstream CO2: no INOP tone
C.O. UNPLUGGED C.O. Plug in the C.O. module. Silencing this INOP switches off the
numeric is replaced by -?- measurement.
INOP tone.
CO2 UPDATE FW CO2 The software in the Measurement Extension does not match
Numeric is replaced by a -?- the software in the MMS. Contact your service personnel.
INOP tone.
CO2 WAIT CAL2 CO2 Calibration on the first calstick cell is complete. Place the
Numeric is replaced by a -?- transducer on the other calstick cell and start the CAL2
calibration cycle.
CO2 ZERO FAILED CO2 An error occurred during the last zero calibration. Check the
Numeric is replaced by a -?- airway adapter and clean, if necessary. Perform another zero
INOP tone. calibration. If the INOP persists, contact your service
personnel.
CO2 ZERO REQU’D CO2 Perform zero calibration for the CO2 sensor. If the INOP
Numeric is replaced by a -?- persists, contact your service personnel.
INOP tone
CO2 ZERO RUNNING CO2 Wait until zero calibration is finished.
CPP CHK SOURCES CPP Not all measurements or values required to perform the
Numeric is replaced by a -?- calculation are available. Check the measurement sources.
CPP CHK UNITS CPP The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this
Numeric is replaced by a -?- calculation. Check the unit settings.
!!/!!!CUFF NOT DEFLAT NBP Remove the cuff from the patient. Make sure that the tubing is
Numeric is displayed with a -?- not kinked or twisted and that the correct patient category is
Severe yellow/red INOP tone. selected. Try repeating the measurement.
You can silence the INOP, but the INOP message remains
During this INOP, alarms cannot be visible until the next NBP measurement is started or the
paused or switched off. Stop All SmartKey is selected.
[Adult or pediatric patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded
15mmHg (2kPa) for more than 3 minutes.
Neonatal patients: The NBP cuff pressure has exceeded 5mmHg
(0.7kPa) for more than 90 seconds.]
!!/!!!CUFF OVERPRESS NBP The NBP cuff pressure exceeds the overpressure safety limits.
Numeric displayed with -?- ; Remove the cuff from the patient. Make sure that the tubing is
Severe yellow/red INOP tone. not kinked or twisted and that the correct patient category is
selected. Try restarting the measurement.
During this INOP, alarms cannot be You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains
paused or switched off. visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop
All SmartKey is selected.
CVP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
DEVICE CHECK SETUP IntelliBridge Device identification completed, but communication could
INOP tone. not be established due to timeout.
IntelliBridge INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending
on the device category.

69
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

DEVICE CHECK CONF. IntelliBridge Device identification completed, but communication could
INOP tone. not be established due to error.
IntelliBridge INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending
on the device category.
DEVICE DEMO DATA IntelliBridge The device connected to the IntelliBridge module reports demo
INOP tone data but the monitor is not in DEMO mode.
DEVICE REAL DATA IntelliBridge The monitor is in DEMO mode but the device connected to
INOP tone the IntelliBridge module reports data that are not flagged as
demo data.
<Device> UNPLUGGED IntelliBridge The IntelliBridge module has been unplugged from the rack, or
INOP tone. the whole rack has been disconnected. Silencing this INOP
switches off the measurement.
IntelliBridge INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending
on the device category.
DEVICE UNSUPPORTED IntelliBridge Device identification completed, but no appropriate device
INOP tone. driver installed.
IntelliBridge INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending
on the device category.
<EC10/EC40> EQUIP MALF IntelliBridge Malfunction in the IntelliBridge module. If this message
INOP tone. appears repeatedly, the module must be replaced. Contact your
service personnel.
ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF ECG All ECG alarms have been switched off, or the HR alarm
!!ECG/AR ALARM OFF source is not ECG. To resume ECG alarm generation, switch
ECG alarms on or select ECG as the alarm source.
ECG EQUIP MALF ECG Contact your service personnel.
Numeric is displayed with a -?- The ECG hardware is faulty.
INOP tone.
ECG EQUIP MALF T Monitor Contact your service personnel.
Numeric is displayed with a -?- The ECG in the Telemetry device is faulty.
INOP tone.
(!!/!!!)<ECG LEAD> LEAD ECG Not all the required leads for ECG monitoring are connected.
OFF Check the ECG connections and make sure that the electrode
Numeric is displayed with a -?- indicated by <ECG lead> [RA, LA, LL, RL, V or C] electrodes
INOP tone. is attached. In EASI mode, all 5 electrodes must be connected.
ECG EL. NOISY <ECG LEAD> ECG The ECG signal from the named ECG electrodes [RA, LA, LL,
RL, V (or C)] is noisy. Check the ECG connections and make
sure that the electrode indicated is attached.
(!!/!!!)ECG LEADS OFF ECG Check that all of the required ECG leads are attached, and that
none of the electrodes have been displaced.

ECG NOISY SIGNAL ECG The ECG signal is too noisy. Check that the electrodes are
INOP tone. properly placed and have not dried out. Remove any possible
sources of signal noise (such as power cords) from the area
around the cable and the patient.
The ECG signal may be saturated or overloaded.
EcgOut EQUIP MALF ECG Check that the ECG out cable is securely connected. Contact
INOP tone your service personnel.

EEG EQUIP MALF EEG The EEG hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
INOP tone

70
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

EEG IMPEDANCE HIGH or EEG The signal electrode in one or both channels exceeds the user-
EEG1 and/or EEG2 IMPED. HIGH selected impedance limit, or the impedance of a single electrode
exceeds the limit. Check the impedance. If the impedance is
too high, reconnect the electrodes according to the EEG
monitoring setup guidelines. If the INOP persists, contact your
service personnel.
EEG<X> LEAD OFF <n> EEG Reconnect specified electrode.
[X = channel, n = electrode]
EEG<X> LEAD OFF EEG One or more electrodes are not connected. Check in the EEG
[X = channel] Impedance/Montage window on the monitor which
at Information Center electrode(s) are affected and reconnect the electrodes.
EEG<X> LEADS OFF EEG Two or more electrodes are not connected. Check in the EEG
[X = channel] Impedance/Montage window which electrodes are
affected and reconnect the electrodes.
EEG LINE NOISE EEG Excessive line noise has been detected in either channel EEG1
EEG 1 or 2 LINE NOISE or EEG2, or in both EEG channels.
Keep all cables together and away from metallic bodies, other
cables & radiated fields.
EEG MUSCLE NOISE EEG Too much power above 30 Hz has been detected in channel
EEG 1 or 2 MUSCLE NOISE EEG1 or EEG2, or both.
Check the Electrode-to-Skin Impedance and reposition the
electrode away from possible muscle activity, if necessary.
EEG NO TRANSDUCER EEG The trunk cable is disconnected from the EEG plug-in module.
INOP tone Reconnect the trunk cable. Silencing this INOP switches the
measurement off.
EEG UNPLUGGED EEG Plug in module. Silencing this INOP switches off the
INOP tone measurement.

EEG OVERRANGE, or EEG Input signal is too high in one or both channels. This is usually
EEG<X> OVERRANGE caused by interfering signals such as line noise or electro-
surgery. X denotes the EEG channel.
FAP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
FMS UNPLUGGED FMS Make sure that the Flexible Module Rack is connected to the
INOP tone. monitor. All FMS measurements are off while the FMS is
unplugged.
FMS UNSUPPORTED FMS The Flexible Module Rack is not supported by your monitor.
INOP tone. Contact your service personnel.
IC1/IC2 INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
ICP INOPs PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Indep.Dsp Malfunc. Display A problem has occurred with the second main display. Contact
your service personnel.
Indep.Dsp NotSupp. Display The monitor does not support a second main display. The
monitor software is incompatible. Contact your service
personnel.
!!INSERT BATTERY Battery X2/MP2 only: There is no battery in the battery compartment.
Severe yellow INOP tone. You cannot operate the monitor on AC mains while the battery
compartment is open (not sealed with a battery). Load a
During this INOP, alarms cannot be battery immediately.
paused or switched off.
Intell.Dsp Malf. Display There is a problem with the Intelligent Display. Check the
INOP tone MSL coupling cable then contact your service personnel.

71
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

Intell.Dsp Missing Display The monitor has lost contact with the connected Intelligent
Display. Contact your service personnel.
Intell.Dsp Unsupp. Display The monitor does not support the connected Intelligent
Display. The monitor software is incompatible.
Internal.Comm.Malf Monitor There is a problem with I2C Bus communication in the
INOP tone monitor. Contact your service personnel.

INVALID LEADSET Telemetry

LA LEAD OFF ECG The LA electrode has become detached from the patient or the
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select New
seconds; INOP tone. Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
LAP INOPs PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
LEADSET UNPLUGGED Telemetry The leadset has been unplugged from the telemetry device.
LL LEAD OFF ECG The LL electrode has become detached from the patient or the
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select New
seconds; INOP tone. Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
MCC Reversed Monitor The MSL coupling cable is reversed. Connect the end with the
INOP tone grey connector to the Intelligent Display.
MCC Unsupported Monitor An MSL coupling cable has been connected to a device which
INOP tone does not support MSL coupling.
Meas. DEACTIVATED An X2 or MP5 has been connected to a host monitor
(companion mode) and all derived measurements have been
deactivated and/or measurements with a label conflict. The
measurements can only be reactivated by disconnecting the
measurement device from the host monitor.
MEASSRV UNSUPPORTD MMS The Multi-Measurement module is not supported by the
INOP tone monitor. Contact your service personnel.
MMS Ext. EQUIP MALF MMS Loss of communication between the Multi-Measurement
INOP tone Extension Module and the MMS extension. Contact your service
personnel.
MMS Ext. UNPLUGGED MMS The MMS extension has been disconnected from the Multi-
INOP tone Extension Measurement Module.
MMS Ext. Unpowered MMS The MMS extension cannot operate while the Multi-
INOP tone Extension Measurement Module is running on battery power.
MMSExt.Unsupported MMS The MMS extensions not supported by your monitor. Contact
INOP tone Extension your service personnel.
MMS UNPLUGGED MMS Make sure that the Multi-Measurement Module is connected
INOP tone. to the monitor. All MMS measurements are off while the MMS
is unplugged.
MMS UNSUPPORTED MMS The Multi-measurement Module is not supported by your
INOP tone. monitor. Contact your service personnel.
!!/!!!MORE BED ALARMS Monitor The monitor is associated with a telemetry device and is
At Information Center sending data to the Information Center via the telemetry
device. There are currently more alarms at the bedside than can
be transmitted to the Information Center.

72
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

MSL Power High Monitor The power consumption of the devices connected to the
Measurement Link (MSL) cable is too high. If this situation
continues, the MSL will be switched off. Contact your service
personnel.
MSL Power Off Monitor The power consumption of the devices connected to the
INOP tone. Measurement Link (MSL) cable was too high for too long and
the MSL has been switched off. Contact your service personnel.
MSL Power Overload Monitor The power consumption of the devices connected to the
INOP tone. Measurement Link (MSL) cable is much too high or there has
been a short circuit. The MSL has been switched off. Contact
your service personnel.
NBP Deactivated NBP The NBP measurement label in the measurement device has
INOP tone. been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears
from the display. To switch the measurement on again,
reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection
window.
NBP EQUIP MALF NBP Remove the cuff from the patient. The NBP hardware is faulty.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Contact your service personnel.
INOP tone. You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains
visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop
All SmartKey is selected.
NBP INTERRUPTED NBP Check the tubing and cuff for leakages or kinks. Check that
Numeric is replaced by -?- you are using the correct cuff size and placement, and that the
INOP tone. correct patient category is selected. Try restarting the
measurement.
If the INOP occurs repeatedly, contact your service personnel.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains
visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop
All SmartKey is selected.
This INOP arises when the measurement needed longer than
the maximum time for inflation, deflation or the total
measurement.
NBP MEASURE FAILED NBP Check that you are using the correct cuff size and placement,
Numeric may be displayed with a -?- and that the correct patient category is selected. Try restarting
INOP tone. the measurement.
You can silence this INOP, but the INOP message remains
visible until the next measurement is started or the Stop
All SmartKey is selected.
Check the condition and suitability of the patient for NBP
monitoring. Use another cuff to continue measuring.
No Central Monit. Monitor There is a problem with the communication to the network.
INOP tone Central monitoring is currently not possible (no patient alarms
or information). Check the connection. Contact your service
personnel.
!!/!!! NO DEVICE DATA IntelliBridge Communication with connected device has been lost.
NO DEVICE DATA
NO ECG AT CENTRAL Monitor The ECG measured with the monitor ECG is not being sent to
the Information Center via the telemetry device.
NO ECG SOURCE Telemetry A telemetry device is paired with the monitor but the
Information Center is not detecting a valid ECG signal from
either of them.

73
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

NO PPV FROM MeasSrv MMS or The measurement device does not supply a beat-to-beat arterial
at Information Center FMS pressure value. Contact your service personnel.
NO PPV FROM <Device> MMS or The measurement device does not supply a beat-to-beat arterial
FMS pressure value. Contact your service personnel.
OUT OF AREA Telemetry The telemetry device has left the access point coverage area.
P/P1/P2/P3/P4 INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
PAP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
PPV BAD <Pressure Label> PPV The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a
SIGNAL pulsatile signal.
PPV BAD SIGNAL PPV The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is not providing a
at Information Center pulsatile signal.
PPV CHK SOURCES PPV The arterial pressure source selected for PPV is unplugged or
switched off. When this INOP has displayed for 1 minute PPV
will be switched off.
<Pressure label> ARTIFACT PRESS A non-physiological event is detected (for example, a flush or
Numeric questionable blood sample). A resulting high limit alarm will be suppressed.
<Pressure label> PRESS A Pressure measurement label in the measurement device or
DEACTIVATED extension has been deactivated, either by connecting a Temp
INOP tone transducer in the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating
the label in the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a
Pressure transducer or reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
<Pressure label> EQUIP PRESS Contact your service personnel.
MALF The pressure hardware is faulty.
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
<Pressure label> NO PRESS Make sure that the pressure transducer is connected to the
TRANSDUCER measurement device or module.
Numeric is replaced by -?- If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
INOP tone.
<Pressure label> NOISY PRESS This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the
SIGNAL pulse source. It occurs when the pulse detector finds a pulse
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?- rate above 350bpm. This is usually caused by movement
INOP tone. artifact or electrical interference.
<Pressure label> NON- PRESS This INOP can only arise when a pressure is selected as the
PULSATILE pulse source. It occurs when the pulse rate being measured is
Pulse numeric is replaced by -?- less than 25 beats per minute or the amplitude is less than three
INOP tone. mmHg.
Check the catheter and connections to the patient.
<Pressure label> PRESS Make sure that the measurement has been properly prepared
OVERRANGE and zeroed, and that the transducer is level with the heart. If
Numeric is replaced by -?- this INOP persists, try another transducer.
INOP tone. Possible causes are a measured pressure outside the allowed
pressure range, or a broken wire to the transducer.
<Pressure label> REDUCE PRESS Increase the scale for the pressure wave.
SIZE

74
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

<Pressure label> PRESS A Pressure measurement label has been deactivated, either by
UNPLUGGED unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
INOP tone. Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module
or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
<Pressure label> PRESS Perform a zero and check the calibration of the transducer.
ZERO+CHECK CAL
Numeric is replaced by -?-
<pTemp label> CHECK PROBE Predictive Check that the probe holder is correctly installed and that a
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp compatible probe is in use. If the INOP does not clear, remove
INOP tone. the probe from the holder then replace it. If the INOP still does
not clear, disconnect and reconnect the probe.
<pTemp label> DEACTIVATED Predictive The Predictive temperature has been deactivated.
INOP tone. Temp
<pTemp label> EQUIP MALF Predictive The Predictive Temperature hardware is defective. Contact
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp your service personnel.
INOP tone.
<pTemp label> INCOMPAT. Predictive The Predictive Temperature version is not supported by the
Temp monitor.
<pTemp label> MEAS FAILED Predictive The ambient temperature is outside the specified range (10 to
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp 40°C /50 to 104°F). Bring the temperature into range to
INOP tone. continue monitoring. If the INOP does not clear, disconnect
and reconnect the probe.
<pTemp label> NO PROBE Predictive Connect a probe to the Predictive temperature unit.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp
INOP tone.
<pTemp label> OVERRANGE Predictive The temperature at the measurement site is out of range. Check
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp that the probe is correctly located. If the INOP does not clear,
INOP tone. disconnect and reconnect the probe.
<pTemp label> PROBE MALF Predictive The connected probe may be defective. Disconnect and
Numeric is replaced by -?- Temp reconnect the probe. If the INOP does not clear, try another
INOP tone. probe.
pTaxil INOPS Predictive See <pTemp label> INOPS
Temp
pToral INOPS Predictive See <pTemp label> INOPS
Temp
pTrect INOPS Predictive See <pTemp label> INOPS
Temp
(!!)PW:Action Required Protocol The protocol currently running requires a user response. Check
Watch which pop-up window is displayed and provide the appropriate
response.
PW:Check Settings Protocol Contact your service personnel. Settings could not be loaded or
Watch interpreted correctly
PW in conflict Protocol There is a patient information mismatch which has not yet
Watch been resolved (>15 minutes).

75
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

RA LEAD OFF ECG The RA electrode has become detached from the patient or the
Numeric is replaced by -?- lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select New
INOP tone. Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
RAP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Rem.Alarmdev.Malf Monitor There is a problem with the connection to the remote alert
INOP tone device. Contact your service personnel to check the remote
alert device and its connections.
Rem. Display Malf. Remote There is a problem with an input device at the remote display.
display Perform a visual and functional check of all input devices.
Contact your service personnel.
!!/!!! REPLACE BATTERY T Telemetry The battery in the telemetry device is almost empty and must
Severe yellow/red INOP tone. be replaced.

During this INOP, alarms cannot be

paused or switched off.
RESP EQUIP MALF RESP Contact your service personnel. The RESP hardware is faulty.
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
RESP ERRATIC RESP The monitor has detected too many artifacts in the measured
Numeric is replaced by -?- Resp signal. Check that the RA and LL electrodes are correctly
attached and have not dried out.
RESP LEADS OFF RESP Not all the required leads for Resp monitoring are attached.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Make sure that the RA and LL leads are attached.
INOP tone.
RL LEAD OFF ECG The RL electrode has become detached from the patient or the
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 lead set has been changed. Reattach the electrode or select New
seconds; INOP tone. Lead Setup in the Setup ECG menu to confirm the
new lead set.
Settings Malfunc. Monitor The monitor cannot use the predefined settings for
INOP tone. monitoring. Contact your service personnel.
<SO2 Label> CAL FAILED SO2 The calibration failed. Check the catheter-to-Optical-Module
Numeric is replaced by -?- connection. Manually restart the calibration. Try another
INOP tone. catheter and Optical Module. If the catheter is already inserted,
perform an in-vivo calibration.
<SO2 Label> CAL MODE SO2 Pre-insertion calibration is complete, but the catheter tip is still
Numeric is replaced by -?- inside the optical reference. The catheter is now ready for
INOP tone. insertion.

<SO2 Label>CAL REQUIRED SO2 There is no valid calibration data in the Optical Module.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Perform either a pre-insertion or an in-vivo calibration.
INOP tone.
<SO2 Label> CANNOT MEAS SO2 The signal is out of the normal range, and no oxygen saturation
Numeric is replaced by -?- can be derived. Perform an in-vivo calibration. If the INOP
INOP tone. persists, try another Optical Module and catheter.

<SO2 Label>CONFIG ERROR SO2 The Optical Module has been configured to SaO2 Mode. Use
Numeric is replaced by -?- Change to Venous in the setup menu to reconfigure to venous
INOP tone. saturation mode.

<SO2 Label> CONN OPTMOD SO2 The Optical Module was disconnected during data storage.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Reconnect the Optical Module for at least 20 seconds.
INOP tone.

76
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

<SO2 Label> EQUIP MALF SO2 The SO2/SvO2 Module or Optical Module is faulty. Unplug
and replug the Optical Module and SO2/SvO2 module.
Numeric displays -?-.
Exchange the modules. If the INOP persists, contact your
INOP tone
service personnel.
SO2 INCOMPATIBLE SO2 The SO2 Module or Optical Module is not supported. Contact
your service personnel.
INOP tone
<SO2 Label> IN-VIVO CAL SO2 The in-vivo calibration is not yet complete. Lab values must be
stored to the Optical Module to complete the calibration.
Either continue with the next steps of the current calibration or
recall the previous calibration.
<SO2 Label>LIGHT INTENS SO2 The intensity changed considerably since the last light intensity
Numeric is replaced by -?- calibration. This may indicate that the catheter tip is positioned
INOP tone. against a blood vessel wall or that there is low blood flow.
Reposition the catheter (and perform a Light Intensity
Calibration).
<SO2 Label> LOW LIGHT SO2 The optical signal levels are too low. Check that the catheter is
Numeric is replaced by -?- either in the optical reference or inserted into the patient.
INOP tone. Check the catheter-to-Optical Module connection. If INOP
persists, try another catheter and Optical Module.
<SO2 Label> NO OPTMOD SO2 Connect the Optical Module. If the INOP persists, try another
Optical Module. Silencing this INOP switches the
Numeric is replaced by -?- measurement off.
INOP tone.
<SO2 Label> OPTMOD MALF SO2 The Optical Module memory is faulty, and calibration data
cannot be stored for transport or during power failure. If this
capability is needed, use another Optical Module.
<SO2 Label> PRE-INS CAL SO2 The pre-insertion calibration is running. This typically takes
Numeric displays -?- one minute. During this time alarms are switched off. Wait
INOP tone until the calibration is complete.

<SO2 Label> UNPLUGGED SO2 Measurement switched on and SO2/SvO2 module unplugged
from the rack.
Numeric displays -?-.
INOP tone

SO2 UPGRADE SO2 The SO2 module is currently in upgrade mode.

INOP tone Monitoring is not possible in this mode.
<SO2 Label> WARMUP SO2 The Optical Module has not yet reached the operating
Numeric is displayed with ? temperature. Wait a few minutes until warm-up is finished.

SOME ECG ALRMS OFF Arrhythmia This message appears (if configured to do so) when the on/off
settings of the yellow arrhythmia alarms differ from the current
Profile.
Speaker Malfunct. Monitor Contact your service personnel to check the speaker and the
INOP tone connection to the speaker.

SPIRO MALFUNCTION Spirometry Module failure detected. Contact your service personnel.
SPIRO INCOMPATIBLE Spirometry Module revision not compatible with the host monitor
software revision. Contact your service personnel.
SPIRO UPGRADE Spirometry The module is running a firmware upgrade. Wait until upgrade
is completed before resuming monitoring.
SPIRO CANNOT MEAS Spirometry Measurement is at its limit, e.g. ambient pressure out of range.

77
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

SPIRO PURGE FAILED Spirometry The purge operation could not be completed successfully.
Check for kinked sensor tubings, hard occlusions and make
sure that the pump is running and all valves are switching.
SPIRO UNKN. SENSOR Spirometry An unknown sensor ID code was detected. Use only the sensors
listed in the Accessories chapter.
SPIRO ALARMS SUPPR Spirometry Alarming is suppressed for the spirometry module.
SPIRO PURGING Spirometry A purge operation is in progress - no data update on the screen.
Wait until purge is complete.
SPIRO NO SENSOR Spirometry No sensor detected. Make sure the correct sensor is attached to
the breathing circuit.
SPIRO NO BREATH Spirometry No breath was detected for more than 25 seconds. Breath
derived numerics are not available.
SPIRO GAS COMPENS? Spirometry Gas compensation is set to “gas analyzer” but not all gases
necessary for compensation are measured by a gas monitor.
Some of the fall-back values provided by the user are used.
Measurement accuracy might be reduced.
SPIRO PATIENT CAT. Spirometry Mismatch of patient size configured in the host monitor and
sensor type plugged into the module. Check the instructions
on selecting the correct sensor in the Spirometry chapter.
ΔSpO2 CHK SOURCES SpO2 Not all measurements or values required to perform the
Numeric is replaced by -?- Difference calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
ΔSpO2 CHK UNITS SpO2 The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this
Numeric is replaced by -?- Difference calculation. Check the unit settings.
<SpO2 label> DEACTIVATED SpO2 The SpO2 measurement label in the measurement device has
INOP tone been deactivated by deactivating the label in the Measurement
Selection window. The measurement automatically disappears
from the display. To switch the measurement on again,
reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement Selection
window.
<SpO2 label> EQUIP MALF SpO2 The MMS or module is faulty. Unplug and replug the MMS or
Numeric is replaced by -?- module. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
INOP tone.
<SpO2 label> ERRATIC SpO2 Check the sensor placement. Try another adapter cable and
Numeric is replaced by -?- sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service personnel.
INOP tone.
<SpO2 label> EXTD. UPDATE SpO2 The update period of displayed values is extended due to an
Label is displayed with a -?- NBP measurement on the same limb or an excessively noisy
(questionable numeric) signal.
<SpO2 label> INTERFERNCE SpO2 There is too much interference, caused by a high level of
Numeric is replaced by -?- ambient light and/or electrical interference. Cover the sensor to
INOP tone. minimize ambient light. If the INOP persists, make sure that
the sensor cable is not damaged or positioned too close to
power cables.
<SpO2 label> LOW PERF SpO2 Accuracy may be compromised due to very low perfusion.
Label is displayed with a -?- Stimulate circulation at sensor site. If INOP persists, change
(questionable numeric) the measurement site.
<SpO2 label> NOISY SIGN. SpO2 Excessive patient movement or electrical interference is causing
Numeric is replaced by -?- irregular pulse patterns. Try to reduce patient movement or to
INOP tone. relieve the cable strain on the sensor.

78
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

<SpO2 label> NON-PULSAT. SpO2 Check the perfusion at measurement site. If necessary,
Numeric is replaced by -?- stimulate circulation or change measurement site. If the INOP
INOP tone. is due to NBP measurement on the same limb, wait until the
NBP measurement is finished.
<SpO2 label> NO SENSOR SpO2 Make sure the SpO2 sensor is connected. If the INOP persists,
Numeric is replaced by -?- try another adapter cable and sensor. If you silence this INOP,
INOP tone. the measurement will be switched off.
<SpO2 LABEL> POOR SIGNAL SpO2 The signal condition of the SpO2 measurement is poor and
Label is displayed with a -?- measurement accuracy may be compromised.
(questionable numeric)
<SpO2 LABEL> PULSE? SpO2 The detectable pulsations of the SpO2 signal are outside the
Numeric is replaced by -?- specified pulse rate range.
INOP tone
<SpO2 LABEL> SEARCHING SpO2 SpO2 is analyzing the patient signal to derive Pulse, SpO2 and
Numeric unavailable Perf values. Please wait until the search analysis is complete.

<SpO2 label> SENSOR MALF SpO2 The SpO2 sensor or adapter cable is faulty. Try another adapter
Numeric is replaced by -?- cable and sensor. If the INOP persists, contact your service
INOP tone. personnel.
<SpO2 LABEL> SENSOR OFF SpO2 The SpO2 sensor is not properly applied to the patient. Apply
Numeric is replaced by -?- the sensor following the instructions supplied by the
INOP tone manufacturer.

<SpO2 LABEL> UNKN.SENSOR SpO2 The connected sensor or adapter cable is not supported by the
Numeric is replaced by a -?- SpO2 measurement. Use only specified sensors and cables.

<SpO2 LABEL> UNPLUGGED SpO2 An SpO2 measurement label has been deactivated, either by
Numeric is replaced by -?- unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
INOP tone Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module
or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
<SpO2 LABEL> UPGRADE SpO2 The SpO2 measurement is currently in UPGRADE mode.
Label is displayed with a -?-, numeric is Monitoring is not possible in this mode.
unavailable
Sp - vO2 CHK SOURCES Sp - vO2 Not all measurements or values required to perform the
Numeric is replaced by -?- calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
Sp - vO2 CHK UNITS Sp - vO2 The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this
Numeric is replaced by -?- calculation. Check the unit settings.
SRR INTERFERENCE Monitor The short range radio connection has interference from
INOP tone another device. Try using another channel.

SRR INVALID CHAN Monitor The channel configuration of the Short Range Radio is invalid.
INOP tone Check channel and channel mask configuration.

SRR MALFUNCTION Malfunction in the short range radio device. If the INOP
persists contact your service personnel.
SVR/SVRI CHK SOURCES SVR/SVRI Not all measurements or values required to perform the
Numeric is replaced by -?- calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
SVR/SVRI CHK UNITS SVR/SVRI The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this
Numeric is replaced by -?- calculation. Check the unit settings.

79
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

SVR/SVRI SET CVP USED SVR/SVRI A CVP value is required for this calculation, but is not
Numeric is replaced by -?- currently being measured. The monitor is using the CVP value
preset in the Setup SVR menu.
T/T1/T2/T3/T4 INOPs TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
TAAP DISABLED Monitor The currently selected telemetry configuration on the monitor
INOP tone does not allow connection of telemetry devices to the monitor.

Tamb INOPs TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)

Tart INOPs TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
Tblood NO TRANSDUC C.O. No transducer attached to the module or catheter
Numeric is replaced by -?- disconnected.
INOP tone
Tblood OVERRANGE C.O. Tblood out of range 17°C - 43°C.
Numeric is replaced by -?-
Tcereb INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
Tcore INOPs TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas A calibration failed. Check the calibration unit, gas pressure,
CAL FAILED and tubing connections, then restart the calibration. If the
Numeric is replaced by -?- calibration has failed more than once, remembrane the
INOP tone. transducer and restart the calibration. If this INOP persists,
contact your service personnel.
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas Calibration is required before applying the transducer to the
CAL REQUIRD patient.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Insert a membraned transducer into the calibration chamber on
INOP tone. the module, connect the calibration unit to the calibration
chamber, open the gas valve and start the calibration. If this
INOP occurs during a calibration, there may be a module or
transducer malfunction: contact your service personnel.
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas Wait until the tcpO2/tcpCO2 calibration is finished.
CAL RUNNING
Numeric displays first -?- , then
numeric is displayed with a ?
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas Site Timer due to time out in 15 minutes or less.
CHECK TIME
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas Site Timer has timed out. Change the application site to avoid
CHANGE SITE skin burns. To reset the Site Timer, either calibrate and change
If Heat Switch Off is configured to Yes, the measurement site, or change the measurement site and reset
numeric is replaced by -?- the Site Timer manually by selecting the appropriate site time
INOP tone. from the Setup TCGas menu.
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas There is a malfunction in the transducer or module. Connect
EQUIP MALF another transducer. If this INOP persists, contact your service
Numeric is replaced by -?- personnel.
INOP tone.
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas No transducer is connected to the tcpO2/tcpCO2 module.
NO TRANSDUC Silencing the alarm switches off the measurement.
Numeric is replaced by -?-
INOP tone.
tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas The transducer has not yet reached the selected temperature
STABILIZING and/or skin hyperemization is not yet finished. This INOP will
Numeric is displayed with a ? disappear within three minutes.

80
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

tcpO2 (or tcpCO2 or tcGas) tcGas The measurement is switched on but the module is unplugged.
UNPLUGGED The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
Numeric is replaced by -?- Silencing this INOP switches off the measurement.
INOP tone.
TELE CONFIG UNSUPP Monitor Telemetry device not supported (companion mode)
INOP tone
!!/!!!TELE DISCONNECT Telemetry Telemetry transceiver was disconnected or short range radio
INOP tone link was lost.
For cable connections; check Telemetry interface, cable
connection and setup.
For short range radio connections: if the telemetry transceiver
has not moved out-of-range, check for interference sources
close to the monitor (bluetooth devices, DECT phones,
cellular phones, microwaves, etc.) If this INOP persists, ask
your service personnel to survey the interference sources.
TELE EQUIP MALF Monitor The telemetry device has a malfunction. Disconnect and
INOP tone reconnect the telemetry device. If the INOP reappears, replace
the telemetry device.
TELE INCOMPATIBLE Monitor SRR-enabled telemetry device is not supported by this central
software revision. Please check configuration.
!!/!!! TELE INOP Telemetry Check for further details at the Information Center or in the
Severe yellow/red INOP tone. Telemetry Data window on the monitor.

Tele Sync Unsupp. Telemetry The MMS in use does not support synchronization of ECG
INOP tone and SpO2 settings between the monitor and central station
after a telemetry device has been paired. Use an MMS with
revision E.0 or above.
TELE UNSUPPORTED Monitor This telemetry device is not supported for direct connection to
INOP tone the monitor.
<ΔTemp> CHK SOURCES TEMP Not all measurements or values required to perform the
Numeric is replaced by -?- Difference calculation are available. Check measurement sources.
<ΔTemp> CHK UNITS TEMP The monitor has detected a conflict in the units used for this
Numeric is replaced by -?- Difference calculation. Check the unit settings.
<Temp label> DEACTIVATED TEMP A Temp measurement label in the measurement device has
INOP tone been deactivated, either by connecting a Pressure transducer in
the shared Press/Temp socket, or by deactivating the label in
the Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either reconnect a Temp
transducer or reactivate the measurement label in the
Measurement Selection window.
<Temp label> EQUIP MALF TEMP Contact your service personnel.
Numeric is replaced by -?- The temperature hardware is faulty.
INOP tone.
<Temp label> NO TEMP Make sure the TEMP probe is connected to the MMS or
TRANSDUCER module.
Numeric is replaced by -?- If you silence this INOP, the measurement will be switched off.
INOP tone.

81
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

<Temp label> UNPLUGGED TEMP A Temp measurement label has been deactivated, either by
INOP tone unplugging a module, or by deactivating the label in the
Measurement Selection window.
The measurement automatically disappears from the display.
To switch the measurement on again, either replug the module
or reactivate the measurement label in the Measurement
Selection window.
<Temp label> OVERRANGE TEMP Try changing the application site of the transducer.
Numeric is replaced by -?- [The temperature is less than -1°C, or greater than 45°C.]
INOP tone.
Tesoph INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
TEXT UPLOAD FAILED IntelliBridge Incoming text from the IntelliBridge modules exceeds the
INOP tone maximum limit. Try unplugging one of the IntelliBridge
modules. If the INOP occurs repeatedly contact your service
personnel; a software upgrade may be necessary.
TimeExpired:<timer label> Monitor The time has expired for the timer indicated in the INOP text.
INOP tone Clearing the timer clears the INOP.
Tnaso INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
Trect INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
Tskin INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
Ttymp INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
Tven INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp).
Tvesic INOPS TEMP See <Temp label> INOPs (under Temp)
UAP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
Unsupported LAN Monitor There is a problem with the communication to the network
INOP tone and central monitoring is currently not possible. Check the
connection. If the INOP persists, switch off the monitor and
contact your service personnel.
User I/F Malfunct. Monitor Perform a visual and functional check of all the monitor input
INOP tone. devices. Contact your service personnel.
UVP INOPS PRESS See <Pressure label> INOPS (under Pressure).
V LEAD OFF ECG The V electrode (IEC: C electrode) has become detached from
Numeric is replaced by -?- for 10 the patient or the lead set has been changed. Reattach the
seconds; INOP tone. electrode or select New Lead Setup in the Setup ECG
menu to confirm the new lead set.
<VueLink option> CHK VueLink No cable or the wrong cable connected to the VueLink module,
CABLE or incorrect device selected. Silencing this INOP switches the
INOP tone. measurement off.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.
<VueLink option> CHK VueLink The wrong external device has been selected on the VueLink
CONF. module, or the external device has not been correctly setup, or
INOP tone. the wrong cable has been used to connect the device to the
VueLink module.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.

82
Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs) 5 Patient Alarms and INOPs

INOP Message, Indication Source What to do

<VueLink option> CHECK VueLink No information was received from the external device. The
SETUP device may be switched off or disconnected.
INOP tone. VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.
VueLnk EQUIP MALF VueLink Malfunction in the VueLink module. If this message appears
INOP tone. repeatedly, the module must be replaced. Contact your service
personnel.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.
VueLnk NO CONFIG VueLink The VueLink module has not been configured during
INOP tone. installation. The installation process should be completed by
either your biomedical engineering department or the Philips
service engineer.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.
VueLnk UNPLUGGED VueLink The VueLink module has been unplugged from the rack, or the
INOP tone. whole rack has been disconnected. The measurement
automatically disappears from the display. Silencing this INOP
switches off the measurement.
VueLink INOP abbreviations may differ slightly depending on
the device category.

83
5 Patient Alarms and INOPs Technical Alarm Messages (INOPs)

84
 6

6Managing Patients
Use the Patient Demographics window and its associated pop-up keys to admit, discharge, and transfer
(ADT) patients.
All patient demographic and ADT information is shared between the patient monitor and the
Information Center, for example, patients admitted to the monitor are automatically admitted to a
connected Information Center.
Note that when the MP5 is connected to a host monitor, its ability to admit or discharge a patient is
disabled, and the host monitor controls patient demographic and ADT information.

Admitting a Patient
The monitor displays physiological data and stores it in the trends as soon as a patient is connected.
This lets you monitor a patient who is not yet admitted. It is however important to admit patients
properly so that you can identify your patient on recordings, reports, and networked devices.
During admission you enter data that the monitor needs for safe and accurate operation. For example,
the patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some
measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.

NOTE It is strongly recommended that the same patient data fields be configured to be mandatory at the
monitor and the Information Center.

To admit a patient,
1 Select the patient name field or select the Admit/Dischrge SmartKey to open the
Patient Demographics window.

85
6 Managing Patients Admitting a Patient

Patient Demographics
Last Name
First Name
Middle Name
Lifetime Id
Encounter Id
Patient Cat. Adult
Paced No
Height
Weight
BSA (D)
DOB
Age
Gender
Notes (1):
Notes (2):

2 Clear any previous patient data by selecting the Dischrge Patient or End Case pop-up
key and then Confirm.
If you do not discharge the previous patient, you will not be able to distinguish data from the
previous and current patients, for example, in the trend database.
3 Select Admit Patient.
4 Enter the patient information: select each field and use the on-screen keyboard or choose from the
pop-up list of alternatives to input information.
– Last Name: Enter the patient’s last name (family name), for example Smith.
– First Name: Enter the patient’s first name, for example Joseph.
– Middle Name (if configured to appear): Enter the patient’s middle name.
– Lifetime Id, Encounter Id: Whether these fields appear and how they are labelled can
be configured for your hospital. One or both fields may be displayed and the labels may read:
MRN, Case Id, Visit Id, etc. Enter the appropriate data for the fields displayed.
– Patient Cat: Choose the patient category, either Adult, Pediatric, or Neonatal.
– Paced: Choose Yes or No (You must use “Yes” if your patient has a pacemaker).
– Height: Enter the patient’s height.
– Weight: Enter the patient’s weight.
– BSA: The monitor calculates the body surface area automatically.
– Date Of Birth: Enter the patient’s date of birth. Enter this in the form dd/mm/yyyy.
– Age: The monitor calculates the patient age automatically.
– Gender: Choose Male or Female.
– Notes: Enter any extra information about the patient or treatment.
5 Select Confirm. The patient status changes to admitted.

86
Quick Admitting a Patient 6 Managing Patients

Patient Category and Paced Status

The patient category setting determines the algorithm the monitor uses to process and calculate some
measurements, the safety limits that apply for some measurements, and the alarm limit ranges.
The paced setting determines whether the monitor shows pacemaker pulses or not. When Paced is
set to No, pace pulses are filtered and therefore do not show in the ECG wave.

WARNING Patient Category and Paced status will always contain a value, regardless of whether the
patient is fully admitted or not. If you do not specify settings for these fields, the monitor uses the
default settings from the current profile, which might not be correct for your patient.

Patient category Changing the patient category may change the arrhythmia and NBP alarm limits.
Always check alarm limits to make sure that they are appropriate for your patient.

Paced status For paced patients, you must set Paced to Yes. If it is incorrectly set to No, the
monitor could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm during asystole.

Admitting a Centrally-Monitored Patient

You can admit a patient at either the bedside or the Information Center. When you admit a patient,
the patient’s name appears on the bedside monitor and the Information Center.
If you do not fill in all patient information required by the Information Center, the Information
Center may reject the admission. Complete all the required fields and try again to admit the patient.

Quick Admitting a Patient

Use Quick Admit only if you do not have the time or information to fully admit a patient. Complete
the rest of the patient demographic details later.
1 Select the Quick Admit SmartKey.
2 Enter the required data (ID fields or Last Name depending on configuration) with the keyboard.
3 Select Enter.
4 In the confirmation window, select Confirm to discharge the previous patient (if confirmation is
configured).
5 Check that patient category and paced status are correct for the new patient.
If the monitor is connected to an Information Center and only the ID field is entered, the patient
name is set to - - - at the Information Center. Complete the rest of the demographic details as soon as
possible to fully identify the patient on the network, on the monitor and on printed reports. To
complete the details, select Admit Patient again and complete all required fields.

Editing Patient Information

To edit the patient information after a patient has been admitted, select the patient name field on the
Main Screen to open the Patient Demographics window, and make the required changes.

87
6 Managing Patients Discharging a Patient

Discharging a Patient
WARNING Always perform a discharge before starting monitoring for a new patient, even if your previous patient
was not admitted. Failure to do so can lead to data being attributed to the wrong patient.

A discharge:
– clears the information in the Patient Demographics window
– erases all patient data (such as trend, event, and calculation data) from the monitor and
Information Center. This ensures that data from a previous patient are not mixed with data from
the new patient.
– resets patient category and paced settings to the settings defined in the default Profile
– resets all monitor and measurement settings as well as the active Screen to the settings defined in
the default Profile
– discharges the patient from the Information Center.
When a patient is discharged from the monitor or from an Information Center, all patient data is
deleted. Make sure that you have printed out any required reports before discharging. Check that a
functioning central printer is available before you use End Case.
To discharge a patient,
1 Select the patient name field or select the Admit/Dischrge SmartKey to open the
Patient Demographics window and associated pop-up keys.
2 Select the pop-up key for either:
– End Case - to print any configured end case reports or vital signs recording, discharge the
patient and clear the patient database, then enter standby mode. If an End Case SmartKey is
configured for your monitor, you can also select this instead and then confirm.
To see which end case reports are set up for your monitor, select Main Setup -> Reports ->
Auto Reports. For each auto report, if End Case Report is set to On, this report will
be printed when you select End Case. See the section on AutoReports for information on
setting up end case reports.
– Dischrge Patient - to discharge the patient without printing any reports.

New Patient Check

The monitor can be configured to ask you in certain situations:
• after a specified power-off period
• after a specified standby period
• when no basic vitals (HR, RR, Pulse, SpO2, NBP) have been measured for a specified period
whether a new patient is now being monitored. The pop-up window is entitled Is this a new
Patient?. The monitor offers a Yes key to discharge the previous patient and begin monitoring a
new patient and a No key to continue monitoring with the current patient data and settings.
The time periods for the three conditions can be configured independently.

88
Transferring Patients 6 Managing Patients

Transferring Patients
To save you from having to enter the same patient data multiple times and enable patient transfer
without loss of data, patient demographic information is shared between patient monitors and
Information Centers.

Transferring a Centrally-Monitored Patient using IIT

Scenario: A centrally-monitored patient is moved with the MP5 to another monitoring location on the
same Information Center database server without interrupting the collection of patient trend
information. The MP5 has an IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry interface (IIT), is connected to a host
monitor and is declared as a “telemetry device” at the Information Center.

NOTE The Transfer key is not available while the MP5 is connected to a host monitor (Companion
Mode is indicated).
1 Remove the MP5 from the host monitor.
2 Move the patient using the MP5 as the transport monitor.
3 At the new location, just before connecting the MP5 to the new host monitor:
– open the Patient Demographics window.
– select the Transfer pop-up key.
– wait until the transfer has completed.
4 Connect the MP5 to the new host monitor. The monitor detects a patient mismatch and a window
will open showing your patient’s data and asking Complete transfer of this
patient?.
5 Select Yes to complete the transfer. This re-admits the patient from the transfer list to the new
monitor. This will upload the patient demographics, and, if configured, the measurement settings
and trend data stored in the MP5 to the receiving monitor.
Verify that the settings for patient category and paced mode are correct.

Transferring a Centrally-Monitored Patient with the Monitor

Scenario: A centrally-monitored patient is moved with the monitor to another monitoring location on
the same Information Center database server without interrupting the collection of patient trend
information.
1 Select the patient name field or select the Admit/Dischrge SmartKey to open the
Patient Demographics window, then select the Transfer pop-up key. If the patient is
not admitted or not monitored by an Information Center, the Transfer key is inactive
(“grayed-out”).
This step preserves the patient’s demographic data during the transfer.
2 At the new location, connect the monitor to the network (only needed for wired networks). If the
monitor detects a patient mismatch, a window will open showing your patient’s data and asking
Complete transfer of this patient?.
3 Select Yes to complete the transfer.
4 Verify that the settings for patient category and paced mode are correct.

89
6 Managing Patients Transferring Patients

If you accidentally transfer a patient, use Re-Admit to restore this patient’s data to the Information
Center. If you are not connected to the network, select Clear Transfer to leave transfer mode.
The patient data remains in the monitor.

Data Exchange Between Information Centers

You can transfer demographic data and trend data from one IIC to another by selecting Transfer
on the patient monitor. Trend data is not shared between Information Centers and monitors.

Resolving Patient Information Mismatch

When you connect together devices which store patient demographic data, for example:
• an MMS and a monitor,
• an X2 or MP5 and a host monitor,
• a monitor and an Information Center,
the system compares patient category, paced status, and unique patient identification in order to
synchronize this information. If configured to do so, the monitor indicates a mismatch if the
information is not identical.

WARNING 1 When a monitor is connected to an Information Center by the wireless IntelliVue Instrument
Telemetry interface, the patient data will automatically be merged in the case of a transfer. This
means there is no patient discharge at the monitor and settings and trend data will be retained. You
will see a message on the monitor and the Patient Demographics window will automatically appear
so that you can check the data and change it if necessary.
2 It is important to resolve the mismatches as soon as they are identified. Failure to do so could result
in using incorrect/confusing data to make clinical decisions. Certain settings, for example Paced
and Patient Category, may not match between the Information Center and the monitor. If the
Paced status is set incorrectly, the system could mistake a pace pulse for a QRS and fail to alarm in
the case of asystole. It is important that the Patient Category is set correctly so the ECG can be
analyzed correctly and initial arrhythmia alarm limits set.
In the case where an MP5 or X2 with an IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry interface is declared as a
“telemetry device” at the Information Center and is connected to a host monitor, it is important to
resolve an existing mismatch between the monitor and the Information Center before
disconnecting the MP5/X2. Failure to do so discharges the MP5/X2 and synchronizes the
demographics and settings to the Information Center.

Manually Resolving Patient Mismatch

The patient mismatch is indicated by question marks (???) beside the questionable fields in the Monitor
Info Line and in the Select Patient window. The monitor displays a message such as
Different patients in Central and Monitor.
The Select Patient window automatically opens so you can decide which patient data to use.
You do not have to resolve the mismatch immediately, but the indicators remain until you do.

90
Transferring Patients 6 Managing Patients

For some common mismatch situations, the monitor will simplify the resolution by suggesting a
solution for the mismatch. For example, when a patient arrives after transport and the Transfer key
has been selected, the monitor will show this patient’s data and ask Complete transfer of
this patient?. You can then select Yes to complete the transfer. If you select No you will go to
the Select Patient window.
After you resolve the mismatch, the monitor displays a confirmation window that shows the patient
that has been selected and where data will be erased, if applicable. Confirm your choice. The monitor
automatically displays the Patient Demographics window after confirmation. Verify that the
settings shown are correct for the patient.
Gender, date of birth, height, weight, and nursing notes do not generate a mismatch. If these fields are
different on different devices, the monitor resolves them itself. For example, it may take date of birth
from the Information Center, whilst taking gender from the monitor. Always check the Patient
Demographics after combining patients, to ensure that you are satisfied with the results. Change them
if necessary.

WARNING After resolving a patient mismatch, check that the monitor settings (especially patient category, paced
status and alarm limits) are correct for the patient.

Patient Mismatch - If One Set of Patient Data is Correct

Select Patient
♦ If there is a mismatch between an
Information Center and a monitor, choose DOE, JOHN F
the data set you want to continue using for 1234HG9556, 2008/00123
this patient by selecting one of the sectors in Adult Non-Paced
the Select Patient window.
MILLER,
After you resolve the mismatch, the monitor
displays a confirmation window that shows the Adult Paced
patient that has been selected and where data Same Patient
will be erased, if applicable. Confirm your
New Patient
choice. The monitor automatically displays the
Patient Demographics window after
confirmation. Verify that the settings shown are correct for the patient.

Patient Mismatch - If Neither Patient Data Set is Correct

A patient mismatch where neither set of patient data is correct might occur if you connect a new MMS
to a monitor in order to prepare for a new patient, before you actually start measuring.
♦ Select New Patient if you are sure that none of the information is correct. This discharges all
patients, erases all data in both the monitor and MMS, resets all settings to the default Profile, and
lets you admit a new patient.

Patient Mismatch - If Both Patient Data Sets Are Correct

A patient mismatch where both sets of patient data are correct might occur if you admit a new patient
at the monitor (or Information Center) before the patient arrives at your unit and then connect the
MMS that was used during the patient transport to the monitor.

91
6 Managing Patients Care Groups

♦ Select Same Patient if the patient information is different, but you are sure it is the same
patient. This merges the demographics and updates them in the Information Center, monitor, and
MMS, according to this table. Be aware that your monitor may be configured to merge trend data
from the MMS and the monitor, and to upload measurement settings from the MMS to the
monitor.

Care Groups
If your monitor is connected to an Information Center, you can group bedside monitors into Care
Groups. This lets you:
• view information on the monitor screen from another bed in the same or in a different Care Group.
• be notified of yellow or red alarm conditions at the other beds in the Care Group.
• see the alarm status of all the beds in the Care Group on each monitor screen.
There are two main types of Care Groups:
• standard care group (Bed-based Care Group) - up to 12 patients monitored by up to 4
Information Centers
• unit group (Unit-based Care Group) - for a complete unit with up to 64 patients
monitored by up to 4 Information Centers
Monitors must be assigned to these Care Groups at the Information Center. There is a third care group
which can be assigned locally at the bedside. This is the My Central care group which includes all
beds (up to 16) from the Information Center your bed is connected to. This care group setting is
typically used in facilities with only one Information center. The selection of beds is automatic and
cannot be changed.
The functions available with Care Groups depend on the Information Center revision your monitors
are connected to. See your Information Center Instructions for Use for further details.

Understanding the Care Group Overview Bar

The Care Group monitors’ status is shown in symbol form in the Care Group overview bar. Flashing
symbols indicate active alarms, symbols that are not flashing indicate alarms that have been
acknowledged. Selecting a bed symbol calls up the window for that bed or a setup window to select
this.

Bed 1 Bed 2 Bed 3 Bed 4 Bed 5 Bed 6 Bed 7 Bed 8 Bed 9 Bed11 Bed 12 Bed 13 Bed 14

The Care Group overview bar must be configured to display on the monitor Screen. If it is not visible
on your monitor, select a Screen which has been configured to show the bar.

92
Care Groups 6 Managing Patients

Care Group Symbols (four alternative display possibilities

depending on space available)

No data from this bed

Bed 8 Bed 8 The alarms are on but there are no currently active alarms at
this monitor

Bed 5 Bed 5 The highest priority alarm at this monitor is a standard INOP

Bed 14 Bed 14 The highest priority alarm at this monitor is a short yellow
alarm

Bed 11 Bed 11 The highest priority alarm at this monitor is a yellow alarm

Bed 9 Bed 9 The highest priority alarm at this monitor is a red alarm

Bed 7 Bed 7 The highest priority alarm at this bed is a yellow INOP

Bed 6 Bed 6 The highest priority alarm at this bed is a red INOP

Bed 4 The alarms at this monitor are suspended

Bed 12 The monitor is in standby mode

The monitor is in Demonstration mode

Bed 3 Bed 3 The current monitor

Care Group Symbols (used in the Care Group overview bar

and the My Care Group window)
This is a telemetry bed

93
6 Managing Patients Care Groups

Care Group Symbols (used in the Care Group overview bar

and the My Care Group window)
This bed is on a wireless network

This bed is on a wired network

This is a “paired” bed, with a bedside

monitor and a telemetry transmitter
assigned.

Viewing the My Care Group Window

This window shows the alarm status, bed name, My Care Group
and patient name for every bed in the Care
Group. Beds From:

The window for the Unit group (shown here) Room 2 Smith, Mary
shows first the beds of the Information Center
Room 4 Jones, Paul
this bed is connected to. By selecting the
Information Center name you can display a list Bed 2 Murphy, Sarah
of all Information Centers associated with the
Bed 4 Miller, John
Unit group, and select another Information
Center to view. Bed 8 Baker, Jane

To enter the My Care Group window, Room 1 Green, Liza

♦ select the Other Patients SmartKey, if Room 3 Scott, James

configured, or
Room 5 Black, Harald
♦ in the Main Setup menu, select My Care
Group.
Use the My Care Group pop-up keys to navigate
through the Care Groups:
My Unit lets you view a list of all the Information Centers in your Care Unit. Select an
Information Center to see a list of the monitors connected to it. Select any monitor to see the Other
Patient window for that bed.
Other Units lets you view a list of all the Care Units in your Care Domain. Select any Care Unit
to view a list of the Information Centers connected to it. Select an Information Center to see a list of
the monitors connected to it. Select any monitor to see the Other Patient window for that bed.
Alarming Beds lets you view a list of all beds in your care group with an unacknowledged
alarm. The beds are listed in order of alarm severity.

94
Care Groups 6 Managing Patients

Viewing the Other Bed Window

The Other Bed window lets you view a subset of the waveform and numeric information from another
bed on the same network. Waves and numeric information from another bed are delayed. If
configured, Other Bed information is displayed in color, using the colors defined by the Information
Center.
The Other Bed window can be configured to popup automatically when an alarm occurs at another
bed. To avoid too many windows appearing (for example, in large care groups) and covering the
monitor’s own bed data on the screen, you can temporarily disable this automatic popup:
1 Select Main Setup > Network > Auto Window
2 Select Disabled
When automatic popup is disabled in this way, an icon will appear as a reminder in the Care Group
Overview Bar next to the monitor’s own bed label .
To open the Other Bed window,
♦ select any field in the monitor info line to enter the Setup menu, then select My CareGroup
and select the required bed, or
♦ Select the Other Patients SmartKey, if configured, and select the required bed.

Bed Label

VTACH

ABP

HR ABP PAP

PULSE
CVP
ST-II PVC
RESP T1
ST-V

The Other Bed window may be configured to display embedded in a specially designed Screen.

♦ To display the embedded Other

Bed Label
Bed screen element, in the
VTACH
Change Screen menu, select a HR
Screen designed to show the
PVC
Other Bed information ABP PAP NBP
permanently. Sys

Changing the Screen may

automatically change the bed shown
in the other bed window. If you
switch to a different Screen, you
should check that the correct other bed is displayed.

95
6 Managing Patients Care Groups

Other Bed Pop-Up Keys

Select the Other Patients SmartKey or the Other Bed window or embedded screen element to
access the associated pop-up keys:
Next Wave lets you view waveforms not currently shown in the other bed window.
More Vitals lets you view more numerics not currently shown in the other bed window.
Next Bed lets you view waveforms and numerics from the next available bed in the Care Group.
My Care Group lets you call up the Care Group window to select another bed.
Alarming Beds lets you view a list of all beds in your care group with an unacknowledged
alarm. The beds are listed in order of alarm severity.
Silence Bed lets you silence active alarms at the other bed. (Whether you see this key depends
on the revision and configuration of the Information Center your monitors are connected to.)

WARNING The Silence Bed pop-up key in the Other Bed window silences alarms at a remote bed. Be aware
that accidental use of this key could silence alarms for the wrong patient.
To silence own bed alarms use the Silence permanent key on screen.

Visual Alarm Status Information in the Other Bed Window

• If individual alarms are switched off at the other bed, this is indicated by the crossed alarm symbol
beside the measurement numeric.
• If alarms are switched off at the other bed, the message Alarms Off is shown in the other bed
window.
• In the embedded Other Bed window, the crossed speaker symbol in the upper right hand indicates
that the volume of the audible alarm status change notification for the other beds in the care group
is set to zero at the overview monitor.

Care Group Alarms

Changes in the alarm status of beds in a Care Group are announced visually and audibly at all other
beds in the same Care Group. The visual and audible indicators used depend on the monitor and
Information Center configuration.
When an alarm is detected at another bed in the Care Group,
• the alarm status is shown in the Care Group overview bar as an icon.
• a message informing you about the care group alarm is shown in the monitor status line.
• if configured, the Other Bed window, the Alarming Beds window or the My Care Group window
may pop up on the Screen (if automatic alarm notification is enabled at the bedside monitor and at
the Information Center). The automatic alarm notification is suppressed when a window, menu or
pop-up keys are active.
• if configured, an audible status change notification is issued. The tone type and volume can be
configured.
Automatic alarm notification can be switched off permanently in the monitor’s Configuration Mode
or at the Information Center. To temporarily disable and re-enable automatic alarm notification at the
bedside monitor, for example if you want to carry out a procedure, in Monitoring Mode:

96
Care Groups 6 Managing Patients

1 Select the network symbol on the monitor screen to call up the Network menu.
2 Select Auto Window to toggle between the settings Enabled and Disabled.
This setting resets to the default at discharge and when the monitor is switched on. Always re-enable
the Auto Window as soon as possible.

97
6 Managing Patients Care Groups

98
 7

7ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT

Monitoring
The electrocardiogram (ECG) measures the electrical activity of the heart and displays it on the
monitor as a waveform and a numeric. This section also tells you about arrhythmia monitoring (see
page 115), ST monitoring (see page 127) and QT monitoring (see page 137).

Skin Preparation for Electrode Placement

Good electrode-to-skin contact is important for a good ECG signal, as the skin is a poor conductor of
electricity.
1 Select sites with intact skin, without impairment of any kind.
2 Clip or shave hair from sites as necessary.
3 Wash sites thoroughly with soap and water, leaving no soap residue.
We do not recommend using ether or pure alcohol, because this dries the skin and increases the
resistance.
4 Dry skin thoroughly.
5 Gently abrade the skin using ECG skin preparation paper to remove dead skin cells to improve the
conductivity of the electrode site.

Connecting ECG Cables

1 Attach the clips or snaps to the electrodes before placing them. If you are not using pre-gelled
electrodes, apply electrode gel to the electrodes before placement.
2 Place the electrodes on the patient according to the lead placement you have chosen.
3 Attach the electrode cable to the patient cable.
4 Plug the patient cable into the white ECG connector on the monitor. An ECG waveform and
numeric appears on the monitor display.

CAUTION To protect the monitor from damage during defibrillation, for accurate ECG information and to
protect against noise and other interference, use only ECG electrodes and cables specified by Philips.

99
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads

Selecting the Primary and Secondary ECG Leads

The monitor uses the primary and secondary lead to compute HR and to analyze and detect cardiac
arrhythmias. They are also available for recordings and for display on the Information Center.
The secondary lead is only used if your monitor is configured for multi-lead (instead of single-lead)
arrhythmia analysis.

You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that

has the following characteristics:
• the QRS complex should be either completely above or
below the baseline and it should not be biphasic
• the QRS complex should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV

To select a lead as primary or secondary lead:

♦ In the Setup ECG menu, select Primary Lead or Secondary Lead, then select the
appropriate lead. You can assign any available lead whether it is currently displayed or not.

Checking Paced Status

It is important to set the paced status correctly when you start monitoring ECG.
♦ To change the paced status in the Setup ECG menu, select Paced to toggle between Yes or
No.

WARNING Pace pulse rejection must be switched on for paced patients by setting “Paced” to Yes. Switching pace
pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in pace pulses being counted as regular QRS
complexes, which could prevent an asystole event from being detected. When changing profiles, and at
admission/discharge, always check that paced status is correct for the patient.
Some pace pulses can be difficult to reject. When this happens, the pulses are counted as a QRS
complex, and could result in an incorrect HR and failure to detect cardiac arrest or some arrhythmias.
Make sure that pace pulses are detected correctly by checking the pace pulse markers on the display.
Keep pacemaker patients under close observation.

Understanding the ECG Display

Your display may be configured to look slightly different.

100
Monitoring Paced Patients 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

1 4 5
2 3

Paced Rhythm
HR bpm

M EASI

8 7 6

1 Lead label of the displayed wave

2 1 mV calibration bar
3 Pacer spikes
4 Pace pulse markers
5 Current heart rate
6 Current heart rate alarm limits
7 EASI lead placement label
8 ECG Filter label

ECG HR numeric: This is the heart rate derived from the monitored ECG.
Pace pulse markers: These are shown if the Paced status has been set to Yes, the pacer spikes are not
configured to have a fixed size, and the patient has a paced signal.
Pacer Spikes: The pacer spikes are shown in white, unless the ECG wave is white, then they will be
green. If the pacer spikes have been configured to have a fixed size, they will be displayed in the
background as a dotted line.

1 Pacer spikes configured to have a fixed size

Defibrillator synchronization marks: If an HP/Agilent/Philips defibrillator is connected, the

synchronization marks (vertical lines on the ECG wave) are shown on the ECG wave. The
synchronization marks will be shown in yellow, unless the ECG wave is yellow, then they will be green.
If so configured, the monitor can supply its own synchronization marks; in this case the
synchronization marks from a defibrillator will not be shown.

ST numerics in ECG wave: ST numerics can be configured to show underneath the ECG wave on
the left side.

Monitoring Paced Patients

An ECG optimized for monitoring a paced patient should look like this:

101
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Monitoring Paced Patients

1 2

1 Normal Beats
2 Pace Pulses/Beats

You should choose a lead as primary or secondary lead that has these characteristics:
• the normal QRS complex should be either completely above or below the baseline and it should not
be biphasic. For paced patients, the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace
pulses.
• the QRS complex should be tall and narrow
• the P-waves and the T-waves should be less than 0.2 mV.
For ease of identification on the screen, the pacer spikes can be configured to have a fixed size. They are
then shown in the background as a dotted lines. The length of the dotted line is fixed to the wave
channel height and is independent of the actual pacer amplitude.

Setting the Paced Status (Pace Pulse Rejection)

♦ In the Setup ECG menu, select Paced to toggle between Yes and No. Paced
You can also change the paced status in the Patient Demographics window.
When Paced is set to Yes:
– Pace Pulse Rejection is switched on. This means that pacemaker pulses are
not counted as extra QRS complexes. Non-Paced
– pace pulse marks are shown on the ECG wave as a small dash (only when
the pacer spikes are not configured to have a fixed size)
– the paced symbol is displayed on the main screen.
When Paced is set to No, pacer spikes are not shown in the ECG wave. Be
aware that switching pace pulse rejection off for paced patients may result in
pace pulses being counted as regular QRS complexes, which could prevent an
asystole event from being detected.

Avoiding Pace Pulse Repolarization Tails

Some unipolar pacemakers display pace pulses with repolarization tails. These tails may be counted as
QRSs in the event of cardiac arrest or other arrhythmias.
If you note a visible repolarization tail, choose a lead that decreases the size of the repolarization tail.

102
Changing the Size of the ECG Wave 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

1 Repolarization tail
(note width)

Changing the Size of the ECG Wave

If any of the displayed ECG waves is too small or clipped, you can change the size of one or all of the
ECG waves on the screen.
Changing the adjustment factor only changes the visual appearance of the ECG wave on the screen. It
does not affect the ECG signal analyzed by the monitor.
Comparing the wave size to the 1 mV calibration bar on the ECG wave segment can help you to get an
idea of the true ECG signal strength. If you choose a fixed adjustment factor, the 1 mV calibration bar
will be the same size for all the displayed ECG waves. If you choose AutoSize, or an individual size
using the Size Up / Size Down keys, the calibration bar may be a different size for each wave.

To Change the Size of an Individual ECG Wave

1 Select the wave segment you want to change. This calls up the lead menu for this segment.
2 In the lead menu, select Size Up to increase wave size or Size Down to decrease the size.
Selecting AutoSize lets the monitor choose the optimal adjustment factor for all displayed ECG
waves.

To Change the Size of all the ECG Waves

To change the size of all the ECG waves on the screen by a fixed adjustment factor,
1 In the Setup ECG menu, select Adjust Size.
2 Select the required adjustment factor from the line of pop-up keys.
– Size x0.5 to halve the wave size
– Size x1 to display the wave without zoom
– Size x2 to double the wave size
– Size x4 to multiply the wave size by four
– Previous Size: to return one step to the previous size
– Auto Size: to let the monitor choose the optimal adjustment factor for all the ECG waves.

Changing the Volume of the QRS Tone

The QRS tone is derived from either the HR or Pulse, depending on which is currently selected as the
alarm source. The QRS volume can be set from 0 to 10 (0 means off).

103
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Changing the ECG Filter Settings

♦ To change the QRS volume, in the Setup ECG menu select QRS Volume and then select the
appropriate volume from the pop-up list.
There will be no QRS tone when the MP5 is connected to a host monitor.

Changing the ECG Filter Settings

The ECG filter setting defines how ECG waves are smoothed. An abbreviation indicating the filter
type is shown underneath the lead label on the monitor display. Filter settings do not affect ST
measurement.
♦ To change the filter setting, in the Setup ECG menu, select Filter and then select the
appropriate setting.
– Monitor: Use under normal measurement conditions.
– Ext. Monitor: Use for pediatric and neonatal patients when diagnostic quality is required
but low frequency interference or a wandering baseline may be expected. The upper edge
frequency is the same as the Diag setting and the lower edge frequency is the same as the
Monitor setting.
– Filter: The filter reduces interference to the signal. It should be used if the signal is distorted
by high frequency or low frequency interference. High frequency interference usually results in
large amplitude spikes making the ECG signal look irregular. Low frequency interference usually
leads to a wandering or rough baseline. In the operating room, the Filter reduces artifacts and
interference from electro-surgical units. Under normal measurement conditions, selecting
Filter may suppress the QRS complexes too much and thus interfere with the clinical
evaluation of the ECG displayed on the monitor. This does not affect the ECG analysis
performed by the monitor.
If AutoFilter is set to On in Configuration Mode, the filter setting will automatically be set
to Filter if electromagnetic interference is detected.
– Diag: Use when diagnostic quality is required. The unfiltered ECG wave is displayed so that
changes such as R-wave notching or discrete elevation or depression of the ST segments are
visible.
The setting Diag selects the highest available ECG bandwidth which is 0.05 to 150 Hz for the
Adult, Pedi and Neo patient category. The term “diagnostic” relates only to the ECG bandwidth
requirements for diagnostic electrocardiographic devices as outlined in the ANSI/AAMI standard
EC11-1991.
When you are using a telemetry transmitter connected via short range radio to the monitor, the
upper bandwidth for all filter settings is limited to 40 Hz.

Selecting Positions of Va and Vb Chest Leads (for 6-

lead placement)
The two chest leads for the 6-lead placement can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions.
Select the positions you have used in the Setup ECG menu, so that the chest leads will be correctly
labeled.
1 In the Setup ECG menu, select Va Lead.
2 Select the position used from the list.

104
Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

3 Select Vb Lead and select the position used from the list

Choosing EASI or Standard Lead Placement

You must enable either standard lead placement or EASI lead placement.
♦ In the Setup ECG menu, select Lead Placement and then Standard or EASI.
EASI is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG wave on the display, and EASI is marked
on any recorder strips and printouts.
See the section on EASI ECG Lead Placement for electrode placement diagrams.

About ECG Leads

To make it possible to compare measured ECG signals, the electrodes (or lead sets) are placed in
standardized positions, forming so-called “leads”. To obtain ECG signals optimized for use in
diagnosis and patient management in different care environments, different lead sets in varying lead
placements can be used. You can use either standard lead placements or EASI lead placements with this
monitor.
When placing electrodes, choose a flat, non-muscular site where the signal will not be interfered with
by either movement or bones. Correct lead placement is always important for accurate diagnosis.
Especially in the precordial leads, which are close to the heart, QRS morphology can be greatly altered
if an electrode is moved away from its correct location.

ECG Leads Monitored

If you are using these leads are available: Resp is measured
between electrodes:
a 3-electrode set I, II, III RA and LL
a 5-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V and MCL RA and LL
a 6-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, Va, Vb RA and LL
a 10-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 RA and LL
an EASI 5-electrode set I, II, III, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, V6 I and A

Changing Lead Sets

To change the ECG lead set,
• When adding leads: place the additional electrodes as required - the monitor automatically
recognizes the new lead placement.
• When removing leads: there are two possibilities - removing the complete chest leads block or
removing individual leads. If you unplug the chest lead block from the trunk cable connector, the
monitor will automatically recognize the new lead placement. Remove individual leads by removing
the electrodes. The monitor will issue a Lead Off INOP message; select New Lead Setup in
the Setup ECG menu and the INOP message will disappear.

105
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring ECG Lead Fallback

ECG Lead Fallback

If fallback is configured on and there is a leads off INOP in the primary lead (and in the secondary
lead, if you are using multi-lead monitoring) for longer than 10 seconds, and if another lead is
available, this available lead automatically becomes the primary lead. This is known as lead fallback.
When the Leads Off condition is corrected, the leads are automatically switched back.
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.

ECG Lead Placements

The labels and colors of the ECG electrodes differ according to the standards that apply for your
hospital. The electrode placement illustrations in this chapter use the AAMI labels and colors.

Electrode labels Electrode colors

AAMI EASI IEC AAMI IEC
RA I R White Red
LA S L Black Yellow
LL A F Red Green
RL N N Green Black
V E C Brown White
V1 C1 Brown/Red White/Red
V2 C2 Brown/Yellow White/Yellow
V3 C3 Brown/Green White/Green
V4 C4 Brown/Blue White/Brown
V5 C5 Brown/Orange White/Black
V6 C6 Brown/Violet White/Violet

106
ECG Lead Placements 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Standard 3-Lead Placement

1 RA placement: directly below the clavicle
and near the right shoulder
2 LA placement: directly below the
1 2 clavicle and near the left shoulder
3 LL placement: on the left lower
abdomen

Standard 5-Lead Placement

RA placement: directly below the clavicle and
near the right shoulder

1 2 LA placement: directly below the clavicle and

I near the left shoulder
aV
R RL placement: on the right lower abdomen
L
aV

II V
III
LL placement: on the left lower abdomen

V placement: on the chest, the position depends

aVF

5
on your required lead selection

3 4

6-Lead Placement
For a 6-lead placement use the positions from the 5-lead diagram above but with two chest leads. The
two chest leads, Va and Vb, can be positioned at any two of the V1 to V6 positions shown in the chest
electrode diagram below. The Va and Vb lead positions chosen must be selected in the ECG Setup
Menu to ensure correct labeling.

107
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring ECG Lead Placements

Chest Electrode Placement

For accurate chest electrode placement and measurement, it is important to locate the fourth
intercostal space.
1 Locate the second intercostal space by first palpating the Angle of Lewis (the little bony
protuberance where the body of the sternum joins the manubrium). This rise in the sternum is
where the second rib is attached, and the space just below this is the second intercostal space.
2 Palpate and count down the chest until you locate the fourth intercostal space.

V1 placement: on the fourth

Angle of
intercostal space at the right sternal
Lewis
border

V2 placement: on the fourth

intercostal space at the left sternal
2 border
3
4 V1 V2
V7 V3 placement: midway between the
V4R V3R
VE V3
V5
V6 V2 and V4 electrode positions
V4

V4 placement: on the fifth

intercostal space at the left
midclavicular line

V5 placement: on the left anterior

axillary line, horizontal with the V4
electrode position

V6 placement: on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with the V4 electrode position

V3R to V6R placement: on the right side of the chest in positions corresponding to those on the left

VE placement: over the xiphoid process

V7 placement: on posterior chest at the left posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space

V7R placement: on posterior chest at the right posterior axillary line in the fifth intercostal space

108
ECG Lead Placements 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

10-Lead Placement
When monitoring 12-leads of ECG, using a 10-Electrode Lead Placement, it is important to correctly
place electrodes and to label all 12-lead ECG reports with the correct lead placement.

Conventional 12-Lead ECG

In conventional 12-Lead ECG using 10

electrodes, an electrode is placed on the right
arm, left arm, right leg, and left leg. Six V-
electrodes are placed on the chest. The right leg
electrode is the reference electrode.
Limb electrodes:
– Place arm electrodes on the inside of each
1
arm, between the wrist and the elbow.
– Place leg electrodes inside of each calf,
between the knee and the ankle.
Chest electrodes:
V1 - on the 4th intercostal space at the right
5 2 sternal border
V2 - on the 4th intercostal space at the left
sternal border
V3 - midway between the V2 and V4 electrode
positions
V4 - on the 5th intercostal space at the left
midclavicular line
V5 - on the left anterior axillary line, horizontal
with the V4 electrode position
V6 - on the left midaxillary line, horizontal with
the V4 electrode position
4 3

1 - V1 - V6
2 - LA
3 - LL
4 - RL
5 - RA

109
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Capture 12-Lead

Modified 12-Lead ECG

1 - LA
2 - V1 - V6
6
3 - LL
5 1
4 - RL
5 - RA
6 - Angle of Lewis
2
If your institution uses modified 10
Lead ECG electrode placement (the
Mason-Likar Lead System), place the
four limb electrodes close to the
shoulders and lower abdomen.
The six V electrodes are placed on the
chest in the same position as the
4 3 conventional 12-lead placement.

Choosing Standard or Modified Electrode Placement

If your institution uses modified 10 Lead ECG electrode placement (the Mason-Likar Lead System),
you must switch Mod.Lead Placment to On in the monitor. To do this,
♦ in the Setup ECG menu, select Mod.LeadPlacment to toggle between On and Off.
– When Mod.Lead Placment is set to On, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled 12 Lead
ECG Report (Mason-Likar), and captured 12-lead ECGs will be labelled Mason-
Likar to the right of the bandwidth annotation at the Information Center.
– When Mod.LeadPlacment is set to Off, 12 Lead ECG Reports will be labelled 12 Lead
ECG Report, and captured 12-lead ECGs will not be annotated at the Information Center.

WARNING Do not use ECG analysis interpretation statements and measurements for 12-lead ECGs obtained
using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement. This may lead to misdiagnosis since the
modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement does not look the same as the conventional 12-lead
ECG and may mask inferior infarction due to calculated axis, R, P and T wave magnitudes shifts and
ST slope.
Do not export 12-lead ECGs obtained using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement.
Captured 12-Lead ECGs using the modified (Mason-Likar) limb electrode placement exported from
the Information Center are not annotated with the Mason-Likar label.

Capture 12-Lead
If the monitor is connected to an Information Center via a wired network, the Capture 12-Lead
SmartKey may be configured. Selecting this exports 12-Lead ECG information to the Information
Center for analysis. For details see the Instructions for Use supplied with the Information Center.

110
EASI ECG Lead Placement 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

EASI ECG Lead Placement

Using a standard 5-electrode set in EASI lead placement you can monitor up to 12 standard ECG leads
simultaneously and continuously at the bedside. EASI provides a monitoring method for trending ST
segment changes that can provide an early indication of ischemia.

WARNING EASI-derived 12-lead ECGs and their measurements are approximations to conventional 12-lead
ECGs. As the 12-lead ECG derived with EASI is not exactly identical to the 12-lead conventional
ECG obtained from an electrocardiograph, it should not be used for diagnostic interpretations.

Respiratory monitoring is also possible with the EASI placement; respiration is measured between the I
and A electrodes.
Place the electrodes as accurately as possible to obtain the best quality EASI measurements.
When EASI lead placement is selected, EASI is shown beside the 1mV calibration bar on the ECG
wave on the display, and EASI is marked on any recorder strips and printouts.

EASI Monitoring During INOP Conditions If one of the derived EASI leads has an INOP
condition (for example, LEAD OFF), a flat line is displayed. After 10 seconds, the directly acquired
EASI AI, AS, or ES lead (depending on which is available) is displayed with the corresponding lead
label. This causes an arrhythmia relearn.

EASI Electrode Placement

1 E (V) on the lower sternum at the level of
the fifth intercostal space
3
2 A (LL) on the left midaxillary line at the
same level as the E electrode
3 S (LA) on the upper sternum
4 4 I (RA) on the right midaxillary line at the
same level as the E electrode
2 5 N reference electrode - can be anywhere,
usually below the sixth rib on the
1
right hip

111
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview

ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview

The ECG and arrhythmia alarms available depend on which measurements are switched on, and the
arrhythmia option enabled for your monitor.
• Cardiotach alarms are available when HR is on and the active alarm source is ECG, but arrhythmia
is switched off
• Basic arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on
• Advanced arrhythmia alarms are available when Arrhythmia is switched on and the Advanced
Arrhythmia option has been enabled for your monitor

Cardiotach Alarms Additional Alarms with Basic Additional Alarms with

Arrhythmia Option Enhanced Arrhythmia
Option
***Asystole ***Ventricular Tachycardia **Afib
***Ventricular Fibrillation/ **Pacer Not Capture **Supraventricular Tach
Tachycardia **Pacer Not Pacing **Missed Beat
***Extreme Bradycardia
**PVCs/min HIGH(PVC > **Pause
***Extreme Tachycardia limit/min) **Irregular HR
**High heart rate
**Ventricular Rhythm
**Low heart rate **Run PVCs High
**Pair PVCs
**R-on-T PVCs
**Ventricular bigeminy
**Ventricular trigeminy
**Non-sustain VT
**Multiform PVCs

112
Using ECG Alarms 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Using ECG Alarms

ECG alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits changed just like other
measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms section. Special alarm features which apply only to
ECG are described here.

Extreme Alarm Limits

The extreme rate alarms, Extreme Tachy and Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm source,
either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value (the Δ value) to the high and
low alarm limits.

Extreme Extreme
Brady Limit Low High Tachy Limit
Limit Limit

Δ Extreme Brady Δ Extreme Tachy

You need to know which value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low
alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦ To see the extreme rate alarms set for your monitor, in the Setup ECG menu, see the menu items
ΔExtrTachy and ΔExtrBrady.

ECG Alarms Off Disabled

Be aware that your hospital department may have decided to disable the setting ECG Alarms Off in
the monitor’s Configuration Mode. In this case, HR alarms cannot be switched off in Monitoring
Mode. If you try to switch off the HR alarms, you will see the message To activate enter
Config and enable Alarms Off.

HR Alarms When Arrhythmia Analysis is Switched Off

When arrhythmia analysis is switched off, only these HR-related alarms will be detected:
• the asystole alarm
• the ventricular fibrillation/tachycardia alarm
• the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms
• the high heart rate and low heart rate alarms.

Enhanced Asystole Detection

In order to improve alarming on asystole under certain conditions, you can set Asystole
Detect. in Configuration Mode to Enhanced. In enhanced mode an asystole alarm will be
suppressed for up to five seconds if a valid beat-to-beat Pulse is detected from a Pressure.

113
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring ECG Safety Information

ECG Safety Information

CAUTION Interference from instruments near the patient and ESU interference can cause problems with the
ECG wave. See the monitor specifications for more information.

WARNING Defibrillation and Electrosurgery: Do not touch the patient, or table, or instruments, during
defibrillation.
After defibrillation, the screen display recovers within 10 seconds if the correct electrodes are used and
applied in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
ECG cables can be damaged when connected to a patient during defibrillation. Check cables for
functionality before using them again.
According to AAMI specifications the peak of the synchronized defibrillator discharge should be
delivered within 60 ms of the peak of the R wave. The signal at the ECG output on the IntelliVue
patient monitors is delayed by a maximum of 30 ms. Your biomedical engineer should verify that your
ECG/Defibrillator combination does not exceed the recommended maximum delay of 60 ms.
When using electrosurgical (ES) equipment, never place ECG electrodes near to the grounding plate of
the ES device, as this can cause a lot of interference on the ECG signal.

General: When you are connecting the electrodes or the patient cable, make sure that the connectors
never come into contact with other conductive parts, or with earth. In particular, make sure that all of
the ECG electrodes are attached to the patient, to prevent them from contacting conductive parts or
earth.

During surgery: Use the appropriate orange electrode ECG safety cable, or lead cable with an orange
connector, for measuring ECG in the operating room. These cables have extra circuitry to protect the
patient from burns during cautery, and they decrease electrical interference. This also reduces the
hazard of burns in case of a defective neutral electrode at the HF device. These cables cannot be used
for measuring respiration.

Pacemaker failure: During complete heart block or pacemaker failure to pace/capture, tall P-waves
(greater than 1/5 of the average R-wave height) may be erroneously counted by the monitor, resulting
in missed detection of cardiac arrest.

Patients exhibiting intrinsic rhythm: When monitoring paced patients who exhibit only intrinsic
rhythm, the monitor may erroneously count pace pulses as QRS complexes when the algorithm first
encounters them, resulting in missed detection of cardiac arrest.
The risk of missing cardiac arrest may be reduced by monitoring these patients with low heart rate limit
at or slightly above the basic/demand pacemaker rate. A low heart rate alarm alerts you when the
patient’s heart rate drops to a level where pacing is needed. Proper detection and classification of the
paced rhythm can then be determined.

Filtered ECG signal from external instruments: Instruments such as defibrillators or telemetry units
produce a filtered ECG signal. When this signal is used as an input to the bedside monitor, it is filtered
again. If this twice-filtered signal is passed to the arrhythmia algorithm, it may cause the algorithm to
fail to detect pace pulses, pacemaker non-capture, or asystole, thus compromising paced patient
monitoring performance.

114
About Arrhythmia Monitoring 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

External pacing electrodes: When a pacemaker with external pacing electrodes is being used on a
patient, arrhythmia monitoring is severely compromised due to the high energy level in the pacer pulse.
This may result in the arrhythmia algorithm’s failure to detect pacemaker noncapture or asystole.

Fusion beat pacemakers: Pacemakers that create fusion beats (pace pulse on top of the QRS complex)
cannot be detected by the monitor’s QRS detector.

Rate adaptive pacemakers: Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Ventilation rate
may occasionally react on the Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination
of the Resp value and execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp
measurement can prevent this.

About Arrhythmia Monitoring

Arrhythmia analysis provides information on your patient’s condition, including heart rate, PVC rate,
rhythm, and ectopics. The monitor uses the user-selected primary and secondary ECG leads for single-
lead or multi-lead arrhythmia analysis. During arrhythmia analysis, the monitor continuously
• optimizes ECG signal quality. This is important for arrhythmia analysis. The monitor continuously
filters the ECG signal to remove baseline wander, muscle artifact, and signal irregularities. Also, if
the Patient Paced status is set to Yes, pace pulses are filtered out to avoid processing them as QRS
beats.
• detects beats, for example, QRS complexes, identifying them for further analysis.
• measures signal features such as R-wave height, width, and timing.
• creates beat templates, and classifies and labels beats to aid in rhythm analysis and alarm detection.
• examines the ECG signal for ventricular fibrillation, asystole, and noise.

Arrhythmia Options
Your monitor has either the basic or the enhanced arrhythmia option. Both options provide rhythm
and ectopic status messages and beat labelling. The number of rhythms being classified, events being
detected, and alarms generated differs according to the option. The alarms available with the different
options are listed in the section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 112, the rhythm and
ectopic messages detected are listed in “Arrhythmia Status Messages” on page 119.

Where Can I Find More Information?

See the Application Notes on ST and Arrhythmia supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed
information on the arrhythmia algorithm and its clinical application.

115
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off

Switching Arrhythmia Analysis On and Off

1 In the Setup Arrhy menu, select Arrhythmia to toggle between On and Off.
2 Select the Confirm pop-up key which appears at the bottom of the screen.
Be aware that when arrhythmia analysis is switched off,
– the message Arrhythmia Off appears beside the ECG wave, if configured to do so
– only the HR-related alarms are detected (the asystole alarm, the ventricular fibrillation/
tachycardia alarm, the extreme tachycardia and extreme bradycardia alarms, the high heart rate
and low heart rate alarms)
– HR High and HR Low alarms behave like normal yellow alarms, no timeout periods are active.

Choosing an ECG Lead for Arrhythmia Monitoring

It is important to select a suitable lead for arrhythmia monitoring.
Guidelines for non-paced patients are:
– QRS complex should be tall and narrow (recommended amplitude > 0.5 mV)
– R-Wave should be above or below the baseline (but not bi-phasic)
– T-wave should be smaller than 1/3 R-wave height
– the P-wave should be smaller than 1/5 R-wave height.
For paced patients, in addition to the above, the pace pulse should be:
– not wider than the normal QRS
– the QRS complexes should be at least twice the height of pace pulses
– large enough to be detected, with no re-polarization.
To prevent detection of P-waves or baseline noises as QRS complexes, the minimum detection level for
QRS complexes is set at 0.15 mV, according to AAMI-EC 13 specifications. Adjusting the ECG wave
size on the monitor display (gain adjustment) does not affect the ECG signal which is used for
arrhythmia analysis. If the ECG signal is too small, you may get false alarms for pause or asystole.

Aberrantly-Conducted Beats
As P-waves are not analyzed, it is difficult and sometimes impossible for the monitor to distinguish
between an aberrantly-conducted supraventricular beat and a ventricular beat. If the aberrant beat
resembles a ventricular beat, it is classified as ventricular. You should always select a lead where the
aberrantly-conducted beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these ‘normal beats’. Instead of trying to select two leads
with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia
monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.

Atrial Fibrillation Alarm

The monitor performs atrial fibrillation analysis using information about the RR irregularity, PR
interval variability and P wave variability.
In order to generate an Afib alarm the following criteria must be detected for 1 minute:
• normal beat RR intervals must be irregular

116
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

• PR interval deviation must be large

• P-wave region must not match well
Atrial fibrillation analysis is only available for adult patients and atrial fibrillation detection cannot be
performed on PVCs or Paced beats.
Since most atrial flutters have regular RR intervals, they cannot be detected by the atrial fibrillation
algorithm.
An Afib alarm can be falsely detected in the presence of:
• sinus arrhythmia,
• muscle noise, or
• electrode motion artifact.
If you also have monitors with earlier software revisions, the Afib alarm will not be generated after a
transfer to one of these monitors. Always leave the Irregular HR alarm switched on, so that this alarm
can be generated in such situations.
See the Application Note on Arrhythmia/ST supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed
information on the arrhythmia algorithm and ECG analysis.

Intermittent Bundle Branch Block

Bundle branch and the other fascicular blocks create a challenge for the arrhythmia algorithm. If the
QRS during the block changes considerably from the learned normal, the blocked beat may be
incorrectly classified as ventricular, causing false PVC alarms. You should always select a lead where the
bundle branch block beats have an R-wave that is as narrow as possible to minimize incorrect calls.
Ventricular beats should look different from these ‘normal beats’. Instead of trying to select two leads
with a narrow R-wave, it may be easier to just select one lead and use single lead arrhythmia
monitoring. Extra vigilance is required by the clinician for this type of patient.

Understanding the Arrhythmia Display

Your monitor screen may look slightly different from the illustration.

3
1 2
4 5
II P P P Paced Rhythm PVC HR
M Pair PVCs

1mV
Delayed
2 75
7 6

1 Beat label
2 Pace pulse marks
3 Rhythm status message

117
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Understanding the Arrhythmia Display

4 PVC Numeric
5 HR Numeric
6 Ectopic status message
7 Delayed arrhythmia wave

Viewing Arrhythmia Waves

♦ To review arrhythmia beat labels, in the Setup Arrhythmia menu, select Annotate
Arrhy.
The wave showing the primary ECG lead will be delayed by six seconds and shown on a grey
background. Beat labels will be annotated above the ECG wave and Delayed will be written
beside it.
♦ To return to the normal ECG primary lead display, select Annotate Arrhy again.

Arrhythmia Beat Labels

Arrhythmia beat labels tell you how the monitor is classifying beats.
N = Normal
V = Ventricular Ectopic
S = Supra-ventricular Premature
P = Paced
' = Pacer spike
“ = Biventricular Pacer Spike
L = Learning patient's ECG
A = Artifact (noisy episode)
? = Insufficient information to classify beats
I = Inoperative condition (e.g., LEADS OFF)
M = Pause or missed beat

118
Understanding the Arrhythmia Display 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Arrhythmia Status Messages

The monitor displays two types of status messages:
• Rhythm Status Messages -- to indicate the patient’s rhythm.
• Ectopic Status Messages -- to indicate the presence of ectopic beats.
These status messages are shown on the right hand side of the primary ECG wave. They are updated
every second, with the exception of the Sinus and Supraventricular (SV) rhythm messages.
The Sinus and SV rhythm messages are updated based on the current heart rate, taking into account
the patient category (adult, pediatric, or neonatal). For the message to change from one rhythm status
to another, the HR must be in the new range for five beats.
If you have basic arrhythmia capability, you will get only messages for the alarms provided with this
level.

Rhythm Status Messages

The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.

Rhythm Status Message Description B or E

ASYSTOLE No QRS for 4 consecutive seconds in absence of vent fib or chaotic B, E
signal
VENT FIB/TACH A fibrillatory wave for 4 consecutive seconds B, E
V-TACH A dominant rhythm of adjacent Vs and a HR > the V-Tach Heart B, E
Rate Limit
SUSTAINED V-TACH Ventricular tachycardia rhythm for more than 15 seconds E
VENT RHYTHM A dominant rhythm of adjacent PVCs and a HR ≤ the V-Tach HR E
Limit
VENT BIGEMINY A dominant rhythm of N, V, N, V E
VENT TRIGEMINY A dominant rhythm of N, N, V, N, N, V E
PACED RHYTHM A dominant rhythm of paced beats B, E
IRREGULAR HR Consistently irregular rhythm E
SINUS BRADY A dominant rhythm of SV beats preceded by P-waves B, E
SINUS RHYTHM
SINUS TACHY
SV BRADY A dominant rhythm of SV beats not preceded by P-waves B, E
SV RHYTHM
SV TACHY
UNKNOWN ECG RHYTHM Rhythm cannot be determined B, E
LEARNING ECG Algorithm is learning the ECG beat morphology B, E
LEARNING RHYTHM Algorithm is learning the rhythm of the classified beats B, E
CANNOT ANALYZE ECG ECG signal is predominantly invalid and therefore cannot be B, E
analyzed

119
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Arrhythmia Relearning

Ectopic Status Messages

The label B or E indicates basic (B) or enhanced (E) arrhythmia capability.

Ectopic Status Message Explanation B or E

(No message displayed) No ectopic activity within the last minute
RUN PVCs More than 2 consecutive PVCs within the last minute E
PAIR PVCs Pair PVCs within the last minute E
PACER NOT CAPT Pause with pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last minute B, E
PACER NT PACING Pause without pace pulse (paced patient only) within the last minute B, E
PAUSE No beat detected for 1.75 x average R-R interval for HR <120, or E
No beat for 1 second with HR >120 (non-paced patient only), or
No beat detected for more than the set pause threshold.
R-ON-T PVCs R-ON-T detected within the last minute E
MULTIFORM PVCs Multiform PVCs detected within the last minute E
FREQUENT SVPBs SVPB count within last minute is greater than 5 E
SVPBs 1-5 SVPBs in the last minute with a sinus rhythm and no Vs E
SV BEATS SV count within last minute and rhythm status is PACED B, E
PACED BEATS Paced beat count within last minute and rhythm status is NOT B, E
PACED

Arrhythmia Relearning
During a learning phase:
• Alarm timeout periods are cleared
• Stored arrhythmia templates are cleared
• Asystole, Vfib, and HR alarms (when there are enough beats to compute the HR) are active. No other
alarms are active.

Initiating Arrhythmia Relearning Manually

1 To initiate relearning manually, in the Setup Arrhythmia menu, select Relearn Arrhy.
– While the monitor is learning, the delayed arrhythmia wave displays the beat label L and the
rhythm status message Learning ECG.
– Next, the monitor determines the dominant rhythm. The beats are labeled N, and the rhythm
status message changes to Learning Rhythm.
2 After relearning is complete, you should check the delayed arrhythmia wave to ensure that the
algorithm is labeling the beats correctly.
3 If beats are still not classified correctly, check that the ECG is optimized for arrhythmia
monitoring. You may need to select a different lead or change the electrodes or electrode positions
if there is excessive noise, unstable voltage, low amplitude, or large P- or T-waves.

120
Arrhythmia Alarms 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Automatic Arrhythmia Relearn

Arrhythmia relearning is initiated automatically whenever:
• ECG monitoring is switched on
• The ECG Lead or Lead Label of the primary/secondary lead is changed manually, or when fallback
occurs
• A Leads Off INOP condition (that has been active for > 60 seconds) ends.
• A telemetry device is directly connected to the monitor, or disconnected.
If you are monitoring multi-lead arrhythmia and there is a change in one lead only, relearning happens
only in the affected lead. During this learning phase, the system will continue monitoring using the
other lead. Therefore, the delayed arrhythmia wave is not labeled L and there is no Learning ECG
rhythm status message. In addition, alarm timeout periods are maintained, stored arrhythmia
templates are maintained for the operative lead, and all alarms switched on are active.

Arrhythmia Relearn and Lead Fallback

Lead fallback triggers an automatic arrhythmia relearn.

WARNING If arrhythmia learning takes place during ventricular rhythm, the ectopics may be incorrectly learned as
the normal QRS complex. This may result in missed detection of subsequent events of V-Tach and V-
Fib.
For this reason you should:
• take care to initiate arrhythmia relearning only during periods of predominantly normal rhythm and
when the ECG signal is relatively noise-free
• be aware that arrhythmia relearning can happen automatically
• respond to any INOP messages (for example, if you are prompted to reconnect electrodes)
• be aware that a disconnected EASI electrode triggers an arrhythmia relearn on all leads
• always ensure that the arrhythmia algorithm is labeling beats correctly.

Arrhythmia Alarms
Arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off and the alarm settings changed just like other
measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms section. Special alarm features which apply only to
arrhythmia are described here.
The different alarms detected and generated by the monitor depend on the level of arrhythmia analysis
that is enabled. For a complete list of arrhythmia alarms and INOPs, see the Alarms chapter.
The monitor detects arrhythmia alarm conditions by comparing ECG data to a set of pre-defined
criteria. An alarm can be triggered by a rate exceeding a threshold (for example, HR >xx), an abnormal
rhythm (for example, Ventricular Bigeminy), or an ectopic event (for example, Pair PVCs).

121
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Arrhythmia Alarms

Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms

Yellow arrhythmia alarms are short yellow alarms specific to arrhythmia-related patient conditions.
Depending on your monitor and Information Center configuration, they may be shown with one or
two stars. The heart rate alarms (High HR and Low HR) can be configured as short yellow or standard
yellow alarms. When they are standard yellow alarms they exist independently of the other arrhythmia
alarms and no timeout periods apply.

WARNING When arrhythmia analysis is on, all yellow ECG and arrhythmia alarms are short yellow alarms (one-
star). This means that the yellow alarm lamp and the tones are active for six seconds only, after which
the blinking numeric and the alarm message remain for up to three minutes. The only exception to this
are the HR High and Low alarms which can be configured as standard yellow alarms. Red alarms
behave as usual.

Arrhythmia Alarms and Latching

When using arrhythmia analysis, Visual Latching and Audible Latching should be on
for red alarms, or at least Visual Latching should be on. Because of the transient nature of
arrhythmia alarms, many arrhythmia conditions may go unnoticed if alarm latching is off. This setting
can only be changed in Configuration Mode.

Switching Individual Arrhythmia Alarms On and Off

Some arrhythmia alarms can be individually switched on or off. They are:
Pacer not capture, Pacer not pace, Non-Sustain VT, Vent Rhythm, Run PVCs, Pair PVCs, R-on-T
PVCs, V.Bigeminy, V.Trigeminy, Multif.PVCs, Pause, SVT, Irregular HR, Missed Beat, PVCs/min
and Afib.
♦ To switch individual alarms on or off, in the Setup Arrhythmia menu, select the alarm from
the list to toggle between On and Off. The monitor displays the INOP message SOME ECG
ALRMS OFF, if configured, when more alarms are switched off than configured in your active
profile.

Switching All Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms On or Off

All yellow arrhythmia alarms can be switched on and off together. To do this,
♦ In the Setup Arrhythmia menu, select All Yellow Off or All Yellow On.

Adjusting the Arrhythmia Alarm Limits

Some arrhythmia alarms have limits which can be individually adjusted. They are:
Vtach HR, Vtach Run, PVCs/min, Vent Rhythm, SVT HR, SVT Run, Asystole Thresh., Pause
Threshold.
1 To adjust alarm limits, in the Setup Arrhythmia menu, select the alarm to be adjusted.
2 Select the appropriate setting from the pop-up list.

122
Arrhythmia Alarms 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods

Normally, an arrhythmia alarm is announced when an alarm condition is detected. However, there are
certain situations that can inhibit the audible and visible indications of the alarm even though the
alarm condition was detected. These include:
• if a more serious alarm condition is active in the same chain
• if a timeout period is in effect for a particular alarm
• if a timeout period is in effect for a higher alarm in that chain.
See “Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining” on page 124 for more details on alarm chains.

What is a Timeout Period?

Timeout periods are automatically started when a yellow arrhythmia alarm is detected. During this
period, the same alarm condition will not generate another alarm. Alarm conditions further down the
same arrhythmia alarm chain will also not generate an alarm, but alarms further up the chain will: see
“Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining” on page 124).
This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
♦ To view the timeout period configured for your monitor, in the Setup Arrhythmia menu,
see the menu items TimeOut 1st and TimeOut 2nd.

Resetting the Timeout Period

♦ To reset the timeout period, select the Alarms Off or Pause Alarms permanent key and
then reselect it.

How are Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms Indicated?

When a yellow arrhythmia alarm is generated, it triggers visual and audible indicators. Yellow
arrhythmia alarms are always set to latch visually for three minutes except HR High/Low alarms, if
configured to standard yellow. Depending on the alarm condition, audible and visual alarm indicators
will appear as follows:

Alarm Condition Example Audible Indicators Visual Indicators

Short yellow alarm tone Alarm message
sounds ... displayed ...
Single alarm instance Non-sustained when alarm condition is for 3 minutes (latching
V-tach initially detected time)
Continuous alarm condition PVCs/min when alarm condition is until the alarm condition
HIGH initially detected and - as an stops, plus a maximum of
alarm reminder - every time three minutes latching
the configured time out time
period has expired
Same intermittent alarm Pair of PVCs each time the alarm condition
condition is detected, provided that the
configured timeout period has
expired

123
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Arrhythmia Alarms

If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition still exists, the visual indicators
continue until the condition stops. You will get an alarm reminder every time the configured timeout
period has expired.

If you silence a yellow arrhythmia alarm and the alarm condition has stopped, the visual indicators
are immediately cleared. Silencing an alarm does not reset its time out period, so you will not get a
realarm for the same condition or lower on the chain until the timeout expires.

Arrhythmia Alarm Chaining

When arrhythmia analysis is switched on, multiple alarm conditions may be present. Announcing all of
the detected alarm conditions would be confusing, and might hide a more serious condition. For this
reason, arrhythmia alarms are prioritized in three alarm “chains”: PVC Alarms; Beat Detection Alarms,
and Rate Alarms.
Only the highest priority alarm condition in each chain is announced. Lower priority alarms in the
same chain will not be announced while an alarm is active or during the configured timeout period. If
alarm conditions of equal severity from different chains are detected, the alarm condition that occurred
most recently is announced. The exception is Irregular HR, which only occurs if no other alarms are
occurring.
See “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 112 for information on which alarms are
included in the different arrhythmia options. See “Arrhythmia Alarm Timeout Periods” on page 123
for an explanation of how alarm timeouts work.

124
Arrhythmia Alarms 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Red Arrhythmia Alarms

Asystole

Vent Fib/Tach

V-Tach

Extreme Tachy/Extreme Brady

Yellow Arrhythmia Alarms

PVC Alarms Chain Beat Detection Alarms Chain Rate Alarms Chain
higher priority

Non-sustain VT/ Pause SVT

Vent Rhythm
Pacer Not Captured/ HR High/ HR Low* First level
Run PVCs Pacer Not Pacing/ timeout
Missed Beat period
AFib
Pair PVCs (TimeOut
1st)
R-on-T PVCs
lower priority

Vent Bigeminy Second

level
Irregular HR timeout
Vent Trigeminy
(occurs only if no other period
PVCs > xx/min arrhythmia alarms are (TimeOut
present) 2nd)
Multiform PVCs

*If HR High/Low alarms are configured as standard yellow alarms,

they are independent of the arrhythmia alarms and are not in the Rate
alarms chain.

– If there is an active Vent Bigeminy alarm, a PVCs > xx/min will not be triggered because it is
lower on the same chain. However, a high HR alarm will become active because it is on a
different chain.
– Higher priority alarms supersede previous alarms. For example, if a Vent Trigeminy alarm is active
and a Pair PVCs occurs, the Pair alarm will be activated.

Understanding PVC-Related Alarms

PVC-related alarms are detected on the basis of the current ventricular heart rate and the number of
consecutive PVCs counted (referred to as PVC Runs).

Example: This diagram illustrates the conditions under which PVC alarms would be generated if the
Vent Rhythm Run limit is set to 12, the V-Tach Run Limit is set to eight, and the V-Tach HR Limit
is set to 100.

125
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Arrhythmia Alarms

V-Tach Run Limit

** Non-Sustain VT ***V-Tach
**Pair PVC Run < 8
PVC Run ≥ 8

Ventricular Heart Rate

PVCs HR > 100
PVC = HR > 100
2
V-Tach Heart
Rate Limit
100
** Run PVCs ** Vent Rhythm
PVC Run > 2 but ≤ 12 PVC Run > 12
HR ≤ 100 HR ≤ 100

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15
Ventricular Rhythm
Run Limit
Number of Consecutive PVCs (PVC Run)

You will see that

• if both the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit and the V-Tach Run Limit are exceeded, a red V-Tach alarm is
generated
• if the ventricular heart rate exceeds the V-Tach Heart Rate Limit but not the V-Tach Run Limit, a
yellow Non-Sustain VT alarm is generated.

126
About ST Monitoring 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

About ST Monitoring
The monitor performs ST segment analysis on normal and atrially paced beats and calculates ST
segment elevations and depressions. This information can be displayed in the form of ST numerics and
snippets on the monitor.
All available leads can be monitored continuously. The ECG waveform does not need to be displayed
on the monitor for ST Segment analysis.
ST analysis is always performed using a dedicated filter which ensures diagnostic quality. If you are
monitoring ECG using an ECG filter mode other than Diagnostic, the ST segment of the ECG wave
may look different from the ST segment of the ST snippet for the same wave. For diagnostic evaluation
of the ST segment, always switch to Diagnostic filter mode or use the ST snippet.

WARNING Some clinical conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable ST monitoring, for example:
• if you are unable to get a lead that is not noisy
• if arrhythmias such as atrial fib/flutter are present, which may cause an irregular baseline
• if the patient is continuously ventricularly paced
• if the patient has left bundle branch block.
You should consider switching ST monitoring off if these conditions are present.
This monitor provides ST level change information; the clinical significance of the ST level change
information should be determined by a physician.
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for
use with neonatal and pediatric patients. For this reason, the recommended - and default - setting for
ST monitoring in neonatal and pediatric modes is ST Analysis: Off.

Switching ST On and Off

♦ To switch all ST monitoring on or off, in the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST
Analysis to toggle between On and Off.

Selecting Leads for ST Analysis

You select which leads to use for ST analysis in the Setup ST Analysis menu.
To see the current list of leads selected for ST analysis:
1 Enter the Setup ST Analysis menu.
2 Select Setup ST Leads. This opens the Setup ST Leads pop-up window. Leads chosen
for ST monitoring are listed here. There are two pop-up keys at the bottom of the screen:

Add Delete

If all leads are already selected, the Add pop-up key is disabled.
To choose a lead for ST monitoring:
1 Select the Add key at the bottom of the Setup ST Leads window. This opens the Choices
pop-up window.

127
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Understanding the ST Display

2 Choose a lead from the list for ST monitoring. This closes the Choices window and adds the
selected lead to the list of chosen leads.
To disable ST monitoring for a lead:
1 Choose a lead from the list in the Setup ST Leads window.
2 Select the Delete key. This removes this lead from the list.

NOTE The order in which ST leads are listed in the Setup ST Leads menu determines the order in which ST
leads are displayed on the monitor screen.
To change the order in which ST leads are displayed,
1 In the Setup ST Leads menu, choose a lead from the list.
2 Select the Sort Up or Sort Down key to move the lead up or down in the list.

Understanding the ST Display

Your monitor screen may be configured to look slightly different from the illustrations.

2 3

1 ST-II 1.2
ST-V 2.5
ST-aVR -3.0

1 ST numerics
2 Current HR alarm limits
3 Current heart rate

ST Numerics Up to 12 ST numerics plus the ST index can be displayed on the monitor screen. They
can be configured to show beside the measurement numerics, beside the ECG wave, or beside the ST
snippet.
A positive ST value indicates ST segment elevation; a negative value indicates depression.
ST numerics are displayed in the order in which you select ST leads for analysis. If there is additional
space in the field assigned to ST numerics, the monitor will display extra numerics in the order in
which they appear in the Setup ST Analysis -> Setup ST Leads list. Any ST leads
switched on for analysis that do not fit in the assigned numerics field are shown in succession in place
of the last ST numeric.

ST Index The ST index numeric (STindx) is the sum of the absolute values for the ST leads V2, V5,
aVF. Because it is based on absolute values, it is always a positive number. If you haven’t selected one of
the leads V2, V5, and aVF for ST analysis, the STindx numeric will display a question mark “?”.
♦ To switch the ST index numeric on or off for display, in the Setup ST Analysis menu,
select ST-Index to toggle between On and Off.

128
Updating ST Baseline Snippets 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

ST Snippets ST snippets show a one second wave segment for each measured ST lead. The most
recent snippet is drawn in the same color as the ECG wave, usually green, superimposed over the
stored baseline snippet, drawn in a different color. The comparison shows any deviation in the
measurement since the baseline snippet was stored, for example as a result of a procedure carried out on
the patient.
The information is updated once per minute.
If you do not see ST snippets on the Screen, select the Screen name in the Monitor Info Line and select
a Screen configured to show snippets from the pop-up list of available Screens.

ST Baseline Window The ST Baseline Window shows an ST snippet drawn on a grid. The current
ST numeric and the ST numeric stored with the baseline are shown, as well as the difference between
these two numerics.
A “?” in front of the difference numeric indicates that the ST measurement points were adjusted since
the baseline snippet was stored.
The Baseline Window opens with the ST pop-up keys Update Baseline, Record ST, Change
ST Lead, Adjust ST Points, ST Map and arrow keys for scrolling through the available leads.
♦ To view the ST Baseline window, select any snippet on the Screen.

1
ST Baseline
ST-II
2 -0.8
1.9
?-2.7

5
ST Baseline from 14 Feb 03 9:38
6

1 ST label and numeric

2 Baseline ST numeric and difference since baseline was stored
3 1mV calibration bar
4 Current snippet
5 ST baseline
6 Timestamp of most recently stored baseline snippet

Updating ST Baseline Snippets

ST analysis requires valid samples to measure and store a snippet. ST Snippets and ST values are
updated every minute. If there is artifact in the signal, it may take longer for an ST snippet and an ST
value to appear.

129
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Recording ST Segments

The first baseline is stored automatically after ST monitoring is started, or when a new patient is
admitted. To update ST baselines,
1 Select an ST snippet to open the ST Baseline window.
2 In the ST Baseline window, select Update Baseline to store all current snippets as
baselines. This deletes all previously-stored baselines.

Recording ST Segments
♦ To record all currently available ST snippets and baselines, in the ST Baseline window, select
the pop-up key Record ST.

About the ST Measurement Points

The ST value for each beat complex is the vertical difference between the ISO point and the ST point,
as shown in the diagram below. The isoelectric (ISO) point provides the baseline, the ST point is at the
midpoint of the ST segment. The J point is where the QRS complex changes its slope; as it is a fixed
distance away from the ST point, it can be useful to help you position the ST point correctly.

R-wave peak at 0 msec

J point, for example, 48 msec

T
P

Difference = ST value

Q
S
Isoelectric point set to -80 msec ST measurement point, for example, J + 60 msec

CAUTION The ST measurement points need to be adjusted when you start monitoring, and if the patient's heart
rate or ECG morphology changes significantly, as this may affect the size of the QT interval and thus
the placement of the ST point. Artifactual ST segment depression or elevation may occur if the
isoelectric point or the ST point is incorrectly set.
Always ensure that ST measurement points are appropriate for your patient.

Adjusting ST Measurement Points

Depending on your monitor’s configuration, the ST point can be positioned either

130
About the ST Measurement Points 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

• relative to the J-point.

In the Adjust ST Points window, the pop-up keys ISO Point, J Point and ST Point are
visible and can be adjusted.
or
• directly by selecting a numeric value for the ST point.
In the Adjust ST Points window, you can adjust the ISO and ST point.
The ST Uses setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
To adjust the ST measurement points,
1 In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select Adjust ST Points to open the Adjust ST
Points window. Alternatively, you can use the Adjust ST Points pop-up key in the ST
Baseline window.
2 Select a suitable ECG lead for ST measurement, with a visible J-point and a visible P wave. Use the
up and down arrow keys to scroll through the ST snippets for the other ECG leads.
3 Use the Select Point pop-up key to scroll through the points and activate the point you need
to adjust, then use the left and right arrow keys to move the measurement point. Each point is
highlighted while active.

ST label and the ST

numeric that would Adjust ST Points
apply using the ST-I
current points 0.0

1mV calibration bar

Cursors for adjusting

ST points

ST Points adjusted at 04 Apr 07 11:38

Timestamp of most
recent ST point ISO Point -80 J Point 48 ST Point J+60
adjustment

Highlighted ST point

The ISO-point cursor positions the isoelectric point relative to the R-wave
peak. The relation is shown beside the ISO-point in milliseconds. Position the
ISO-point in the middle of the flattest part of the baseline (between the P and
ISO Q waves or in front of the P wave).

131
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring ST Alarms

The J-point cursor positions the J-point relative to the R-wave peak. It helps
you to correctly position the ST-point. Position the J-point at the end of the
QRS complex and the beginning of the ST segment.
The J-point cursor is not available if your monitor is configured to let you set
the ST point directly.

To position the ST-point relative to the J-point:

select either J + 60 or J + 80. Select J Point and use the arrow keys
to move the J-Point and position the ST-point at the midpoint of the ST
segment.
To position the ST-point directly:
select ST Point and use the left and right arrow keys to position the ST
point at the midpoint of the ST segment.
4 Select the Apply Changes pop-up key to activate the new ST measurement points and
recalculate all ST values.
The most recent ST Points adjustment time is displayed in the Adjust ST Points window.
This information is cleared when a patient is discharged or when a new Profile is loaded into the
monitor.
5 To update the ST snippet shown in the Adjust ST Points window, select the Update pop-
up key.

ST Alarms
ST alarms are yellow alarms. Each ST lead has its own alarm limit. ST alarms are triggered when an ST
value exceeds its alarm limit for more than one minute. Switching ST alarms off switches off alarms for
all ST leads.
If more than one ST measurement is in alarm, the monitor only displays the alarm message of the ST
lead which is currently furthest from its set alarm limits.

Single- or Multi-lead ST Alarming

Be aware that if multi-lead ST alarming is switched on, only alarms involving more than one ST lead
will be announced.
To choose individual or multi-lead ST alarming,
♦ In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST Alarm Mode and select either Single ST
or Multi ST.

Changing ST Alarm Limits

The monitor can detect alarms on each ST lead separately, so you can set high and low ST alarm limits
individually for each ST lead. You can also set separate alarm limits for single-lead and multi-lead ST
monitoring. Set the high and low alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical
condition, unit protocols, physician orders or medication specified limits. A good guideline is + 1.0
mm or - 1.0 mm from the patients's ST, or follow your hospital protocol.
1 In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST Alarm Mode and select Single ST or
Multi ST.

132
Viewing ST Maps 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

2 Select the alarm to be adjusted.

3 Select the appropriate setting.

Viewing ST Maps
The monitor can derive a multi-axis portrait (map) from the ST analysis to help you detect changes in
ST values. It displays two planes obtained from a multilead ECG in a multi-axis diagram, where each
axis represents a lead. The ST value at the J point is given. The position of the axes within the diagram
correspond to the placement of the ECG leads. Each ST value is assigned to either a limb lead, or to a
chest lead. Every axis shows the polarity of the lead it represents. By joining adjacent ST values, the
monitor obtains the ST map. The contour line, and the map shading, is shown in the same color as the
ECG parameter.

Current View
In current view, the monitor displays an ST map that corresponds to the current ST values. Three or
more leads per plane are necessary to display a map.
The left of the following diagram shows leads I, II, III, aVR, aVL, and aVF on the limb leads. On the
right, the V-leads (V1, V2, V3, V4, V5, and V6) are on the chest leads.
-
alarm status indicator 12-Lead EASI indicator ST index (for EASI)

ST Map (Current)

EASI Limb leads EASI Chest Leads

ST map ST label, value and polarity of corresponding lead

133
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Viewing ST Maps

If an ST lead is switched off, its axis is not shown in the map.

If a lead is in INOP (the value is being measured but is invalid or unavailable because, for example, the
corresponding ECG electrode is unplugged), the area formed by the remaining ST leads is left open.

If there is insufficient information (for example, there are less than three chest leads) for a second ST map to
be displayed, the currently available ST values are displayed in place of the second ST map.

Limb Leads ST-I

ST-II
ST-aVR
ST-aVL
ST-aVF

Trend View
In trend view, you can see up to four trended ST maps, and the current ST map, simultaneously. You
can configure the time interval between trended samples. The most recent map is shown in the same
color as the parameter itself. Past values change from white through dark gray. In the diagram below,
the time interval between trends is 12 seconds. The first trended sample is white and is 12 seconds old.
The second trended sample corresponds to the ST values 24 seconds ago and so forth. The ST values
on the diagrams show the current ST values.
If a lead is turned off, its axis is no longer shown. This has no impact on the presentation of trended
values that were recorded while the lead was still on. In the diagram below, lead V4 was switched off 20
seconds ago. The current ST values and the first trended value reflect this change in the lead setup. All
other maps are displayed the way in which they were recorded.

134
Viewing ST Maps 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

ST Map (Trend)

Limb Leads Chest Leads

Interval
12 sec

trending interval current ST values

In this diagram, V4 was either temporarily switched off, or in INOP,

for around 30 seconds. No data was recorded. Consequently, the
affected maps are not closed.

Viewing an ST Map
To display an ST map,
♦ In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST Map.

Working in the ST Map Task Window

You may need to activate the ST map task window to see all the data, and to access the pop-up keys.
Select the map view on screen to activate its task window. Once you activate it, you can perform the
tasks detailed here.

Switching Between ST Map Views

To switch between views,
♦ Select Current View or Trend View to toggle between views.
If your trend view is empty, you need to adjust the priority of this measurement in the trending
priority list. See “Trend Priority” on page 212.

135
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Viewing ST Maps

Displaying an ST Reference Baseline

You can display an ST reference baseline for the current view, or for the trended view. The baseline is
shown in yellow. However, if the ECG color is yellow, the baseline is shown in green. Use this baseline
to detect ST changes. The baseline is derived automatically whenever the monitor relearns arrhythmia
and also on user request.
♦ Select Show Baseline/Hide Baseline to toggle between baseline display on and off.

Updating an ST Map Reference Baseline

To update the baseline,
♦ In the Setup ST Analysis menu, select ST Baseline -> Update baseline.

Changing the Scale of the ST Map

To change scale,
♦ Select Size Up or Size Down to alter the size at which monitor displays the map.

Changing the Trending Interval

To determine how frequently the monitor displays a trended sample,
1 In Trend view, select Select Interval.
2 Select the required interval from the menu. The interval ranges between 12 seconds to 30 minutes.

Printing an ST Map Report

To print the most recently viewed (current or trend) window,
1 Select Main Setup - > Reports.
2 Select ST Map.
3 Press Print.

136
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring

The QT interval is defined as the time between the beginning of the Q-wave and the end of the
T-wave. It measures the total duration of the depolarization (QRS duration) and repolarization (ST-T)
phases of the ventricular action potential. QT interval monitoring can assist in the detection of
prolonged QT interval syndrome.

T
P

Q S
QT interval

The QT interval has an inverse relationship to heart rate. Faster heart rates shorten the QT interval and
slower heart rates prolong the QT interval. Therefore there are several formulas used to correct the QT
interval for heart rate. The heart rate corrected QT interval is abbreviated as QTc. The monitor uses as
a default the Bazett correction formula and the alternative Fridericia formula can be selected in
Configuration Mode.
For QT interval monitoring to be effective, basic or enhanced arrhythmia monitoring should be turned
on.

QT Measurement Algorithm
The QT values are updated every five minutes except in the initial phase (first five minutes) where they
are updated once per minute. Normal or atrial paced beats and beats with a similar morphology are
averaged to form a representative waveform for further processing. Normal beats followed by a
premature QRS will be excluded from the measurements to prevent the premature beat from obscuring
the end of the T-wave. If the algorithm cannot form a representative waveform, for example because
the morphology of the beats is too varied, a CANNOT ANALYZE QT INOP will be generated after 10
minutes. This is also the case if normal beats have been falsely labelled so that the algorithm does not
have enough valid beats to make QT measurements. No QT value is calculated if the QT-HR is
>150 bpm (Adult) or >180 bpm (Pedi/Neo).
Because of the different algorithm approaches, a QT/QTc measurement from a diagnostic 12-lead
program may differ from the realtime measurement on the monitor.

Where Can I Find More Information?

See the Application Note on QT/QTc Interval Monitoring and the QT Interval Monitoring Quick
Guide supplied on your documentation DVD for detailed information on the QT algorithm and
performance.

137
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring

Indications For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring

Of special concern for QT monitoring is the administration of QT prolonging drugs to patients
identified with risk factors for Torsade de Pointe. Females, older patients and patients with
bradycardia, impaired left ventricular function (ischemia, left ventricular hypertrophy), hypokalemia
and hypomagnesemia are in this increased risk category.

Limitations For Use Of QT Interval Monitoring

Some conditions may make it difficult to achieve reliable QT monitoring, for example:
• the T-wave is very flat
• T-waves are not well defined due to atrial flutter or atrial fibrillation
• the end of the T-wave is difficult to define because of the presence of U-waves
• a high heart rate causes the P-wave to encroach on the end of the previous T-wave
• noise or high QRS morphology variation
For these cases you should select a lead with a good T-wave amplitude and no visible flutter activity,
and without a predominant U-wave or P-wave.
Some conditions such as left or right bundle branch block or hypertrophy can lead to a widened QRS
complex. If a long QTc is observed you should verify it to ensure that it is not caused by QRS
widening.
Because normal beats followed by ventricular beats are not included in the analysis, no QT
measurement will be generated in the presence of a bigeminy rhythm.
If the heart rate is extremely high (over 150 bpm for adults and over 180 bpm for pediatrics and
neonates) QT will not be measured.
When the heart rate changes, it can take several minutes for the QT interval to stabilize. For reliable
QTc calculation it is important to avoid a region where the heart rate is changing.

WARNING QT/QTc measurements should always be verified by a qualified clinician.

Selecting The QT Leads

For QT Monitoring you can select one of the following three modes:
• All Leads mode - all available leads (I, II, III, V, MCL, V1 - V6) are used to produce a global QT
measurement. For EASI lead placement, directly acquired AI, AS and ES leads are used.
• Primary-Lead mode - the primary lead will be used for QT measurement. If the original primary
lead becomes unavailable or is changed, QT measurement will continue with the new primary lead.
• Single-Lead mode - a single lead selected from all available leads (except the augmented leads) will be
used for QT measurement. QT measurement will stop if the selected lead becomes unavailable.
To select the mode,
1 Select the QT numeric to enter the Setup QT Analysis window.
2 Select QT Lead and select All, Primary Lead or one of the available single leads.
When using the All Leads mode, make sure when you compare QT values that they are based on the
same set of leads.

138
About QT/QTc Interval Monitoring 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Changing the lead(s) used for QT measurements will not cause the baseline to be reset.

QT View
In the QT View window you can verify that the QT algorithm detects correct Q and T points.

The current waves are shown in the upper half of the window and the baseline waves in a different
color below. The Q and T points are marked with a vertical line. By selecting one of the lead labels at
the top of the window you can highlight the corresponding wave; the other waves are shown in gray.
The underlined lead labels are the leads used for the QT calculation. By selecting the numeric area you
can highlight all underlined leads.

Changing The View To A Single Wave Set

To view one set of waves in a larger scale, you can cycle through the different views,
1 Select Current view to see the set of current waves.
2 Select Baseline view to see the set of baseline waves.
3 Select Split view to return to the combined view with current and baseline waves.

Setting The QT Baseline

In order to quantify changes in the QTc value, you can set a QTc baseline. For example to assess the
effect of medication on the QT interval you can set the current value as the baseline before you begin
medication. This baseline will then be used to calculate the ΔQTc value.
To set the baseline,
♦ Select Set Baseline and set the value.

139
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring QT Alarms

If no baseline has been set for this patient, the first five minute value after the start of monitoring is
automatically set as baseline. If you set a new baseline the previous baseline is discarded. As the ΔQTc
alarm is based on the difference between the baseline and the current value, setting an inappropriate
new baseline may prevent a ΔQTc alarm from being generated. Discharging a patient clears the
baseline.

Printing The QT Waves

To start a printout,
♦ Select Print QT.

Recording The QT Waves

To start a recording,
♦ Select Record QT.

QT Alarms
There are two QT alarms, QTc high limit alarm and ΔQTc high alarm. The QTc high limit alarm is
generated when the QTc value exceeds the set limit for more than 5 minutes. The ΔQTc alarm is
generated when the difference between the current value and the baseline value exceeds the set limit for
more than 5 minutes.
The CANNOT ANALYZE QT INOP and the ?_will be displayed when no QT measurement could be
calculated for 10 minutes. Up to this time the previous valid value will be displayed. The following
additional messages on the cause of the invalid measurements may also be displayed.

Additional Message Cause of Invalid QT Measurement

QT Startup QT monitoring was just turned on or has been reset
Asystole or Leads Off 1 Not all specified leads needed to perform QT analysis are
available, or
2 Asystole condition is detected
Insufficient Valid Not enough valid QRS complexes to generate a QT measurement
Leads
Invalid rhythm for QTc Not enough valid RR intervals to generate QT-HR, the averaged HR
used for QTc calculation
High QT-HR QT-HR exceeds the specified upper limit of 150 bpm (for adults) or 180
bpm (for neonates and pediatrics)
Small R Wave R-wave of the signal is too small
Small T Wave T-wave of the signal is too small
End of T Not detected End of the T-Wave cannot be accurately detected
QT Out Of Range QT measurement is outside the specified range of valid QT values (200-
800 msec)
QTc Out Of Range QTc measurement is outside the specified range of valid QTc values
(200-800 msec)
QTc Erratic QTc measurements are not stable

140
Switching QT Monitoring On and Off 7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring

Switching Individual QTc Alarms On and Off

Each QTc alarm can be switched off individually.
♦ To switch an alarm on or off, in the Setup QT Analysis menu, select QTc High Alarm
or ΔQTc High Alarm to toggle between On and Off.

Changing QTc Alarm Limits

Set the high alarm limits based on your assessment of the patient's clinical condition, unit protocols,
physician orders or medication specified limits.
1 In the Setup QT Analysis menu, select QTc High Limit.
2 Select the appropriate setting.
3 Select ΔQTc High Limit.
4 Select the appropriate setting.

Switching QT Monitoring On and Off

♦ To switch all QT monitoring on or off, in the Setup QT Analysis menu, select QT
Analysis to switch between On and Off.

141
7 ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Monitoring Switching QT Monitoring On and Off

142
 8

8Monitoring Pulse Rate

The pulse numeric counts the arterial pulsations that result from the mechanical activity of the heart in
beats per minute (bpm). You can display a pulse from any measured SpO2 signal (pleth wave), or any
arterial pressure (P, ABP, ART, Ao, PAP, UAP, FAP, BAP: see the pressure section for an explanation
of the pressure labels). The displayed pulse numeric is labeled and color-coded to match its source
wave. If the pulse numeric is not displayed, see the Setup Pulse menu to check whether it is
switched on.

Entering the Setup Pulse Menu

If a pulse numeric is displayed on the screen, select it to enter the Setup Pulse (Pulse
Source) menu. If no pulse numeric is visible, in the Setup SpO2 menu or a Setup arterial
pressure menu, select Pulse (Pulse Source).

System Pulse Source

The currently selected system pulse source is shown in the setup menus of the pulse source
measurements. The pulse rate chosen as system pulse:
• is monitored as system pulse and generates alarms when you select pulse as the active alarm source
• is sent via the network to the Information Center, if available
• is trended in the HighRes Trends and stored in the monitor’s databases.
To define which pulse rate is used as system pulse,
1 In the Setup Pulse menu, select System Pulse.
2 Select one of the SpO2 or arterial pressure labels from the pop-up list, or select Auto.
If you select Auto, the monitor automatically chooses a pulse rate to be used as system pulse. It
looks through the list from top to bottom and activates the first pulse rate that is switched on and
available.
If your selected pulse source measurement becomes unavailable or is switched off, the monitor will use
the next measurement from the list as system pulse until the selected pulse source measurement
becomes available again.

143
8 Monitoring Pulse Rate Switching Pulse On and Off

Switching Pulse On and Off

To switch a particular pulse numeric on or off, enter the Setup Pulse menu via the measurement
setup menu or wave menu of the pulse source. For example, to switch an SpO2 pulse numeric on or
off,
1 Enter the Setup Pulse menu by selecting the Pulse numeric or by selecting Pulse in the
Setup SpO2 menu.
2 In the Setup Pulse menu, select Pulse (Pulse Source) to toggle between On and
Off.

Using Pulse Alarms

You can change pulse rate alarm limits in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu which can be accessed
from the Setup Pulse menu or the Setup ECG menu by selecting Alarm Source (xxx)
where xxx is the current alarm source. Changing the alarm limits for a specific Pulse numeric changes
the alarm limits for all pulse rate alarms and heart rate alarms.
Pulse alarms are only generated when the active alarm source is set to Pulse, a pulse source is set as
system pulse and pulse alarms are switched on.

Selecting the Active Alarm Source: ECG or Pulse?

In most cases the HR and Pulse numerics are identical. In order to avoid simultaneous alarms on HR
and Pulse, the monitor uses either ECG or Pulse as its active alarm source. To change the alarm source,
select Alarm Source in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu, then select
• ECG: if you want the HR to be the alarm source for HR/Pulse.
• Pulse: If you select Pulse as the active alarm source, the monitor will prompt you to confirm your
choice. Be aware that if you select Pulse as the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are
switched off.
• Auto: If the Alarm Source is set to Auto, the monitor will use the heart rate from the ECG
measurement as the alarm source whenever the ECG measurement is switched on and at least one
ECG lead can be measured without an INOP condition.
The monitor will automatically switch to Pulse as the alarm source if:
– a valid ECG lead can no longer be measured
and
– a Pulse source is switched on and available,
The monitor then uses the pulse rate from the measurement currently active as system pulse. While
Pulse is the alarm source, all arrhythmia and ECG HR alarms are switched off. If an ECG lead
becomes available again, the monitor automatically uses HR as alarm source.

Note: If ECG is switched off, the monitor will always change to Pulse as alarm source, if a Pulse is
available. One exception to this rule can arise when you have a telemetry device paired with your
monitor. The monitor ECG is then deactivated but the monitor may be configured to allow only ECG
as the active alarm source. In this case the monitor will not switch to Pulse as alarm source and Pulse
will not be available as a selection in the ECG/Pulse Alarms menu.

144
Using Pulse Alarms 8 Monitoring Pulse Rate

WARNING Selecting Pulse as the active alarm source for HR/Pulse switches off the arrhythmia alarms listed in the
section “ECG and Arrhythmia Alarm Overview” on page 112, including Asystole, Vfib and Vtach
alarms, and the heart rate alarms. This is indicated by the message ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF (unless
this has been configured off for your monitor), and the crossed-out alarm symbol beside the ECG heart
rate numeric. The message ECG/ARRH ALARM OFF can be configured off, or to switch to a yellow
(medium severity) INOP after a fixed number of hours.
High and low pulse rate and extreme bradycardia and extreme tachycardia alarms from pulse are active.

Alarm Source Selection Disabled

If Alarm Source Selection is disabled, you cannot change the alarm source. If you try to change the
source, the monitor displays the message To activate enter Config and enable
Alarm Source Selection. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.

Changing HR/Pulse Alarm Limits

As Pulse and HR share the same high and low alarm limits, if you change the alarm limit in the
Setup Pulse menu, the high or low alarm limits for HR in the Setup ECG menu change
automatically, and vice versa. The only exceptions are caused by a low limit clamp for each
measurement: the lowest value for Pulse when derived from SpO2 is 30 bpm; for HR 15 bpm, and for
Pressure 25 bpm.

Extreme Alarm Limits

The extreme rate alarms, Extreme Tachy and Extreme Brady, generated by the active alarm source,
either HR or Pulse, are set in Configuration Mode by adding a set value to the high and low alarm
limits. You need to know what value has been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and
low alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦ To see the values added to the high and low limit alarms to create the extreme rate alarms for your
monitor, in the Setup ECG menu, see the menu items ΔExtrTachy and ΔExtrBrady.

QRS Tone
The active alarm source is also used as a source for the QRS tone. You can change the tone volume in
the Setup SpO2 and Setup ECG menus and the QRS tone modulation in the Setup SpO2
menu.

WARNING The audible QRS tone might be influenced by external interference and is not intended to be used as a
substitute for ECG based arrhythmia analysis.
If arrhythmia detection is needed, do not rely on the audible QRS tone.

145
8 Monitoring Pulse Rate Using Pulse Alarms

146
 9

9Monitoring Respiration Rate

(Resp)
For the respiratory measurement (Resp), the monitor measures the thoracic impedance between two
ECG electrodes on the patient’s chest. Changes in the impedance due to thoracic movement produce
the Resp waveform on the monitor screen. The monitor counts the waveform cycles to calculate the
respiration rate (RR).

Lead Placement for Monitoring Resp

Correct patient skin preparation techniques for electrode placement are important for Resp
measurement: you will find this information in the chapter on ECG.
The Resp measurement uses the standard ECG cable sets and lead placements. You can use any of the
different types of ECG cable sets - 3-lead, 5-lead, 6-lead or 10-lead, using either standard or EASI™
placement - to measure Resp, as long as you use ICU ECG cables.
The Resp signal is always measured between two of the ECG electrodes. If you are using standard ECG
electrode placement, Resp is measured between the RA and LL electrodes. If you are using EASI™
ECG electrode placement, Resp is measured between the I and A electrodes.

Optimizing Lead Placement for Resp

If you want to measure Resp and you are already measuring ECG, you may need to optimize
placement of the two electrodes between which Resp will be measured for some patients. Repositioning
ECG electrodes from standard positions, especially when you are using EASI™ ECG electrode
placement, results in changes in the ECG waveform and may influence ST and arrhythmia
interpretation.

Cardiac Overlay
Cardiac activity that affects the Resp waveform is called cardiac overlay. It happens when the Resp
electrodes pick up impedance changes caused by the rhythmic blood flow. Correct electrode placement
can help to reduce cardiac overlay: avoid the liver area and the ventricles of the heart in the line
between the respiratory electrodes. This is particularly important for neonates.

147
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp) Understanding the Resp Display

Lateral Chest Expansion

Some patients, especially neonates, expand
their chests laterally. In these cases it is best
to place the two respiratory electrodes in the
right midaxillary and left lateral chest areas at
the patient’s maximum point of breathing
movement to optimize the respiratory wave.

Abdominal Breathing
Some patients with restricted chest movement breathe mainly abdominally. In these cases, you may
need to place the left leg electrode on the left abdomen at the point of maximum abdominal expansion
to optimize the respiratory wave.

Understanding the Resp Display

The Resp measurement is displayed on the monitor as a continuous wave and a numeric respiration
rate. If the detected respiration rate is close to the heart rate, this is indicated by the text HR = RR
next to the respiration wave if you are in manual monitoring mode. Your monitor screen may look
slightly different from the illustration.

1 Ohm calibration bar Manually-set Resp detection level Resp numeric and
label
Resp

RR

1 Ohm
22
Changing Resp Detection Modes
The Resp detection level can be set either automatically or manually.
♦ To change the resp detection mode, in the Setup Resp menu, select Detection to toggle
between the settings.

Auto Detection Mode

In Auto Detection Mode, the monitor adjusts the detection level automatically, depending on the wave
height and the presence of cardiac artifact. Note that in Auto Detection Mode,
• the detection level (a dotted line) is not displayed on the waveform,

148
Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave 9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)

• the algorithm expects a heart rate and therefore needs at least 3 electrodes attached to the patient. If
you are monitoring respiration with only two electrodes, the detection algorithm becomes less
sensitive which may result in reduced breath detection performance.
Use Auto Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate is not close to the heart rate
• breathing is spontaneous, with or without continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP)
• patients are ventilated, except patients with Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation (IMV).

Manual Detection Mode

In Manual Detection Mode you must set the Resp detection level.
♦ In the Setup Resp menu, select Manual Up or Manual Down. Use the dotted detection
level line in the Resp waveform to determine when the desired level is reached.
Once set, the detection level will not adapt automatically to different respiration depths. It is important
to remember that if the depth of breathing changes, you may need to change the detection level.
Use Manual Detection Mode for situations where:
• the respiration rate and the heart rate are close.
• patients have Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation.
• respiration is weak. Try repositioning the electrodes to improve the signal.

Resp Detection Modes and Cardiac Overlay

In Auto Detection Mode: If you are monitoring Resp and the ECG is switched off, the monitor
cannot compare the ECG and Resp rates to detect cardiac overlay. The respiration detection level is
automatically set higher to prevent the detection of cardiac overlay as respiration.

In Manual Detection Mode: Cardiac overlay can in certain situations trigger the respiration counter.
This may lead to a false indication of a high respiration rate or an undetected apnea condition. If you
suspect that cardiac overlay is being registered as breathing activity, raise the detection level above the
zone of cardiac overlay. If the Resp wave is so small that raising the detection level is not possible, you
may need to optimize the electrode placement as described in the section ”Lateral Chest Expansion”.

Changing the Size of the Respiration Wave

WARNING When monitoring in Manual Detection Mode, make sure to check the respiration detection level after
you have increased or decreased the size of the respiration wave.

♦ In the Setup Resp menu, select Size Up to increase the size of the wave or Size Down to
decrease it.

149
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp) Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave

Changing the Speed of the Respiration Wave

Resp waveforms are usually viewed at a slower speed than other waveforms. For this reason, the Resp
measurement has its own speed control and is not affected by the wave speed settings of the other
measurements.
♦ Select the Resp wave to enter the Resp Wave menu, then select Change Speed. Choose the
required speed from the pop-up list. This defines the speed at which the wave is drawn across the
screen in millimeters per second (mm/s).

Using Resp Alarms

Resp alarms can be switched on and off and the high and low alarm limits can be changed just like
other measurement alarms, as described in the Alarms chapter.

Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay

The apnea alarm is a high priority red alarm used to detect apneas. The apnea alarm delay time defines
the time period between the point where the monitor cannot detect any respiration activity and the
indication of the apnea alarm.
1 In the Setup Resp menu, select Apnea Time.
2 Select the appropriate setting.

Resp Safety Information

WARNING Respiration detection level If you do not set the detection level for the respiration correctly in manual
detection mode, it may not be possible for the monitor to detect apnea. If you set the detection level
too low, the monitor is more likely to detect cardiac activity, and to falsely interpret cardiac activity as
respiratory activity in the case of apnea.

Apnea The respiration measurement does not recognize obstructive and mixed apneas — it only
indicates an alarm when a pre-adjusted time has elapsed since the last detected breath.
The safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea,
particularly the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.

Interference If operating under conditions according to the EMC Standard EN 60601-1-2 (Radiated
Immunity 3V/m), field strengths above 1V/m may cause erroneous measurements at various
frequencies. Therefore it is recommended to avoid the use of electrically radiating equipment in close
proximity to the respiration measurement unit.

Resp Accessories To monitor respiration, use only the non-OR ECG accessories listed in the Resp
section of the accessories chapter. You cannot measure respiration if you are using an orange OR ECG
cable set. This is because of the higher internal impedance of the OR cable set, required for use if
electro-surgery is being performed.

150
Resp Safety Information 9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp)

Rate adaptive pacemakers: Implanted pacemakers which can adapt to the Minute Ventilation rate
may occasionally react on the Impedance measurement used by patient monitors for the determination
of the Resp value and execute pacing with the maximum programmed rate. Switching off the Resp
measurement can prevent this.

151
9 Monitoring Respiration Rate (Resp) Resp Safety Information

152
 10

10Monitoring SpO2
Philips pulse oximetry uses a motion-tolerant signal processing algorithm, based on Fourier artefact
suppression technology (FAST). It provides four measurements:
• Oxygen saturation of arterial blood (SpO2) - percentage of oxygenated hemoglobin in relation to the
sum of oxyhemoglobin and deoxyhemoglobin (functional arterial oxygen saturation).
• Pleth waveform - visual indication of patient’s pulse.
• Pulse rate (derived from pleth wave) - detected pulsations per minute.
• Perfusion indicator - numerical value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by
arterial pulsation.
The monitors are also compatible with SpO2 technologies from other manufacturers. Please refer to the
instructions for use provided with these devices for further information.

SpO2 Sensors
Familiarize yourself with the instructions for use supplied with your sensor before using it. In
particular, check that the sensor being used is appropriate for your patient category and application
site.

CAUTION Do not use OxiCliq disposable sensors in a high humidity environment, such as in neonatal incubators
or in the presence of fluids, which may contaminate sensor and electrical connections causing
unreliable or intermittent measurements. Do not use disposable sensors on patients who have allergic
reactions to the adhesive.

Applying the Sensor

1 Follow the SpO2 sensor’s instructions for use, adhering to all warnings and cautions.
2 Remove colored nail polish from the application site.
3 Apply the sensor to the patient. The application site should match the sensor size so that the sensor
can neither fall off, nor apply excessive pressure. When using the M1195A Infant Finger Sensor,
select a finger or toe with a diameter of between 7 and 8 mm (0.27” and 0.31”). When applying a
M1193A neonatal sensor do not overtighten the strap.

153
10 Monitoring SpO2 Connecting SpO2 Cables

4 Check that the light emitter and the photodetector are directly opposite each other. All light from
the emitter must pass through the patient’s tissue.

WARNING Loose Sensor: If a sensor is too loose, it might compromise the optical alignment or fall off. If it is too
tight, for example because the application site is too large or becomes too large due to edema, excessive
pressure may be applied. This can result in venous congestion distal from the application site, leading
to interstitial edema, hypoxemia and tissue malnutrition. Skin irritations or lacerations may occur as a
result of the sensor being attached to one location for too long. To avoid skin irritations and
lacerations, periodically inspect the sensor application site and change the application site at least every
four hours.
Venous Pulsation: Do not apply sensor too tightly as this results in venous pulsation which may
severely obstruct circulation and lead to inaccurate measurements.
Ambient Temperature: At elevated ambient temperatures be careful with measurement sites that are
not well perfused, because this can cause severe burns after prolonged application. All listed sensors
operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin if the initial skin temperature does not exceed 35°C.
Extremities to Avoid: Avoid placing the sensor on extremities with an arterial catheter, or intravascular
venous infusion line.

Connecting SpO2 Cables

♦ Connect the sensor cable to the color-coded socket on the monitor. You can connect some Philips
sensors directly to the monitor. For other sensors, use the corresponding adapter cable.

CAUTION Extension cables: Do not use more than one extension cable (M1941A). Do not use an extension cable
with Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates “long” cable
version).
Electrical Interference: Position the sensor cable and connector away from power cables, to avoid
electrical interference.
Humidity: For neonatal patients, make sure that all sensor connectors and adapter cable connectors are
outside the incubator. The humid atmosphere inside can cause inaccurate measurements.

Measuring SpO2
1 Select the correct patient category setting (adult/pediatric and neonatal), as this is used to optimize
the calculation of the SpO2 and pulse numerics.
2 During measurement, ensure that the application site:
– has a pulsatile flow, ideally with a perfusion indicator value above 1.0.
– has not changed in its thickness (for example, due to edema), causing an improper fit of the
sensor.

154
SpO2 Signal Quality Indicator (Fast SpO2 only) 10 Monitoring SpO2

WARNING Inspect the application site every two to three hours to ensure skin quality and correct optical
alignment. If the skin quality changes, move the sensor to another site. Change the application site at
least every four hours.

CAUTION • Injected dyes such as methylene blue, or intravascular dyshemoglobins such as methemoglobin and
carboxyhemoglobin may lead to inaccurate measurements.
• Interference can be caused by:
– High levels of ambient light or strobe lights or flashing lights (such as fire alarm lamps). (Hint:
cover application site with opaque material.)
– Electromagnetic interference.
– Excessive patient movement and vibration.

SpO2 Signal Quality Indicator (Fast SpO2 only)

The SpO2 numeric is displayed together with a signal quality indicator (if configured and enough space
is available) which gives an indication of the reliability of the current values.
The level to which the triangle is filled shows the quality of the signal; the indicator below shows a
medium signal quality, the signal quality is at a maximum when the triangle is completely filled.

SpO2

Assessing a Suspicious SpO2 Reading

Traditionally, pulse rate from SpO2 was compared with heart rate from ECG to confirm the validity of
the SpO2 reading. With newer algorithms, such as FAST-SpO2, this is no longer a valid criteria
because the correct calculation of SpO2 is not directly linked to the correct detection of each pulse.
When pulse rate is very low, or strong arrhythmia is present, the SpO2/Pleth pulse rate may differ from
the heart rate calculated from ECG but this does not indicate an inaccurate SpO2 value.
If you doubt the measured SpO2, use the signal quality indicator (if available) or the pleth wave and
perfusion indicator instead to assess the signal quality.

NOTE With pulse oximetry, sensor movement, ambient light (especially strobe lights or flashing lights) or
electromagnetic interference can give unexpected intermittent readings when the sensor is not attached
to a patient. Especially bandage-type sensor designs are sensitive to minimal sensor movement that
might occur when the sensor is dangling.

155
10 Monitoring SpO2 Changing the Averaging Time

Changing the Averaging Time

Depending on the monitor configuration, you may be able to change the averaging time for the SpO2
values. The averaging time represents the approximate time period used for the calculation. The exact
averaging algorithm depends on the SpO2 technology (option) used and on the signal conditions. The
longer the averaging time, the longer the time needed until the SpO2 value reflects the physiological
event. Fast averaging is useful for situations where an extremely fast measurement is required or few
artifacts are expected. Use slow averaging where you expect the number of artifacts to be relatively high.
1 In the SpO2 Setup, select Average.
2 Select the required averaging time from the list.

Setting the Measurement Mode

When a telemetry device supplies SpO2T to the monitor via short range radio transmission, the
monitor will have a manual measurement mode available. This allows SpO2 measurements to be made
on request and not continuously, helping to save the telemetry device’s battery power.
To set the measurement mode,
1 In the SpO2 Setup, select Mode.
2 Select Continuous or Manual mode.

Making a Manual Measurement

When the measurement mode is set to manual,
♦ In the SpO2 Setup, select Measure SpO2.
When manual measurements are made, there will be no continuous SpO2 monitoring or alarming.
The manual measurement value reflects a momentary status. The numerics from SpO2T
measurements made in manual mode, for example SpO2T, PerfT, PulseT, will remain for a time on
the main screen. They are annotated with the time that the measurement was made to distinguish them
from continuously measured values.

Perf T

Understanding SpO2 Alarms

This refers to SpO2 specific alarms. See the Alarms section for general alarm information. SpO2 offers
high and low limit alarms, and a high priority desat alarm. You cannot set the low alarm limit below
the desat alarm limit.

156
Pleth Wave 10 Monitoring SpO2

CAUTION If you measure SpO2 on a limb that has an inflated NBP cuff, a non-pulsatile SpO2 INOP can occur.
If the monitor is configured to suppress this alarm there may be a delay of up to 60 seconds in
indicating critical patient status, such as sudden pulse loss or hypoxia.

Alarm Delays
There is a delay between a physiological event at the measurement site and the corresponding alarm at
the monitor. This delay has two components:
• The time between the occurrence of the physiological event and when this event is represented by
the displayed numerical values. This delay depends on the algorithmic processing and the
configured averaging time. The longer the averaging time configured, the longer the time needed
until the numerical values reflect the physiological event.
• The time between the displayed numerical values crossing an alarm limit and the alarm indication
on the monitor. This delay is the combination of the configured alarm delay time plus the general
system delay time (see “Monitor Performance Specifications” on page 304).

Adjusting the Alarm Limits

In the Setup SpO2 menu:
• Select High Limit then choose the high alarm limit.
• Select Low Limit then choose the low alarm limit.

WARNING High oxygen levels may predispose a premature infant to retrolental fibroplasia. If this is a
consideration do NOT set the high alarm limit to 100%, which is equivalent to switching the alarm
off.

Adjusting the Desat Limit Alarm

The Desat alarm is a high priority (red) alarm notifying you of potentially life threatening drops in
oxygen saturation.
1 In the Setup SpO2 menu, select Desat Limit.
2 Adjust the limit.

Pleth Wave
The Pleth wave is autoscaled to maximum display size. It decreases only when the signal quality
becomes marginal. It is NOT directly proportional to the pulse volume. If you need an indication of
change in pulse volume, use the perfusion indicator.

157
10 Monitoring SpO2 Perfusion Numeric

minimum size for reliable SpO2 value

Perfusion Numeric
The perfusion numeric (Perf) gives a value for the pulsatile portion of the measured signal caused by
the pulsating arterial blood flow.
As pulse oximetry is based on the pulsatile nature of the signal, you can also use the perfusion numeric
as a quality indicator for the SpO2 measurement. Above 1 is optimal, between 0.3-1 is acceptable.
Below 0.3 is marginal; reposition the sensor or find a better site.

Perfusion Change Indicator

The perfusion change indicator is a graphic symbol which shows the change in the perfusion value,
relative to a reference value which you can set.
To set the current perfusion value as the reference value:
♦ In the Setup SpO2 menu, select Set Perf Ref..
When a reference value has been set, the perfusion change indicator is displayed next to the perfusion
numeric.

Perfusion change
indicator

Setting SpO2/Pleth as Pulse Source

1 In the Setup SpO2 menu, select Pulse (SpO2) to enter the Setup Pulse menu.
2 In the Setup Pulse menu, select System Pulse and select SpO2 from the pop-up list.

Setting Up Tone Modulation

If tone modulation is on, the QRS tone pitch lowers when the SpO2 level drops. Remember, the QRS
tone is derived from either heart rate or pulse depending on which is currently selected as the active
alarm source.
♦ In the Setup SpO2 menu, select Tone Modulation to toggle between Yes (for on) and
No (for off ).

158
Setting the QRS Volume 10 Monitoring SpO2

Tone modulation is licensed under US patent US 4,653,498 from Nellcor Puritan Bennett
Incorporated.

Setting the QRS Volume

♦ In the Setup SpO2 menu, select QRS Volume and set the appropriate QRS tone volume.
When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor there will be no QRS tone.

159
10 Monitoring SpO2 Setting the QRS Volume

160
 11

11Monitoring NBP
This monitor uses the oscillometric method for measuring NBP. In adult and pediatric mode, the
blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the American National
Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992) in relation to
mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements
(depending on the configuration) in a representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference,
the fifth Korotkoff sound was used to determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10-
1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when compared to intra-arterial measurements
in a representative patient population.
The NBP measurement is suitable for use in the presence of electrosurgery and during the discharge of
a cardiac defibrillator according to IEC 601-2-30:1999/EN 60601-2-30:2000.
A physician must determine the clinical significance of the NBP information.

Introducing the Oscillometric NBP Measurement

Oscillometric devices measure the amplitude of pressure changes in the occluding cuff as the cuff
deflates from above systolic pressure. The amplitude suddenly increases as the pulse breaks through the
occlusion in the artery. As the cuff pressure decreases further, the pulsations increase in amplitude,
reach a maximum (which approximates to the mean pressure), and then diminish.
Studies show that, especially in critical cases (arrhythmia, vasoconstriction, hypertension, shock),
oscillometric devices are more accurate and consistent than devices using other noninvasive measuring
techniques.

WARNING Patient Category: Select the correct patient category setting for your patient. Do not apply the higher
adult inflation, overpressure limits and measurement duration to neonatal patients.
Intravenous infusion: Do not use the NBP cuff on a limb with an intravenous infusion or arterial
catheter in place. This could cause tissue damage around the catheter when the infusion is slowed or
blocked during cuff inflation.
Skin Damage: Do not measure NBP on patients with sickle-cell disease or any condition where skin
damage has occurred or is expected.
Unattended measurement: Use clinical judgement to decide whether to perform frequent unattended
blood pressure measurements on patients with severe blood clotting disorders because of the risk of
hematoma in the limb fitted with the cuff.

161
11 Monitoring NBP Preparing to Measure NBP

CAUTION If you spill liquid onto the equipment or accessories, particularly if there is a chance that it can get
inside the tubing or the measurement device, contact your service personnel.

Measurement Limitations
Measurements are impossible with heart rate extremes of less than 40 bpm or greater than 300 bpm, or
if the patient is on a heart-lung machine.
The measurement may be inaccurate or impossible:
• if a regular arterial pressure pulse is hard to detect
• with cardiac arrhythmias
• with excessive and continuous patient movement such as shivering or convulsions
• with rapid blood pressure changes
• with severe shock or hypothermia that reduces blood flow to the peripheries
• with obesity, where a thick layer of fat surrounding a limb dampens the oscillations coming from the
artery
• on an edematous extremity.

Measurement Methods
There are three methods of measuring NBP:
• Manual - measurement on demand.
• Auto - continually repeated measurements (between one and 120 minute adjustable interval).
• Sequence - up to four measurement cycles which will run consecutively, with number of
measurements and interval between them configurable for each cycle.
• STAT - rapid series of measurements over a five minute period, then the monitor returns to the
previous mode. Use only on supervised patients.

Reference Method
The NBP measurement reference method can be Auscultatory (manual cuff) or Invasive (intra-
arterial). For further information, see the Application Note on NBP supplied on the monitor
documentation CD-ROM.

In Adult and Pediatric mode to check the current setting, select Main Setup -> Measurements
-> NBP, and check whether the Reference setting is set to Auscultatory or Invasive. This
setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.

In Neonatal mode, to comply with safety standards, invasive is always used as the reference method.
This setting cannot be changed and is not visible in any operating mode.

Preparing to Measure NBP

1 Connect the cuff to the air tubing.

162
Preparing to Measure NBP 11 Monitoring NBP

2 Plug the air tubing into the red NBP connector. Avoid compression or restriction of pressure tubes.
Air must pass unrestricted through the tubing.
3 Make sure that you are using a Philips-approved correct sized cuff and that the bladder inside the
cover is not folded or twisted.
A wrong cuff size, and a folded or twisted bladder, can cause inaccurate measurements. The width
of the cuff should be in the range from 37% to 47% of the limb circumference. The inflatable part
of the cuff should be long enough to encircle at least 80% of the limb.
4 Apply the cuff to a limb at the same level as the patient’s heart. If it is not, you must use the
measurement correction formula to correct the measurement.
The marking on the cuff must match the artery location. Do not wrap the cuff too tightly around
the limb. It may cause discoloration, and ischemia of the extremities. Inspect the application site
regularly to ensure skin quality and inspect the extremity of the cuffed limb for normal color,
warmth and sensitivity. If the skin quality changes, or if the extremity circulation is being affected,
move the cuff to another site or stop the blood pressure measurements immediately. Check more
frequently when making automatic or stat measurements.

Correcting the Measurement if Limb is not at Heart Level

To correct the measurement if the limb is not at heart level, to the displayed value

add 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each centimeter deduct 0.75mmHg (0.10kPa) for each centimeter
higher or lower or
add 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch higher. deduct 1.9mmHg (0.25kPa) for each inch lower.

Understanding the NBP Numerics

Alarm source Measurement Mode Timestamp/
Timer
Sys. Auto

Alarm limits Systolic Diastolic Mean pressure

Depending on the NBP numeric size, not all elements may be visible. Your monitor may be configured
to display only the systolic and diastolic values.

Alarm Sources if you have parallel alarm sources, the sources are displayed instead of the alarm limits.

NBP Timestamp depending on the configured NBP Time setting, the time shown beside the NBP
numeric can be:
– Meas Time: the time of the most recent NBP measurement, or

– Next Meas: the time until the next measurement in an

automatic series, displayed with a graphic representation of the
remaining time, as shown here.

163
11 Monitoring NBP Starting and Stopping Measurements

During measurements the cuff pressure is displayed instead of the units and the repeat time. An early
systolic value gives you a preliminary indication of the systolic blood pressure during measurement.

Starting and Stopping Measurements

Use the Setup menu or SmartKeys to start and stop measurements.

Action to be performed NBP Setup menu SmartKeys

Start manual measurement Start/Stop
Start Auto series Start/
Stop

Start
NBP

Start STAT measurement NBP STAT

NBP
Stat

Start
Stat

Stop Manual measurements Start/Stop

Start/
Stop

Stop
NBP

Stop current Auto measurement Start/Stop

Start/
Stop

Stop
NBP

164
Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition Time 11 Monitoring NBP

Action to be performed NBP Setup menu SmartKeys

Stop current STAT measurement and end series Start/Stop
Start/
Stop

NBP STAT

NBP
STAT

Stop
NBP

Stop Auto, Manual or STAT measurement AND Stop All

series
Stop
All

CAUTION Use clinical judgement to decide whether to perform repeated series of STAT measurements because of
the risk of purpura, ischemia and neuropathy in the limb with the cuff.

Enabling Automatic Mode and Setting Repetition

Time
1 In the Setup NBP menu, select Mode and select Auto from the pop-up menu.
2 For an automatic measurement, select Repeat Time and set the time interval between two
measurements.

Enabling Sequence Mode and Setting Up The

Sequence
1 In the Setup NBP menu, select Mode and select Sequence from the pop-up menu.
2 Select Setup Sequence to open the Setup Sequence window.
Up to four measurement cycles can be setup which will run consecutively. For each cycle you can
set the number of measurements and the interval between them. If you want to run less than four
cycles in a sequence, you can set the number of measurements for one or more cycles to Off.
3 Select each sequence in turn and select the number of measurements and the time interval between
the measurements.
4 To have measurements continue after the sequence, set the number of measurements for your last
cycle to Continuous and this cycle will run indefinitely.

165
11 Monitoring NBP Choosing the NBP Alarm Source

CAUTION Be aware that, if none of the cycles are set to Continuous, NBP monitoring will end after the last
measurement of the cycle.

When the NBP measurement mode is set to Sequence, the repetition time for Auto mode cannot
be changed.

Choosing the NBP Alarm Source

You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in
parallel. Only one alarm is given, with the priority of mean, systolic, diastolic.
In the Setup NBP menu, select Alarms from and choose from:

Menu option Pressure value monitored

Sys. systolic
Dia. diastolic
Mean mean
Sys&Dia systolic and diastolic in parallel
Dia&Mean diastolic and mean in parallel
Sys&Mean systolic and mean in parallel
Sys&Dia&Mean all three pressures in parallel

If mean is not selected as alarm source (Sys, Dia, or Sys&Dia selected), but the monitor can only derive
a mean value, mean alarms will nevertheless be announced using the most recent mean alarm limits.
When no value can be derived an NBP MEASURE FAILED INOP will be displayed.

Switching Pulse from NBP On/Off

In the process of making the NBP measurement, a pulse value can be derived and displayed. The pulse
value is displayed together with the time the measurement was made. After one hour the value becomes
invalid. There are no alarms associated with pulse from NBP.
To switch the display of the pulse value on or off:
♦ In the NBP Setup menu select Pulse (NBP).

Pulse from NBP

NBP Pulse Auto

Sys.

166
Assisting Venous Puncture 11 Monitoring NBP

Assisting Venous Puncture

You can use the NBP cuff to cause sub-diastolic pressure. The cuff deflates automatically after a set
time (adult/pediatric 170 seconds, neonatal 85 seconds) if you do not deflate it.
1 In the NBP Setup menu select VeniPuncture.
2 Puncture vein and draw blood sample.
3 Reselect VeniPuncture to deflate the cuff.
During measurement, the NBP display shows the inflation pressure of the cuff and the remaining time
in venous puncture mode.

Venous puncture measurement mode

Cuff pressure
Time left in venous
NBP 01:45 puncture mode
VP
(60)
Calibrating NBP
NBP is not user-calibrated. Cuff-pressure transducers must be verified and calibrated, if necessary, at
least once every two years by a qualified service professional. See the Service Guide for details.

167
11 Monitoring NBP Calibrating NBP

168
 12

12Measuring Predictive
Temperature
With the predictive temperature measurement1a reading is available after six to15 seconds because the
monitor uses an algorithm to “predict” what the temperature would be if the probe were left in place
until a steady reading results.
If a predictive measurement is not possible you can switch to Continuous mode. Here the probe is left
in place until a steady reading is available - after approximately three minutes for oral and rectal
measurements and five minutes for axillary measurements. When making a rectal measurement in
Continuous mode, stay with the patient until the measurement is complete and remove the probe
immediately. The reading is displayed until the probe is returned to the holder or until 10 minutes
have passed.
The monitor will automatically make a Predictive mode measurement unless you select Continuous
mode.
There are no limit alarms for the predictive temperature measurement.

WARNING • Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics, such as a flammable anesthetic mixture with
air, oxygen or nitrous oxide.
• Long-term monitoring in Continuous mode (beyond five minutes) is not recommended.
• Do not use the Predictive Temperature measurement on neonates.

Axillary or orally measured predictive temperature values do not represent the core temperature. Care is
needed when comparing measured values: only compare values measured at the same measurement
site.

Making a Temperature Measurement

1 Select the correct probe and holder for the measurement site: blue for oral or axillary
measurements, red for rectal measurements.
2 Insert the temperature probe in the probe holder into the unit and plug the cable connector into
the socket at the back of the unit. The cable can be fixed at an appropriate length by pressing it
into the channel on the underside of the unit.

1.The Predictive temperature measurement may not be available in all countries

169
12 Measuring Predictive Temperature Making a Temperature Measurement

3 Check that the correct temperature label for the measurement site is displayed: pTrect,
pToral, or pTaxil, and for axillary measurements verify that the correct patient category is
selected.

4 Remove the probe from the holder to turn the temperature measurement on.
5 Fit a new single-use probe cover onto the probe.
6 When the ready prompt appears, apply the probe to the patient.
During the measurement a progress indicator is displayed on the screen. When the temperature value is
available it appears on the screen with the time the measurement was made.

pToral

7 Discard the single-use probe cover and return the probe to the holder.

WARNING • Never apply the probe to the patient when the probe is not connected to the unit.
• Always use a single-use probe cover to limit patient cross-contamination.
• Measurement errors or inaccurate readings may result when:
– probe covers other than the specified probe covers are used (see Accessories section)
– the incorrect probe for the measurement site is used
– the patient temperature is below ambient temperature
• When making rectal temperature measurements, insert the probe slowly and carefully to avoid tissue
damage.
• Use of the incorrect probe holder may result in patient cross-contamination.
• Always ensure that the used probe cover is removed before attaching a new probe cover.

CAUTION • Biting the probe during an oral measurement may result in damage to the probe.
• Do not take an axillary measurement through the patient’s clothing. Direct probe-cover-to-skin
contact is required.
• If a probe is dropped or damaged, have it checked out by qualified service personnel before further
use.

170
Making a Temperature Measurement 12 Measuring Predictive Temperature

• Do not autoclave. To prevent damage to the unit, probe and accessories, refer to the cleaning
procedures in the Care and Cleaning chapter.

Selecting a Temperature Label

Tell the monitor which temperature you want to monitor by selecting its temperature label. When you
choose a label, the monitor uses that label’s stored color and unit.
1 In the Setup <Temp> menu, select Label.
2 Select the appropriate label from the list.

pTrect rectal temperature - this label is automatically selected if the rectal

probe is in use, and cannot be changed
pToral oral temperature
pTaxil axillary temperature

Selecting Predictive or Continuous mode

If you need to select Continuous mode, check that the probe is in the holder, then:
1 In the Setup <Temp> menu, select Mode.
2 Select Continuous.
To end a Continuous mode measurement return the probe to the holder. When the probe has been
returned to the holder, the mode will be automatically reset to Predictive mode. After 10 minutes the
measurement is automatically ended and the value is no longer displayed.

171
12 Measuring Predictive Temperature Making a Temperature Measurement

172
 13

13Monitoring Temperature
Temp measurement automatically switches on when you connect a probe. You can switch the
measurement off manually.

Making a Temp Measurement

1 Select the correct type and size of probe for your patient.
2 If you are using a disposable probe, connect the probe to the temperature cable.
3 Plug the probe or temperature cable into the temperature connector socket.

4 Apply the probe to the patient. You are advised to use a protective rubber cover on rectal probes.
5 Select an appropriate temperature label.
6 Check that the alarm settings (on or off, high and low limits) are appropriate for this patient and
this type of temperature measurement.

WARNING Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that
particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.

Selecting a Temperature for Monitoring

Tell the monitor which temperature you want to monitor by selecting its temperature label. The label
is a unique identifier for each type of temperature. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that
label’s stored color and alarm settings.
1 In the Setup <Temp> menu, select Label.
2 Select the appropriate label from the list.

Temp non-specific temperature label. Trect rectal temperature

Tart arterial temperature Tskin skin temperature
Tcore core temperature Tven venous temperature
Tesoph esophageal temperature Tnaso nasopharyngeal temperature

Note that pT labels are only available with the Predictive Temperature measurement on the MP5
monitor.

173
13 Monitoring Temperature Calculating Temp Difference

Extended Temperature Label Set

The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be
changed in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended
label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more
information.

T1, T2, T3, T4 Non-specific temperature labels

Tamb ambient temperature
Tcereb cerebral temperature
Ttymp tympanic temperature
Tvesic vesical temperature

Calculating Temp Difference

The monitor can calculate and display the difference between two temperature values by subtracting
the second value from the first. The difference is labeled ΔTemp.
1 In the Main Setup menu, select Measurements.
2 In the Setup ΔTemp menu, select First Temp.
3 Label the measurement source as appropriate.
4 Select Second Temp.
5 Label the measurement source as appropriate.

174
 14

14Monitoring Invasive Pressure

CAUTION Do not use the MP5 in combination with other monitors using an M1006A pressure module and the
HP1290A pressure transducer. This may cause interference on the respiration or invasive pressure
signals.

Setting up the Pressure Measurement

1 Plug in the pressure cable.
2 Prepare the flush solution.
3 Flush the system to exhaust all air from the tubing. Ensure that the transducer and stopcocks are
free of air bubbles.

WARNING If air bubbles appear in the tubing system, flush the system with the infusion solution again. Air
bubbles may lead to a wrong pressure reading.

4 Connect the pressure line to the patient catheter.

5 If you are using an infusion pressure cuff with the pressure line, attach the pressure cuff to the fluid
to be infused. Inflate it according to your standard hospital procedure, then start the infusion.
6 Position the transducer so that it is level with the heart, approximately at the level of the
midaxillary line.

WARNING If measuring intracranial pressure (ICP, IC1 or IC2) with a sitting patient, level the transducer with the
top of the patient’s ear. Incorrect leveling may give incorrect values.

Selecting a Pressure for Monitoring

Tell the monitor which pressure you want to monitor by selecting its pressure label. The label is a
unique identifier for each type of pressure. When you choose a label, the monitor uses that label’s
stored settings, for example color, wave scale and alarm settings. The label also determines which
algorithm is used to process the pressure signal, so an incorrect label can lead to incorrect pressure
values.
1 In the Setup <Press> menu, select Label.

175
14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure Zeroing the Pressure Transducer

2 Select the appropriate label from the list.

Label Description Label Description

ABP Arterial blood pressure P Non-specific pressure label
ART Arterial blood pressure (alternative) PAP Pulmonary artery pressure
Ao Aortic pressure RAP Right atrial pressure
CVP Central venous pressure UAP Umbilical arterial pressure
ICP Intracranial pressure UVP Umbilical venous pressure
LAP Left atrial pressure

Extended Pressure Label Set

The following additional labels are available if Label Set is set to Full. This setting can only be
changed in Configuration Mode.
Note that if your monitor is connected to an Information Center, the additional labels in the extended
label set may not be correctly displayed. See the Configuration Guide for your monitor for more
information.

Label Description
BAP Brachial arterial pressure
FAP Femoral arterial pressure
IC1, IC2 Alternative intracranial pressures
P1, P2, P3, P4 Alternative non-specific pressure labels

Zeroing the Pressure Transducer

To avoid inaccurate pressure readings, the monitor requires a valid zero. Zero the transducer in
accordance with your hospital policy (at least once per day). You must perform a zero:
• when you use a new transducer or tubing
• every time you reconnect the transducer cable to the monitor
• if you think the monitor’s pressure readings are not correct.

Zeroing ICP (or IC1/IC2)

Your hospital guidelines may require you to zero the ICP transducer less frequently than other
transducers, due to the need for aseptic conditions. When you zero an ICP transducer, the zero values
are automatically stored and you will not be prompted to repeat the zero procedure.

WARNING If you select the label ICP (or IC1/IC2), the measurement device uses the most recently stored zero.
Therefore, make sure you zeroed the transducer correctly in accordance with the transducer
manufacturer’s instructions and your hospital policy. When you use a transducer that you cannot
rezero after placement, ensure that you keep the measuring device with the patient so that you are
certain you have the correct zero data for this patient.

176
Zeroing the Pressure Transducer 14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure

Determining a Pressure’s Most Recent Zero

The monitor displays the most recent zero on the status line. If this has “timed-out” after you have
performed a zero, redisplay the information in the status line by entering the pressure’s setup menu.

Zeroing a Pressure Measurement

WARNING Invasive pressure alarms (and pulse alarms, if derived from invasive pressure) are temporarily
suppressed until 30 seconds after the transducer finishes zeroing.

1 Turn off the stopcock to the patient.

2 Vent the transducer to atmospheric pressure, to compensate for the static and atmospheric pressure
exerted on the transducer.
3 In the setup menu for the pressure, select Zero <Press>.
4 When you see the message <Press> zero done at <date and time> on the status
line, (for example, ABP zero done at 13 Mar 02 23.35) close the stopcock to
atmospheric pressure, and open the stopcock to the patient.

CAUTION When using high frequency ventilation, ensure that the tubing from the ventilator does not touch the
arterial line, or connect with it indirectly, while zeroing the pressure. This could cause small pressure
variations which can interfere with the zero procedure.

Zeroing Two Pressures Simultaneously

WARNING Before zeroing two pressures, make sure that both pressure transducers are vented to atmospheric
pressure.

If you have two pressures and have the Zero SmartKey configured you can zero both pressures
simultaneously. Selecting the SmartKey calls up a list of active pressures. Select All Press to zero
all pressures simultaneously.

Troubleshooting the Zero

The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful zero:

177
14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure Adjusting the Calibration Factor

Message Corrective Action

unable to zero - The hardware is faulty. Contact your service personnel.
equipment
malfunction
unable to zero - Make sure the transducer is vented to air and try again. If this fails, the hardware
excessive offset may be faulty. Replace the adapter cable and try again. If it fails, replace the
unable to zero - transducer and try again. If it still fails, contact your service personnel.
unstable signal
unable to zero - Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again. If this fails, exchange
no transducer the adapter cable and try again. If this fails, exchange the transducer.
unable to zero - Make sure that the transducer is vented to air, not to the patient, and try again.
pulsatile
pressure
unable to zero - Try pressing the Zero key again. If this fails, replace the transducer and adapter
timed out cable and contact your service personnel.
switch <Press> on Pressure measurement is switched off. To switch it on, in the Setup Pressure
first menu, select the pressure’s label.

Adjusting the Calibration Factor

Each time you use a reusable transducer, compare the calibration factor written on your transducer
with the calibration factor shown on the monitor. To ensure accurate measurement, they must be the
same.
1 In the Setup <Press> menu, select Cal. Factor.
If the value here does not match that on the transducer, select the corresponding value from the
list now in accordance with your hospital’s procedure.
2 To confirm you want to use the new calibration factor, select the Confirm popup.

Displaying a Mean Pressure Value Only

Use this when you want to see only the mean pressure.
♦ In the pressure’s setup menu, select Mean only. Toggle between On to display mean pressure
value only, and Off to display all pressure values (systolic, diastolic and mean).

Changing the Pressure Wave Scale

1 Select the label of the pressure wave whose scale you want to set to enter the Setup menu.
2 In the Setup <Press> menu, (for example ABP) select Scale.
3 Select a value from the pop-up list:
– a positive value sets the top gridline. The bottom gridline is set at zero.
– a negative value sets the bottom gridline. The middle gridline is set at zero.

178
Optimizing the Waveform 14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure

Optimizing the Waveform

♦ In the Setup <Press> menu, select Optimum Scale to let the monitor select the best
minimum and maximum scales for the current wave.

Using the Wave Cursor

When the pressure wave is selected, you can display a cursor in the wave. It appears as a white
horizontal line in the wave. Using the pop-up keys you can move the cursor up or down to the required
position and store the corresponding value. The cursor value can be stored as a systolic, diastolic or
mean pressure value and if the pressure wave is a PAP wave it can also be stored as a PAWP value. The
stored value appears in the trend database as a manually entered value.
To display and position the cursor
1 Select the pressure wave.
2 Select Activate Cursor.
3 Use the pop-up arrow keys to position the cursor.
Using the pop-up keys you can also change the scale or the speed for the wave, freeze the wave or start
a printout or recording.

Non-Physiological Artifact Suppression

Some clinical procedures may affect blood pressure, for example, a flush procedure or a blood sample.
Your monitor may be configured to suppress these non-physiological artifacts for a specified duration
(Artifact Suppression is configured to 30, 60, or 90 seconds). During artifact suppression,
the monitor shows the INOP message <Pressure label> ARTIFACT, and a question mark is
shown beside the pressure numerics. Pressure alarms and the Pulse NON-PULSATILE INOP are
suppressed during the configured period. The CPP high alarm is not suppressed.

Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source

WARNING Make sure you set alarm limits for the correct label. The alarm limits you set are stored for that
particular label only. Changing the label may change the alarm limits.

You can monitor for alarm conditions in systolic, diastolic and mean pressure, either singly or in
parallel. Only one alarm is given at a time, in this order of priority: mean, systolic, diastolic.
♦ In the Setup <Press> menu, select Alarms from and choose the source.

Menu option Pressure value monitored

Sys. systolic
Dia. diastolic
Mean mean

179
14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure Choosing the Pressure Alarm Source

Menu option Pressure value monitored

Sys & Dia systolic and diastolic in parallel
Dia & Mean diastolic and mean in parallel
Sys & Mean systolic and mean in parallel
Sys&Dia&Mean all three pressures in parallel

♦ Select and set the High Limit and Low Limit for the pressure(s) you have selected.

Extreme Alarm Limits

The extreme pressure alarms, Extreme High and Extreme Low, can be made available for your monitor
in Configuration Mode and are additional to the standard High and Low limit alarms. They are
generated by the active pressure alarm source, and are setup in Configuration Mode by adding a set
value (the Δ value) to the high and low alarm limits. This value can be set for each pressure label
individually.

Extreme Extreme
Low High
Low Limit Limit High Limit
Limit

Δ Extreme Low Δ Extreme High

You need to know which values have been configured for your monitor. Changing the high and low
alarm limits automatically changes the extreme alarm limits within the allowed range.
♦ To see the extreme pressure alarms set for your monitor, in the Setup <Press> menu, see the
menu items Δ Extreme High and Δ Extreme Low.
The extreme pressure alarms are high priority, red alarms, marked *** in the alarm message.

180
Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6 14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure

Calibrating Reusable Transducer CPJ840J6

Depending on your monitor’s configuration, you may be able to perform a calibration in monitoring
mode. Perform a mercury calibration when you use a new transducer, and at regular intervals according
to your hospital policy. You require:
• standard sphygmomanometer.
• sterile 10cc syringe with heparinised solution.
• 3-way stopcock.
• approximately 25cm of tubing.

Making the Pressure Calibration

WARNING Never perform the invasive pressure calibration while a patient is being monitored.

1 Zero the transducer.

2 Connect the syringe and manometer.
a. Attach the tubing to the manometer.
b. Connect the 3-way stopcock to the stopcock that is not connected to the patient catheter when
you measure a patient.
c. Attach the syringe to one port and the manometer tubing to the other port.
d. Open the port to the manometer.

tubing to manometer

Syringe with
heparinised solution
Patient
connection
stoppered

PRESS M1006A T
Off
PRESS ZERO

12
PIN

Pressure connector on
monitor

3 Move the syringe barrel in and raise the mercury to 200mmHg (30kPa). 200mmHg is the
recommended calibration pressure.
4 In the Setup Pressure menu, select Cal. Press.
181
14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure Calculating Cerebral Perfusion

5 Select the calibration pressure from the list, for example 200 mmHg.
6 Select Confirm to recalculate the calibration factor using the applied pressure.
7 When the monitor displays <Press> calibration done at <date and time>,
remove the manometer tubing, syringe and extra stopcock. We recommend you replace the
transducer dome and tubing with sterile ones.
8 Label the transducer with the calibration factor shown in the Cal. Factor field in the
pressure’s setup menu.
9 Reconnect the patient and start measuring again.

Troubleshooting the Pressure Calibration

The status line lists the probable cause of an unsuccessful calibration.

Message Corrective Action

unable to calibrate - Contact your service department. The pressure hardware is faulty.
equipment malfunction
unable to calibrate - Make sure that you have selected the value for Cal. Press that
out of range you are applying to the transducer, and repeat the calibration.
unable to calibrate - no Make sure that the transducer is connected and try again.
transducer
unable to calibrate - Make sure there are no disturbances to the transducer, and repeat
unstable signal the calibration.
unable to calibrate - No valid zero. Zero the transducer.
perform zero first

Calculating Cerebral Perfusion

The monitor can calculate the difference between mean arterial pressure and the intracranial pressure.
The difference is labeled CPP.
1 In the Main Setup menu, select Measurements.
2 In the Setup CPP menu, select ABP, ART, Ao, BAP or FAP as the arterial pressure source.
The CPP value will not be available when the MP5 is connected to a host monitor.

Calculating Pulse Pressure Variation

Pulse Pressure Variation (PPV) is calculated from beat-to-beat arterial pressure values. Pulse pressure is
the difference between the systolic and the diastolic pressure values for a single beat. Pulse pressure
variation is defined as the maximal pressure less the minimum pressure divided by the average of these
two pressures. The average variation in pulse pressure is calculated over periods of 32 seconds.

WARNING • This monitor can calculate PPV from beat-to-beat values of any arterial pulsatile pressure. The
circumstances under which the calculation of a PPV value is clinically meaningful, appropriate and
reliable must be determined by a physician.

182
Calculating Pulse Pressure Variation 14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure

• The clinical value of the derived PPV information must be determined by a physician. According to
recent scientific literature, the clinical relevance of PPV information is restricted to sedated patients
receiving controlled mechanical ventilation and mainly free from cardiac arrhythmia.
• PPV calculation may lead to inaccurate values in the following situations:
– at respiration rates below 8 rpm
– during ventilation with tidal volumes lower than 8 ml/kg
– for patients with acute right ventricular dysfunction (“cor pulmonale”).
• The PPV measurement has been validated only for adult patients

To select an arterial pressure as PPV source:

1 In the Main Setup menu, select Measurements.
2 In the Setup PPV menu, select ABP, ART, Ao, BAP, P or FAP as the arterial pressure source.

183
14 Monitoring Invasive Pressure Calculating Pulse Pressure Variation

184
 15

15Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

Use the CO2 measurement to monitor the patient’s respiratory status and to control patient
ventilation.
There are two methods for measuring carbon dioxide in the patient’s airway:
• Mainstream measurement uses a CO2 sensor attached to an airway adapter directly inserted into the
patient’s breathing system.
• Sidestream measurement takes a sample of the respiratory gas with a constant sample flow from the
patient’s airway and analyzes it with a remote CO2 sensor. Two variations of this method, with
different sensors, are available as options on the monitor. They are referred to here as sidestream
CO2 and Microstream CO2.
In both cases, the measurement principle is infrared transmission, where the intensity of infrared light
passing the respiratory gas is measured with a photo detector. As some of the infrared light is absorbed
by the CO2 molecules, the amount of light passing the gas probe depends on the concentration of the
measured CO2.
When using a wet ventilator circuit, monitor mainstream CO2 if available, in preference to sidestream
CO2.
The partial pressure is calculated from the gas concentration by multiplying the concentration value
with the ambient pressure.
The measurement provides:
• a CO2 waveform.
• an end tidal CO2 (etCO2) value: the CO2 value measured at the end of the expiration phase.
• an inspired minimum CO2 (imCO2): the smallest value measured during inspiration.
• an airway respiration rate (awRR): the number of breaths per minute, calculated from the CO2
waveform.
Depending on the Max Hold setting configured for your monitor, the etCO2 numeric shows either
the highest CO2 value measured within the configured time period (Max Hold set to 10 sec or
20 sec) or the etCO2 numeric shows breath-to-breath value (Max Hold set to Off).

WARNING Correlation: The etCO2 readings do not always correlate closely with paCO2, especially in neonatal
patients and patients with pulmonary disease, pulmonary embolism or inappropriate ventilation.
Pharmaceuticals in aerosols: Do not measure CO2 in the presence of pharmaceuticals in aerosols.

185
15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide Using the CO2 Measurement

Explosion Hazard: Do not use in the presence of flammable anesthetics or gases, such as a flammable
anesthetic mixture with air, oxygen or nitrous oxide. Use of the devices in such an environment may
present an explosion hazard.
Failure of operation: if the measurement or a sensor fails to respond as described, do not use it until
the situation has been corrected by qualified personnel.
Low etCO2 values: Leakages in the breathing system or sampling system may cause the displayed
etCO2 values to be significantly too low. Always connect all components securely and check for leaks
according to standard clinical procedures. Displacement of the nasal or combined nasal oral cannulas
can cause lower than actual etCO2 readings. Even with combined nasal oral cannulas, the etCO2
readings may be slightly lower than actual in patients breathing through the mouth only.

Using the CO2 Measurement

The MP5 monitor measures partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient’s expired gas using the
mainstream method or the sidestream method.
The mainstream CO2 measurement can be used, with appropriate accessories, with intubated adult,
pediatric and neonatal patients. The sidestream CO2 measurement can be used, with appropriate
accessories, with intubated and nonintubated adult, pediatric, infant and neonatal patients. With
intubated patients, a sample of the respiratory gas is drawn from the patient’s breathing circuit through
an airway adapter and a gas sampling tube. With non-intubated patients, the gas sample is drawn
through a nasal or oral-nasal cannula.

WARNING Altitude Setting: The monitor is not equipped with automatic barometric pressure compensation.
Before the CO2 measurement is used for the first time, the altitude must be set to the correct value. An
incorrect altitude setting will result in incorrect CO2 readings. The CO2 readings will typically deviate
5% for every 1000m difference.
Electrical Shock Hazard: Do not open the monitor. Contact with exposed electrical components may
cause electrical shock. Always turn off and remove power before cleaning the sensor or monitor. Do
not use a damaged sensor or one with exposed electrical contacts. Refer servicing to qualified service
personnel.

CAUTION Use the CO2 measurement with Philips approved accessories only. Refer to the instructions for use
provided with the accessory.

Preparing to Measure Mainstream CO2

You must perform a zero as described in this procedure each time you use a new airway adapter.
1 Attach the sensor connector to the CO2 connector on the monitor.
2 Wait 2 minutes, allowing the sensor to reach its operating temperature and a stable thermal
condition.

186
Using the CO2 Measurement 15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

3 Choose the appropriate airway adapter and connect it to the sensor

head. The airway adapter clicks into place when seated correctly.
4 To zero the sensor:
– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of
CO2 including the ventilator, the patient’s breath and your own.
– in the setup menu for the CO2, select Start Zero Cal.
– When you see the message Zero done at <date and
time> on the status line, the zero calibration is finished and you
can begin monitoring.

5 Install the airway adapter at the proximal end of the circuit

between the elbow and the ventilator Y-section.

WARNING To prevent stress on the endotrachial tube, support the sensor and airway adapter.
Position sensor cables and tubing carefully to avoid entanglement or potential strangulation. Do not
apply excessive tension to any cable.
Replace the airway adapter, if excessive moisture or secretions are observed in the tubing or if the CO2
waveform changes unexpectedly without a change in patient status.
To avoid infection, use only sterilized, disinfected or disposable airway adapters.
Inspect the airway adapters prior to use. Do not use if airway adapter appears to have been damaged or
broken. Observe airway adapter color coding for patient population.

Preparing to Measure Sidestream CO2

1 Plug the sensor cable into the monitor’s CO2 input connector. Allow the sensor
two minutes warm up time

2 Connect the cannula, airway adapter, or sample line as appropriate, to the

sensor. It will click into place when seated correctly.

3 To zero the sensor:

– expose the sensor to room air and keep it away from all sources of CO2
including the ventilator, the patient’s breath and your own.
– In the setup menu for the CO2, select Start Zero Cal.

187
15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide Using the CO2 Measurement

– When you see the message Zero done at <date and time> on the status line, the zero
calibration is finished and you can begin monitoring.
4 For intubated patients requiring an airway adapter: Install the airway adapter at
the proximal end of the circuit between the elbow and the ventilator Y-
section.

For intubated patients with an integrated airway adapter in the breathing

circuit.: Connect the male luer connector on the straight sample line to the
female port on the airway adapter.
For non-intubated patients: Place the nasal cannula onto the patient.

For patients prone to mouth breathing use an oral-nasal cannula.

For nasal or oral-nasal cannulas with oxygen delivery, place the cannula on the patient as shown then
attach the oxygen supply tubing to the oxygen delivery system and set the prescribed oxygen flow.

WARNING Always connect the airway adapter to the sensor before inserting the airway adapter into the breathing
circuit. In reverse, always remove the airway adapter from the breathing circuit before removing the
sensor.

CAUTION Always disconnect the cannula, airway adapter or sample line from the sensor when not in use.

Using the Sidestream Sensor Holder

The holder delivered with the sensor can be used to clamp the sensor onto an IV pole or a shelf.
1 Push the sensor into the holder until it clicks into
position.
2 Clamp the holder onto an IV pole, a shelf or another
appropriate location.
To remove the sensor from the holder, release the clip and
pull the sensor out of the holder.
clip

188
Measuring Microstream CO2 15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

Removing Exhaust Gases from the System

WARNING Anesthetics: When using the sidestream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving or have
recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, to avoid exposing medical staff
to anesthetics.

Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the sidestream sensor
at the outlet connector.

Measuring Microstream CO2

The Microstream CO2 method measures the partial pressure of carbon dioxide in a patient’s expired
gas using Microstream technology.
The measurement is equipped with an automatic barometric pressure compensation.

Preparing to Measure Microstream CO2

Use appropriate accessories for:
• the patient type (adult, pediatric or neonatal),
• the ventilation situation (including humidification)
• the duration - short term use, up to 24 hours (typically OR), or long term use (typically ICU).
All accessories are for single patient use only.

Using Microstream Accessories

The Microstream measurement can be operated with the special Microstream accessories only. Refer to
the instructions for use provided with the accessory.
For intubated patient with non-humidified ventilation, you can use a Microstream FilterLine set. For
humidified ventilation, use a FilterLine H Set.
For non-intubated patients, the gas sample is taken through a Nasal FilterLine, or a Smart CapnoLine
(which is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine). In parallel to the measurement of the CO2, oxygen (O2)
may be delivered to the patient to support gas exchange. This is done by using an O2/CO2 FilterLine,
or a Smart CapnoLine O2 (a combined oral-nasal O2/CO2 FilterLine).

Using the FilterLine and Airway Adapter

1 Attach the female Luer connector to the CO2 inlet connector on the extension by pushing the
socket cover down and screwing the connector into place.
2 Check that the FilterLine is not kinked.
3 Change the FilterLine if a CO2 OCCLUSION INOP appears on the monitor or if the readings
become extremely erratic.
Disconnect the FilterLine during suctioning and nebulizing therapies.
Check the table in the Microstream CO2 Accessories section of the Accessories chapter for typical
usage times for the different Microstream accessories.

189
15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide Setting up all CO2 Measurements

CO2 values for non-intubated patients using Microstream accessories will always tend to be lower than
for intubated patients. If values appear extremely low, check whether the patient is breathing through
the mouth or whether one nostril is blocked

Removing Exhaust Gases from the System

WARNING Anesthetics: When using the Microstream CO2 measurement on patients who are receiving or have
recently received anesthetics, connect the outlet to a scavenging system, or to the anesthesia machine/
ventilator, to avoid exposing medical staff to anesthetics.

Use an exhaust tube to remove the sample gas to a scavenging system. Attach it to the MMS Extension
at the outlet connector.

Suppressing Zero Calibration

To prevent an automatic zero calibration from being started in the next five minutes,
♦ in the Setup CO2 menu, select No Zero For 5Min, or select the Suppress CO2 Zero
SmartKey, if configured.
Selecting No Zero For 5Min or selecting the Suppress CO2 Zero SmartKey again before
the timer has timed out resets the timer to five minutes, unless an AutoZero became due during the
previous suppression.

Setting up all CO2 Measurements

These tasks are common to all CO2 measurements except where otherwise noted.

Adjusting the CO2 Wave Scale

1 In the CO2 Wave menu or the Setup CO2 menu, select Scale.
2 Choose a suitable scale range from the pop-up list.

Setting up CO2 Corrections

Temperature, water vapor in the patient’s breath, barometric pressure, and the proportions of O2, N2O
and Helium in the mixture all influence CO2 absorption. If values seem inaccurately high or low,
check that the monitor is using the appropriate corrections.
If one of the corrections does not appear in your Setup CO2 menu, your CO2 measurement does not
require that correction.

Correction
Altitude Altitude is set during installation. The monitor automatically applies an appropriate
correction.
O2 In the Setup CO2 menu, select Oxy. Corr and select a value between 0% and
100%, the default value is 20%.

190
Setting up all CO2 Measurements 15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

Correction
Humidity At installation, the monitor is configured to automatically apply either Body Temperature
Pressure Saturated (BTPS) or Ambient Temperature Pressure Dry (ATPD). To see
which, go to the Setup CO2 menu, and scroll down to look at HumidtyCorr.
Gas In the Setup CO2 menu, select Gas Corr. and select Helium, N2O or turn off.
If Helium or N2O is present in the ventilation gas mixture, you must make the
appropriate selection.
Agent In the Setup CO2 menu, select Agent Corr. and select the concentration of the
anesthetic agent (between 0.0% and 20.0%). If an anesthetic agent is present in the
ventilation gas mixture, you must select the appropriate concentration.

Suppressing Sampling (not Mainstream CO2)

To temporarily stop sampling,
♦ in the Setup CO2 menu, select Pump 15Min Off or use the CO2 Pump Off SmartKey if
available.
Selecting Pump 15Min Off again before fifteen minutes have passed resets the timer to fifteen
minutes.
To re-start the pump,
♦ in the Setup CO2 menu, select Pump On.

Changing CO2 Alarms

This refers to CO2 specific alarms. See the Alarms section for general alarm information.
1 In the Setup CO2 menu, select etCO2 High or imCO2 High and choose the high alarm
limit.
2 Select etCO2 Low and choose the low alarm limit.

Changing the Apnea Alarm Delay

This determines the time limit after which the monitor alarms if the patient stops breathing.
1 In the Setup CO2 menu, select awRR.
2 Choose the apnea alarm delay time.

WARNING Safety and effectiveness of the respiration measurement method in the detection of apnea, particularly
the apnea of prematurity and apnea of infancy, has not been established.

Deriving Alarms From awRR

1 In the Setup CO2 menu, select awRR.
2 In the Setup awRR menu, select Alarms.
3 Choose On to derive alarms from the airway respiration signal or Off to disable them.

191
15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide Setting up all CO2 Measurements

Changing awRR Alarm Limits

1 In the Setup CO2 menu, select awRR.
2 Select High Limit to set the upper alarm limit.
Select Low Limit to set the lower alarm limit.
3 Select the appropriate setting.

192
Setting up all CO2 Measurements 15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide

193
15 Monitoring Carbon Dioxide Setting up all CO2 Measurements

194
 16

16Assigning Two Devices to One

Patient
It is possible to assign a monitor and a telemetry device to the same patient, resulting in the
information from both devices being combined in one sector at the Information Center. This is called
“pairing” and when a telemetry device and a monitor are paired, the measurement data from the
telemetry device will be displayed on the monitor screen.
A telemetry device can be:
• any Philips telemetry device (only for indirect connections, see below).
• a TRx+/TRx+ Intellivue Telemetry system transceiver.
• an MP5 monitor with a telemetry interface, declared as a telemetry device and with a telemetry
equipment label.

How Can You Combine Devices?

• With an indirect connection, using standard telemetry transmission - the data are sent to the
monitor via the Information Center and arrive with a delay of several seconds at the monitor.
• With a direct connection to the monitor, via a short range radio (SRR) link or with a direct cable
connection - the data arrive with a minimal delay on the monitor screen.

Indirect Connection - Manual Pairing

The telemetry device can be paired with the monitor at the Information Center or at the monitor. For
detailed information regarding pairing and configuration at the Information Center, see the
Information Center Instructions for Use.
To pair the monitor with a telemetry device at the monitor:
1 Select Main Setup then Measurements
2 Select Telemetry
The Setup Telemetry menu will appear with only one entry Paired Equipment.
3 Enter here the equipment label of the telemetry device to be paired.
Pairing at the monitor is only possible when the monitor already has a connection to the Information
Center and the Information Center software version allows pairing at the monitor.

195
16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient How Can You Combine Devices?

Telemetry Data Window

The measurements from the telemetry device are shown in the telemetry data window on the monitor
when there is no direct connection via cable or short range radio link.

Bed2 Bed3 Bed4 Bed7 Bed8 Bed1 Bed9

Bed6 Not Admitted Adult 15:37 Telemetry

TELE INOP TELE ALARM

CANNOT ANALYZE ST Jmb01 PVCs > 10/min

HR
Telemetry
PVC data window
%SpO2T

Delayed

WARNING All data presented in the telemetry data window are delayed for several seconds.
For MP5 only: If you need realtime data, for example for defibrillation, always use the monitor ECG
instead of telemetry. As long as the ECG is being measured with the telemetry device there will be no
ECG signal available at the ECG analog output or ECG Sync Pulse output.

Direct Connection - Automatic Pairing

The following direct connections are possible:
• a TRx+4841A Intellivue Telemetry system transceiver connected via short range radio (SRR) link to
an MP5 with SRR capability.
• a TRx+4841A Intellivue Telemetry system transceiver connected to an MP5 directly with a cable.
• an MP5, declared as a telemetry device, and connected with an MSL cable to a monitor (MP20-90).
If a telemetry device is connected to a monitor directly with a cable, or if it is assigned to a monitor via
a direct short range radio link, the monitor and the telemetry device are automatically paired at the
Information Center (if configured).
The measured data from the telemetry device — ECG and, if available, SpO2T— will appear on the
monitor screen and will be sent through the monitor to the Information Center. The ECG waves and
numerics appear in place of the monitor’s own ECG, and SpO2T is displayed as an additional
measurement. When ECG is measured with the telemetry device there will be no Respiration
measurement derived.
When you disconnect the cable, the devices remain paired until you Unpair them at the monitor or
Information Center. When the devices are paired but disconnected, the telemetry data is displayed on
the screen as described in “Telemetry Data Window” on page 196.

196
How Can You Combine Devices? 16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient

WARNING • When ECG is being measured with a telemetry device directly connected to the monitor, there will
be no ECG signal available at the ECG analog output or ECG Sync Pulse output and no
synchronization marks on the ECG wave. A No ECG Out message will appear in the ECG wave
channel.
• When a telemetry device is connected to the monitor, arrhythmia relearning is initiated, and again
when the telemetry device is disconnected.
• Controls on the Telemetry Device (e.g. nurse call) will be inactive when the device is directly
connected to the monitor except in the case when the monitor has no network connection and data
are transferred via the telemetry device. See the "Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the
Monitor" chapter.

Assigning a Telemetry Transceiver with an SRR Adapter to a Monitor

Monitors which have this capability have a short range radio symbol on the model label.
A telemetry device with a short range radio adapter can be assigned to a monitor directly. To assign a
telemetry device to a monitor:
1 Press the Check button on the telemetry device.
The measurement selection key on the monitor will change to show the “assign telemetry” icon

2 Select the assign telemetry icon.

3 In the Assign Telemetry Device menu, select the correct equipment label for the
telemetry device.
4 Check that the assignment is successful and that transmission has begun:
• A Tele Device assigned message appears on the monitor
• a tone sounds at the telemetry device and the Laeds Off indicators light
• the ECG wave appears on the monitor
To confirm that the correct telemetry device has been assigned, open the ECG Setup menu. The title
of the menu contains the equipment label of the telemetry device; check that this is the correct label.
If a monitor is already paired to another device, you cannot assign a telemetry device to that monitor.
If the telemetry device goes out-of-range or loses the short range radio connection, it will switch over to
standard telemetry transmission to the Information Center. In this case, the telemetry data is displayed
in the Telemetry Data Window as described above.
If a monitor is manually paired with a telemetry device with a short range radio adapter, the short range
radio assignment will be automatically made.
If a telemetry device disappears from the list in the Assign Telemetry Device menu, press the
Check button on the telemetry device again. If the monitor is not configured to be used with a
telemetry device, the “assign telemetry” icon will appear crossed out .
If the devices are unpaired, the short range radio connection will be ended.

197
16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient How Can You Combine Devices?

WARNING Short range radio connections are subject to interruption due to interference from other radio sources
in the vicinity, including microwaves, bluetooth devices and DECT phones. Outside the operating
frequency band and 5% above and below, i.e. the exclusion band according IEC 60601-1-2, section
36.202.3a)4), the short range radio connection is immune up to 3V/m in the frequency range from 80
MHz to 2.0 GHz and up to 1V/m in the frequency range from 2.0 to 2.3 GHz. Depending on the
strength and duration of the interference, the interruption may occur for an extended period. A loss of
connection, due to moving out-of-range, interference, or for other reasons, is indicated with a
TELE DISCONNECT INOP.
Correct channel configuration is important, refer to the Configuration Guide for details.

If a TELE DISCONNECT INOP occurs when the telemetry device goes out-of-range, the INOP will
disappear (without being silenced) as soon as the ECG signal from the telemetry device is available at
the Information Center via standard telemetry transmission.

SpO2T Manual Mode

When a telemetry device with a short range radio connection supplies SpO2T to the monitor, the
monitor will have a manual measurement mode available. This allows SpO2 measurements to be made
on request and not continuously, helping to save battery power. To ensure there is no gap in SpO2
measurements when moving from standard telemetry transmission to short range radio transmission,
the measurement mode will always be set to continuous in this situation unless manual mode is set in
both the telemetry device and the monitor.

Unassigning a Telemetry Transceiver with SRR Adapter at the Monitor

If a monitor and a telemetry device are paired, the assignment and the short range radio connection
will be ended when the devices are unpaired (see “Unpairing the Monitor and Telemetry Device” on
page 199).
If the monitor does not have a connection to an Information Center, you must manually end the
assignment and the short range radio connection.
1 Select the Measurement Selection key.
2 In the Measurement Selection window, select the Tele pop-up key.
3 In the Tele device window select Unassign Tele.

Pairing an MP5 With a Telemetry Interface to a Host Monitor

An MP5 using an IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry interface will be automatically paired when it is
connected to a host monitor and it has been declared as a “telemetry device” at the Information Center
(telemetry equipment label is configured).
When the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor it will remain paired and the measurement data
will appear at the host monitor in the Telemetry Data window. After the MP5 is disconnected from
the monitor it may take over 15 seconds until its data is displayed at the Information Center.

NOTE Pairing of a host monitor and a telemetry device, with all the related functionality, is only possible
when the host monitor is using a wired LAN connection or a wireless LAN interface (but not using the
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry interface).
The MP5 can also be paired to a host monitor without a direct connection, as described in “Indirect
Connection - Manual Pairing” on page 195.

198
Functions Available When the Telemetry Data Window is Displayed 16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient

Refer also to “Use Models With Telemetry” on page 202 for further related use modes.

Unpairing the Monitor and Telemetry Device

If the patient will no longer be monitored with the telemetry device, or only with the telemetry device
and no longer with the monitor, you need to end the device pairing. After unpairing, the Information
Center will receive data exclusively from the monitor or from the telemetry device:
♦ select the Unpair To Mon. SmartKey to end pairing and have the Information
Center receive the measurement data from the monitor
♦ select the Unpair To Tele SmartKey to end pairing and have the Information
Center receive the measurement data from the telemetry device
or
♦ use the Unpair function at the Information Center.

NOTE The Unpair SmartKeys and pop-up keys appear only on the monitor which is directly involved in
pairing.

Functions Available When the Telemetry Data

Window is Displayed
Controlling the Telemetry Device from the Bedside
You can change settings for a paired telemetry device at the monitor:
1 Select the telemetry data screen element
2 Select the Setup Tele pop-up key
The Setup Telemetry menu will appear with the settings available for the telemetry device.
These will normally include: adjusting heart rate alarms, ECG size control, selecting primary/secondary
lead, relearning arrhythmia, and selecting the arrhythmia analysis mode. The Equipment label of the
paired device is also shown here.

Viewing and Silencing Telemetry Alarms at the Bedside

When a telemetry device is paired with the monitor, telemetry alarms will also be indicated on the
monitor, in addition to the main indication at the Information Center.
If configured, a generic Tele Alarm message will appear in the alarm status area with standard
alarm tones. The Tele Alarm message will have the color and * or ! coding corresponding to the
severity of the alarm. The specific alarm message (for example *HR Low) will appear in the Telemetry
Data Window.
If configured, alarms generated from a paired telemetry device can be silenced at the bedside. Either the
monitor Silence key is configured to silence both monitor and telemetry alarms (must be
configured at the Information Center) or the Silence Bed pop-up key will be available:
1 Select the telemetry screen element.
2 Select the Silence Bed pop-up key.
Depending on your Information Center configuration, the Silence Bed key may silence both
telemetry alarms and bedside alarms.

199
16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient Functions Available For Devices Connected Via SRR

WARNING Even when the telemetry data is not visible on the screen, you may be silencing telemetry and monitor
alarms, if the Information Center and monitor are so configured.

Suspending Telemetry Alarms

When you select Pause Alarms or Alarms Off at the monitor, the alarms are off or paused for
the bedside measurements. When you switch alarms off or pause alarms at the Information Center,
both telemetry and monitor alarms are affected.
Refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use for more details on the Suspend/Pause alarms
behavior of the Information Center and telemetry device.

Using Standby
When you select Standby mode at the monitor, the bedside goes into Standby mode but the telemetry
device will continue monitoring.
Refer to the Information Center Instructions for Use for details on the Standby behavior of the
Information Center and telemetry device.

Functions Available For Devices Connected Via

SRR

Telemetry Device

Tele 1

The Telemetry Device window can be opened from the Measurement Selection
window, by selecting the Tele pop-up key, or via Main Setup -> Telemetry Device.
The window shows the equipment label of the assigned telemetry device and, for monitors with SRR
capability, a battery status symbol and a symbol indicating the signal quality of the
SRR link .
If the monitor has a connection to an Information Center, the pop-up keys Unpair to Mon. and
Unpair to Tele let you end the device pairing. After unpairing, the Information Center will
receive data exclusively from the monitor or from the telemetry device.
If the monitor does not have a connection to an Information Center, or there is a pairing mismatch,
the Unassign Tele pop-up key lets you end the telemetry device assignment and close the SRR
link.

Temporarily Stopping the Short Range Radio Connection

To temporarily disable the SRR connection for this device, for example, in case of interference:
♦ Select the Stop SRR pop-up key.

200
General Telemetry-related Functions 16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient

This closes the SRR link and the telemetry device switches over to standard telemetry transmission.
The battery status symbol will no longer be shown and the SRR quality indicator symbol will be
crossed out.
To return to SRR use:
♦ Select the Start SRR pop-up key and press the Check button on the telemetry transceiver.

Setting Up Measurements
The Setup ECG and Setup SpO2T pop-up keys give you access to the measurement setup menus.
The Measmt. Select. pop-up key takes you directly to the Measurement Selection window where
all connected measurement devices are shown.

General Telemetry-related Functions

The following functions are valid for directly and indirectly connected telemetry devices.

ECG Source Tracking at the Information Center

The Information Center continuously checks whether a valid ECG signal is coming from the monitor
or the telemetry device. If you unplug the ECG patient cable from the monitor and plug it into the
telemetry device, the Information Center will automatically switch to monitoring the ECG from the
telemetry device. At the monitor, its own ECG measurement will be deactivated — the ECG Setup
menu will no longer be accessible.
When you unplug the patient cable from the telemetry device and plug it back into the monitor again,
the Information Center will switch back to monitoring the ECG from the monitor. The ECG
measurement will be activated again at the monitor. Note that in this case, as the screen switches back
to the monitor’s own measurements, the SpO2T measurement (if present) will no longer be displayed.
In the same way the source is tracked when a telemetry device is directly connected to a monitor, then
disconnected and vice versa.
In case of ambiguity, a yellow INOP message !!CHECK ECG SOURCE indicates that more than one
valid ECG source is active.

Synchronized Settings
If ECG is measured at the monitor, and then the patient is connected to a telemetry device for
monitoring, the Information Center will use the monitor settings for the telemetry device. In general,
the following settings will be synchronized:

Heart Rate HR/Pulse Alarm On/Off, Heart Rate High/Low Limit,

ECG Primary Lead, Secondary Lead, Va Lead1, Vb Lead1, Lead Placement
Arrhythmia Analysis Mode, Asystole Threshold, Pause Threshold, VTach HR,
VTach Run, PVCs/min, Vent. Rhythm, SVT HR, SVT Run, PVCs/
min On/Off, Pacer not capture On/Off, Pacer not pace On/Off, Non-
Sustain On/Off, Vent. Rhythm On/Off, Run PVCs On/Off, Pair
PVCs On/Off, Missed Beat On/Off, Pause On/Off, R-on-T On/Off,
Vent. Bigeminy On/Off, Vent. Trigeminy On/Off, Multiform PVCs
On/Off, Irregular HR On/Off, SVT On/Off, Afib On/Off

201
16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient Use Models With Telemetry

ST ST Analysis On/Off, ST Alarm On/Off, ISO Point, J point, ST point,

ST Priority List, Single ST Alarm Limit, Multi ST Alarm Limit
QT QT analysis On/Off, QT Lead, QTc High Alarm On/Off, ΔQTc
Alarm On/Off, QTc High Limit, ΔQTc High Limit, QTc Formula2,
QT Baseline
SpO2T SpO2 Alarms on/off, SpO2 Alarm limits
NBP Alarm Suppression On/Off, Pulse(SpO2) On/Off

1.Va and Vb leads are reset to default (V2, V5) if the configured Va or Vb lead for the telemetry device is not
one of V1 through V6.
2.These setting will only be synchronized when the Information Center supports QT Analysis for Telemetry.

WARNING • Not all settings are synchronized; after changing the ECG source, always check that the settings are
appropriate.
• Va and Vb leads are reset to default (V2, V5) if the configured Va or Vb lead for the telemetry device
is not one of V1 through V6

If later the patient is disconnected from the telemetry device, and reconnected to the monitor again,
any changes in the settings made in the meantime will be passed on to the monitor. In this way,
settings continuity is preserved when the ECG source changes.
Settings synchronization can only take place when there is no patient information mismatch between
the monitor and the Information Center. If a Check ECG Settings or CHECK PAIRING
INOP appears always check that the ECG settings, especially the paced setting, are appropriate for
your patient.

Use Models With Telemetry

The standard use model combining a monitor and a telemetry device involves pairing the two devices
so that the data measured by the telemetry device appears on the monitor screen - and at the
Information Center in the same patient sector as the monitor data. The following variations are
possible:
1 MP5 monitor is paired with a telemetry transceiver - direct or indirect connection
– telemetry data appear on the monitor
– the MP5 cannot be connected to a host monitor (Companion Mode)
2 MP5 is declared as a telemetry device and paired with one of the larger monitors (MP20-90) -
direct or indirect connection
– MP5 measurement data appear on the monitor it is paired with
– a telemetry transceiver cannot be used with the MP5
3 A telemetry transceiver with a short range radio adapter is assigned to an MP5 which is connected
(Companion Mode) to a larger host monitor (MP20 - MP90) - direct connection.
– telemetry data appear on the host monitor
– telemetry transceiver is paired with the host monitor but is assigned to the MP5
– the MP5 must have no equipment label
The different variations require different configuration settings; refer to the Configuration Guide for
details.

202
Use Models With Telemetry 16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient

NOTE If a telemetry transceiver is directly connected to an X2 or MP5 that is connected (via Companion
Mode) to a host monitor with revision F software, a TELE CONFIG UNSUPP INOP will appear as
this combination is not supported.

203
16 Assigning Two Devices to One Patient Use Models With Telemetry

204
 17

Enhancing Telemetry17

Monitoring with the Monitor

You can use an MP5T or MP5 monitor without a connection to an Information Center to view
measurement data from a telemetry transceiver at the bedside. You can also use the monitor to make
additional measurements and send this measurement data to the Information Center via the telemetry
transceiver. The monitor can so be used as a mobile viewer and measurement device, and is set up to
simplify the assign/unassign procedures when used with short range radio.

Monitor and Telemetry Transceiver Requirements

The monitor and the telemetry transceiver need a direct connection, either with a cable or with a short
range radio link. Monitors which can be used for cable connection have a socket labeled . Not all
revisions of the telemetry transceiver can be used directly with the monitor, a message Sending
patient data to Telemetry Device... will appear after connection when the
telemetry device supports this function.
Due to data availability restrictions, in particular that no alarm data are available, it is not
recommended to use a monitor connected to a host monitor (via Companion Mode) to collect data in
this way. If such a monitor is used a CENTRAL: TELE ONLY INOP will be displayed.

Data Sent to the Information Center

The data sent to the Information Center includes numerics from NBP, SpO2, Pulse from SpO2 and
predictive temperature. INOPs from these measurements, battery INOPs and a general INOP
generated by alarms from any other measurement (MORE BED ALARMS) will also be transmitted.

NOTE The monitor must be configured appropriately to support direct connection to a telemetry transceiver;
refer to the Configuration Guide for details.

Changing Assignment to a New Telemetry Transceiver

1 Connect the telemetry transceiver to the monitor (if a cable connection is used), or
Assign the telemetry transceiver to the monitor; see “Assigning a Telemetry Transceiver with an
SRR Adapter to a Monitor” on page 197.
2 Make the required measurements; the data will be automatically sent to the Information Center via
the telemetry transceiver.
3 Disconnect the telemetry transceiver from the monitor (if a cable connection is used).
When a short range radio connection is used, it is not necessary to unassign the telemetry
transceiver. This will happen automatically when the next telemetry transceiver is assigned. The

205
17 Enhancing Telemetry Monitoring with the Monitor

patient is also discharged (if configured), ensuring that the measurement data is erased before data
from the next patient appears. Always assign the telemetry transceiver before you start making
measurements.

NOTE When a direct connection is used: your monitor may be configured to automatically discharge the
patient either when the telemetry transceiver is disconnected or when another telemetry transceiver is
connected. Be aware that in the second case you must always connect the new telemetry transceiver
before you start making measurements, otherwise the measured data will be erased by the discharge
when you connect the new telemetry transceiver.

206
 18

18Trends
Trends are patient data collected over time and displayed in graphic, tabular or histogram form to give
you a picture of how your patient’s condition is developing. Trend information is stored in the trends
database for continuously-monitored measurements, such as ECG, as well as for aperiodically-
measured parameters, such as Cardiac Output.

Viewing Trends
Trend information can be viewed embedded as a screen element on specially-designed Screens, or you
can open a trend window over the current Screen.
♦ To view trends embedded as a screen element, select the Screen name in the monitor info line to
enter the Change Screen menu, then select a Screen designed to show an embedded trend
window.
♦ To open the tabular trends window over the current Screen, select the
Vitals Trend SmartKey.
Vitals
Trend
♦ To open the graphic trends window over the current Screen, select the
Graph Trend SmartKey.
Graph
♦ To open the graphic trends window over the current screen, select Main Trend
Setup > Trends > Graph Trend.
♦ To open the histogram trend window over the current screen, select Main
Setup > Trends > Histogram, or select the Histogram SmartKey. .
Histo-
The trend windows open displaying the most recent data and are updated as new gram
data is stored. A timescale along the bottom of the screen shows you where you
are in the trends database. The preview column on the right-hand side shows the
latest available measurement value. The preview column is updated every five minutes or whenever an
NBP or other aperiodic measurement is completed.
A question mark (?) beside a value means that the data may not be reliable, due perhaps to an INOP
condition in the measurement.
Your monitor screen may look slightly different to the examples shown in this chapter.

207
18 Trends Viewing Trends

Trends Pop-Up Keys

When you open the graphic or tabular trends window, a selection of pop-up keys appears to let you
navigate through the stored trend data and carry out trends-related tasks.

Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....

Select see a pop-up list of trend groups and select a group for viewing.
Group
Select see a pop-up list of available data resolution settings and select the level of detail shown
Interval in the trend view.
Print/ print a tabular trends report or make a tabular trend recording of the data in the
Record current window. The report will use the current trend interval settings.
Print print a graphic trends report of the data in the current window. The report will use the
current trend interval settings.
move the cursor one step to the left or right to navigate through the trends database
timeline.

move the cursor one page to the left or right to navigate through the trends database
timeline.

jump to the beginning or the end of the trends database to see the most recent or oldest
trend information stored.
scroll up and down the screen to see measurement trends that do not fit in the current
view.

Vital open the current trend view in tabular form. The displayed time period and resolution
Signs stay the same.
Graph open the current trend view in graphic form. The displayed time period and resolution
Trend stay the same.

Viewing Graphic Trends

Graphical Trends: Standard

HR
SpO2

RR

Temp

Select Select
Group Interval

208
Viewing Trends 18 Trends

A cursor spanning all measurements in the trend group helps you to navigate through the trends
database and shows you your current position in the database. When the cursor is moved across the
time line, the values measured at the cursor time are shown in the right hand column.
In graphical trends, aperiodic measurement trends are shown as an asterisk, NBP has a special symbol.
To use the trend cursor to navigate in time through the trends database,
1 Select the graphical trend or the arrow pop-up keys to activate the cursor.
2 Use the arrow pop-up keys to move the trend cursor backwards and forwards in time, or
3 Place the cursor at a specific time by touching the graph.

Viewing Vital Signs Trends

Vital Signs: Standard

HR
SpO2
RR
Temp
NBPs
NBPd
NBPm

Aperiodic values are shown with a timestamp

The currently-selected column is highlighted. The values can be configured to display in the same
colors as the waves and numerics on the realtime display.
Any values available for display before the next scheduled update are shown in the right hand column,
with a timestamp in brackets.
If more than one value is available for an aperiodic trend for a certain trend period, all measured values
are stored in the database and the value closest to the timestamp is shown in the Vital Signs display
marked with an arrow.

209
18 Trends Setting Up Trends

Viewing Histogram Trends

Histogram: RR (4hrs @ 1min)

rpm

The title line of the window shows the label of the trended measurement and the resolution of the data;
in the RR histogram above, 1 minute trend samples.
The horizontal axis shows the range and unit of the displayed measurement. The vertical axis shows the
percentage of time.
The columns in the foreground show how much of the time the measured values fell into this range on
the scale. For example, in the histogram above, the RR value was between 15 and 20 rpm during 70%
of the last four hours. The arrow mark over that column shows that the currently measured value is also
in this range. These columns are displayed in the same color as the measurement data.
The columns in the background show the cumulative percentage value: each of the foreground
columns is added to the sum of those columns to the left of it.
A question mark is displayed if less than two-thirds of the data are valid samples.
The pop-up keys in the window can be used to change the measurement, the time period and the
range. You can also print out a histogram report.
The SpO2 histograms can be trend histograms or realtime histograms with 1 second samples. For
SpO2 realtime histograms, the range cannot be changed.

Setting Up Trends
Trends are set up in Configuration Mode. You can make temporary changes to trends settings such as
trend groups, priorities, or scales in Monitoring Mode. The general settings for all Trends are under
Main Setup -> Trends.
Settings for a single segment in graphical trends or for the corresponding trend group can be made
more easily in that segment menu.

Making Segment Settings

The Graphical Trends window is divided into measurement segments, each of which has its
own settings.

210
Setting Up Trends 18 Trends

To enter the segment menu,

♦ select the left hand column of the segment, where the measurement label is displayed.

Expanded View
To expand the segment to fill the Graphical Trends window,
♦ in the Segment menu, select Expand to have that segment enlarged to fill the window.
In the expanded view, you can also highlight a measurement to make it more easily visible (for example
when multiple ST trends are in one segment). To highlight a measurement,
♦ in the Segment menu, select Highlight repeatedly until the highlight is on the required
measurement.
To return the segment to its original size,
♦ in the Segment menu, select Expand again.

Trend Scales for Segment Measurements

To change the trend scales for a measurement in the current segment:
1 In the segment menu, select the measurement label
2 Select Upper to change the upper limit of the scale or Lower to change the lower limit of the
scale.

Optimum Scale
To have the monitor automatically select an optimum scale for viewing, based on current values,
♦ in the Segment menu, select Optimum Scale.
This scale change is temporary. When the graphical trend window is closed the scale reverts back to the
setting in Parameter Scales.
To switch off automatic optimum scaling,
♦ in the Segment menu, select Optimum Scale again.

Trend Group
To add or remove measurements for this trend group or change the order of the existing
measurements:
1 In the Segment menu, select Change Group
2 Use the Add, Change, Sort Up and Sort Down popup keys to change or re-order the group
as required.

No. of Segments
In an embedded graphical trend window, you can select the number of segments to be displayed in the
Segment menu:
♦ In the Segment menu, select No. of Segments

211
18 Trends Setting Up Trends

Trend Groups
The measurements grouped in trend groups define the trends displayed together in the Vital Signs or
Graphics Trends windows and printed in trends reports and recordings. The sequence of the
measurements in the group defines the order in which they are displayed. Measurements listed between
dotted line separators are displayed overlapping. The trend group All contains all available
measurements, you cannot change the order or selection of this group.
To change the selection of measurements in a trend group, either use the Change Group setting in
the Segment menu or:
1 Select Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Groups
2 Select the Trend Group you want to change and use the pop-up keys to Add, Change, or
Delete the selection of measurements trended.
To temporarily change the order in which the measurements are displayed in a group,
1 Select Main Setup -> Trends -> Trend Groups
2 Select the Trend Group and then the measurement you want to move and use the Sort Up/
Sort Down pop-up keys.

Trend Interval
The trend interval defines the resolution of trend data shown on the Screen. High-resolution data is
especially suited for neonatal applications, where the clinical situation may change very quickly. In
adult monitoring, where the patient’s status typically changes more gradually, a longer trend may be
more informative.
To set the trend resolution, in the Vital Signs or Graphical Trends window,
♦ Select the Select Interval pop-up key and then select the required interval from the list.

Trend Priority
The monitor stores trend information for all monitored measurements, if configured to do so. If your
configuration restricts the number of measurements trended, you must choose which measurements
will be included. A priority list is used to select the trended measurements.
To see the measurement priority list for trending,
1 In the Main Setup menu, select Trends.
2 Select Trend Priority.
To add measurements to the priority list,
1 Select the pop-up key Add and choose from the pop-up list of available measurements.
2 Use the Sort Up and Sort Down pop-up keys to change the priority order.

Trend Parameter Scales

Parameter scales define how the trend waveform will appear on the screen and in trend reports.
Separate scales can be set for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patient trends.
To change the trend parameter scales settings, either use the Scale setting in the Segment menu or:
1 In the Main Setup menu, select Trends.
2 Select Parameter Scales.

212
Documenting Trends 18 Trends

3 Select the measurement or parameter you want to change from the list.
4 Select the pop-up key Change to call up the Scale menu.
5 In the Scale menu, select the parameter label you want to define settings for. Select Adult,
Pedi, and Neo and use the pop-up keypad to enter new upper and lower scale definitions.

Graphical Trend Presentation

Graphical trends and screen trends for measurements with compound values (for example ABP or
CO2) can be viewed in line or band form.
To change the presentation style,
1 Select Main Setup -> Trends
2 Select Global Style and choose
• Line to display the trends as a continuous line
• Band to fill the area between the trend lines, for example, between the systolic and diastolic
pressures, with color.

This sample ABP ABP 240

trend shows the
continuously-
measured values for 50
the systolic, diastolic
and mean pressures
displayed in band
form.

Setting Measurement and Period for Histograms

To set the default for the measurement data to be used in the histogram,
1 Select Main Setup -> Trends
2 Select Setup Histogram.
3 Select Data Source.
4 Select either a realtime SpO2 or Trended Data. From the trended data list select the required
measurement.
To set the default period for the histogram,
1 Select Main Setup -> Trends
2 Select Setup Histogram.
3 Select Select Period and select the required time period from the list.
When viewing a histogram, the data source, the period and the range can be changed using the pop-up
keys.

Documenting Trends
To print a Vital Signs or Graphical Trends report,

213
18 Trends Trends Databases

♦ in the Vital Signs or Graph Trends window, select the pop-up key Print to print a
report for the trend group currently on the monitor screen.
Reports include the most recent information in the trends database and extend backwards in time
according to the selected trend interval and your monitor’s configuration. Trends reports can be
printed on central or local printers.
To make a Vital Signs recording,
♦ in the Vital Signs window, select the Print/Record pop-up key, then select the Record
Vitals pop-up key.
Vital Signs recordings print the trend data for the current group and trend period shown in the
Vital Signs window.

Trends Databases
The trend databases store information for up to 16 measurements for up to 48 hours.
The values in the trends database are stored as measured by the monitor, they are not averaged values.
The trend resolution defines how often a value is stored. In general, if more than one value is available
for storage in the trends database, the most recent value is used. Some values in the trends are marked
with arrows. This indicates that for this time period, more values were available and the most recent
one is shown.

Example database configuration In this example, we see that the monitor stores the most recent data
at the highest resolution, older data are stored at a lower resolution.
“4 hours @ 12 second resolution” means that the monitor stores trend data every 12 seconds, for the
most recent four hours.

- 48 - 24 -4
hours hours hours now
time

4 hours @12 second resolution

24 hours @ 1 minute resolution

48 hours @ 5 minute resolution

Aperiodic Trends Database

Aperiodic trends do not count toward the maximum number of trends allowed by the trend
configuration. Trend data for aperiodic measurements is stored in a separate database and timestamped
with the measurement time.

Trending Multiple-Value Measurements

Some measurements generate multiple values, for example invasive pressure measurements can provide
systolic, diastolic, and mean values. These values are trended as separate measurements.

214
Screen Trends 18 Trends

Screen Trends
Trends configured to display permanently on special monitor Screens are called screen trends. The
selection and number of measurement waves in the Screen Trend segment depends on your monitor
configuration. Screen trends are color-coded to match the measurement wave and numerics, and they
can be viewed in graphical, tabular, histogram or horizon format.
If you do not see screen trends on the monitor Screen, select a different Screen, one that is configured
to show screen trends. Screen trends are only available on specially designed Screens.
Screen Trend information is taken from the Trends database. If you do not see a Screen Trend for a
particular measurement on the Screen, check the trend priority list to ensure that this measurement is
being trended.

Measurement waves or Measurement

high-res trend waves Screen trends numerics

ABP 240

50

Setting the Screen Trend Time

To set the ScreenTrend Time for all graphical, histogram and horizon screen trends (“global”
trend time),
1 Select a screen trend then select Setup Trend, or select Main Setup -> Trends.

215
18 Trends Screen Trends

2 Select ScreenTrend Time and select the required time: 30 minutes, one, two, four, eight, or
twelve hours.
This is now the Global screen trend time and defines the period of trend information shown for all
screen trends.
To set a different ScreenTrend Time for a screen trend or a group of aligned screen trends,
1 Select a screen trend
2 Select Change TrendTime
3 Select the required trend time.
Selecting Global leaves the trend time set to the global screen trend time.

Changing the Selection of Screen Trends Displayed

1 Select the screen trend.
2 Select Change Trend and select the required trend from the list of available trends.
Select Blank to remove the selected trend from the Screen.
If you do not see Change Trend in the screen trend menu, the trend is aligned to display with
the measurement wave. Changing the wave automatically changes the trend.
To display two or more screen trends overlapping,
1 Select the screen trend to open the screen trend menu,
2 Select Change Trend -> Add Trend and select a screen trend from the pop-up list.

Activating the Cursor for Screen Trends

To activate the cursor for Screen Trends:
1 Select the screen trend.
2 Select Activate Cursor
You can now use the arrow keys to move the cursor across the time line. The values measured at the
cursor time are shown next to the cursor.
To de-activate the cursor,
♦ Select Main Screen.

Changing the Screen Trend View

♦ To switch between tabular, graphic, histogram and horizon views, select the screen trend then select
Change View and select the required view.

Tabular View
NBP 15:15 120/80(95) 16:30 120/80(95)
Aperiodic measurements such as NBP, 120/80(95)
mmHg 15:30 120/80(95) 16:45
can be viewed as a screen trend in 15:45 120/80(95) 17:00 120/80(95)
tabular form. The measured values and 16:00 120/80(95) 17:15 120/80(95)
their timestamps are shown, with the 16:15 120/80(95) 17:30 120/80(95)
measurement label.

216
Screen Trends 18 Trends

The trend time for tabular screen trends depends on the space available on the Screen. Up to 30
measurements or 12 hours information can be shown.

Histogram View

The histogram view presents a combination of graphical trend and histogram. The histogram is on the
right hand side in a horizontal presentation with vertical gridlines representing 25%, 50%, 75% and
100%. Each column shows the percentage of time that the measurement values were in a specific
range. This range is represented by the column’s position in the graphical trend gridlines. The arrow
mark next to a column shows that the currently measured value is in the range covered by that column.
If less than two-thirds of the samples are valid, the histogram will be replaced by a question mark.

Horizon View

The horizon view presents trend information

superimposed over a defined baseline or base
range. This helps you visualize changes in
your patient’s condition since the baseline
was set.
The horizon view is made up of:
• a horizon, drawn in white, as a reference 1 2 3
point or baseline to help you visualize
changes in your patient’s condition. The horizon can be set to represent your patient’s current
condition, or a target condition and can be a single value or a range.
• a graphical trend, displaying patient data for the set TrendTime (1).
• a trend indicator arrow, indicating how the patient trend has developed in the set time period
(10 minutes, 5 minutes or 2 minutes) (2).
• a deviation bar, showing how the currently measured value deviates from the set horizon (3). The
height of the deviation bar is an indication of the extent of the change in your patient’s condition
relative to the (horizon) baseline.
Your monitor may not be configured to show all elements of the screen trend horizon view.

Setting the Horizon

The horizon is the reference value to which deviations in the measurements are compared.
1 To set the horizon, select the horizon trend
2 Select
– Set High Horizon to select the upper horizon value. If the high and low horizon values are
the same, the horizon is a baseline - if the values are different the horizon is a range.
– Set Low Horizon to select the lower horizon value.

217
18 Trends Screen Trends

– Auto Horizon to set the horizon for the selected horizon trend to the currently-measured
value
– Auto All to reset the horizon for all horizon screen trends to the currently-measured values
– Set Horizon to set the horizon to a specific value from a pop-up list.

Setting the Horizon Trend Scale

The horizon trend scale is defined with respect to the horizon. If your horizon is set to 100 and you
select 20 as the horizon scale delta, the upper limit of the horizon scale will be 120 and lower limit 80.
To set the horizon trend scale delta,
1 Select the horizon trend.
2 Select Set Scale Delta and select a value to define the distance between the horizon and the
upper and lower scale limits.
Be aware that changing the horizon trend scale can change the angle of the trend indicator, without the
patient’s condition having changed.
If a measurement exceeds the outer limits of the scale, the wave will be clipped and you must either
reset the horizon or the horizon trend scale to display the values outside the scale limits.

Setting the Time Period for the Trend Indicator Arrow

The time period for which the trend indicator arrow can be set in the Trends window.
1 Select Main Setup > Trends
2 Select HorizonArrowTime.
3 Select 10, 5 or 2 minutes.

218
 19

19High Resolution Trend Waves

High resolution (hi-res) trend waves provide information for fast-changing parameters at a glance.
They can help you to recognize trend patterns and to find interrelationships between measurements, by
comparing changes in your patient’s condition across different hi-res trend waves.
The hi-res waves are drawn at a speed of 3 cm/minute.
Hi-res trend waves use the wave scale as their display scale. Changing the wave scale changes the hi-res
trend wave scale.

OxyCRG
OxyCRG is a combination of three hi-res trend waves, btbHR, SpO2, and Resp, mainly used in
neonatal monitoring.

Printing Hi-Res Trend Wave Reports

To print hi-res trend waves on reports, you can choose to print either
• all VisibleWaves - prints all waves and hi-res trend waves currently displayed
• OxyCRG Waves - prints hi-res trend waves for btbHR, SpO2, and Resp.
For each hi-res trend wave, a maximum of six minutes of measurement data will be printed.
See the section on Reports for more information on setting up reports.

219
19 High Resolution Trend Waves Hi-Res Trend Wave Recordings

Hi-Res Trend Wave Recordings

The selection of waves in hi-res trend wave recordings and the recording speed are defined by the pre-
configured HiResTrd recording template. See the section on Recordings for more information.
To start a hi-res trend waves recording,
1 select the Recordings SmartKey, if configured, or select Main Setup -> Recordings
2 select the HiRes Recording pop-up key.

220
 20

20Event Surveillance
Events are electronic records of episodes in your patient’s condition. You can trigger them manually, or
set them to trigger automatically during pre-defined clinical situations.
The information the monitor stores for each event episode includes:
• waveforms for up to three measurements, ECG, SpO2 and Respiration
• numeric vital signs for all the measurements monitored
• any alarm conditions active when the event episode was triggered
You can navigate through the event database to view events retrospectively, and you can document
events on a recording or report marked with the patient name, bed label, and the data and time.
When an MP5 is connected to a host monitor, event surveillance will be disabled. No new events will
be detected and no existing events will be deleted. There is no data exchange between the host monitor
and the MP5 for event surveillance. When the MP5 is disconnected from the host monitor event
surveillance will resume and new events will be detected.

Event Episodes
When an event occurs, information for a
predefined duration is stored. This is the Event trigger
event episode. It includes information
from a defined period before the trigger,
called the event pre-time. The episode Event pre-time Event post-time
time after the event is called the event
post-time. If a further event occurs during
the event post-time it changes a single
event to a combined event (combi-event).
Manually-triggered event episodes Event Episode
document patient information from the
time leading up to the event trigger; they
do not have a post-time.

Neonatal Event Review - Event Episode Pre-time Post-time

HiResTrnd 1 minute 3 minutes
Four minutes, four samples per second. 2 minutes 2 minutes
3 minutes 1 minute

221
20 Event Surveillance Events Pop-Up Keys

Events Pop-Up Keys

Depending on the events view you choose, a selection of the events pop-up keys let you navigate
through the stored events and carry out events-related tasks.

Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....

Event open the Event Surveillance Setup menu.
Setup
Show open the Event Episode window to review the selected event in
Episode detail.
Show open the Event Review window.
Review
Manual start a manually-triggered event capture.
Event
CAR open the window showing the CAR SpO2 histogram
Histogrm
move the cursor left or right to the next event to navigate through the
events database. Placing the cursor over an event highlights it and shows
the event values for the selected event.
jump to the first or last event in the event database.

Vitals Graphic toggle between a tabular and graphic version of the Event Episode
View View window currently viewed.
Delete delete the currently-selected event from the database. The monitor asks
Event you to confirm this deletion. You cannot retrieve deleted events.
Print/ access the printing and recording pop-up keys to document events.
Record

Event Triggers
You can trigger event capture manually, for example, if you want to record a patient’s condition before
a procedure. You can also set events to trigger automatically, when the patient’s values cross a
predefined threshold value, or when a particular measurement or procedure is carried out.
The trigger condition for event groups is set in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.

If you use alarm limits as event triggers, the event capture is triggered automatically when your
patient’s values violate set alarm limits, or when a specified alarm condition, such as apnea, occurs. No
events of this kind are triggered if alarms are switched off. Changing alarm limits changes the event
trigger definitions.
The asterisk symbols beside the trigger tell you about the alarm triggers:
*** indicates a high priority (red) alarm
** indicates a lower priority (yellow) alarm.
Triggers without asterisk symbols are user-defined triggers.

222
Event Triggers 20 Event Surveillance

If you set user-defined threshold triggers, you can define event triggers that are independent of alarm
limits. You must set a threshold value and a threshold time for the trigger. If you set the trigger
threshold time to 12 seconds, the monitor triggers an event if the threshold is violated for more than 12
seconds.

If you set user-defined deviation triggers, you can define event triggers that are independent of
specific limits and based instead on deviations from the current values. You must set a deviation and a
period of time in which the deviation occurs. There are three types of deviation available: ANY
Deviation, UP Deviation where only changes in a positive direction are detected and DOWN
Deviation where only changes in a negative direction are detected. The deviation can be defined
either in relative terms as a percentage, for example 10%, or as an absolute value, such as 10 bpm.

Event Retriggering
If a condition that triggered an event persists and the values remain beyond the trigger threshold, a new
event will not be triggered.
For a new event to be triggered by the same condition, the measured values for at least one of the
triggers must cross back into the normal range and then recross the trigger threshold.

Setting Triggers
1 Select Main Setup -> Event Surveill. -> Setup Events to enter the Event
Setup window.
Event Setup
2 Select the name of
the episode type to Group Name: NER Activated

set the episode pre/ Episode Type: HighRes Trend (4min): -2/+2 min

post time. All ***/** Alarms

HR (Pulse)
3 Set the event trigger
for each HIGH for sec
SpO2
measurement.
Select each trigger All ***/** Alarms
Resp
name and select, if
available, either an
alarm trigger, or a user-defined trigger from the pop-up trigger list. If you select a user-defined
trigger, set the required threshold level and delay time.
4 Set the trigger status to Activated to start event triggering. If the status is Deactivated
event surveillance is effectively switched off.
5 Select Confirm to confirm your changes.

Triggering Events Manually

♦ To manually trigger an event, select the SmartKey Manual Event.
For manually-triggered events, patient information for the time leading up to the trigger moment is
stored using the settings of the assigned event group.

Running a Car Seat Assessment Record

In the NER group you can run a Car Seat Assessment Record (CAR). This is a special period of event
surveillance using the current setup of the NER group.

223
20 Event Surveillance The Events Database

To start a CAR period:

1 Select the Start CAR pop-up key or SmartKey.
2 Select the required time period for the assessment.
3 Select Confirm to start the CAR.
If the NER group was not active it will be activated automatically.
During the CAR period an SpO2 histogram is also generated with 1 second samples. For general
information about the presentation of data in a histogram, see “Viewing Histogram Trends” on
page 210. The CAR SpO2 histogram is unique: it can only be accessed from the events function. It is
generated from the beginning of the CAR period (contrary to the non-SpO2 histograms which are
generated from trended data retrospectively at the end of a time period). Settings are fixed for this
histogram and cannot be changed when viewing it.

The Events Database

The maximum number of events that can be stored in the event database depends on the database
configuration. The event database is set up in the monitor’s Configuration Mode. Events are stored in
the monitor’s event database for the configured lifetime, either 8 hours or 24 hours. Deleted events
cannot be retrieved. Events are automatically deleted when:
• their configured lifetime is over
• the storage capacity of the database is exceeded (storing a further event deletes the oldest event in the
memory)
• a patient is discharged.
As the event database is cleared when you discharge a patient, you should ensure that you have
documented any events you require for the patient records before you confirm the discharge.

Viewing Events
• To review all the events, use the Event Review window.
• To review individual event episodes in detail, use the Event Episode window.

To start viewing events, either:

♦ in the Main Setup menu, select Event Surveill. and then select the event view you
require from the list, or
♦ select the Event Surveill. SmartKey and then select the event view you
require from the list.

Event Counter
Apnea events (A), bradycardia events (B), and combinations of these events are counted and classified
by the event counter in the Event Summary. If they are associated with a Desaturation (D), this is also
marked. Manual events (M) are counted separately. In the example below, A(D):2(1) indicates that
two apnea events occurred and one of them was associated with a desaturation.

16 Stored Events: A(D):2(1) B(D):7(1) AB (D): 1(1) D:6 M:0

224
Viewing Events 20 Event Surveillance

Counting Combi-Events
If one or more events occur during the same Episode Time, the monitor combines them and displays
them as distinct events in one event episode, called a combi-event. The first event is the trigger event,
and the others are follow-up events. For example, if an apnea event is followed 40 seconds later by a
brady event, the brady event is not counted as a single event but as part of the apnea event.

Event Review Window

♦ To enter the Event Review window, select the graphic event summary, if available, or select the
events pop-up key Show Review.

Event Review

(Total: 4)
HR
Brady

SpO2
DESAT

Resp
APNEA

Manual
Total

Event bars: Each event bar represents one event. The height indicates the event severity. Bars that
extend over more than one channel represent combi-events. Manually-captured events are marked with
a bar above the timeline instead of in the measurement channels.

Event values: Event information for the currently-selected event is shown on the left of the review
window. The trigger measurement is highlighted.
– If an alarm triggers the event, the monitor shows the alarm conditions that triggered the event.
– If the event trigger was user-defined, instead of an alarm condition the monitor shows for
example SpO2 94<96, where the second number is the current event trigger threshold and the
first number is the maximum deviation from the set limit.

Trigger threshold: The horizontal lines show the trigger thresholds. Gaps in the line indicate that the
trigger was inactive for a while, possibly because alarms were switched off or because there was an
INOP condition in the group measurements.

Timeline: The timeline at the bottom indicates the period currently stored in the event database.

Event Episode Window

♦ To enter the Event Episode window, select the pop-up key Show Episode.

225
20 Event Surveillance Annotating Events

The Event Episode window shows four minutes of high-resolution event information.

Event Episode
Trigger event values,
HR
highlighted
Brady
104 < 110

SpO2
Follow-on event
values
Desat
71 < 85

Timeline, showing Resp

episode Pre/Post-
time

Active event group 7 Jul

NER

The event values to the left of the measurement channels show the trigger threshold set and the
maximum amount by which this limit was exceeded. In this example, Brady 104<110 tells you
that 104 was the lowest HR value measured during the event time and that the low HR trigger
threshold was set to 110 when the event was triggered. If the event was manually triggered, the event
value boxes display “manual”.

Annotating Events
1 To annotate an event, in the Event Episode window, select the pop-up key Select Annotatn.
2 Select the required annotation from the pop-up list of available annotations for the currently active
event group.
Up to 20 annotations can be configured to let you add commonly-used clinical notes to event episodes
for documentation purposes. To see the complete list of available annotations, in the Event Setup
menu, select Event Annotation.

Documenting Events
You can print a report or make a recording of the events history stored in the database or of individual
event episodes or a Car Seat Assessment Record.

Documenting Event Review

1 In the Event Review window, select the pop-up key Print/Record. This calls up the
event documentation pop-up keys.

226
Documenting Events 20 Event Surveillance

2 For a graphic Event Review recording, select the Record Graphic pop-up key.
For a tabular Event Review recording, select the Record Tabular pop-up key.
For a CAR review report, select the Print CAR pop-up key
To print an Event Report, select the Print Review pop-up key.

Documenting an Event Episode

1 In the Event Episode window, select the pop-up key Print/Record. This calls up the
event documentation pop-up keys.
2 To make an Event Episode recording, select the Record pop-up key.
To print an Event Episode, select the Print Episode pop-up key.

Event Recordings

Event Review Recordings

Each event review recording strip begins with a summary of the events stored in the event database.
Recording strip annotation is explained in the Recording chapter.
In graphic event review recordings, events are represented by bars.
The timeline reflects the period stored in the database, either 24 hours (divided into 4 hour sections) or
8 hours (divided into one-hour sections).
In tabular event review recordings, the events stored in the event database are shown in chronological
order, with a number and time-stamp.
The measurements in the event group are shown in the next columns, marked “Parameter 1, Parameter
2...”, along with the event values measured at the time of the event. For each event, the trigger values
are shown.

Event Episode Recordings

Event episode recordings are divided into four sections.

1 The first section shows the patient information and the event 1.
group of the episode with the event values for the group 91MIN Green, Sarah
37549201
measurements. The trigger symbol marks the event trigger. 23 Jan 02 10:43 NICU3

2 The second section shows the waveforms recorded during the Group: NER
episode. The trigger moment is marked with a triangle and HR : BRADY 95>110

divides the episode into the pre/post time. Any calibration marks SpO2
Resp : ▼APNEA (31 sec)▼
and grid marks on the screen are automatically printed on the
recording.

227
20 Event Surveillance Documenting Events

25 mm/min
2. 3. 4.
-2 min 2:36 +2 min HR 142 bpm **BRADY
SPO2 97% ***Apnea
RR 0 rpm HR 142 bpm
btbHR Pulse 142 bpm
CVP (-?-) mmHg
SpO2 Intervention req. SpO2 98%
PERF 4.9
RR 80 rpm
Resp
***Apnea NBP EQUIP MALF

3 The third section shows the most important vital signs information, including numerics, active
alarms, and any annotations made on the event episode.
4 The fourth section shows the numerics for all the currently monitored vital signs and any alarm
conditions or INOPs active at the time the event was triggered.

Event Reports
Event reports can be printed on A4 and letter size paper.

228
Documenting Events 20 Event Surveillance

Event Review Reports

The event review report documents all the events stored in the event database.

229
20 Event Surveillance Documenting Events

Event Episode Reports

The event episode report documents the patient information from the currently-selected event. See the
section on event recordings for an explanation of the report elements.

230
 21

21ProtocolWatch
ProtocolWatch (PW) is a clinical decision support tool. It allows you to run a clinical protocol which
can monitor developments in the patient’s condition, taking into account:
• measured values from the monitor
• values manually entered by you (for example manual temperature measurements, lab values)
• your assessment of patient status
ProtocolWatch notifies you when certain conditions or combinations of conditions occur and it
documents developments in a log which can be printed.

Severe Sepsis Screening

Severe Sepsis Screening is a protocol implemented for the ProtocolWatch application. It is a
computerized implementation of the January 2008 Surviving Sepsis Campaign Guidelines for
Management of Severe Sepsis and Septic Shock 2 Sepsis Definitions. Philips does not make any claims
about their effectiveness to reduce the morbidity or mortality associated with severe sepsis.
Severe Sepsis Screening assists you in recognizing the early signs and symptoms of sepsis by comparing
the state of your patient to the defined criteria. Use of the protocol requires thorough knowledge of the
Sepsis Definitions in the SSC Guidelines for Management of Severe Sepsis and Septic Shock. Severe Sepsis
Screening is not a diagnostic or therapeutic tool and is not intended to replace the competent
judgement of a clinician.
In Severe Sepsis Screening the measurement values and patient status are compared to the Severe Sepsis
Screening criteria. When these criteria have been met, the clinician confirms the presence of infection
and sepsis-related organ dysfunction and can authorize entering the Sepsis Resuscitation Bundle.
On the MP5 monitor only Severe Sepsis Screening is implemented. If at the end of this phase sepsis has
been confirmed, the patient will normally be transferred to an intensive care unit for treatment in the
sepsis resuscitation and management phases. In this case you can connect the MP5 to another
IntelliVue monitor with the full version of the SSC Sepsis Protocol and transfer the current state, the
settings and the log.

CAUTION It is not possible to transfer SSC Sepsis Protocol data from an MP5 monitor with release F.0 software
to another monitor with release G.0 software and vice versa.

2.Surviving Sepsis Campaign Guidelines for Management of Severe Sepsis and Septic Shock - 2008
January
© Surviving Sepsis Campaign, (All Rights Reserved)

231
21 ProtocolWatch Severe Sepsis Screening

Severe Sepsis Screening and this description are based on the SSC Guidelines for Management of Severe
Sepsis and Septic Shock2 from January 2008 and the SSC Bundle definitions from January 2005. To
check the version of the Guidelines and Bundle definitions on the monitor,
♦ Select Main Setup -> Revision -> ProtocolWatch -> SSC Sepsis

ProtocolWatch-SSC Sepsis
Inactive Screening SSC Standby
SSC Sepsis is only intended for adult patients.
SSC Sepsis Protocol rev A.02.04
SSC Guidelines for Management of Severe Sepsis and Septic Shock from
Jan 2008 - Copyright Surviving Sepsis Campaign (All rights reserved)
SSC/IHI Bundle Definitions from Jan 2005

Caution: Consider specific clinical context before following

SSC Sepsis treatment recommendations

The SSC Sepsis Protocol is not a diagnostic or therapeutic tool and is not
intended to replace the competent judgement of a clinician.

SSC: Surviving Sepsis Campaign

IHI: Institute for Healthcare Improvement
14-Mar-2007 08:10:20

Orientation On The Screen

At the top of each window there is an orientation line showing the phases available on your monitor,
with the currently active phase highlighted.

ProtocolWatch - Sepsis Resuscitation Bundle

Inactive Screening SSC Standby

You can also place the ProtocolWatch symbol, together with the currently active phase, on the main
screen, in one of the numeric positions. This allows you to see at a glance which phase is currently
active, even when no SSC Sepsis Protocol window is currently displayed. If you need to enter data or
perform an action in an SSC Sepsis Protocol window, the symbol will turn into a SmartKey.
SSC SSC
Screening Screening

Suspending the Protocol for 24 Hours

To suspend the protocol for 24 hours:
1 Select Main Setup -> ProtocolWatch -> Suspend for 24 hours.
2 Select Confirm.
The protocol will resume activity after 24 hours with Severe Sepsis Screening.

232
Severe Sepsis Screening 21 ProtocolWatch

Severe Sepsis Screening

As soon as an adult patient is connected to the monitor, and heart rate or pulse is being measured, the
protocol begins to observe heart rate, temperature and respiration rate values in the background. If
temperature or respiration rate is not being measured continuously, a pop-up window appears at 4-
hour intervals to ask for manually measured values. These values are all compared to the screening
criteria: HR above 90, Temp above 38.3°C (100.9°F) or below 36.0°C (96.8°F), RR above 20.
If any one of the values fulfils the screening criteria, the first Severe Sepsis Screening
window appears:

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby
Which of the following signs and symptoms of infection are
both PRESENT and NEW to the patient?
T<36.0ºC (96.8ºF) or T>38.3ºC (100.9ºF) 39.5ºC

Tachycardia (HR>90bpm) 60bpm

Respiration

Spontaneous Respiration (RR > 20rpm)

Mechanically ventilated

WBC >12000/μl or <4000/μl or >10% immature forms

Acutely altered mental status

Chills with rigors

Hyperglycemia (Glucose > 6.7 mmol/l or >120mg/dl) in absence of

diabetes

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Enter Enter Confirm Remind
Log T1 SpRR 15 min

The measured value which has fulfilled the criteria is shown highlighted (in the example shown above
it is temperature). There is a check box for the infection signs and symptoms listed,
• if the monitor has measured values which meet the screening criteria, and
• for all signs and symptoms which cannot be measured by the monitor.
Check the box if you can confirm that this sign or symptom is present and new. If the patient is
mechanically ventilated, the Mechanically ventilated box must be checked. If you have
manually measured temperature or respiration rate, you can enter the values using the Enter RR and
Enter Temp keys.
Select Confirm when the check boxes reflect the current patient status.
Select Remind 15 min if you want to delay filling out this screen. (When you enter the screen
manually this key will be a Cancel key, as no action is required in this case.)

233
21 ProtocolWatch Severe Sepsis Screening

Changing Conditions
The window reappears if:
• a previously fulfilled criteria is again fulfilled
• a new HR or RR criteria is fulfilled,
• the HR or RR value which previously fulfilled the criteria now triggers a **High alarm or a ***
Tachy alarm,
• after 8 hours (configurable to 12 hours) if at least one infection sign is still present.

Two Or More Infection Signs Or Symptoms Confirmed

If you have confirmed two or more infection signs in the first Severe Sepsis Screening window, a new
pop-up window appears:

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby

Is the patient history suggestive of a new infection

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Show Yes No Remind
Log Details 15 min

If you select Yes, the next screen appears requesting a lactate measurement.
If you select No, the screening phase continues and the first Severe Sepsis Screening window reappears
in the situations described in Changing Conditions above.

Lactate Measurement

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby
SSC Sepsis protocol requires Lactate measurement now.
Lactate>4mmol/l (36mg/dl)?

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Enter Remind
Confirm
Log Lact 15 min

To enter the Lactate value, select the Enter Lact key. If the value entered is > 4 mmol/l the check
box is automatically checked.
Select Confirm when a value has been entered. What follows depends on the Lactate value:
• If Lactate is > 4 mmol/l: the value meets the criteria for severe sepsis and a window appears
recommending authorized clinician review before entering the Sepsis Resuscitation Bundle.
• If Lactate is ≤ 4 mmol/l: a further window appears requiring your input to determine on the basis of
blood pressure values whether the patient meets the criteria for severe sepsis.

234
Severe Sepsis Screening 21 ProtocolWatch

Hypotension Evaluation
If the Lactate value was not above 4 mmol/l, the next window asks whether the patient has persistent
hypotension.

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby

Does the patient have persistent Hypotension?

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Show Yes No Remind
Log Details 15 min

The protocol defines Hypotension as:

• SBP < 90mmHg (12.0kPa), or
• MAP < 65mmHg (9.0kPa), or
• SBP decrease > 40mmHg (5.0kPa) below baseline.
You can see this definition in the window by selecting Show Details.
If the patient has persistent hypotension as defined, select Yes. This acknowledges that the patient
meets the criteria for severe sepsis and a final window appears recommending authorized clinician
review before entering the Sepsis Resuscitation Bundle.
If the patient does not have persistent hypotension, select No. After an hour the following screen
appears.

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby

Is the previously acknowledged infection still present?

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Show No
Yes Cancel
Log Details

If you select Yes, the window for the Lactate measurement will reappear. If you select No, screening
continues — comparing heart rate, temperature and respiration rate values against the screening
criteria.

Authorized Clinician Review

ProtocolWatch-Severe Sepsis Screening

Inactive Screening SSC Standby
The patient meets the SSC Sepsis protocol criteria for severe sepsis.
Review by authorized clinician is recommended.

ProtocolWatch
Protocol Confirm Remind
Log 5 min

235
21 ProtocolWatch Severe Sepsis Screening

To review the protocol, select Protocol Log. You can also print out the log to document the
screening phase.
Select Confirm to complete the screening phase.

Viewing And Printing The Protocol Log

The Protocol Log stores all user interactions, alarms and phase transitions while the SSC Sepsis
Protocol is running.
To view the Log select Main Setup -> ProtocolWatch -> Protocol Log
You can choose between three different views of the Protocol Log:
• Summary View - a short form which does not include when the windows were triggered
• Full View - a complete log of all user interactions, alarms and phase transitions
• Phase View - you can view log entries for one phase by selecting that phase on the orientation
line
When the Log consists of several pages, you can move through the pages with the Previous Page
and Next Page keys.
To start a Protocol Log printout, select Print.
The log is cleared whenever a patient is discharged.

Always Discharge Patients

It is essential that patients are discharged when monitoring ends. As a reminder, the monitor can be
configured to display a pop-up window when the monitor has been switched off, in Standby mode, or
not monitoring basic vitals for a certain time. The window asks whether a new patient is being
monitored and offers a pop-up key to discharge the previous patient if this is the case. The window
must be configured in Configuration Mode.
When the previous patient is discharged, this clears the protocol log, resets the timers and deletes
manually entered measurement values.

236
 22

22 Recording

The optional integrated recorder records numerics for all active

measurements and up to three waveforms.
When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor (Companion
Mode is indicated on the MP5 display), only data originating in the
MP5 can be printed locally on the integrated recorder. All data can
be printed on a recorder connected to the host monitor.

Integrated Recorder

Central For central recording from the bedside, your monitor must be connected via a network to an
Recording Information Center. You can use either the M1116B 2-Channel Recorder or the standalone M3160A
4-Channel Recorder. Recordings made on the M3160A may look slightly different to those described
here. See the documentation supplied with the Information Center for information on the 4-Channel
Recorder.

Starting and Stopping Recordings

The recordings pop-up keys let you start and stop recordings. Select the Recordings SmartKey to
call up the line of pop-up keys. Scroll right or left to see any pop-up keys not displayed.

Delayed RT A RT B Select HiRes All ECG

Recordng Recordng Recordng Waves Recordng Waves

Vital Alarm ST Setup Stop all

Signs Limits Segments Recordng Recordng

237
22 Recording Overview of Recording Types

Quickstarting Recordings
To quickstart any type of recording using a preconfigured recordings template,
♦ Select the Recordings SmartKey and then select the pop-up key of the recording type you want
to start.
Alternatively, you can
♦ Select the Main Setup SmartKey, select Recordings, then select the recording type.
To quickstart a delayed recording,
♦ Select the SmartKey Delayed Record to immediately start a delayed recording.

Extending Recordings
Timed (non-continuous) recordings stop when their runtime is over. Continuous recordings continue
until stopped manually or by an INOP condition.
♦ To extend an ongoing recording by its runtime, reselect its Start pop-up key once.
♦ To make an ongoing recording continuous, reselect its Start pop-up key twice within 5 seconds.

Stopping Recordings
Recordings stop automatically when the preset runtime is over, when the recorder runs out of paper,
when you open the recorder door or when the recorder has an INOP condition.
♦ To manually stop a recording, select the Recordings SmartKey and then select the pop-up key
Stop All Recordng.

Recording Without a Template

To record without a preconfigured template, selecting the waves you require,
1 Either: Select the Recordings SmartKey then select the pop-up key Select Waves.
Or: Select the SmartKey Record Waves.
2 Use the pop-up keys to choose up to three measurement waves to be printed on the recording. If
you want fewer than three waves on the recording, select the waves you want then select the
Continue pop-up key.
3 Select one of the recording speed pop-up keys to set the required recording speed.
4 Select the Start pop-up key to start the recording.
Select Waves recordings use default values for any recorder settings not defined: runtime is
continuous, overlapping is set to non-overlapping.

Overview of Recording Types

This table details settings for local recordings. For details on recordings made on the central recorder,
see your Information Center Instructions for Use.

238
All ECG Waves Recordings 22 Recording

Procedure or
Delayed Alarm Realtime (RT) All ECG Waves HiResTrnd Context

Type of manual automatic, triggered by manual manual manual manual, use the
recording defined alarm conditions context
window’s pop-
up keys to start
Recording local recorder and local recorder and printer local recorder and local recorder local recorder local recorder
Destination central central central only only only

Information from the start from the start N/A from the start from the start from the start defined by the
recorded trigger minus the trigger minus the trigger trigger, in trigger minus context
delay time delay time realtime delay time
Number of up to 3 up to 3 N/A up to 3 all ECG waves up to 3 high- up to 3 waves,
waves currently resolution trends or specific to
monitored and (beat-to-beat) the context,
available waves e.g. a wedge
procedure
Speed 50, 25, 12.5, 6.25, 50, 25, 12.5, 6.25, N/A 50, 25, 12.5, 25 mm/sec 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 6 defined by the
2.5 mm/sec 2.5 mm/sec 6.25, 2.5 mm/sec cm/min context
Runtime 15, 20, 25, or 30 15, 20, 25, or 30 N/A 6, 8, 10, 15 4 seconds per 10 minutes, or defined by the
seconds seconds seconds or wave continuously context
continuously
Stops automatically automatically N/A automatically if automatically automatically if defined by the
limited, manually limited, manually context
if continuous if continuous
Delay Time 10, 15 seconds 10, 15 seconds N/A none none 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 defined by the
minutes context
Overlap up to 3 waves up to 3 waves N/A up to 3 waves none up to 3 waves defined by the
context
N/A = not applicable

All ECG Waves Recordings

An All ECG Waves recording shows a 4 second recording of each lead with a calibration bar
preceding each ECG lead. All available leads are recorded sequentially in the standardized lead order.
The recording is realtime, that is, the information recorded is not simultaneous.

Creating and Changing Recordings Templates

To save you defining recording settings each time you start a recording, you can create templates for
commonly-used types of recordings in the Setup Recording menu. You can create templates for
one delayed recording, one alarm recording, two realtime recordings, and one high resolution
recording. All ECG Waves recordings do not need to be configured, they always use the same
format.
Changing recordings templates changes the settings that will be used each time a recording of this
name is triggered.
1 Select the Main Setup permanent key to call up the Main Setup menu.
2 Select Recordings to enter the Setup Recordings menu.

239
22 Recording Changing ECG Wave Gain

3 Select the name of the template you want to create or change. Each recording name is linked to a
recording type, delayed, alarm, realtime, and hi-res trends. Recording names can be changed in the
monitor’s Configuration Mode.
4 Design the template by selecting each menu item and entering the information for the template.
• Recorder: choose which recorder the recording will print to (Local, Central 2-Ch. or Central 4-
Ch. recorder, or a printer (for realtime reports in alarm receording only)).
• Channels 1 - 4: choose which waveform to record in each channel. If the wave assigned to a
recording channel in a particular template is not available when a recording is triggered, the channel
is left blank on the recording strip. The pop-up list of available (currently monitored) waves differs
according to the recording type:
– Realtime, delayed and alarm recordings: the list shows all the currently available waves.
– High-resolution recordings: the list shows all the available high-resolution waves.
In addition to the currently available waves, you can choose from several other settings which make
an automatic allocation when the recording starts:
– Alarm Par will always record the measurement in alarm in the chosen recorder channel
– Primary Lead will always record the current primary lead in the chosen recorder channel
– Secondary Lead will always record the current secondary lead in the chosen recorder
channel
– Agent will always record the currently selected anesthetic agent.
For high-resolution recordings only the Agent setting is available.
• Overlap: define whether the recorded waveforms will be printed overlapping or beside each other.
• Speed: choose the recording print speed.
• Delay Time: Delayed recordings start documenting on the recorder strip from a pre-set time
before the recording is started. This interval is called the “Delay Time” and can be set as specified in
the table on page 239. This setting can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
• Runtime: see how long this type of recording is configured to run. This setting can only be
changed in Configuration Mode. Continuous recordings run indefinitely.
• Central Config - if available in the General menu, select this setting to use the recording
settings made for the centrally-connected recorder.

Changing ECG Wave Gain

The ECG Gain setting in the General Recording Setup window defines how every
recorded ECG wave, irrespective of template or recording type, will appear on the recorder strip. This
does not affect the displayed ECG wave, or printed ECG reports. To change the ECG gain setting for
recordings,
1 In the Setup Recording menu select General
2 Select ECG Gain.
3 Select the required setting:
– Auto: the wave recording will use the same scale as the ECG wave on the monitor screen
– 5 mm/mV, 10 mm/mv, 20 mm/mV: the wave recording will use a scale of 5, 10, or 20
millimeters per millivolt.

240
Recording Priorities 22 Recording

Recording Priorities
Manually-started recordings have priority over automatically-started recordings. If an
automatically-triggered alarm recording is running, and a realtime or delayed recording is manually
started, the alarm recording is stopped and the manually-requested recording is started.

More recent manually-started recordings have priority over older manually-started recordings. If a
manually-started recording is running, and another manually-started recording is triggered, then the
older recording is stopped and the more recent manually-started recording is started.

Alarm recordings are prioritized according to alarm priority. If an alarm recording triggered by a
yellow alarm is running and a new alarm recording is triggered by a red alarm, the yellow alarm
recording is stopped and the red alarm recording is started.

Sample Recording Strip

The information printed on the recording strip includes the patient name and MRN, bed number,
date and time of recording, recording speed, and recording code. Active alarm and INOP messages as
well as numerics for all currently monitored measurements are also printed.
Recording strip annotations are printed at the beginning of the recording strip and updated at regular
intervals, every 15 minutes for recordings made at speeds lower than 6.25 mm/s, and every 60 seconds
for recordings made at speeds greater or equal to 6.25 mm/s.
This sample recording strip shows a typical initial annotation:

Recording strip code Recording Speed Measurement numerics

Patient
90DIN 25 mm/sec HR 120 bpm imCO2 0 mmHg
information 23 Jan 02 10:43 Bed 3 SPO2 95% awRR
and medical Green, Sarah 37549201 Pulse 120 bpm RR 15 rpm
record No. PERF 10.0 Tnaso 37.0°C
*** EXTREME BRADY ABP 120/70 (91) mmHg
** ABPs HIGH PAP 28/15 /21) mmHg
Alarms and ** PAPd HIGH NBP 120/80 (90) mmHg 23 Jan 02 10:31
INOPs SOME ECG ALARMS OFF etCO2 40 mmHg

Recording Strip Code

The recording strip code printed in the first line of the initial annotation has up to seven characters,
specifying recording type, operating mode, application area, patient category, and delay time, if
applicable.

241
22 Recording Sample Recording Strip

Code Meaning
Recording type 90 Realtime
8A Delayed
0B Alarm
91 Context (Procedures)
Operating mode M Monitoring
D Demo
C Configuration
S Service
Application area I ICU
O OR
C CCU
N NICU
Patient category A Adult
P Pediatric
N Neonatal

As there are no alarms available on the MP5 when it is connected to a host monitor (Companion
Mode is indicated on the MP5 display), recordings made on the local recorder are annotated with
“Companion Mode” and “No Alarm Display”.

Recorded Waveforms
A selection of up to three waveforms is recorded, marked with wave labels and wave scale information.
Wave scale information can be in the form of a calibration bar, like the 1 mV calibration bar for ECG,
or calibration steps before the waveform starts.

Maintaining Recording Strips

Recording ink sometimes fades when covered with transparent tape. Avoid covering any part of a
recording that is clinically relevant (annotation or waveforms) when taping a recording strip to a
patient record or other patient documentation.

242
Reloading Paper 22 Recording

Reloading Paper
1 Use the latch on the right side of the recorder door to pull the door open.
2 Remove the empty core.

3 Insert a new roll and secure it in place on the paper holder. The paper
feeds from the bottom of the roll and over the top of the recorder door.
Recommended paper: M4816A and M4817A.
4 With at least one inch of paper extending beyond the edge of the door,
swing the recorder door up and push it firmly closed.
5 To test if paper is loaded correctly, start a recording. If no printing appears, paper may be loaded
backwards. Try reloading the paper.

CAUTION When the recorder is disabled (door open, or out of paper), any alarm recordings will be sent to the
central station recorder, if there is one. If no recorder is available, alarm recordings may be lost during
the time the recorder is disabled. The message No alarm recording available will be
displayed. This message is not shown if Printer is configured as the alarm recording destination.

Recorder Status Messages

Recorder Status Messages Explanation
<Recording name> running The named recording is currently running.
No <recorder name> alarm No alarm recording can be made on the selected recorder.
recording available Try selecting another recorder. If a local recorder was
selected, the monitor will try to reroute the recording to a
central recorder. Recordings configured to a central
recorder cannot be rerouted to a local recorder. Alarm
recordings may be lost. Try configuring Printer as the
alarm recording destination.
No alarm recording available No recorder available. Alarm recordings will be lost.
Try configuring Printer as the alarm recording
destination.
<Recorder name> out of paper The named recorder is out of paper.

<Recorder name> door open The door of the specified recorder is open.

243
22 Recording Recorder Status Messages

244
 23

23Printing Patient Reports

Starting Report Printouts

Most patient reports can be printed by selecting Main Setup - > Reports (or the Reports
SmartKey) and then selecting the report name in the top half of the Reports menu. Report names
are shown only for reports that have been correctly set up.
Data from the time of the print request is printed, even if the print job is delayed in the printer queue.
Your monitor can also be set up to automatically print all reports when a matching printer is available.
To set this up
1 Select Main Setup - > Reports
2 Select Auto Print Dbs.
– Always will print all reports when a matching printer is available.
– Host only will print the reports stored on the host monitor when a matching printer is
available. Reports stored in the companion database (shown in grey on the Reports Job List) must
be manually sent to the printer. See “Checking Report Status and Printing Manually” on
page 250.
– Never will print no reports automatically; all reports stored in the host or companion database
must be manually sent to the printer. See “Checking Report Status and Printing Manually” on
page 250.
Depending on availability, reports can be printed on printers connected to the Information Center, an
external PC-based print server or into the print database. Print jobs stored in the database are
automatically printed when a print device with a matching paper size becomes available.
Print jobs in the print database are not deleted after a patient discharge. A new patient can be admitted
and their reports are saved in addition to the previous reports. Always admit your patient so that
reports can be clearly assigned to a patient.
When the MP5 is connected to a host monitor, reports requested or stored on the MP5 can be printed
via the host monitor. Reports requested on the MP5 when connected to a host monitor will not show
any patient alarms or INOPs. In order to see alarms, reports should be requested on the host monitor.

245
23 Printing Patient Reports Stopping Reports Printouts

Report types Report contents How to start printing reports

Vital Signs Report depends on selected trend group, data In the Vital Signs window, select Print/
resolution, and period. Record, then select Print
Graphic Trends Report In the Graphic Trends window, select Print
Events Reports Event Episode with up to 5 episodes In the Events window, select the pop-up key
Graphic or tabular Event Review Print/Record, then select the pop-up key
Print Review or Print Episode
ECG Reports Depends on format selected Select the ECG Report SmartKeys, if configured
ST Map Report ST data in a transversal and/or horizontal In the ST Map window, select Print.
multiaxis diagram,
Wedge Report Wedge numerics and reference wave In the Wedge window, select the Print
Wedge pop-up key
Drug Calculator Titration Table In the Titration Table window, select the
Report Print Titr.Tbl pop-up key
Drip Table In the Drip Table window, select the Print
Drip Tbl pop-up key
Alarm Limits Report Graphic and numeric report of all In the Alarm Limits window, select Print
current alarm limits Limits
Realtime Reports, Patient data and numerics, and either: Select the Realtime Reports SmartKey, if
including oxyCRG all displayed waves OR all measured configured
Reports (Neonatal waves OR all measured RT waves OR all
Event Review) measured HiRes waves, OR oxyCRG
waves (RT waves: ECG Primary lead,
Pleth, Resp; HiRes waves: btbHR, HiRes
SpO2, HiRes Resp)
Battery Report Battery serial number, information on In the Battery Status window, select
the currently-measured and potential Print Status.
charge status of the battery
Central Report A/B/C These are reports configured at the In the Main Setup select Reports then
Information Center. Monitors connected Central Report A, B or C.
via the IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry
wireless network can have these reports
available.

Stopping Reports Printouts

♦ To stop Reports printing, in the Reports menu, select
– Delete Report to stop the current print job
– Delete All Repts to cancel all queued report printouts
– Scheduled Rep. to toggle to Off and switch off scheduled reports.

Setting Up Reports
ECG report layout and Auto Reports settings must be defined in Configuration Mode.
The content you define in the individual Setup Reports menus will be used in all reports of this
type: for example, if you set a print speed of 50 mm/sec in the ECG Reports menu, every ECG
report will be printed at this speed, irrespective of format.

246
Setting Up Reports 23 Printing Patient Reports

Setting Up ECG Reports

The settings you choose in the ECG Reports menu apply for all ECG reports printed. To set up
ECG Reports,
1 Select Main Setup -> Reports -> ECG Reports. Note the report layout configured for
your monitor, either Internat. or Cabrera. This setting is inactive (“grayed-out”) in Monitoring Mode
and can only be changed in Configuration Mode.
2 Select ECG Gain and set the required ECG Gain to define how ECG waves will appear on the
ECG report printouts.
3 Select Speed and select the report print speed.
4 Select Annotation and toggle to On if the printed ECG wave should be annotated with beat
labels or not. See the chapter on ECG for a list of beat labels. Pace pulse marks are automatically
printed beside the wave for paced patients.

Setting Up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend Reports

The settings you choose in the Vital Signs Report and Graphical Trend Report
menus apply for all Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports printed.
To set up Vital Signs and Graphic Trend reports,
1 Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Vital Signs Rep. or Graph Trend Rep.
2 Select Trend Group and select the group you want to print on the report. The groups available
depend on your monitor’s trend configuration.
3 Select Period and select the period of time for which trend data should be printed on the report. If
Automatic Period is configured to On, all trend data for the current patient will be printed,
irrespective which trend period is selected.
4 Select Interval (Vital Signs Reports only) and select the resolution of the trend data printed on the
report,

Setting Up Auto Reports

Auto Reports print automatically when a specified trigger occurs. There are two types of Auto Reports:
Scheduled Reports, which print at predefined intervals, and End Case Reports, which print when a
patient is discharged using the End Case function. An Auto Report can be both a Scheduled Report
and an End Case report.
To set up Auto Reports,
1 Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Auto Reports and select the Auto Report you want to set up (A, B,
C, or D).
2 Select Report and assign a report type to the Auto Report.
3 Select End Case Report and toggle to On if you want the selected report to print
automatically when you select End Case to discharge a patient.
Toggle End Case Report to Off if the report is a Scheduled Report only.
4 Select Scheduled Rep. and toggle to On if you want the selected report to print at predefined
intervals, starting at a predefined time of day. The start time you set applies for every following day.
For example, if you set a start time of 07:00 and a repeat time of six hours, the first report will print
at 07:00 every day, the next at 13:00 and so on.

247
23 Printing Patient Reports Setting Up Individual Print Jobs

– To set the time of day at which you want the report to print every day: select Start Hour and
Start Minute and select the required time from the pop-up list
– To set the time interval in minutes between two scheduled reports: select Rep. Freq.(Hr)
and Rep. Freq.(Min) and select the time interval from the pop-up list.
If you are setting up an end case report, these settings will be inactive (“grayed-out”).
Toggle Scheduled Rep. to Off if the report is an End Case Report only.
5 Repeat the procedure for all Auto Reports you want to set up.
All Auto Reports or Scheduled Reports set to On print automatically at the predefined trigger.
Be aware that the monitor’s memory for reports is limited. If the memory is full, Auto Reports cannot
be printed and the information may be lost.

Setting Up Individual Print Jobs

To adjust the appearance of individual print jobs, in the Reports menu,
1 Select Main Setup -> Reports -> Setup Reports to enter the Setup Reports
menu.
2 Select Report and then select the report you want to set up.
3 Select Report Type and then select the reports template you want the report selected in Step 2
to use. The selection of templates listed depends on the report type selected.
Each template includes patient demographic data, and each Realtime Report also includes alarm
and INOP information. In addition, the templates include:
VisibleWaves: all waves currently visible, in the order they appear on the screen.
All Waves: all measured waves,
RT Waves: all currently measured realtime waves, according to the monitor’s priority list.
HiRes Waves: all measured HiRes waves
OxyCRG Waves: the OxyCRG/Neonatal Event Review waves.
Vital Signs: trend information in tabular form.
Graph Trend: trend information in graphic form.
ECG3X4, ECG6X2, ECG12X1, ECG4X2, ECG8X1, ECG12X1(2P): ECG reports.
Episode: a single patient event episode.
Review: an overview of patient events
Alarm Limits: a list of all currently set alarm limits.
4 Select Report Size to set the paper size to be used for the report: Unspecified to use the
default size for the template chosen, Universal, A4, Letter, LrgUniversal, A3, or
Ledger. The list of available sizes depends on the report type selected.
5 Select Orientation to set the orientation of the report printout: Unspecified to use the
default size for the template chosen, Landscape or Portrait.
6 Select Target Device and choose which printer the print job will be sent to: Unspec. to use
the default printer, or choose from the list of printer names defined at the Information Center or in
the monitor’s Configuration Mode (for example, Remote 1 or Database).
Some settings may be inactive (“grayed-out”) in this menu for reports that can only be started in a
special window.

248
Checking Printer Settings 23 Printing Patient Reports

Checking Printer Settings

The printer settings for your monitor are defined in Configuration Mode. The printer settings Paper
Size, Resolution, Color Support, and Duplex Option for the active printer are visible
but inactive (“grayed-out”) in the Setup Printers menu. When Print Database is selected
as active printer only the Paper Size setting will be shown.
♦ To enter the Setup Printers menu, in the Reports menu, select Setup Printers.

Printing a Test Report

A test report can be printed in Configuration mode, refer to the Service Guide for details.

Switching Printers On Or Off for Reports

You can enable or disable printer status to switch individual printers on or off for report printouts.
1 In the Setup Printers menu, select Printer and then select the name of the device you
want to switch on or off for Reports printing from the pop-up list.
2 Select Printer Status to toggle between the settings Enabled and Disabled. If you set
this to Disabled, no reports will be printed to the named printer.
If the monitor detects that no printer of a particular type is available, the Enabled/Disabled
setting will automatically be set to Disabled and “grayed out”.

Dashed Lines on Reports

If a section of a wave on a report is drawn with dashed lines, this tells
you that a setting that affects the appearance of the wave on the
screen was changed while the report was printing.
For example, if you change the wave scale while a report is printing,
the wave scale and wave size are changed immediately on the
monitor screen and on the report. To indicate that the scale
information printed at the beginning of the report no longer matches the currently used scale, the wave
will be printed using dashed lines, starting from the moment the change took place.
Some examples of settings that cause dashed lines in reports if changed during printing are: Filter
mode, ECG lead placement, wave scale, measurement unit, paced/non-paced setting, and
measurement mode. Note that as ECG waves are drawn with a fixed gain on reports (either 10 mm/
mV or 20 mm/mV), changing the ECG wave scale will not cause dashed-line reports.
To avoid dashed lines on reports, wait 15 seconds after changing a setting before you trigger a report.

Unavailable Printer: Re-routing Reports

If you send a report to be printed on a printer that is not available, for example, because it has run out
of paper, this print job is suspended and stored in the monitor’s memory.

249
23 Printing Patient Reports Checking Report Status and Printing Manually

If the target device of this print job was set to Unspecified, the monitor will periodically try to
resend the print job to the first printer listed in the Setup Printers menu under Printer that
is set to Enabled and that has paper of the correct size.
To allow the report to print, you must either solve the problem with the target printer, or re-route the
print job to another printer with paper of the correct size. To re-route a print job,
♦ Enable the new target printer by selecting it in the Setup Printers menu and toggling to
Enabled. As the monitor tries to send the report to the printers in the order they are listed, you
must make sure that all the printers above the new target printer are disabled.
If the target device of the print job was set to a specific printer, re-routing is not possible.

Checking Report Status and Printing Manually

A list of all print requests which are waiting, printing or stored can be viewed in the Reports Job List.
To view the list,
♦ in the Reports menu, select Reports Job List.
The following information is displayed for each print request:
• Report title
• Patient name (except for system reports such as the battery status report)
• Request date and time
• Report paper format
• Job status: Preparing, Printing, Waiting, In Database, In Companion, Retry, Cancelling, Error
Individual reports can be deleted from the list with the Delete Report key, and all reports with
the Delete All Reps key.

CAUTION The reports job list includes privacy information, in the form of the patient name with the related
report title and date. It is advisable to provide controlled access to this data to ensure confidentiality.

Printing Manually
Those jobs shown in black will be printed automatically when a matching printer is available. If the
Auto Print Dbs setting is Host only or Never, some or all reports will not be printed
automatically and will be shown in grey. Any jobs shown in grey must be printed manually; to do this,
1 In the Reports Job List, select the required report
2 Select Print Report.
Selecting Print All Reps. will send all reports to the printer.

250
Printer Status Messages 23 Printing Patient Reports

Printer Status Messages

Printer Status Message Possible causes and suggested action
Print job queued The report has been placed in the queue for the named printer.
for <Printer name>
Print job could The printer queue is full and the monitor cannot accept another report
not be queued request. Wait until some more reports have been printed, then try again,
OR
A report has been triggered that uses a paper size unavailable with the
target printer. Try another printer, if available, or change the paper size of
the print request.
Cancelling all Delete All Reports has been selected in the Report menu, OR
print jobs The Operating Mode has been changed from Monitoring Mode to
Demonstration or Service Mode.
Cancelling the The current report is being cancelled as the result of a user request.
active print job
Cancelling N print When a patient is discharged, all queued reports are cancelled except those
jobs due to stored in the print database. “N” is the number of reports cancelled.
patient discharge
Deleted N print The monitor has restarted and all report requests have been cancelled
jobs due to except those stored in the print database. “N” is the number of reports
hotstart cancelled.
Printing failed: A report has been triggered which has not been correctly set up. Enter the
no report setup menu for the report type to set up the report.
configured!
Printing on device A report is in progress, or the monitor is waiting for the central printer to
<Printer name> accept the print job.

251
23 Printing Patient Reports Sample Report Printouts

Printer Status Message Possible causes and suggested action

Print device The chosen device is unavailable. Check that the printer is properly
<Printer name> connected and that paper is available. The requested report will start
unavailable - job printing when the printer becomes available.
suspended
Print Database The requested report does not fit into the print database. You can select
full -> job another printer to print the report (see “Unavailable Printer: Re-routing
suspended Reports” on page 249). Alternatively you can delete another report from
the Reports Job List (using the Stop report key) to create space for your
report.
Job on <Printer A report cannot be started on the requested printer.
name> failed One of three reasons will also be shown in the status message:
• data requisition error - an internal error has caused data required for
the report to be unavailable, try starting the report again.
• printer unavailable - make sure the printer is plugged in, switched
on, and has paper loaded.
• data unavailable - the connected X2 or MP5 has been removed
before the data for the report was transferred.
Print job on The report has been printed.
device <Printer
name> done

Sample Report Printouts

Each report header contains the patient’s bed label, last name and first name, middle name (if there is
enough space) the patient ID, the date and time, and the name of the report. The report footer
contains the hospital label and page number, and the last page contains a note to mark the report end.
The monitor may be configured to leave a space on the top left or right of the report printout to enable
you to stick a patient address label on it. This setting is called the Addressograph and it can only be
changed in the monitor’s Configuration Mode.

252
Sample Report Printouts 23 Printing Patient Reports

Alarm Limits Report

Patient Name

Measurement
labels, with
alarms off symbol
where alarms are
switched off

Graphic view of current alarm limits in relation

to currently monitored measurement value

Realtime Report

253
23 Printing Patient Reports Sample Report Printouts

Patient
demographic
information, time
stamp

Active Alarms and

INOPs, followed
by vital signs

Measurement
waves section

254
Sample Report Printouts 23 Printing Patient Reports

ECG Reports
Patient
information

Numeric block

Wave area

Below the header on ECG Reports, the numeric block shows the current HR, PVC, and ST values.
The wave area shows the printed waves for all available ECG leads. A 1 mV calibration bar is printed at
the beginning of each wave. With the 3X4, 6X2, and 2X4 formats, a rhythm stripe prints a longer
section of the ECG wave from the primary ECG lead for ECG rhythm evaluation. The ECG signal
bandwidth, the patient’s paced status, the ECG gain, and the print speed are printed at the bottom of
the wave area. Pace pulse marks are automatically printed beside the wave for paced patients. Beat
labels can be set to print on the rhythm stripe. The 12X1 (2P) format prints the report over two pages.

ECG Report type Available Formats Available Paper Sizes

12-Lead ECG 3X4 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
6X2 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
12X1 portrait A4 and letter only
12X1 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
12X1 (2P) landscape A4, letter (2 pages)
Multi-lead ECG 2X4 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger
8X1 portrait A4 and letter only
8X1 landscape A4, letter, A3, ledger

Other Reports
See the sections on Trends and Calculations and the chapter on Event Surveillance for other example
reports.

255
23 Printing Patient Reports Sample Report Printouts

256
 24

24Using the Drug Calculator

Drug mixtures for intravenous (IV) drug infusions combine information on drug dose, rate, amount,
volume, concentration, and standardized rate. The Drug Calculator helps you to manage infusions by
calculating one of these values at a time.

Term Definition Units

Dose total quantity of drug to be delivered to the amount units per time or per kg/
patient over time time, if the drug is weight-dependent
Rate volume of the mixture to be delivered to the ml/hour
patient over time
Amount amount of drug to be added to diluent to ng, mcg*, mg, g, mUnit, Unit, where
make up a mixture g stands for gram
Volume quantity of mixture of diluent and drug ml

Concentration ratio of the amount of drug to the solution amount units per ml
volume
Standardized 1ml volume of the mixture to be delivered to ml/hr
Rate the patient per hour

*Be aware that your hospital may use either ‘μg’ or ‘mcg’ as an abbreviation for microgram. These
abbreviations are equivalent.

WARNING Before you administer any drug, always check that the correct calculation units and patient category are
selected. Consult your pharmacy if you have questions.
Decisions on the choice and dosage of drugs administered to patients must always be made by the
physician in charge. The Drug Calculator performs calculations based on the values input during use,
it does not check the plausibility of the calculations performed.

Accessing the Drug Calculator

♦ To access the Drug Calculator, select Main Setup -> Calculations ->
Drug Calculator, or select the Drug Calculator SmartKey, if
configured.

257
24 Using the Drug Calculator Performing Drug Calculations

Performing Drug Calculations

Using the service Support Tool, a list of drugs can be configured for the monitor containing pre-
defined dosage recommendations and unit settings. Selecting the arrow beside the drug name in the
Drug Calculator window opens a list of configured drugs. Contact your pharmacist if you have any
questions about the drugs in the list.
If ANY DRUG is the only entry in the list of drugs, no drugs have been preconfigured for your
monitor. Drug calculations can be performed for non-specific drugs.
You must have a Support Tool to add additional drugs to the Drug Calculator.

About the Rule of Six

If the Rule of Six has been enabled for use with individual drugs in your Drug Calculator, you can use
the formula in crisis situations to quickly calculate the amount of a drug needed to yield a target dose
for continuous infusion for neonatal or pediatric patients (the drug amount is given in “mg”, the
patient weight in “kg”). The Rule of Six can only be used with the dose unit mcg/kg/min.

CAUTION JCAHO recommends disabling the Rule of Six. The configuration is not JCAHO-compliant if Rule of
Six is enabled.

The Drug Calculator uses the following formula for Rule of Six calculations, based on the patient’s
weight:
• For a target dose of 0.1 mcg/kg/min, the Drug Calculator multiplies 0.6 x patient weight to
calculate the amount you need to add to the IV solution to equal a total of 100 ml.
• For a target dose of 1.0 mcg/kg/min, the Drug Calculator multiplies 6.0 x patient weight to
calculate the amount you need to add to the IV solution to equal a total of 100 ml.

Performing Calculations for a Non-Specific Drug

If a list of drugs has not been configured for your monitor, Drug Calculator
you can use the Drug Calculator to calculate drug doses for a
ANY DRUG
single, generic drug called “Any Drug”. Selecting the arrow
beside the drug name in the Drug Calculator window shows Dose 2 mg/min
that are no other drugs configured. Rate 480 ml/hour
1 Enter three of these four values: dose, amount, volume, Amount 25 mg
and rate of the infusion solution.
Volume 100 ml
To enter values, select the correct unit, then select each
value field and use the pop-up keypad to enter the correct Concentr 0.25 mg/ml
value. 1 ml/hr 0.004 mg/min

2 If you have chosen a weight-dependent dose unit, you Weight 150 lb

must enter the patient weight now or choose a different
unit.
If available, the patient weight from the Patient Demographic window is entered
automatically in the Drug Calculator window when the Drug Calculator is accessed. To change the
patient weight, select the Weight key then use the on-screen keypad to enter the correct value.
This will not change the patient weight stored in the patient demographic information.

258
Performing Drug Calculations 24 Using the Drug Calculator

3 When you have entered three values, the Drug Calculator automatically calculates the unknown
fourth value and shows it in the highlighted field. Standardized rate and concentration are also
calculated.

Performing Calculations for a Specific Drug

1 Select the arrow beside Drug Calculator (Adult)
ANY DRUG, then select
the required drug from Patient Category Lidocaine
the list of drugs. Adult Dose mg/min

This opens the Pedi Rate ml/hour

Drug Calculator Neo Amount
mg
window for the selected
Volume ml
drug.
Concentr. mg/ml
2 Select the correct patient
category for your patient. ml/hr mg/min

If you have a neonatal or Reset Values Weight lb

pediatric patient, the

Rule Of 6 choice may
be available. Select if required.
3 Enter the patient weight, if necessary.
If available, the patient weight from the Patient Demographic window is entered
automatically in the Drug Calculator window. To change the patient weight, select the Weight
key then use the on-screen keypad to enter the correct value. This will not change the patient
weight stored in the patient demographic information. Select the weight unit shown to change
between lb and kg.
4 When a specific drug is selected, the initial values for Dose, Amount and Volume are the
configured Start values for this drug. The Rate is then calculated. If other values are required you
can calculate any value by entering the remaining three values as described in ”Performing
Calculations for a Non-Specific Drug”.
The column on the right of the Drug Calculator window shows either drug dose or dosage rate,
whichever is the calculated value. The current calculated value is shown on a scale with the
recommended range in green. If the current calculated value lies outside the recommended range it is
shown in red.
If you have changed values in the Drug Calculator and you want to revert to the configured values,
select Reset Values key at any time.

259
24 Using the Drug Calculator Charting Infusion Progress

Charting Infusion Progress

The Drip Table shows you at
a glance how much of the
infusion has been Drip Table
administered to your patient Amount Volume Drip Time
Lidocaine
and how much time is left.
Dose mg/min
♦ To see the Drip Table, in
Rate ml/hour
the Drug Calculator
Amount mg
window, select the Drip
Volume ml
Table pop-up key.
Weight lb
If the Drip Time exceeds 24 DripTime hr:min:sec
hours, the Drip Time
timestamp shows - - :- - : - - .

Using the Titration Table

Titration Table
Use the Titration Table to see
at a glance what dose your Lidocaine Dose mg/min
patient would receive of a Dose increments Rate ml/hour
drug at different infusion From a low of mg/min Amount mcg
rates. By clicking on the title To a high of mg/min Volume ml
row of the table you can In increments of mg/min Weight lb
switch between the Dose
Dose Rate Dose Rate Dose Rate Dose Rate
Increments and Rate
Increments view.
Values outside of the
recommended range are
shown in red.
To see the Titration Table,
♦ in the Drug
Calculator window,
select the pop-up key
Titr.Table.
The Titration Table is configured with the service Support Tool.

Documenting Drug Calculations

♦ In the Drug Calculator window, select the pop-up key Record DrugCalc to immediately start
a recording of the current drug calculation.
♦ In the Titration Table window, select the pop-up key Print Titr. Tbl to print a report of
the current Titration Table.
♦ In the Drip Table window, select the pop-up key Print Drip Tbl to print a report of the
current Drip Table.

260
 25

25Using the Timer

With the Timer function you can set a timer to notify you when a specific time period has expired.

CAUTION Do not use the timers to schedule critical patient-related tasks.

Viewing the Timer

You can view the currently active timer in the Timer window or directly on the Main Screen (if a
timer has been substituted for a numeric).
To open the Timer window:
♦ Select the Timer SmartKey
or
♦ Select Main Setup -> Timer
For a timer with a defined run time a progress bar is shown with the run time for that timer. Next to
the progress bar the elapsed time or the remaining time is shown, depending on whether the timer is
counting Up or Down. On the left, the label of the timer and a symbol indicating the type of expiry
notification is shown.

Timer Types
There are four types of timer: Basic, Enhanced, Cyclic and No Limit. A Basic timer has a
single, defined run time and progress is shown in the progress bar. An Enhanced timer is like a
Basic timer but the progress bar shows progress beyond the end of the run time. A Cyclic timer
is like a Basic timer but restarts automatically when the run time is expired. A No Limit timer has
no run time or progress bar and shows the time elapsed since the timer was started.
The type of timer is set in the monitor’s Configuration Mode and is associated with the timer label.

Timer Setup Pop-up Keys

When you open the Timer window and select the Setup “Label” pop-up key, the Setup
window opens and a selection of pop-up keys appear to let you activate and control the timer.

261
25 Using the Timer Setting Up Timers

Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....

Start start the timer.
Stop stop the timer, allowing either restarting after a pause (Start key) or clearing
(Clear key).
Clear clear the timer, ending this timer episode.
Timers return to the timer window

Setting Up Timers
The timer type, display color of the timer and whether a window automatically pops up on expiry are
settings made in Configuration Mode for each timer label.
The remaining timer settings can be made in Monitoring Mode. If you change settings when a timer is
running it will not be stopped. The timer will continue to count but the new settings will be applied.
To display the Setup window for a timer,
♦ in the Timer window, select Setup “Label”, or
♦ select a timer on the Main Screen then select Setup Timers

Timer Label
You can select from a variety of specific labels, for example Tourniquet, Infusion, Documentation or
from four non-specific labels Timer A, B, C, D. When you assign a label to a timer, the monitor
automatically applies the associated configuration settings to this timer, but the timer continues
counting and is not reset.
To select a label, in the Timer window:
1 Select the Setup “Label” pop-up key to display the Setup window.
2 Select Label.
3 Select a specific or non-specific label from the list.

Run Time
The run time can be set between 1 minute and 96 hours. No Limit timers have no run time.
To set the run time, in the Timer window:
1 Select the Setup “Label” pop-up key to display the Setup window.
2 Select Run Time.
3 Select a run time from the list.

Timer Counting Direction

Timers can count up or down, showing elapsed time or remaining time. No Limit timers
automatically count up.
To change the direction, in the Timer window:
1 Select the Setup “Label” pop-up key to display the Setup window.

262
Displaying a Timer On The Main Screen 25 Using the Timer

2 Select Direction to switch between Up and Down.

Notification
When a timer expires (except a No Limit timer), the color changes to red and a message appears in the
status line on the Main Screen. Be aware that if a timer has been configured to display in light red, the
color will not visibly change when the timer expires.
Additional notification is also available and can be set to:

Alarm An INOP alarm indicates the expiry of the timer

Sound A single tone indicates the expiry of the timer

No Sound No additional notification

To set the additional notification, in the Timer window:
1 Select the Setup “Label” pop-up key to display the Setup window.
2 Select Notification and select the notification level required from the list.
If an MP5 is connected to a host monitor, and notification is set on the MP5 to Alarm, the INOP
alarm will appear on the host monitor TimeExpired:MMS.

Timer Volume
For all Timers with the notification setting Sound, you can set the volume of the tone.
To set the volume, in the Timer window:
1 Select the Setup “Label” pop-up key to display the Setup window.
2 Select Timer Volume and select a volume setting from the list.

Displaying a Timer On The Main Screen

If you want to have a timer displayed on the Main Screen, you can substitute it for a numeric which is
not directly associated with a wave. If limited space is available, some elements displayed in the Timer
window may not be displayed. The minimum information displayed is the label and the elapsed or
remaining time.

TimerA
2 hrs

To display a timer on the Main Screen:

1 Select the numeric you want to substitute.
2 Select Change Numeric.
3 Select Any Timer.

263
25 Using the Timer Displaying A Clock On The Main Screen

Main Screen Timer Pop-up Keys

When you select a timer displayed on the Main Screen, additional pop-up keys become available:

Pop-Up Keys Selecting this pop-up key lets you....

Setup enter the setup screen for the currently selected timer.
“Label”
Change select a different timer for display.
Timer
Timers enter the Timers window.

Displaying A Clock On The Main Screen

In the same way that you can substitute a timer for a numeric, you can also substitute a larger clock
display for a numeric.
To display a clock on the Main Screen:
1 Select the numeric you want to substitute.
2 Select Change Numeric.
3 Select Clock.
When you select the clock on the Main Screen you can select Date, Time in the menu to set the
date and time.

264
 26

26Laboratory Data
Laboratory data can be entered manually at the Information Center or at the monitor. For details on
manual entry at the monitor, see “Entering Measurements Manually” on page 39. Selected laboratory
data can be integrated on the monitor - values are then stored in the database and included in trends
and reports and can be displayed as a numeric on the main screen. Which data can be stored and used
on the monitor in this way is selected in Configuration Mode.

Viewing Received Data

When new data has been received from the Information Center a New lab data received.
Check Lab Results Window message will appear with the arrival time. To view the data,
select Main Setup > Lab Results or the Lab Results SmartKey.

Lab Results - 08:50 22. Feb

Parameter Description Volume Unit Range Timestamp
Blood Gases

PCO2
mmHg
PO2
mmHg
BE
μmol/L
pH

Metabolites
Glu μmol/L

BUN mg/dl

Enzymes/Markers
cTnI ng/ml

The Lab Results window shows the most recent set of data received. The data is grouped into
categories:
• Blood Gases
• Electrolytes
• Hematology
• Metabolites
• Chemistry

265
26 Laboratory Data Viewing Received Data

• Enzymes/Markers
• Coagulation
• Urine Diagnostics
If no results are available for a particular category, that category will not be shown. Values which were
entered manually at the Information Center will be marked with an * .

266
 27

27Care and Cleaning

Use only the Philips-approved substances and methods listed in this chapter to clean or disinfect your
equipment. Warranty does not cover damage caused by using unapproved substances or methods.
Philips makes no claims regarding the efficacy of the listed chemicals or methods as a means for
controlling infection. Consult your hospital’s Infection Control Officer or Epidemiologist. For
comprehensive details on cleaning agents and their efficacy refer to “Guidelines for Prevention of
Transmission of Human Immunodeficiency Virus and Hepatitis B Virus to Health Care and Public-
Safety Workers” issued by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service,
Centers for Disease Control, Atlanta, Georgia, February 1989. See also any local policies that apply
within your hospital, and country.

General Points
Keep your monitor, cables and accessories free of dust and dirt. After cleaning and disinfection, check
the equipment carefully. Do not use if you see signs of deterioration or damage. If you need to return
any equipment to Philips, decontaminate it first.
Observe the following general precautions:
• Always dilute according to the manufacturer’s instructions or use lowest possible concentration.
• Do not allow liquid to enter the case.
• Do not immerse any part of the equipment or any accessories in liquid.
• Do not pour liquid onto the system.
• Never use abrasive material (such as steel wool or silver polish).
• Never use bleach.

WARNING If you spill liquid on the equipment, battery, or accessories, or they are accidentally immersed in liquid,
contact your service personnel or Philips service engineer. Do not operate the equipment before it has
been tested and approved for further use.

267
27 Care and Cleaning Cleaning the Monitor

Cleaning the Monitor

Clean with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm water (40°C/104°F maximum) and soap, a diluted
non-caustic detergent, tenside, ammonia- or alcohol-based cleaning agent. Do not use strong solvents
such as acetone or trichloroethylene.
Take extra care when cleaning the screen of the monitor because it is more sensitive to rough cleaning
methods than the housing. Do not permit any liquid to enter the monitor case and avoid pouring it on
the monitor while cleaning. Do not allow water or cleaning solution to enter the measurement
connectors. Wipe around, not over, connector sockets.

CAUTION To clean the touch-enabled display, disable the touch operation by switching off the monitor during
the cleaning procedure, or by selecting and holding the Main Screen key until the padlock symbol
appears on it, indicating that touch operation is disabled. Select and hold again to re-enable touch
operation.

Recommended cleaning agents are:

Tensides (dishwasher detergents) Edisonite Schnellreiniger®, Alconox®

Ammonias Dilution of Ammonia <3%, Window cleaner
Alcohol Ethanol 70%, Isopropanol 70%, Window cleaner

Disinfecting the Monitor

CAUTION Solutions: Do not mix disinfecting solutions (such as bleach and ammonia) as hazardous gases may
result.
Hospital policy: Disinfect the product as determined by your hospital’s policy, to avoid long term
damage to the product.

Clean equipment before disinfecting. Recommended types of disinfecting agents are:

Base Approved Agents

Alcohol Ethanol up to 70%
1- and 2- Propanol up to 70%
Aldehyde Glutaraldehyde up to 3.6%

Sterilizing the Monitor

Sterilization is not recommended for this monitor, related products, accessories or supplies unless
otherwise indicated in the Instructions for Use that accompany the accessories and supplies.

268
Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring Accessories 27 Care and Cleaning

Cleaning, Sterilizing and Disinfecting Monitoring

Accessories
To clean, disinfect and sterilize reusable transducers, sensors, cables, leads, and so forth, refer to the
instructions delivered with the accessory.

Cleaning and Disinfecting the Predictive

Temperature Accessories
Probes
Wipe the probe and cord regularly with a cloth dampened with warm water and a mild detergent
solution.
As needed, disinfect the probe and cord with a 70% isopropyl alcohol solution, or a nonstaining
disinfectant.

Probe Holders
1 Disconnect the probe and remove it from the holder.
2 Remove the holder from the unit.
3 Clean the inner and outer surfaces by swabbing them with a cloth dampened with a mild detergent
solution.
4 As needed, disinfect the probe holder with a 70% isopropyl alcohol solution, or a nonstaining
disinfectant.
5 Thoroughly dry all surfaces before reassembling the equipment.

Cleaning Batteries and the Battery Compartment

Wipe with a lint-free cloth, moistened with warm water (40°C/104°F maximum) and soap. Do not use
strong solvents. Do not soak the battery.

269
27 Care and Cleaning Cleaning Batteries and the Battery Compartment

270
 28

28Using Batteries

One Philips M4605A rechargeable Lithium Ion battery must be inserted into the battery compartment
on the right side of the monitor to use the MP5 monitor with battery power.

Battery compartment

You can switch between battery-powered and mains-powered (AC) operation without interrupting
monitoring.
When an MP5 is connected to a host monitor, no battery data from the MP5 is visible on the host.
Battery INOPs, however, are displayed.
The battery normally recharges automatically when the monitor is connected to mains power.

Battery Power Indicators

The battery LED and battery status information on the Main Screen, in combination with INOP
messages and prompts, help you keep track of the battery power status. The indicators always show the
remaining capacity in relation to the battery’s actual maximum capacity, which may lessen as the
battery ages. You can see the actual capacity in the Battery Status window.

271
28 Using Batteries Battery Power Indicators

Battery LED
The battery LED on the front panel of the monitor is indicated by a battery symbol.

Battery LED

Battery LED Colors If the monitor is connected to If the monitor is running on

mains power, this means battery power, this means
Green battery power is > 90%

Yellow battery charging (battery power

< 90%)
Red, flashing less than 10 minutes power
remaining
Red, flashes intermittently battery or charger malfunction battery malfunction

Battery Status on the Main Screen

Battery status information can be configured to display permanently on all
Screens. It shows the status of the battery, with the battery power
remaining and, when the battery is not charging, an estimate of the
monitoring time this represents. 2:40 hrs
Battery power gauge: This shows the remaining battery power. It is
divided into sections, each representing 20% of the total power. If three and a half sections are filled, as
in this example, this indicates that 70% battery power remains. If no battery is detected, the battery
gauge is grayed-out. If no data is available from the battery, question marks are shown in the gauge.

Monitoring Time Available: Below the battery power gauge a time is displayed. This is the estimated
monitoring time available with the current battery power. Note that this time fluctuates depending on
the system load (the display brightness and how many measurements and recordings you carry out),
the age of the battery, and the remaining capacity of the battery.

Battery malfunction symbols: If a problem is detected with the battery, these symbols are displayed.
They may be accompanied by an INOP message or by a battery status message in the monitor
information line providing more details. Symbols indicating critical situations are colored red.

Battery status symbols Battery malfunction symbols

battery is empty (red) incompatible battery

272
Battery Power Indicators 28 Using Batteries

battery not charging as the temperature is (red) battery malfunction

above or below the specified range

battery requires maintenance (red) battery has no power left

charging stopped to protect the battery (red) battery temperature too

high

Battery Status Window

♦ To access the Battery Status window and its associated pop-up keys, select the battery status
information on the Screen, or select Main Setup -> Battery.

Battery Status

TimeToEmpty: 5:20 hrs

Capacity
remaining [mAh] 5700
fullCharge [mAh] 6135

Capacity, remaining tells you how much power is left in the battery.
Capacity, fullCharge tells you how much power the battery can hold when fully charged.
TimeToEmpty tells you approximately how long you can continue to use the monitor with this
battery. Note that this time fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how
many measurements and recordings you carry out), the age of the battery, and the remaining capacity
of the battery.
TimeToEmpty tells you approximately how long you can continue to use the monitor with this
battery. Note that this time fluctuates depending on the system load (the display brightness and how
many measurements and recordings you carry out), the age of the battery, and the remaining capacity
of the battery.
TimeToFull is shown in place of TimeToEmpty if the monitor is connected to mains power, and
tells you how much time is left until the battery is charged to 90%. If >10 hrs is shown here, the
battery may not charge completely when the monitor is in use. You can use the M8043A Smart Battery
Charger to charge the batteries externally.

Recording Battery Status

To print the information in the Battery Status window on a connected recorder,
1 Select the battery status information on the Screen to open the Battery Status window
2 Select the Record Status pop-up key.

Printing Battery Reports

To print the information in the Battery Status window on a connected printer,

273
28 Using Batteries Checking Battery Charge

1 Select the battery status information on the Screen to open the Battery Status window
2 Select the Print Status pop-up key.

Checking Battery Charge

♦ To check the charge status of a battery in a monitor, see the battery power gauge on the Screen or
select Main Setup -> Battery to enter the Battery Status window.
♦ To check the charge status of a battery that is not connected to a monitor or battery charger, press
the black dot marked “PUSH” on the labeled side of the battery. The remaining charge is indicated
by four LEDs on the electronic fuel gauge directly above the dot. Each LED represents 25% of
charge. If all LEDs are lit, the battery is fully charged, if only one LED is lit, 25% or less charge is
left.

Replacing a Battery
To replace the battery,
1 Press the battery compartment latch to open the
battery compartment door.
2 Push the release clip in the compartment.
3 Pull gently on the canvas strap to move the battery
towards you, then grasp the battery and pull it out
fully.
4 Slide the new battery into position, making sure that the battery contacts are facing in the correct
direction, as outlined on the inside of the battery compartment.
5 Close the battery compartment door.

Optimizing Battery Performance

The performance of rechargeable batteries may deteriorate over time. Battery maintenance as
recommended here can help to slow down this process.

Display Brightness Setting

♦ In the Main Setup menu, select User Interface -> Brightness - > Optimum. This
selects a level of brightness suitable for most monitoring locations that uses less battery power than
brighter settings.
Satisfy yourself that this level of brightness is suitable for your monitoring location.
Note that your monitor may be configured to dim or brighten the display brightness automatically
when you disconnect from power, to suit the most common transport scenario
(“TransportBrightn” setting).

274
Battery Safety Information 28 Using Batteries

Charging a Battery
A battery can be charged in monitors used to monitor patients. Charging is quicker in monitors which
are switched off. You can also use the M8043A Smart Battery Charger to charge batteries.
1 Insert the battery into a monitor connected to mains power. The battery LED will light yellow to
indicate that charging is in process (it can take up to three minutes before charging begins).
2 Charge the battery until it is full, the battery LED is green, and the battery power gauge is filled.
In certain situations, where many measurements are in use plus the recorder, the load on the monitor
may be so high that the batteries will not charge. In this case you must use the M8043A Smart Battery
Charger to charge the battery.

Conditioning a Battery
You must condition a battery when its “battery requires maintenance” symbol shows on the Screen. Do
not interrupt the charge or discharge cycle during conditioning.

CAUTION Do not use a monitor being used to monitor patients to condition batteries. The monitor switches off
automatically when there is no battery power left.

You can also use the M8043A Smart Battery Charger for external battery conditioning (requires
adapter, order number 4512 610 17451). For details please see the Instructions for Use for the Smart
Battery Charger. Do not use any other battery chargers or conditioners.
To condition a battery using a monitor,
1 Insert the battery into a monitor connected to mains power.
2 Switch the monitor power off.
3 Charge the battery until it is completely full. Open the Battery Status window and check
that the Batt Fully Charged message is displayed.
4 Disconnect the monitor from mains power, and let the monitor run until there is no battery power
left and the monitor switches itself off.
5 Reconnect the monitor to mains power and charge the battery until it is full for use or charge to
50% for storage.

Storing a Battery
A battery should not remain inside the monitor if it is not used for a longer period of time. Batteries
should be charged to a maximum of 50% for storage.

NOTE The battery will discharge over time if it is stored inside the monitor without AC power connection.
The reported values for “remaining capacity” and “runtime” will become less accurate when the battery
is stored in this way for a longer period of time (that is, several weeks).

Battery Safety Information

WARNING Use only Philips batteries part number M4605A. Use of a different battery may present a risk of fire or
explosion.

275
28 Using Batteries Battery Safety Information

Do not open batteries, or dispose of them in fire, or cause them to short circuit. They may ignite,
explode, leak or heat up, causing personal injury.
Dispose of used batteries promptly and in an environmentally-responsible manner. Do not dispose of
the battery in normal waste containers. Consult your hospital administrator to find out about local
arrangements.

CAUTION Do not disassemble, heat above 100°C (212°F) or incinerate the batteries, to avoid the risk of fire and
burns. Keep batteries out of the reach of children and in their original package until you are ready to
use them.
If battery leakage should occur, use caution in removing the battery. Avoid contact with skin. Refer to
qualified service personnel.

276
 29

29Maintenance and
Troubleshooting

WARNING Schedule: Failure on the part of the responsible individual hospital or institution employing the use of
this equipment to implement a satisfactory maintenance schedule may cause undue equipment failure
and possible health hazards.
Contact: If you discover a problem with any of the equipment, contact your service personnel, Philips,
or your authorized supplier.

Inspecting the Equipment and Accessories

You should perform a visual inspection before every use, and in accordance with your hospital’s policy.
With the monitor switched off:
1 Examine unit exteriors for cleanliness and general physical condition. Make sure that the housings
are not cracked or broken, that everything is present, that there are no spilled liquids and that there
are no signs of abuse.
2 Inspect all accessories (cables, transducers, sensors and so forth). If any show signs of damage, do
not use.
3 Switch the monitor on and make sure the backlight is bright enough. Check that screen is at its full
brightness. If the brightness is not adequate, contact your service personnel or your supplier.

Inspecting the Cables and Cords

1 Examine all system cables, the power plug and cord for damage. Make sure that the prongs of the
plug do not move in the casing. If damaged, replace it with an appropriate Philips power cord.
2 Inspect the patient cables, leads and their strain reliefs for general condition. Make sure there are
no breaks in the insulation. Make sure that the connectors are properly engaged at each end to
prevent rotation or other strain.
3 Apply the transducer or electrodes to the patient, and with the monitor switched on, flex the
patient cables near each end to make sure that there are no intermittent faults.

277
29 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Maintenance Task and Test Schedule

Maintenance Task and Test Schedule

The following tasks are for Philips-qualified service professionals only. All maintenance tasks and
performance tests are documented in detail in the service documentation supplied on the monitor
documentation CD.
Ensure that these tasks are carried out as indicated by the monitor’s maintenance schedule, or as
specified by local laws. Contact a Philips-qualified service provider if your monitor needs a safety or
performance test. Clean and disinfect equipment to decontaminate it before testing or maintaining it.

Maintenance and Test Schedule Frequency

Monitor Tests
Safety checks. Selected tests on the basis At least once every two years, or as needed, after any repairs
of IEC 60601-1 where the power supply is removed or replaced, or if the
monitor has been dropped.
Monitor Maintenance
Check ECG synchronization of the At least once every two years, or as needed.
monitor and defibrillator (only if
hospital protocol requires use of
monitor during defibrillation)
Replace backlight 50,000 hours (about four years) of continuous usage, or as
(integrated displays only) needed.
Measurement Tests
Performance assurance for all At least once every two years, or if you suspect the measurement
measurements not listed below. values are incorrect.
Measurement Maintenance
NBP calibration At least once every two years, or as specified by local laws.
Mainstream and sidestream CO2 At least once a year, or if you suspect the measurement values are
calibration check incorrect.
Microstream CO2 calibration and At least once a year or after 4000 operating hours.
performance test
Predictive Temperature At least once a year, or if you suspect the measurement values are
incorrect.
Battery Maintenance
Battery See the section on Maintaining Batteries

278
Troubleshooting 29 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem with an individual measurement, read the Instructions for Use and
doublecheck that you have set up the measurement correctly.
If you suspect an intermittent, system-wide problem call your service personnel. You may be asked for
information from the status log. To view the status log,
1 In the Main Setup menu, select Revision.
2 Select a pop-up key according to the status log you want to consult.
3 View the status log by selecting Status Log from the Monitor Revision window.

Disposing of the Monitor

WARNING To avoid contaminating or infecting personnel, the environment or other equipment, make sure you
disinfect and decontaminate the monitor appropriately before disposing of it in accordance with your
country’s laws for equipment containing electrical and electronic parts. For disposal of parts and
accessories such as thermometers, where not otherwise specified, follow local regulations regarding
disposal of hospital waste.

You can disassemble the monitor as described in the Service Guide.

You will find detailed disposal information on the following web page:
http://www.medical.philips.com/main/company/sustainability/recycling/patient_monitoring/
The Recycling Passports located there contain information on the material content of the equipment,
including potentially dangerous materials which must be removed before recycling (for example,
batteries and parts containing mercury or magnesium).
Do not dispose of waste electrical and electronic equipment as unsorted municipal waste.
Collect it separately, so that it can be safely and properly reused, treated, recycled, or
recovered.

Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders

1 Empty the cylinder completely by pushing in the pin of the regulator valve or by pulling out the
pin of the fill valve using a tire valve stem wrench or a pair of needle nose pliers.
2 When the cylinder is empty, either remove the valve stem from the fill (or regulator) hole, or drill a
hole in the cylinder.
3 Write “Empty” on the cylinder and dispose of it appropriately for scrap metal.

WARNING Ensure that the cylinder is completely empty before trying to remove the valve stem or drill a hole in
the cylinder.

279
29 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Disposing of Empty Calibration Gas Cylinders

280
 30

30Accessories
You can order parts and accessories from Philips supplies at www.medical.philips.com or consult your
local Philips representative for details.

WARNING Reuse: Never reuse disposable transducers, sensors, accessories and so forth that are intended for single
use, or single patient use only. Reuse may compromise device functionality and system performance
and cause a potential hazard.
Philips’ approval: Use only Philips-approved accessories. Using non-Philips-approved accessories may
compromise device functionality and system performance and cause a potential hazard.
Packaging: Do not use a sterilized accessory if its packaging is damaged.

ECG/Resp Accessories
This symbol indicates that the cables and accessories are designed to have special
protection against electric shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents),
and are defibrillator proof.

The following cables may not all be available in all countries. Please check availability with your local
Philips supplier.

Recommended Cables

Trunk Cables

3-Electrode 5-Electrode 6-Electrode 10-Electrode 10-Electrode

Cable Set Cable Set Cable Set Cable set Cable set
(5+5) (6+4)

Part No. M1669A M1668A M1667A M1663A M1665A

Length 2.7m 2.7m 2.7m 2.0m 2.7m

281
30 Accessories ECG/Resp Accessories

3-Electrode Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

OR Grabber shielded 1.0m M1675A M1678A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0m M1671A M1672A
ICU snap shielded 1.0m M1673A M1674A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.45m M1622A --
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7m M1624A M1626A

5-Electrode Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

OR Grabber shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1973A M1974A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1968A M1971A
ICU Snap shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1644A M1645A
ICU Miniclip non-shielded 0.7m/1.3m M1647A M1648A

6-Electrode Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

OR Grabber 1.0m/1.6m M1684A M1685A
ICU Grabber 1.0m/1.6m M1680A M1681A
ICU Snap 1.0m/1.6m M1682A M1683A

10-Electrode (5+5)Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m M1976A M1978A
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0m M1602A M1604A
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m M1979A M1984A
For Limb Leads see 5-electrode cable sets

10-Electrode (6+4)Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

ICU Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m M1532A M1533A
ICU Snap, chest, shielded 1.0m M1537A M1538A
OR Grabber, chest, shielded 1.0m M1557A M1558A
For Limb Leads see 6-electrode cable sets

282
ECG/Resp Accessories 30 Accessories

One-piece Cables

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

3-lead Grabber, ICU 1.0m 989803143181 989803143171
5-lead Grabber, ICU 1.0m 989803143201 989803143191

Radio-translucent Cables
Pack of five single wires, radio-translucent, 0.9m, M1649A

Set Combiners and Organizers

Set combiners and organizers Part No.

Set combiner 3-electrode M1501A
5-electrode M1502A
Set organizer for shielded 3-electrode M1503A
leadsets - grabber and snap 4-electrode M1664A
5-electrode M1504A
6-electrode M1679A
Set organizer for non- 3-electrode M1636A
shielded lead sets - miniclip 5-electrode M1638A
Bedsheet clip M1509A
Replacement red cover for trunk cable (for 5-electrode 989808148861
cable sets)

Supported Cables

Trunk Cables

Length 3-Electrode Cable Set 5-Electrode Cable Set

AAMI IEC AAMI IEC
Part No. Part No. Part No. Part No.
0.9m M1540C M1550C M1560C M1570C
2.7m M1500A M1510A M1520A M1530A

283
30 Accessories ECG/Resp Accessories

3-Electrode Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

OR 1.0m M1601A M1611A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0m M1603A M1613A
ICU snap shielded 1.0m M1605A M1615A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.45m M1608A M1618A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7m M1609A M1619A

5-Electrode Cable Sets

Description Length AAMI Part No. IEC Part No.

OR Grabber shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1621A M1631A
ICU Grabber shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1623A M1633A
ICU Snap shielded 1.0m/1.6m M1625A M1635A
ICU Clip non-shielded 0.7m/1.3m M1629A M1639A

3-Electrode One Piece Cables

AAMI 3-Electrode Length AAMI IEC 3-electrode One IEC

One Piece Cables Part No. Piece Cables Part No.
OR Grabber 1.9m M1970A OR Grabber M1980A
ICU Snap 1.9m M1972A ICU Grabber M1981A

5-Electrode One Piece Cables

AAMI 5-electrode Length AAMI IEC 5-electrode One IEC

One Piece Cables Part No. Piece Cables Part No.
OR Grabber 2.5m M1975A OR Grabber M1985A
ICU Snap 2.5m M1977A ICU Grabber M1986A

Set Combiners and Organizers

Set combiners and organizers Part No.

Set combiner 3-electrode M1501A
5-electrode M1502A
Set organizer Shielded 3-electrode M1503A
Shielded 5-electrode M1504A
Bedsheet clip M1509A

284
NBP Accessories 30 Accessories

NBP Accessories
These cuffs and tubings are designed to have special protection against electric shocks
(particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof. You can
use them during electrosurgery.

Adult/Pediatric Multi-Patient Comfort Cuffs and Disposable Cuffs

Patient Category Limb Bladder Disposable Reusable cuff Tubing

Circumference Width cuff Part No.
Part No.
Adult (Thigh) 42 to 54 cm 20 cm M1879A M1576A M1598B (1.5m)
Large Adult 34 to 43 cm 16 cm M1878A M1575A or
M1599B (3m)
Adult 27 to 35 cm 13 cm M1877A M1574A
Small Adult 20.5 to 28 cm 10.5 cm M1876A M1573A
Pediatric 14 to 21.5 cm 8 cm M1875A M1572A
Infant 10 to 15 cm 5.5 cm M1874A M1571A

Reusable Cuff Kits

Cuff Kits Part No.

Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult M1577A
Small adult, adult, large adult, thigh M1578A
Infant, pediatric, small adult, adult, large adult, thigh M1579A

Adult/Pediatric Antimicrobial Coated Reusable cuffs

Patient Category (color) Limb Bladder Width Part No. Tubing

Circumference
(cm)
Adult Thigh (grey) 45 - 56.5 21.0 cm M4559A M1598B
Large Adult X-Long (burgundy) 35.5 - 46.0 17.0 cm M4558A (1.5m) or

Large Adult (burgundy) 35.5 - 46.0 17.0 cm M4557A M1599B (3m)

Adult X-Long (navy blue) 27.5 - 36.5 13.5 cm M4556A
Adult (navy blue) 27.5 - 36.5 13.5 cm M4555A
Small Adult (royal blue) 20.5 - 28.5 10.6 cm M4554A
Pediatric (green) 13.8 - 21.5 8.0 cm M4553A
Infant (orange) 9 - 14.8 5.4 cm M4552A

285
30 Accessories Invasive Pressure Accessories

Adult/Pediatric Soft Single Patient Single-Hose Disposable Cuffs

Patient Category Limb Circumference Bladder Part No. Tubing

(cm) Width
Adult (Thigh) 45 - 56.5 cm 20.4 cm M4579A M1598B (1.5m)
Large Adult X-Long 35.5 - 46 cm 16.4 cm M4578A or

Large Adult 35.5 - 46 cm 16.4 cm M4577A M1599B (3m)

Adult X-Long 27.5 - 36.5 13.1 cm M4576A
Adult 27.5 - 36.5 cm 13.1 cm M4575A
Small Adult 20.5 - 28.5 cm 10.4 cm M4574A
Pediatric 15.0 - 21.5 cm 8.0 cm M4573A
Infant 9 - 15 cm 5.6 cm M4572A

Neonatal/Infant Cuffs (Disposable, non-sterile)

Cuffs Limb Circumference Bladder Width Part No. Tubing

(cm)
Size 1 3.1 to 5.7 cm 2.2 cm M1866A M1596B (1.5m)
Size 2 4.3 to 8.0 cm 2.8 cm M1868A or
M1597B (3m)
Size 3 5.8 to 10.9 cm 3.9 cm M1870A
Size 4 7.1 to 13.1 cm 4.7 cm M1872A

Invasive Pressure Accessories

These transducers and accessories are designed to have special protection against electric
shocks (particularly regarding allowable leakage currents), and are defibrillator proof.

Transducer, accessories, sensor kits Part No

Reusable pressure transducer 5 μV/.V/mmHg sensitivity CPJ840J6
Sterile disposable pressure domes for CPJ840J6 (pack of 50) CPJ84022
Transducer holder for CPJ840J6 (pack of 4) CPJ84046
IV pole mount for CPJ840J6 CPJ84447
Single channel disposable sensor kit (20) - (EU/EFTA only) M1567A
Dual channel disposable sensor kit (20) (EU/EFTA only) M1568A
Transducer holder for M1567/8A (EU/EFTA only) M2271A
IV pole mount for M1567/8A (EU/EFTA only) M2272C
Adapter cable for disposable sensor kit 3,0m for M1567/8A M1634A
Monitoring Line Set CPJ84026

286
SpO2 Accessories 30 Accessories

SpO2 Accessories
Some Nellcor sensors contain natural rubber latex which may cause allergic reactions. See the
Instructions for Use supplied with the sensors for more information. M1901B, M1902B, M1903B
and M1904B disposable sensors are not available in USA from Philips. Purchase Nellcor sensors and
adapter cables directly from Tyco Healthcare.
Do not use more than one extension cable with any sensors or adapter cables. Do not use an extension
cable with:
• Masimo adapter cables,
• Philips reusable sensors or adapter cables with part numbers ending in -L (indicates “Long” version).
All listed sensors operate without risk of exceeding 41°C on the skin, if the initial skin temperature
does not exceed 35°C.
Make sure that you use only the accessories that are specified for use with this device, otherwise patient
injury can result.

Product Description Comments

Number
Philips reusable sensors.
M1191A/B Adult sensor (2m cable), for patients No adapter cable
over 50 kg. Any finger, except thumb. required.
M1191AL/ M1191A/B with longer cable (3 m)
BL
M1192A Small adult, pediatric sensor (1.5m
cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193A Neonatal sensor (1.5m cable) for
patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand
or foot.
M1194A Ear sensor (1.5m cable) for patients
more than 40 kg.
M1195A Infant sensor (1.5m cable) for patients
between 4kg and 15 kg. Any finger
except thumb.
M1196A Adult clip sensor (3m cable) for No adapter cable
patients over 40 kg. Any finger except required.
thumb.

287
30 Accessories SpO2 Accessories

Product Description Comments

Number
M1191T Adult sensor (0.45m cable), for Requires M1943
patients over 50 kg. Any finger, except (1 m) or M1943AL
thumb. (3 m) adapter cable
M1192T Small adult, pediatric sensor (0.45m
cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193T Neonatal sensor (0.9m cable) for
patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand
or foot.
M1196T Adult clip sensor (0.9m cable) for
patients over 40 kg. Any finger except
thumb.
M1191ANL Special Edition (SE) No adapter cable
Adult sensor (3m cable), for patients required.
over 50 kg. Any finger, except thumb.
M1192AN Special Edition (SE)
Small adult, pediatric sensor (1.5m
cable) for patients between 15 kg and
50 kg. Any finger except thumb.
M1193AN Special Edition (SE)
Neonatal sensor (1.5m cable) for
patients between 1kg and 4 kg. Hand
or foot.
M1194AN Special Edition (SE) No adapter cable
Ear sensor (1.5m cable) for patients required.
more than 40 kg.
M1195AN Special Edition (SE)
Infant sensor (1.5m cable) for patients
between 4 kg and 15 kg. Any finger
except thumb.
Philips disposable sensors. Not available in the USA and Canada.
M1904B Identical to OxiMax MAX-A Use adapter cable
M1903B Identical to OxiMax MAX-P M1943A or
M1943AL.
M1902B Identical to OxiMax MAX-I
M1901B Identical to OxiMax MAX-N
Philips disposable sensors. Available worldwide.
M1131A Adult/Pediatric finger sensor, 0.45m Use adapter cable
cable (patient size >20 kg) M1943A or
M1943AL.

288
SpO2 Accessories 30 Accessories

Product Description Comments

Number
M1132A Infant finger or toe sensor, 0.9m cable Use adapter cable
(patient size 3 - 10 kg) M1943A or
M1943AL.
M1133A Adult/Infant/Neonatal, 0.9m cable Use adapter cable
Foot or hand for neonates < 3 kg M1943A or
Big toe or thumb for patients between M1943AL.
10kg and 20kg
Any finger except thumb for patients
> 40kg

NELLCOR disposable sensors (must be ordered from Nellcor)

OxiMax Adult finger sensor (patient size >30 Use adapter cable
MAX-A kg) M1943A or
M1943AL.
OxiMax OxiMax MAX-A with long cable
MAX-AL
OxiMax Pediatric foot/hand sensor (patient
MAX-P size 10-50 kg)
OxiMax Infant foot/hand sensor (patient size
MAX-I 3-20 kg)
OxiMax Adult finger or neonatal foot/hand
MAX-N sensor (patient size >40 kg or <3 kg)
Oxisensor II Adult sensor (patient size >30kg) Use adapter cable
D-25 M1943A or
Oxisensor II Pediatric sensor (patient size 10-50 kg) M1943AL
D-20
Oxisensor II Infant sensor (patient size 3-20 kg)
I-20
Oxisensor II Neonatal sensor (patient size <3 kg or
N-25 >40 kg)
OxiCliq A See OxiMax MAX-A Use adapter cable
OxiCliq P See OxiMax MAX-P M1943A or
M1943AL together
OxiCliq I See OxiMax MAX-I with OC-3 adapter
OxiCliq N See OxiMax MAX-N cable.
Extension / Adapter Cables for Philips and Nellcor Sensors
M1941A Extension cable (2 m) For use with Philips
reusable sensors and
adapter cables.
M1943A Adapter cable (1.1 m cable) Adapter cable for
M1943AL Adapter cable (3 m cable) Philips/Nellcor
disposable sensors.

289
30 Accessories SpO2 Accessories

Product Description Comments

Number
OC-3 Adapter Cable for OxiCliq sensors Available from
Nellcor only.

Product Philips Part

Description
Number Number
MASIMO LNOP® reusable sensors.
LNOP DC-I Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803140321
LNOP DC-IP Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg) 989803140331
LNOP YI Multi-site Sensor (> 1 kg) n/a
LNOP TC-I Ear Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803140341
MASIMO LNCS® reusable sensors.
LNCS DC-I Adult reusable Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803148281
LNCS DC-IPPediatric reusable Sensor (10 - 50 kg) 989803148291
LNCS TC-I Reusable ear Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803148301
MASIMO LNOP® disposable adhesive sensors.
LNOP Adt Adult Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803140231
LNOP Adtx Adult Sensor (> 30 kg) n/a
LNOP Pdt Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg) 989803140261
LNOP Pdtx Pediatric Sensor (10 - 50 kg) n/a
LNOP Inf-L Infant Toe Sensor (3 - 20 kg) 989803140311
LNOP Neo-L Neonatal Sensor (<3kg) 989803140291
or Adult adhesive Sensor (> 40 kg)
LNOP NeoPt-L Neonatal Pre-Term Sensitive Skin 989803140301
Sensors (<1kg)
MASIMO LNCS® disposable adhesive sensors.
LNCS Adtx Adult Finger Sensor (> 30 kg) 989803148231
LNCS Pdtx Pediatric Finger Sensor (10 - 50 kg) 989803148241
LNCS Inf-L Infant Toe Sensor (3 - 20 kg) 989803148251
LNCS Neo-L Neonatal Foot Sensor (< 3 kg) 989803148271
or Adult Finger Sensor (> 40 kg)
LNCS NeoPt-L Neonatal pre-term sensitive skin Sensor 989803148261
(< 1 kg)
Adapter Cable for MASIMO sensors.
LNOP MP12 LNOP MP Series Patient Cable (3.6 m) 451261000761
Adapter Cable for Masimo LNOP
Sensors
LNC MP10 LNCS MP Series Patient Cable (3.0 m) 989803148221
Adapter Cable for Masimo LNCS
Sensors

290
Temperature Accessories 30 Accessories

The monitor uses Masimo certified pulse oximetry for reduced noise and low
perfusion performance with Masimo Sensors under the Masimo NR&LP protocol
available from Masimo

Temperature Accessories
Temperature Probes Part No. Minimum measurement time
for accurate readings
Reusable
General purpose probe 21075A 90 sec
Small flexible vinyl probe (Infant/Pediatric) 21076A 60 sec
Attachable surface probe 21078A 60 sec
Disposable
General purpose probe M1837A 90 sec
Skin probe 21091A 60 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (12 French) 21093A 180 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 18) 21094A 210 sec
Esophageal/Stethoscope Probe (French 24) 21095A 310 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (12 French) M2255A 180 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (16 French) 21096A 180 sec
Foley Catheter Probe (18 French) 21097A 180 sec
Adapter cable 1.5m 21082B
Adapter cable 3.0m 21082A

Predictive Temperature Accessories

Temperature Probes and Disposable Covers Part No. Welch Allyn Part No.
Oral probe with probe well (holder), 2.7m cable (9ft) 989803143381 02895-000
Rectal probe with probe well (holder), 2.7 m cable (9ft) 989803143391 02895-100
Disposable probe covers: 1,000 (40 boxes, 25 per box) M4823A 05031-101

291
30 Accessories Mainstream CO2 Accessories

Mainstream CO2 Accessories

Description Part No.

CO2 Sensor M2501A
Adult/Pediatric Airway Adapter (reusable) M2513A
Infant Airway Adapter (reusable) M2516A
Adult Airway Adapter (single-patient use) M2533A
Infant Airway Adapter (single-patient use) M2536A

Sidestream CO2 Accessories

Description Part No.

CO2 Sensor M2741A
Nasal and Oral-Nasal Cannulas
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Adult M2744A
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2745A
CO2 Nasal Cannula, Infant M2746A
CO2 / O2 Nasal Cannula, Adult M2750A
CO2 / O2 Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2751A
CO2 / O2 Nasal Cannula, Infant 989803144471
CO2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult M2756A
CO2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2757A
CO2 / O2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Adult M2760A
CO2 / O2 Oral-Nasal Cannula, Pediatric M2761A

Airway Adapters
Airway Adapter Set, ET > 4.0 mm M2768A
Airway Adapter Set, ET =< 4.0 mm 989803144531
Airway Adapter Set H, ET > 4.0 mm M2772A
Airway Adapter Set H, ET =< 4.0 mm M2773A

Straight Sample Lines

Straight Sample Line M2776A
Straight Sample Line H M2777A

Microstream CO2 Accessories

• “FilterLine Set” is a combination of a FilterLine with an Airway Adapter.
• “H” in the accessory name indicates suitability for humidified ventilation and longer usage due to
the active removal of humidity from the sample line.

292
 Recorder Accessories 30 Accessories

• “Smart CapnoLine” is a combined oral-nasal FilterLine.

• “Smart CapnoLine O2” is a combined oral-nasal-O2-CO2 FilterLine.
• “NIV Line” is a nasal FilterLine suitable for mask ventilation (for example, C-PAP).
• “Single purpose” means CO2 measurement only, “dual purpose” means CO2 measurement and O2
delivery.
• The accessories are supplied in packs of 25.

Microstream accessory selection flowchart

Is the patient intubated?
Yes No
Does the patient need oxygen?
Yes No
Short-term Long-term Short term Long term Long-term Short term Short term
(up to 6 hours) (up to 72 hours) (up to 8 hours) (up to 24 hours) (up to 24 hours) (up to 8 hours) (up to 8 hours)
Oral/Nasal Nasal Nasal Oral/Nasal Nasal
Key Applications
Critical Care OR, EMS, ED Procedural Sedation, Critical Care, Sleep Critical Care, Procedural EMS, ED
Critical Care, EMS, Lab, Long-term Sleep Lab Sedation, Critical
ED Pain Management Care, EMS, ED
Philips part numbers (A = Adult, P= Pediatric, I = Infant, N = Neonate)
FilterLine Set: FilterLine H Set: Smart CapnoLine CapnoLine HO2: CapnoLine H: Smart CapnoLine: NIV Line:
A/P: M1920A A/P: M1921A O2: A: M4680A A: M4689A A: M2526A A: 4686A
FilterLine Set Long: I/N: M1923A A: M2522A P: M4681A P: M4690A P: M2524A P: M4687A
A/P:989803160241* FilterLine H Set Long P: M2520A I/N: M4691A Smart CapnoLine
FilterLine: A/P:989803160251* Smart CapnoLine O2 Plus Long
Long A:989803160301*
M1925A* I/N:989803160261*
A:989803160281*
VitaLine H Set:
P:989803160271*
A/P:989803159571*
I/N: 989803159581*
FilterLine H:
M1926A*
*Not available in all geographies.

Recorder Accessories
Description Part No.
10 rolls of paper M4816A
80 rolls of paper M4817A

293
30 Accessories Cable for Direct Connection of a Telemetry Device

Cable for Direct Connection of a Telemetry Device

Telemetry Interface Cable, 2.0m, PN 989803146911

Battery Accessories

Description Part No.

Battery Charger and Conditioner M8043A

294
 31

31Installation and Specifications

Intended Use
The monitor is intended to be used for monitoring and recording of, and to generate alarms for,
multiple physiological parameters of adults, pediatrics, and neonates in a hospital environment. The
MP5 and MP5T monitors are also intended for use during patient transport inside the hospital
environment; only the MP5 monitor for use during patient transport outside of the hospital
environment. The monitor is intended for use by health care professionals.
The monitor is only for use on one patient at a time. It is not intended for home use. Not a therapeutic
device.
Rx only: U.S. Federal Law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
ST segment monitoring is intended for use with adult patients only and is not clinically validated for
use with neonatal and pediatric patients.
The Predictive Temperature unit is intended for use with adult and pediatric patients in a hospital
environment.
The ECG measurement is intended to be used for diagnostic recording of rhythm and detailed
morphology of complex cardiac complexes (according to AAMI EC 11).
The derived measurement Pulse Pressure Variation (PPV) is intended for use with sedated patients
receiving controlled mechanical ventilation and mainly free from cardiac arrhythmia. The PPV
measurement has been validated only for adult patients.

NOTE1 Hospital Environment

The monitor is suitable for use in all medically used rooms which fulfil the requirements regarding
electrical installation according to IEC60364-7-710 “Requirements for special installations or locations
- Medical locations”, or corresponding local regulations.

NOTE2 EMC Environment

The following measurements and system interfaces are, in addition, suitable for use in establishments
directly connected to the public low-voltage supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes (see table in “Electromagnetic Emissions” on page 321):
• ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO2, Pressure, Temperature, CO2 (only Mainstream Sensor M2501A and
Microstream CO2)
• LAN, Video Out, Battery, Nurse Call, RS232, and recorder interfaces
The monitor is indicated for use by health care professionals whenever there is a need for monitoring
the physiological parameters of patients.

295
31 Installation and Specifications Manufacturer’s Information

WARNING The monitors are not intended for use in an MRI environment or in an oxygen-enriched environment
(for example, hyperbaric chambers.

Manufacturer’s Information
You can write to Philips at this address
Philips Medizin Systeme Boeblingen GmbH
Hewlett-Packard-Str. 2
71034 Boeblingen
Germany
Visit our website at: www.philips.com.
© Copyright 2002 - 2008. Koninklijke Philips Electronics N.V. All Rights Reserved.

Trademark Acknowledgement
The following are trademarks of Nellcor Puritan Bennett Incorporated: Nellcor®, Durasensor®, Dura-
Y®, Oxiband®, Oxicliq®, OxiMax®. MAX-FAST® is a trademark of Mallinckrodt Inc.

Masimo®, Masimo SET®, and LNOP are federally registered trademarks of the Masimo Corporation.
Other product and company names mentioned in this book may be trademarks of their respective
owners.

Symbols
These symbols can appear on the monitor and its associated equipment.
‘These symbols can appear on the monitor and its associated equipment (depending on options).

296
Symbols 31 Installation and Specifications

Symbols

Refer to accompanying Protective earth RS-232 RS232 connector

documents

Standby Equipotential 2002- Identifies year

grounding 06 and month of
manufacture

Non-ionizing Alternating current Connection direction

radiation symbol indicator

Electrical input Electrical output Connector has

indicator indicator special protection
against electric
shocks and is
defibrillator proof

Gas input indicator Gas output indicator Quick mount release

LAN connection Nurse call relay IntelliVue

indicator for connection indicator Instrument
connection to a wired Telemetry wireless
network network

Battery symbol Analog interface Data input/output

VIDEO
indicator for symbol
connection to
any analog video
display

297
31 Installation and Specifications Installation Safety Information

Symbols

Always use separate built-in wireless Error LED

collection for waste network
electrical and
electronic equipment (WEEE)

Pressure connector Temperature connector Telemetry device

connector

NBP connector SpO2 connector Uses FAST SpO2

algorithm

ECG connector
Monitor supports 12- built-in short
lead ECG range radio
interface

Installation Safety Information

WARNING If multiple instruments are connected to a patient, the sum of the leakage currents may exceed the
limits given in IEC/EN60601-1, IEC60601-1-1, UL60601-1. Consult your service personnel.

Grounding The monitor must be grounded during operation. If a three-wire receptacle is not
available, consult the hospital electrician. Never use a three-wire to two-wire adapter.

Equipotential If the monitor is used in internal examinations on the heart or brain, ensure that the room
Grounding incorporates an equipotential grounding system to which the monitor has separate
connections.
Combining equipment Combinations of medical equipment with non-medical equipment must comply with
IEC 60601-1-1. Never use a multiple portable socket-outlet or extension cord when
combining equipment unless the socket outlet is supplied specifically for use with that
equipment.
Fusing The monitor uses double pole/neutral fusing.
Network Cables All network cables must be unshielded.

Connectors
The actual placement of boards and configuration of connections for your monitor depends on how
your hardware has been configured. See the symbols table on page 296 to see which symbols are used
to mark the connections.

WARNING • Connect only medical devices to the ECG output connector socket.
• Connecting the ECG sync out to external equipment should only be done by a qualified user. Do
not touch the patient when you have contact to the ECG output connector socket.

298
Installation Safety Information 31 Installation and Specifications

• Always connect the ECG sync cable first to the external device and then to the monitor. Wherever
possible, pre-install the cable before the patient is brought into the vicinity of the equipment.

Left Side of Monitor

1 Measurement connectors (combination

will vary due to optional measurements,
1 see below)
2 ECG analog output/marker input
connector

US measurement connectors

Pressure Noninvasive SpO2 ECG/ Telemetry CO2

and Temp Pressure Respiration device

International measurement connectors

Pressure Noninvasive SpO2 ECG/ Telemetry CO2

and Temp Pressure Respiration device

299
31 Installation and Specifications Altitude Setting

1 Serial/MIB (RS232) connector

2 Nurse call connector
3 Wired network connector
4 Analog video out connector
5 Equipotential grounding
6 Protective earth

1 2 3 4 5 6

Right Side of Monitor

1 Battery compartment
2 AC power inlet
3 Recorder (optional)
4 4 MSL Connector (for connection to a
host monitor)

2
1

Altitude Setting
Altitude affects CO2 measurements. The monitor must be configured at installation to the correct
altitude.

Monitor Safety Specifications

0366

The monitor complies with the Medical Device Directive 93/42/EEC.

300
EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance 31 Installation and Specifications

In addition, the product complies with:

IEC 60601-1:1988 + A1:1991 + A2:1995; EN60601-1:1990 + A1:1993 + A2:1995; UL 60601-
1:2003; CAN/CSA C22.2#601.1-M90; JIS T 0601-1:1999; IEC 60601-1-1:2001; EN 60601-1-
1:2001; IEC 60601-1-2:2001; EN 60601-1-2:2001.
Classification (according to IEC 60601-1): Class 1, Type CF, Continuous Operation.
The possibility of hazards arising from software errors was minimized in compliance with ISO
14971:2000, EN60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999 and IEC 60601-1-4:1996 + A1:1999.

EMC And Radio Regulatory Compliance

This ISM device complies with Canadian ICES-001. Cet appareil ISM est conforme a la norme NMB-
001 du Canada.
The MP5 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry WMTS (US only) complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Operation of this equipment requires the prior coordination with a frequency coordinator designated
by the FCC for the Wireless Medical Telemetry Service.
The MP5 including IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry ISM (2.4 GHz) - FCC and Industry Canada
Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by
Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radio frequency interference and void your authority to
operate this equipment.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive). Class 2 radio equipment. Member
states may apply restrictions on putting this device into service or placing it on the market.
This product is intended to be connected to the Publicly Available Interfaces (PAI) and used
throughout the EEA.
IntelliVue 802.11 Bedside Adapter (Option J35 Wireless Network Adapter) - FCC and Industry
Canada Radio Compliance: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly
approved by Philips Medical Systems may cause harmful radio frequency interference and void your
authority to operate this equipment.
The maximum antenna gain permitted (for devices in the 5250-5350 MHz and 5470-5725 MHz
bands) complies with the e.i.r.p. limits as stated in RSS-210.
The maximum antenna gain permitted (for devices in the 5725-5825 MHz band) complies with the
e.i.r.p. limits specified for point-to-point operation, as stated in RSS-210.
The device for the band 5150-5250 MHz is only for indoor usage to reduce potential for harmful
interference to co-channel mobile satellite systems.
The OEM radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. This product is intended to be connected to the Publicly
Available Interfaces (PAI) and used throughout the EEA.

301
31 Installation and Specifications Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance

CAUTION High power radars are allocated as primary users (meaning they have priority) of 5250-5350 MHz and
5650-5850 MHz and these radars could cause interference and /or damage to LE-LAN devices.

IntelliVue 802.11 Bedside Adapter CE compliances:

This device is compliant to Council Directive 73/23/EEC (Low voltage directive) & 89/
336/EEC (EMC directive) & 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications
Terminal Equipment Directive)

The radio component contained in this device is compliant to Council Directive 1999/5/
EC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive)

The MP5 including the short range radio interface - FCC and Industry Canada Radio Compliance:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation. Any changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Philips Medical
Systems may cause harmful radio frequency interference and void your authority to operate this
equipment.
The radio device used in this product is in compliance with the essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC (Radio Equipment and
Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive). Class 1 radio equipment.
In addition the product complies with: ETSI EN 300 328; AS/NZS 4771+A1; ARIB STD-T66.

Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance

The MP5 patient monitor with measurements and interfaces other than those listed below, and the
MP5T, cannot be used for patient transport outside of the hospital environment.
The MP5 patient monitor with the following measurements and interfaces:
– ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO2, Pressure, Temperature, CO2 (only Mainstream Sensor M2501A
and Microstream CO2)
– LAN, Video Out, Battery, Nurse Call, RS232, and recorder interfaces
can be used in a transport environment such as a road ambulance, airplane or helicopter. For this
purpose the monitor fulfils the following additional mechanical, EMC and environmental
requirements:
• Shock Tests according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to IEC/EN
60068-2-27 (peak acceleration up to 100g).
• Random Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to IEC/
EN 60068-2-64 (RMS acceleration 5g).
• Sinusoidal Vibration according to IEC TR 60721-4-7, Class 7M3. Test procedure according to
IEC/EN 60068-2-6 (acceleration up to amplitude 2g).
• Bump Test according to IEC/EN60068-2-29 (peak acceleration 15 g, 1000 bumps).
• Free Fall Test according to EN1789 (covers also IEC TR 60721-4-7 and Class 7M3). Test
procedure according to EN 60068-2-32 (height 0.75 m).

302
Out-Of-Hospital Transport - Standards Compliance 31 Installation and Specifications

• Specification for degrees of protection provided by enclosures according to IEC/EN 60529: IP 32

• EN 1789 +A1:2003 Medical vehicles and their equipment - Road ambulances (chapter 6 - Medical
Devices).
• Radiated susceptibility 20 V/m according to EN ISO 9919 (SpO2) and EN ISO 21647 (CO2).
• Altitude Range from -500 to 3000 m operating and -500 to 4600 m storage and transportation.
• Extended radiated susceptibility tests
The MP5 patient monitor with its out-of-hospital parameter set provides a general immunity level
of 20 V/m with only few restrictions. Details are as listed below:
– GSM 900: Immunity at 900 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m (ECG:10 V/m), duty cycle
1:8
– GSM 1800: Immunity at 1800 MHz (uplink mobile phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:8.
– DECT: Immunity at 1800 MHz (digital cordless phone), 20 V/m, duty cycle 1:24
– AM: 1 kHz Immunity from 80 MHz to 1.0 GHz (any radio communication unit, broadcasting
and TV transmitter), 20 V/m, modulation factor 80 %. (ECG: 20 V/m except 600-950 MHz
where it is 10 V/m and Temperature which holds 3 V/m over the full range).

CAUTION Temperature measurement accuracy may be compromised in the presence of strong electromagnetic
fields (>3V/m) in certain small frequency bands.

• Magnetic Field emission according to MIL STD 461E, Chapter RE101: Radiated emissions,
magnetic field, 30 Hz to 100 kHz. Limit class: Army.
• Magnetic Field susceptibility: Radiated susceptibility, magnetic field, 50, 60 and 400 Hz,
18 µT(15 A/m)
• Operating ambient temperature testing over the range from 0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F).
• Operating ambient humidity testing up to 95 % RH at 40°C (100°F), non condensing.

NOTE There may be additional requirements for transport situations in air, on water or in difficult terrain in
certain countries, e.g. EU.

Physical Specifications

Specification Comments
Maximum Weight
4.0 kg ±5 % with ECG/Resp, NBP, SpO2 and battery
(8.8 lb)
WxHxD
<259 x 248 x 186 mm without Predictive Temperature unit
10.2 x 9.8 x 7.3 in
<312 x 248 x 186 mm with Predictive Temperature unit
12.3 x 9.8 x 7.3 in

303
31 Installation and Specifications Monitor Performance Specifications

Environmental Specifications
The monitor may not meet the performance specifications given here if stored or used outside the
specified temperature and humidity ranges.
The monitor is protected against ingress of objects and fluids according to IEC 60529 IP32 (except
monitors with the predictive temperature unit). However, do not expose the monitor directly to heavy
rain.
When the monitor and related products have differing environmental specifications, the effective range
for the combined products is that range which is common to the specifications for all products.

Item Condition Range

Temperature Range Operating 0 to 40°C (32 to 104°F)
Storage -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
1
Transportation -20 to 60°C (-4 to 140°F)
Temperature Range with Operating 0 to 35°C (32 to 95°F)
IntelliVue 802.11 Bedside
Adapter or IntelliVue
Instrument Telemetry
Wireless Network or
when charging the battery
Temperature Range with Operating 10 to 40°C (50 to 104°F)
Predictive Temperature Storage -20 to 50°C (-4 to 120°F)
Unit
Humidity Range Operating 15 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH) (non condensing)
Storage 5 % to 90 % Relative Humidity (RH)
Transportation 5 % to 90 % Relative Humidity (RH)
Altitude Range Operating -500 m to 3000 m (10000 ft)
Storage -500 m to 4600 m2 (15000 ft)
Transportation -500 m to 4600 m2(15000 ft)
Ingress Protection Monitor without the IP32 (protected against ingress of water when the water is
predictive temperature dripping vertically and the monitor is tilted up to 15° and
unit protected against contact with or ingress of objects larger than
2.5 mm)
Monitor with the IPX1 (protection against ingress of water when the water is
Predictive dripping vertically)
Temperature Unit
1.Short-term storage during shipment.
2.Sufficient for flight altitudes up to 12,000 m with pressurized cabins.

Monitor Performance Specifications

Performance Specifications
Power Specifications Power consumption <40 W average
<65 W peak
Line Voltage 100 to 240 V ~
Current 1.3 to 0.7 A
Frequency 50/60 Hz ~

304
Monitor Performance Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

Performance Specifications
Battery Specifications Operating Time Basic monitoring configuration: >4 hours
(with new, fully (Brightness set to Optimum, ECG/Resp, SpO2
charged battery) measurements in use, NBP measurement every 15 minutes)
Extended monitoring configuration: >3 hours
(Brightness set to Optimum, ECG/Resp, SpO2, Press/
Temp, CO2 measurements in use, NBP every 15 minutes,
Recorder)
Charge Time When monitor is off: 4 hours
When monitor is in use: 5 hours and above, depending on
monitor configuration (in some configurations the battery
may not completely recharge in the monitor, in this case the
M8043A Smart Battery Charger should be used)
Indicators Alarms Off red (crossed-out alarm symbol) LED
Alarms red/yellow/light blue (cyan) LED
On/Standby/Error green/red LED
AC Power green LED
Battery LED red/yellow/green LED
Sounds Audible feedback for user input
Prompt tone
QRS tone, or SpO2 modulation tone
4 different alarm sounds
Remote tone for alarms on other beds in network
Tone for Timer expired
Trends Resolution 12, 16, 24 or 32 numerics @ 12 sec, 1 minute, 5 minute
resolution
Information Multiple choices of number of numerics, resolution and
duration depending on trend option and application area.
For example:
neonatal extended 12 numerics, 24 hours @ 12 secs or
32 numerics 32 hours @ 1 minute
intensive care extended: 16 numerics 120 hours @ 5 minutes
anesthesia extended 32 numerics 9 hours @ 12 seconds
High-Res Trend Waves Measurements HR, SpO2, Resp
OxyCRG
Resolution Measurement samples are taken at a resolution of four samples
per second
Update speed waves are drawn at a speed of 3 cm/minute
Events Information trigger condition and time, event classification and associated
detailed view of episode data
Episode data 4 minutes of high resolution trend
Alarm signal System delay less than 3 seconds
Pause duration 1,2,3 minutes or infinite, depending on configuration
Extended alarm pause 5 or 10 minutes
Review Alarms Information all alarms / inops, main alarms on/off, alarm silence and time
of occurrence
Capacity 300 items

305
31 Installation and Specifications Monitor Performance Specifications

Performance Specifications
Real Time Clock Range from: January 1, 1997, 00:00 to: December 31, 2080, 23:59
Accuracy <2 seconds per day (typically)
Hold Time infinite if powered by AC; otherwise at least 48 hours (typical:
>72 hours)
Buffered Memory Hold Time if powered by AC: infinite
without power: at least 48 hours (typical: >72 hours)
Contents Active settings, trends, patient data, realtime reports, events,
review alarms

Monitor Interface Specifications

Measurement Link Connectors Female ODU (Proprietary)
(MSL) Power Sync. RS-422 compliant input 78.125 kHz (typical)
LAN signals IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T compliant
Serial signals RS-422 compliant
Local signals Internal use only
Network Standard IEEE 802.3 10-Base-T
Connector RJ45 (8 pin)
Isolation 1.5 kV
MIB/RS232 Standard IEEE 1073-3.2-2000
Connectors RJ45 (8 pin)
Mode BCC (RxD/TxD cross over)
Power 5 V +/-5 %, 100 mA (max.)
Isolation 1.5 kV
ECG Sync Pulse Pulse Width 100 +/-10 ms (high)
Mode Delay from R-wave 20 ms maximum per AAMI EC13
peak to start of pulse
Output voltage swing +/-5 V minimum
ECG Output/Marker Input (1/4” stereo phone jack with tip, ring, sleeve)
General Connector 1/4” phone each with tip, ring, sleeve
ECG Output Signal Gain 320 to 3200 in 19 steps
(ring, tip) Full Scale on Display signal gain x measured ECG voltage
Gain Error <20 %
Baseline Offset <150 mV
Bandwidth 1 to 80 Hz
Output Impedance ECG Output (ring): <2.2 KΩ ±20 %
ECG Output/Marker Input (tip) <2.5 kΩ ±20 %
Signal delay ≤30 ms
Marker Input Signal Type 0 to -12 V, negative edge pulse
Requirements Pulse Source <7 kΩ
(tip) Impedance
Pulse Fall Time <100 μs
Pulse Duration >4 ms

306
Monitor Performance Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

Monitor Interface Specifications

Basic Nurse Call Connector 3.5 mm phone jack, active closed contact only
Relay Contact <=100 mA, <=24 V DC
Isolation 1.5 kV
Delay <(Configured Latency + 0.5 sec)
Wireless Network Signals RD+/-, TD+/-: IEEE 802.3 10 Base-T, PWR, GND
Device Interface 12.5 V ±20 %, 3.5 W continuous
(integrated, for
compatible network
options see below)
Short Range Radio Type Internal SRR interface
Interface1 Technology IEEE 802.15.4
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM (2.400 - 2.483 GHz)
Modulation Technique DSSS (O -QPSK)
Effective radiated max. 0 dBm (1 mW)
power
1.The short range radio interface is compatible with the following telemetry devices: TRx4841A/TRx4851A IntelliVue
Telemetry System Transceiver.

Display Specifications
All displays Sweep Speeds 6.25, 12.5, 25 and 50 mm/s;
Integrated SVGA Resolution 800 x 600
Display Refresh frequency 60 Hz
Useful screen 170.4 x 127.8 mm
Pixel size 0.213 x 0.213 mm
Video Interface SVGA Horizontal Frequency 37.5 kHz
Refresh frequency 60 Hz
Video Signals 0.7 Vpp @ 75 Ohm, HSYNC/VSYNC Signals TTL
Connector 15 pin D-SUB

Compatible Devices
Displays (must be approved M8031B XGA color 15” LCD touchscreen
for medical use) M8033C SXGA color 17” LCD Touchscreen
IntelliVue 802.11 Bedside Adapter (Wireless Network Adapter)
Internal Wireless Adapter Technology IEEE 802.11a/b/g
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz ISM Band
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network (USA only)
Internal WMTS Adapter Technology compatible with Philips Cellular Telemetry System
(CTS), cellular infrastructure
Frequency Band WMTS, 1395-1400 MHz and 1427-1432 MHz
IntelliVue Instrument Telemetry Wireless Network (except USA)
Internal ISM Adapter Technology compatible with Philips Cellular Telemetry System
(CTS), cellular infrastructure
Frequency Band 2.4 GHz ISM

307
31 Installation and Specifications M4605A Battery Specifications

M4605A Battery Specifications

One battery is required for battery operation of the monitor.

M4605A Battery Specifications

Physical Specifications
WxDxH 149 mm (5.866 in) x 89 mm (3.504 in) x 19.8 mm (0.78 in)
Weight 490 g (1.08 lb) per battery
Performance Specifications
Nominal Voltage 10.8 Volt
Rated Capacity at discharge C/5 6000 mAh
Continuous Discharge Capability 6.5 A
Environmental Specifications
Temperature Range Discharge 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Charge 0 to 50°C (32 to 122°F)
Storage and Transportation: -20 to 65°C (-4 to 140°F)
Humidity Range Operating: 15 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
Storage and Transportation: 5 % to 95 % Relative Humidity (RH)
Battery Type Smart Battery 10.8 V, 6000 mAh, Lithium Ion
Safety complies with UL 2054
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) complies with the requirements for FCC Type B computing Device,
and EN 61000-4-2 and EN 61000-3-2
Communication Standard complies with the SMBus specification v 1.1

308
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

Measurement Specifications
See the Appendix on Default Settings for a list of the settings the monitor is initially shipped with.

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Complies with IEC 60601-2-25:1993 + A1:1999 /EN60601-2-25:1995 + A1:1999, IEC 60601-2-
27:2005/EN60601-2-27:2006, IEC 60601-2-51:2003 /EN 60601-2-51:2003 and AAMI EC11/
EC13:1991/2002.

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications

Cardiotach Range Adult/pedi: 15 to 300 bpm
Neo range: 15 to 350 bpm
Accuracy ±1% of range
Resolution 1 bpm
Sensitivity ≥200 µVpeak
PVC Rate Range 0 to 300 bpm
Resolution 1 bpm
ST Numeric Range -20 to +20 mm
Accuracy ±0.5 mm or 15%, whichever is greater
Resolution 0.1 mm
QT Numeric Range 200 to 800 ms
Accuracy ±30 ms
Resolution 8 ms
QTc Numeric Range 200 to 800 ms
Resolution 1 ms
ΔQTc Numeric Range -600 to +600 ms
Resolution 1 ms
QT-HR Numeric Range - adult 15 to 300 bpm
Range - pediatric 15 to 350 bpm
and neonatal
Sinus and SV Rhythm Brady Adult: 15 to 59 bpm
Ranges Pedi: 15 to 79 bpm
Neo: 15 to 89 bpm
Normal Adult: 60 to 100 bpm
Pedi: 80 to 160 bpm
Neo: 90 to 180 bpm
Tachy Adult: >100 bpm
Pedi: >160 bpm
Neo: >180 bpm
Bandwidth Diagnostic Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.05 to 150 Hz
Extended Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 150 Hz
Monitoring Mode
Monitoring Mode Adult: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 55 Hz
Filter Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 20 Hz

309
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Performance Specifications

Bandwidth Diagnostic Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.05 to 40 Hz
when the ECG is Extended Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 40 Hz
transmitted from a Monitoring Mode
telemetry device via short
Monitoring Mode Adult: 0.5 to 40 Hz
range radio
Neo/pedi: 0.5 to 40 Hz
Filter Mode Adult/neo/pedi: 0.5 to 20 Hz
Differential Input Impedance >2 MΩ RA-LL leads (Resp)
>5 MΩ at all other leads (at 10 Hz including patient cable)
Common Mode Rejection Ratio Diagnostic mode: >86 dB (with a 51 kΩ/47 nF imbalance).
Filter mode: >106 dB (with a 51 kΩ/47 nF imbalance).
Electrode Offset Potential Tolerance ±500 mV
Auxiliary Current Active electrode: <100 nA
(Leads off Detection) Reference electrode: <900 nA
Input Signal Range ±5 mV

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST/QT
Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment
HR 15 to 300 bpm Adult:1 bpm steps (15 to 40 bpm)
maximum delay: 10 seconds according 5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
to AAMI EC 13-1992 standard Pedi/Neo:1 bpm steps (15 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Extreme Tachy Difference to high limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Extreme Brady Difference to low limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps
Clamping at 15 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps
Run PVCs 2 PVCs Not adjustable by user
PVCs Rate 1 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
Vent Tach HR 20 to 300 bpm 5 bpm
Vent Tach Run 3 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
Vent Rhythm Run 3 to 99 PVCs/minute 1 PVC
SVT HR 120 to 300 bpm 5 bpm
SVT Run 3 to 99 SV beats 1 SV beat
ST High -19.8 to +20 mm 0.2 mm
ST Low -20 to +19.8 mm 0.2 mm
QTc High 200 ms to 800 ms 10 ms steps
ΔQTc High 30 ms to 200 ms 10 ms steps

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Supplemental Information as required by AAMI EC11/13

Respiration Excitation Waveform Sinusoidal signal, 260 μA, 40.5 kHz
Noise Suppression RL drive gain 44 dB max., max. voltage 1.8 Vrms

310
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

ECG/Arrhythmia/ST Supplemental Information as required by AAMI EC11/13

Time to Alarm for Vent Tachycardia Gain 0.5, Range 6.5 to 8.4 seconds, Average 7.2 seconds
Tachycardia 1 mVpp,206 bpm Gain 1.0 Range 6.1 to 6.9 seconds, Average 6.5 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.9 to 6.7 seconds, Average 6.3 seconds
Vent Tachycardia Gain 0.5, Range 5.4 to 6.2 seconds, Average 5.8 seconds
2 mVpp,195 bpm Gain 1.0, Range 5.7 to 6.5 seconds, Average 6.1 seconds
Gain 2.0, Range 5.3 to 6.1 seconds, Average 5.7 seconds
Tall T-Wave Rejection Capability Exceeds ANSI/AAMI EC 13 Sect. 3.1.2.1(c) minimum
recommended 1.2 mV T-Wave amplitude
Heart Rate Averaging Method Three different methods are used:
Normally, heart rate is computed by averaging the 12 most
recent RR intervals.
For runs of PVCs, up to 8 RR intervals are averaged to compute
the HR.
If each of 3 consecutive RR intervals is greater than 1200 ms
(that is, rate less than 50 bpm), then the 4 most recent RR
intervals are averaged to compute the HR.
Response Time of Heart Rate Meter to Change in HR change from 80 to 120 bpm:
Heart Rate Range: [6.4 to 7.2 seconds] Average: 6.8 seconds
HR change from 80 to 40 bpm:
Range: [5.6 to 6.4 sec] Average: 6.0 seconds
Heart Rate Meter Accuracy and Response to Ventricular bigeminy: 80 bpm
Irregular Rhythm Slow alternating ventricular bigeminy: 60 bpm
Rapid alternating ventricular bigeminy: 120 bpm
Bidirectional systoles: 90 bpm
Accuracy of Input Signal Reproduction Methods A and D were used to establish overall system error
and frequency response.
Pacemaker Pulse Rejection Performance Rejection of pacemaker pulses with amplitudes from ±2 mV to
±700 mV and widths from 0.1 ms to 2.0 ms (Method A)

Respiration

Respiration Performance Specifications

Respiration Rate Range Adult/pedi: 0 to 120 rpm
Neo: 0 to 170 rpm
Accuracy at 0 to 120 rpm ±1 rpm
at 120 to 170 rpm ±2 rpm
Resolution 1 rpm
Bandwidth 0.3 to 2.5 Hz (–6 dB)
Noise Less than 25 mΩ (rms) referred to the input

311
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

Respiration Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
High Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps max. 14 seconds
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps
Low Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm under 20 rpm: 1 rpm steps for limits from 0 to 20 rpm:
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm over 20 rpm: 5 rpm steps max. 4 seconds
for limits above 20 rpm: max.
14 seconds
Apnea Alarm 10 to 40 seconds 5 second steps

312
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

SpO2
Complies with EN ISO 9919:2005 (except alarm system; alarm system complies with IEC 60601-2-
49:2001).
Measurement Validation: The SpO2 accuracy has been validated in human studies against arterial
blood sample reference measured with a CO-oximeter. Pulse oximeter measurements are statistically
distributed, only about two-thirds of the measurements can be expected to fall within the specified
accuracy compared to CO-oximeter measurements. Display Update Period: Typical: 2 seconds,
Maximum: 30 seconds. Maximum with NBP INOP suppression on: 60 seconds.

SpO2 Performance Specifications

SpO2 Range 0 to 100%
The specified accuracy Accuracy Philips Reusable Sensors:
is the root-mean- M1191A, M1191AL, M1191ANL, M1191B, M1191BL, M1192A,
square (RMS) M1192AN = 2% (70% to 100%)
difference between the M1193A, M1193AN, M1194A, M1194AN, M1195A, M1195AN,
measured values and M1196A = 3% (70% to 100%)
the reference values M1191T, M1192T, M1193T (Adult), M1196T = 3% (70% to 100%)
M1193T (Neonate) = 4% (70% to 100%)
Philips Disposable Sensors with M1943A(L):
M1132A, M1133A (adult/infant) = 2%
M1901B, M1902B, M1903B, M1904B, M1131A, M1133A (neonate)
= 3% (70% to 100%)
NellcorPB® Sensors with M1943A(L):
MAX-A, MAX-AL, MAX-P, MAX-I, MAX-N, D-25, D-20, I-20, N-
25, OxiCliq A, P, I, N = 3% (70% to 100%)
Masimo Reusable Sensors® with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP DC-I, LNOP DC-IP, LNOP YI, LNCS DC-1, LNCS DC-IP:
2% (70% to 100%)
LNOP TC-I, LNCS TC-I: 3.5% (70% to 100%)
Masimo Disposable Sensors® with LNOP MP12 or LNC MP10:
LNOP Adt, LNOP Adtx, LNOP Pdt, LNOP Pdtx, LNOP Inf-L,
LNCS Adtx, LNCS Pdtx, LNCS Inf-L: 2% (70% to 100%)
LNOP Neo-L, LNOP NeoPt-L, LNCS Neo-L, LNCS NeoPt-L: 3%
(70% to 100%)
Resolution 1%
Pulse Range 30 to 300 bpm
Accuracy ±2% or 1 bpm, whichever is greater
Resolution 1 bpm
Sensors Wavelength range: 500 to 1000 nm
Emitted Light Energy: ≤15 mW
Information about the wavelength range can be especially useful to
clinicians (for instance, when photodynamic therapy is performed)
Pulse Oximeter Calibration Range 70% to 100%

313
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

SpO2 Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
SpO2 Adult: 50 to 100% 1% steps (0, 1, 2, 3,... 30)
Pedi/Neo: 30 to 100% +4 seconds
Desat Adult: 50 to Low alarm limit 1% steps
Pedi/Neo: 30 to Low alarm limit
Pulse 30 to 300 bpm Adult: max. 14 seconds
1 bpm steps (30 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (30 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)
Tachycardia Difference to high limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps max. 14 seconds
Clamping at 150 to 300 bpm 5 bpm steps
Bradycardia Difference to low limit 0 to 50 bpm 5 bpm steps max. 14 seconds
Clamping at 30 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps

NBP
Complies with IEC 60601-2-30:1999/EN60601-2-30:2000.

NBP Performance Specifications

Measurement Ranges Systolic Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa)
Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)
Diastolic Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Mean Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)
Pulse Rate Adult: 40 to 300
Pedi: 40 to 300
Neo: 40 to 300
Accuracy Max. Std. Deviation: 8 mmHg (1.1 kPa)
Max. Mean Error: ±5 mmHg (±0.7 kPa)
Pulse Rate Measurement Accuracy 40 to 100 bpm: ±5 bpm
101 to 200 bpm: ±5% of reading
201 to 300 bpm: ±10% of reading
(average over NBP measurement cycle)
Pulse Rate Range 40 to 300 bpm
Measurement Time Typical at HR >60 bpm
Auto/manual/sequence: 30 seconds (adult)
25 seconds (neonatal)
Stat: 20 seconds
Maximum time: 180 seconds (adult/pediatric)
90 seconds (neonates)

314
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

NBP Performance Specifications

Cuff Inflation Time Typical for normal adult cuff: Less than 10 seconds
Typical for neonatal cuff: Less than 2 seconds
Initial Cuff Inflation Pressure Adult: 165 ±15 mmHg
Pedi: 130 ±15 mmHg
Neo: 100 ±15 mmHg
Auto Mode Repetition Times 1, 2, 2.5, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 45, 60 or 120 minutes
STAT Mode Cycle Time 5 minutes
Venipuncture Mode Inflation
Inflation Pressure Adult 20 to 120 mmHg (3 to 16 kPa)
Pediatric 20 to 80 mmHg (3 to 11 kPa)
Neonatal 20 to 50 mmHg (3 to 7 kPa)
Automatic deflation Adult/pediatric 170 seconds
after Neonatal 85 seconds

Measurement Validation: In adult and pediatric mode, the blood pressure measurements determined
with this device comply with the American National Standard for Electronic or Automated
Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 - 1992) in relation to mean error and standard deviation,
when compared to intra-arterial or auscultatory measurements (depending on the configuration) in a
representative patient population. For the auscultatory reference the 5th Korotkoff sound was used to
determine the diastolic pressure.
In neonatal mode, the blood pressure measurements determined with this device comply with the
American National Standard for Electronic or Automated Sphygmomanometers (ANSI/AAMI SP10 -
1992 and AAMI/ANSI SP10A -1996) in relation to mean error and standard deviation, when
compared to intra-arterial measurements in a representative patient population.

NBP Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment

Systolic Adult: 30 to 270 mmHg (4 to 36 kPa) 10 to 30 mmHg: 2 mmHg (0.5 kPa)
Pedi: 30 to 180 mmHg (4 to 24 kPa) >30 mmHg: 5 mmHg (1 kPa)

Neo: 30 to 130 mmHg (4 to 17 kPa)

Diastolic Adult: 10 to 245 mmHg (1.5 to 32 kPa)
Pedi: 10 to 150 mmHg (1.5 to 20 kPa)
Neo: 10 to 100 mmHg (1.5 to 13 kPa)
Mean Adult: 20 to 255 mmHg (2.5 to 34 kPa)
Pedi: 20 to 160 mmHg (2.5 to 21 kPa)
Neo: 20 to 120 mmHg (2.5 to 16 kPa)

NBP Overpressure Settings

Adult >300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec not user adjustable
Pedi >300 mmHg (40 kPa) >2 sec
Neo >150 mmHg (20 kPa) >2 sec

315
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

Invasive Pressure and Pulse

Complies with IEC 60601-2-34:2000/EN60601-2-34:2000.

Invasive Pressure Performance Specifications

Measurement Range –40 to 360 mmHg
Pulse Rate Range 25 to 350 bpm
Accuracy ±1% Full Range
Resolution 1 bpm
Input Sensitivity Sensitivity:5 µV/V/mmHg (37.5 µV/V/kPa)
Adjustment range:±10%
Transducer Load Impedance:200 to 2000 Ω (resistive)
Output Impedance:≤3000 Ω (resistive)
Frequency Response dc to 12.5 Hz or 40 Hz
Zero Adjustment Range: ±200 mmHg (±26 kPa)
Accuracy ±1 mmHg (±0.1 kPa)
Drift Less than 0.1 mmHg/°C (0.013 kPa/°C)
Gain Accuracy Accuracy ±1%
Drift Less than 0.05%/°C
Non linearity Error of ≤0.4% FS (@CAL 200 mmHg)
and Hysteresis
Overall Accuracy (including ±4% of reading or ±4 mmHg (±0.5 kPa), whichever is greater
transducer)
Volume displacement of CPJ840J6 0.1 mm3 /100 mmHg

Invasive Pressure Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment Delay

Pressure –40 to 360 mmHg -40 to 50 mmHg max.
(–5.0 to 48 kPa) 2 mmHg (0.5 kPa) 12 seconds
>50 mmHg
5 mmHg (1 kPa)
Extreme High Difference to high limit 0 to 5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
25 mmHg
Clamping at -40 to 5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa)
360 mmHg
Extreme Low Difference to low limit 0 to 5 mmHg steps (0.5 kPa)
25 mmHg
Clamping at -40 to 5 mmHg steps (1.0 kPa)
360 mmHg
Pulse 25 to 300 bpm Adult:
1 bpm steps (25 to 40 bpm)
5 bpm steps (40 to 300 bpm)
Pedi/Neo:
1 bpm steps (25 to 50 bpm)
5 bpm steps (50 to 300 bpm)

316
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

Invasive Pressure Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment Delay

Tachycardia Difference to high limit 0 to 5 bpm steps max.
50 bpm 14 seconds
Clamping at 150 to 5 bpm steps
300 bpm
Bradycardia Difference to low limit 0 to 5 bpm steps max.
50 bpm 14 seconds
Clamping at 25 to 100 bpm 5 bpm steps

Temp
Complies with EN 12470-4:2000. Specified without transducer.

Temp Performance Specifications

Temp Range –1 to 45°C (30 to 113°F)
Resolution 0.1°C (0.2°F)
Accuracy ±0.1°C (±0.2°F)
Average Time Constant Less than 10 seconds

Temp Alarm Specifications Range Adjustment

Temp High/Low Alarms –1 to 45°C (30 to 113°F) -1 to 35°C (30 to 95°F), 0.5°C (1.0°F) steps
35 to 45°C (95 to 113°F), 0.1°C (0.2°F) steps

Predictive Temperature
Performance Specifications
Technology Welch Allyn® SureTemp Plus®
Probe Types oral/axillary, rectal
Temperature Measurement Range 26.7 to 43.3°C (80 to 110°F)
Resolution ±0.1°C (±0.2°F)
Accuracy ±0.1°C (±0.2°F) (in continuous mode, complies with ASTM 1112-
(Oral, axillary and rectal measurements) 00

CO2
The CO2 measurement complies with EN ISO 21647:2004 + Cor.1:2005 (except alarm system; alarm
system complies with IEC 60601-2-49:2001).

317
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

Microstream CO2 Performance Specifications

CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20 kPa), or 20 % CO2, whichever is lower
Accuracy Up to 5 minutes during warmup: ±4 mmHg or 12 %, whichever is greater
After 5 minutes warmup:
0 to 40 mmHg (0 to 5.3 kPa):±2.2 mmHg (±0.3 kPa)
Above 40 mmHg (5.3 kPa):±(5.5 % + (0.08 %/mmHg above 40 mmHg)) of
reading
These specifications are valid for 21 % O2 and N2 balance, up to 35°C
ambient temperature, up to 60 rpm in adult mode and 100 rpm in neonatal
mode. Outside of these conditions the accuracy reaches at a minimum
±4 mmHg or ±12 % of the reading, whichever is greater.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability Included in Accuracy specifications
awRR Range 0 to 150 rpm
Accuracy 0 to 40 rpm: ±1 rpm
41 to 70 rpm: ±2 rpm
71 to 100 rpm: ±3 rpm
>100 rpm: ±5 % of reading
Warm-up Time 5 minutes for full accuracy specification
Rise Time 190 ms for neonatal mode
(measured with FilterLine H for neonatal)
240 ms for adult mode
(measured with FilterLine H for adult)
Sample Flow Rate 50 + 15/-7.5 ml/minute
Gas Sampling Delay Time Typical:2.3 seconds
Maximum:3 seconds
Sound Pressure Acoustic noise: <45 dBA
Total System Response Time The total system response time is the sum of the delay time and the rise time.

Microstream CO2 Humidity Correction Factor

Either BTPS or ATPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the Microstream CO2
readings. The formula for the correction calculation is:

PBTPS = (PATPD . 0.94)

Mainstream CO2 Performance Specifications

CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg:±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5 % of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8 % of reading
The specifications are valid for standard gas mixtures, balance air, fully
hydrated at 35°C, Pabs = 760 mmHg, flow rate = 2 l/min.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability:
Short term drift ±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Long term drift Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period

318
Measurement Specifications 31 Installation and Specifications

Mainstream CO2 Performance Specifications

awRR Range 2 to 150 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Warm-up Time 2 minutes with CO2 transducer attached for full accuracy specification
Response Time Less than 60 ms (with adult or infant reusable or disposable adapter)

Sidestream CO2 Performance Specifications

CO2 Range 0 to 150 mmHg (0 to 20.0 kPa)
Accuracy after 2 minutes warmup:
For values between 0 and 40 mmHg: ±2.0 mmHg (±0.29 kPa)
For values from 41 to 70 mmHg: ±5 % of reading
For values from 71 to 100 mmHg: ±8 % of reading
For values from 101 to 150 mmHg: ±10 % of reading
At respiration rates above 80 rpm, all ranges are ±12 % of actual. The
specifications are valid for gas mixtures of CO2, balance N2, dry gas at
760 mmHg within specified operating temperature range.
Resolution Numeric: 1.0 mmHg (0.1 kPa)
Wave: 0.1 mmHg (0.01 kPa)
Stability:
Short term drift ±0.8 mmHg over four hours
Long term drift Accuracy specification will be maintained over a 120 hour period
awRR Range 2 to 150 rpm
Accuracy ±1 rpm
Warm-up Time 2 minutes with CO2 sensor attached for full accuracy specification
Sample Flow Rate 50 ±10 ml/minute
Total System Response Time 3 seconds
Operating Temperature 0 to 40°C (32 to 100°F)

Mainstream and Sidestream CO2 Humidity Correction Factor

Either BTPS or ATPD can be selected as the humidity correction factor for the CO2 readings. The
formula for the correction calculation is:

P abs
P ATPD = P BTPS ⋅ -----------------------------
P abs – P H2O

Where p = partial pressure, Pabs = absolute pressure, and PH2O = 42 mmHg @35°C and 100% RH.

CO2 Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
etCO2 High 20 to 95 mmHg (2 to 13 kPa) 1 mmHg (0.1 kPa) less than 14 seconds
etCO2 Low 10 to 90 mmHg (1 to 12 kPa)

319
31 Installation and Specifications Measurement Specifications

CO2 Alarm
Specifications Range Adjustment Delay
imCO2 High 2 to 20 mmHg steps of 1 mmHg less than 14 seconds
(0.3 to 3.0 kPa) (0.1 kPa)
awRR High Adult/pedi: 10 to 100 rpm under 20 rpm: 1 rpm less than 14 seconds
Neo: 30 to 150 rpm steps
awRR Low Adult/pedi: 0 to 95 rpm over 20 rpm:5 rpm settings <20 rpm: less than 4 seconds
Neo: 0 to 145 rpm steps settings >20 rpm: less than 14 seconds
Apnea delay 10 to 40 seconds 5 second steps set apnea delay time +4 seconds

Interfering Gas and Vapor Effects On CO2 Measurement Values

The specified deviations are valid when the appropriate corrections are switched on and set correctly.

Gas or Vapor Gas Level Additional deviation due to gas interference, measured
(% volume fraction) at 0 - 40 mmHg CO2
Nitrous Oxide 60 ±1 mmHg
Halothane 4 ±2 mmHg
Enflurane 5 ±2 mmHg
Isoflurane 5 ±2 mmHg
Sevoflurane 5 ±2 mmHg
Xenon 80 -5 mmHg
Helium 50 ±1 mmHg
Metered dose inhaler - not specified for use
propellants
Desflurane 15 +5 mmHg
Ethanol 0.1 ±1 mmHg
Isopropanol 0.1 ±1 mmHg
Acetone 0.1 ±1 mmHg
Methane 1.0 ±1 mmHg

320
Safety and Performance Tests 31 Installation and Specifications

Safety and Performance Tests

You must observe any national regulations on the qualification of the testing personnel and suitable
measuring and testing facilities. See the maintenance section for a list of required tests. Safety and
performance tests, and what to do if the instrument does not meet these specifications are described in
the Installation and Service guide.

Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) Specifications

Take special precautions regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) when using medical electrical
equipment. You must operate your monitoring equipment according to the EMC information
provided in this book. Portable and mobile radio frequency (RF) communications equipment can
affect medical electrical equipment.

Accessories Compliant with EMC Standards

All accessories listed in the accessories section comply, in combination with the monitor, with the
requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2001 + A1:2004.

WARNING Using accessories other than those specified may result in increased electromagnetic emission or
decreased electromagnetic immunity of the monitoring equipment.

Electromagnetic Emissions
The monitor is suitable for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the table below. You
must ensure that it is used in such an environment

Emissions test Compliance Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference

Radio Frequency (RF) emissions Group 1 The monitor uses RF energy only for its internal function.
Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely
to cause any interference in nearby electronic equipment
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class A The monitor is suitable for use in all establishments other
than those directly connected to the public low-voltage
power supply network that supplies buildings used for
domestic purposes.
RF emissions CISPR 11 Class B The monitor, with the following measurements and
Harmonic emissions IEC 61000-3-2 complies interfaces:

Voltage fluctuations IEC 61000-3-3 complies ECG/Respiration, NBP, SpO2, Pressure, Temperature, CO2
(only Mainstream Sensor M2501A)
LAN, Video Out, Battery, Nurse Call, RS232, and recorder
interfaces
is suitable for use in all establishments including those
directly connected to the public low-voltage power supply
network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.

321
31 Installation and Specifications Safety and Performance Tests

Avoiding Electromagnetic Interference (Resp)

The respiration (Resp) measurement is a very sensitive measurement that measures a very small signal.
Technological limitations do not allow higher immunity levels than 1 V/m for radiated RF
electromagnetic fields and 1 Vrms for conducted disturbances induced by RF fields. Electromagnetic
fields with field strengths above 1 V/m and conducted disturbances above 1 Vrms may cause erroneous
measurements. Therefore Philips recommends that you avoid using electrically radiating equipment in
the close proximity of this measurement.

WARNING The monitor should not be used next to or stacked with other equipment. If you must stack the
monitor, you must check that normal operation is possible in the necessary configuration before you
start monitoring patients.

Electromagnetic Immunity
The monitor is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The user must ensure
that it is used in the appropriate environment as described below.
IEC 60601-1-2 Electromagnetic environment
Immunity test test level Compliance level guidance
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete, or
discharge (ESD) ±8 kV air ±8 kV air ceramic tile. If floors are covered
IEC 61000-4-2 with synthetic material, the relative
humidity should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power supply lines ±2 kV for power supply lines Mains power quality should be that
transient/burst ±1 kV for input/output lines ±1 kV for input/output lines of a typical commercial and/or
IEC 61000-4-4 hospital environment
Surge ±1 kV differential mode ±1 kV differential mode Mains power quality should be that
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV common mode ±2 kV common mode of a typical commercial and/or
hospital environment
Voltage dips, <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality should be that
short (>95% dip in UT) for (>95% dip in UT) for of a typical commercial and/or
interruptions 0.5 cycles 0.5 cycles hospital environment. If the user of
and voltage 40% UT 40% UT the monitor requires continued
variations on (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles operation during power mains
power supply interruptions, it is recommended
input lines 70% UT 70% UT that the monitor is equipped with
IEC 61000-4- (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles an internal battery or is powered
11 <5% UT <5% UT from an uninterruptible power
(>95% dip in UT) for 5 sec (>95% dip in UT) for 5 sec supply.
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 Hz) should be a t levels characteristic of
magnetic field a typical location in a typical
IEC 61000-4-8 commercial and/or hospital
environment

In this table, UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

322
Safety and Performance Tests 31 Installation and Specifications

Recommended Separation Distance

WARNING The monitor, equipped with a wireless network interface, intentionally receives RF electromagnetic
energy for the purpose of its operation. Therefore, other equipment may cause interference, even if that
other equipment complies with CISPR emission requirements.

In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres
(m). The values given in brackets are for respiration.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the
monitor, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation
appropriate for the frequency of the transmitter.
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey, should be
less than the compliance level in each frequency range.

Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with this symbol:

IEC 60601-1-2
Immunity test test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment guidance
Conducted RF 3 VRMS 3 VRMS Recommended separation distance:
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to (1 VRMS for
80 MHz respiration) d = 1,2 P :
for respiration:

d = 3,5 P :
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m Recommended separation distance:
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to (1 V/m for respiration) 80 MHz to 800 MHz
2.5 GHz
For short range radio, d = 1,2 P
see note1.
80 MHz to 800 MHz for respiration
d = 3,5 P :

800 MHz to 2,5 GHz

d = 2,3 P

800 MHz to 2,5 GHz for respiration

d = 7,0 P

2.0 to 2,3 GHz for short range radio

d = 7,0 P
1.If ECG/SpO2 signals are acquired from a telemetry device via short range radio the compliance level is 3V/m except in
the range 2.0 to 2.3 GHz where it is 1 V/m.

323
31 Installation and Specifications Safety and Performance Tests

Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular, cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in
which the monitor is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the monitor should be
observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be
necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the monitor.
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects, and people.

Recommended separation distances from portable and mobile RF

communication equipment
The monitor is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or user of the monitor can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and
the monitor as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications
equipment.
In the following table, P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in metres
(m). The values given in brackets are for those measurements which do not use the general formula.

Frequency of transmitter 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz

d = 1,2 P d = 1,2 P d = 2,3 P

for respiration: for respiration: for respiration:
d = 3,5 p d = 3,5 P d = 7,0 P
for short range radio in
the range 2.0 to 2.3 GHz:
Equation d = 7,0 P
Rated max. output power
of transmitter (W) Separation distance (m) Separation distance (m) Separation distance (m)
0.01 0.1 (0.4) 0.1 (0.4) 0.2 (0.7)
0.1 0.4 (1.1) 0.4 (1.1) 0.7 (2.2)
1 1.3 (3.5) 1.3 (3.5) 2.3 (7.0)
10 3.8 (11.1) 3.8 (11.1) 7.3 (22.1)
100 12.0 (35.0) 12.0 (35.0) 23.0 (70.0)

Electrosurgery Interference/Defibrillation/Electrostatic Discharge

The equipment returns to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any stored
data. Measurement accuracy may be temporarily decreased while performing electro-surgery or
defibrillation. This does not affect patient or equipment safety. Do not expose the equipment to x-ray
or strong magnetic fields (MRI).

Fast Transients/Bursts
The equipment will return to the previous operating mode within 10 seconds without loss of any
stored data. If any user interaction is required, the monitor indicates with a technical alarm (INOP).

324
Safety and Performance Tests 31 Installation and Specifications

Restart time
After power interruption, an ECG wave will be shown on the display after 30 seconds maximum.

325
31 Installation and Specifications Safety and Performance Tests

326
 32

32Default Settings Appendix

This appendix documents the most important default settings of your monitor as it is delivered from
the factory. For a comprehensive list and explanation of default settings, see the Configuration Guide
supplied with your monitor. The monitor’s default settings can be permanently changed in
Configuration Mode.
Note: If your monitor has been ordered preconfigured to your requirements, the settings at delivery
will be different from those listed here.

Country-Specific Default Settings

Certain default settings are specific to a particular country. These are listed here for all countries
alphabetically.

Country-Description Line Frequency Units Units ECG Cable Color

Weight Height
50/60 [Hz] kg, lb in, cm IEC, AAMI
Afghanistan 50 kg cm AAMI
Åland Islands 50 kg cm IEC
Albania 50 kg cm IEC
Algeria 50 kg cm IEC
American Samoa 60 lb in AAMI
Andorra 60 lb in AAMI
Angola 50 kg cm IEC
Anguilla 60 lb in AAMI
Antarctica 60 lb in AAMI
Antigua and Barbuda 50 kg cm AAMI
Argentina 50 kg cm AAMI
Armenia 50 kg cm IEC
Aruba 60 kg cm AAMI
Australia 50 kg cm AAMI
Austria 50 kg cm IEC
Azerbaijan 50 kg cm IEC
Bahamas, The 60 kg cm AAMI
Bahrain 50 kg cm AAMI
Bangladesh 60 lb in AAMI
Barbados 50 kg cm AAMI
Belarus 50 kg cm IEC
Belgium 50 kg cm IEC

327
32 Default Settings Appendix Country-Specific Default Settings

Belize 60 lb in AAMI
Benin 60 lb in AAMI
Bermuda 60 kg cm AAMI
Bhutan 60 lb in AAMI
Bolivia 50 kg cm AAMI
Bosnia and Herzegovina 50 kg cm IEC
Botswana 50 kg cm IEC
Bouvet Island 60 lb in AAMI
Brazil 60 kg cm AAMI
British Indian Ocean Territory 60 lb in AAMI
Brunei Darussalam 50 kg cm AAMI
Brunei 50 kg cm IEC
Bulgaria 50 kg cm IEC
Burkina Faso 50 kg cm IEC
Burundi 50 kg cm IEC
Cambodia 50 kg cm IEC
Cameroon 50 kg cm IEC
Canada 60 kg cm AAMI
Cape Verde 60 lb in AAMI
Cayman Islands 60 kg cm AAMI
Central African Republic 50 kg cm IEC
Chad 60 lb in AAMI
Chile 50 kg cm AAMI
China 50 kg cm IEC
Christmas Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Cocos Keeling Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Colombia 60 kg cm AAMI
Comoros 60 lb in AAMI
Congo 50 kg cm IEC
Congo, Democratic Republic of the 50 kg cm IEC
Cook Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Costa Rica 60 kg cm AAMI
Côte d'Ivoire 50 kg cm IEC
Croatia 50 kg cm IEC
Cuba 60 kg cm IEC
Cyprus 50 kg cm IEC
Czech Republic 50 kg cm IEC
Denmark 60 lb in AAMI
Djibouti 50 kg cm IEC
Dominica 50 kg cm AAMI
Dominican Republic 60 kg cm AAMI
Ecuador 60 kg cm AAMI
Egypt 50 kg cm IEC
El Salvador 60 kg cm AAMI
Equatorial Guinea 50 kg cm IEC
Eritrea 50 kg cm IEC
Estonia 50 kg cm IEC
Ethiopia 50 kg cm IEC
Falkland Islands, Malvinas 60 lb in AAMI
Faroe Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Fiji 60 lb in AAMI

328
Country-Specific Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Finland 50 kg cm IEC
France 50 kg cm IEC
French Guiana 50 kg cm IEC
French Polynesia 60 lb in AAMI
French Southern Territories 60 lb in AAMI
Gabon 50 kg cm IEC
Gambia, The 50 kg cm IEC
Georgia 60 lb in AAMI
Germany 50 kg cm IEC
Ghana 50 kg cm IEC
Gibraltar 60 lb in AAMI
Greece 50 kg cm IEC
Greenland 60 lb in AAMI
Grenada 50 kg cm AAMI
Guadeloupe 50 kg cm IEC
Guam 60 lb in AAMI
Guatemala 60 kg cm AAMI
Guernsey 50 kg cm IEC
Guinea 60 lb in AAMI
Guinea-Bissau 60 lb in AAMI
Guyana 60 kg cm AAMI
Haiti 60 kg cm AAMI
Heard Island and McDonald Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Holy See, Vatican City State 60 lb in AAMI
Honduras 60 kg cm AAMI
Hong Kong 50 kg cm IEC
Hungary 50 kg cm IEC
Iceland 50 kg cm IEC
India 50 kg cm IEC
Indonesia 50 kg cm IEC
Iran, Islamic Republic of 50 kg cm AAMI
Iraq 50 kg cm AAMI
Ireland 50 kg cm IEC
Isle of Man 50 kg cm IEC
Israel 50 kg cm IEC
Italy 50 kg cm IEC
Jamaica 50 kg cm AAMI
Japan 60 kg cm IEC
Jersey 50 kg cm IEC
Jordan 50 kg cm AAMI
Kazakhstan 50 kg cm IEC
Kenya 50 kg cm IEC
Kiribati 60 lb in AAMI
Korea, Democratic People’s Republic of 60 lb in AAMI
Korea, Republic of 60 kg cm AAMI
Kuweit 50 kg cm AAMI
Kyrgyzstan 60 lb in AAMI
Lao People’s Democratic Republics 50 kg cm IEC
Latvia 50 kg cm IEC
Lebanon 50 kg cm AAMI
Lesotho 50 kg cm IEC

329
32 Default Settings Appendix Country-Specific Default Settings

Liberia 50 kg cm IEC
Libyan Arab. Jamahiriya 60 lb in AAMI
Liechtenstein 60 lb in AAMI
Lithuania 50 kg cm IEC
Luxembourg 50 kg cm IEC
Macao 60 lb in AAMI
Macedonia, The former Yugoslavian 50 kg cm IEC
Republic of
Madagascar 50 kg cm IEC
Malawi 50 kg cm IEC
Malaysia 50 kg cm IEC
Maldives 60 lb in AAMI
Mali 50 kg cm IEC
Malta 50 kg cm IEC
Marshall Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Martinique 60 kg cm IEC
Mauritania 50 kg cm IEC
Mauritius 60 lb in AAMI
Mayotte 60 lb in AAMI
Mexico 60 kg cm AAMI
Micronesia, Federal States of 60 lb in AAMI
Moldova, Republic of 60 lb in AAMI
Monaco 60 lb in AAMI
Mongolia 60 lb in AAMI
Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC
Montserrat 50 kg cm AAMI
Morocco 50 kg cm IEC
Mozambique 50 kg cm IEC
Myanmar 60 lb in AAMI
Namibia 50 kg cm IEC
Nauru 60 lb in AAMI
Nepal 60 lb in AAMI
Netherlands 50 kg cm IEC
Netherlands Antilles 50 kg cm AAMI
New Caledonia 60 lb in AAMI
New Zealand 50 kg cm AAMI
Nicaragua 60 kg in AAMI
Niger 50 kg cm IEC
Nigeria 50 kg cm IEC
Niue 60 lb in AAMI
Norfolk Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Northern Mariana Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Norway 50 kg cm IEC
Oman 50 kg cm AAMI
Pakistan 50 kg cm IEC
Palau 60 lb in AAMI
Palestinian Territory 50 kg cm AAMI
Panama 60 lb in AAMI
Papua New Guinea 60 lb in AAMI
Paraguay 50 kg cm AAMI
Peru 60 kg cm AAMI

330
Country-Specific Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Philippines 60 kg cm AAMI
Pitcairn 60 lb in AAMI
Poland 50 kg cm IEC
Portugal 50 kg cm IEC
Puerto Rico 60 lb in AAMI
Qatar 50 kg cm AAMI
Reunion 60 lb in AAMI
Romania 50 kg cm IEC
Russian Federation 50 kg cm IEC
Rwanda 50 kg cm IEC
Saint Helena 60 lb in AAMI
Saint Kitts and Nevis 60 kg cm AAMI
Saint Lucia 50 kg cm AAMI
Saint Pierre and Miquelon 60 lb in AAMI
Saint Vincent and the Grenadines 50 kg cm AAMI
Samoa 60 lb in AAMI
San Marino 60 lb in AAMI
Sao Tome and Principe 60 lb in AAMI
Saudi Arabia 50 kg cm AAMI
Senegal 50 kg cm IEC
Serbia 50 kg cm IEC
Serbia & Montenegro 50 kg cm IEC
Seychelles 60 lb in AAMI
Sierra Leone 50 kg cm IEC
Singapore 50 kg cm IEC
Slovakia 50 kg cm IEC
Slovenia 50 kg cm IEC
Solomon Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Somalia 50 kg cm IEC
South Africa 60 lb in AAMI
South Georgia and the South Sandwich 60 lb in AAMI
Islands
Spain 50 kg cm IEC
Sri Lanka 60 lb in AAMI
Sudan 50 kg cm IEC
Suriname 60 kg cm AAMI
Svalbard and Jan Mayen 60 lb in AAMI
Swaziland 60 lb in AAMI
Sweden 50 kg cm IEC
Switzerland 50 kg cm IEC
Syrian Arab Rep 50 kg cm AAMI
Taiwan, Province of China 60 kg cm AAMI
Tajikistan 60 lb in AAMI
Tanzania, United Republic of 60 lb in AAMI
Thailand 50 kg cm AAMI
Timor-Leste 60 lb in AAMI
Togo 60 lb in AAMI
Tokelau 60 lb in AAMI
Tonga 60 lb in AAMI
Trinidad and Tobago 60 lb in AAMI
Tunisia 50 kg cm IEC

331
32 Default Settings Appendix Country-Specific Default Settings

Turkey 50 kg cm IEC
Turkmenistan 60 lb in AAMI
Turks and Caicos Islands 60 kg cm AAMI
Tuvalu 60 lb in AAMI
Uganda 60 lb in AAMI
Ukraine 60 lb in AAMI
UK 50 kg cm IEC
United Arab Emirates 50 kg cm AAMI
United Kingdom 50 kg cm IEC
United States 60 lb in AAMI
United States Minor Outlying Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Uruguay 50 kg cm AAMI
Uzbekistan 60 lb in AAMI
Vanuatu 60 lb in AAMI
Venezuela 60 lb in AAMI
Viet Nam 50 kg cm IEC
Virgin Islands (British) 50 kg cm AAMI
Virgin Islands (US) 60 lb in AAMI
Wallis and Futuna Islands 60 lb in AAMI
Western Sahara 50 kg cm IEC
Yemen 50 kg cm AAMI
Zambia 60 lb in AAMI
Zimbabwe 60 lb in AAMI

332
Alarm and Measurement Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Alarm and Measurement Default Settings

Settings are only entered once per table row if they are the same for all patient categories.

Alarm Default Settings

Alarm Settings Factory Default H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
Alarm Volume 5
Alarms Off 2 min
Pause Al. 5min Enabled
Pause Al. 10min Enabled
Auto Alarms Off Off
Alarm Off Reminder Off
Visual Latching Red & Yell Red Only
Audible Latching Red & Yell Off
Alarm Reminder On
Reminder Time 3 min
Alarm Sounds Traditional
Red Alarm Interval 10 sec
Yel. Al. Interval 20 sec
Alarm Low 4 2
Red Alarm Volume AlarmVol +2
Yell. Alarm Volume AlarmVol +0
Inop Volume AlarmVol +0
Auto Increase Vol. 2 Steps
Increase Vol Delay 20 sec
Keep Blinking No
Relay 1 Sensitiv. R&Y&C
Relay 2 Sensitiv. Red & Yell
Relay 3 Sensitiv. Red
CyanRelayLatency 5 sec
Yel. Relay Latency 2 sec
Alarm Text Standard
No Centr Mon Min Vol 4

333
32 Default Settings Appendix ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings

ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
ECG Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
High Limit 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Low Limit 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
Alarms On
Alarm Source Auto Auto
ECG On
QRS Volume 1
Primary Lead II
Secondary Lead V
Analysis Mode Multi-lead
Lead Placement Standard
Mod. Lead Placment Off
Filter Monitor Filter
Speed 25 mm/s
Auto Filter Off
Default ECG Size x1
Color Green
Asystole Thresh 4.0 sec 3.0 sec
Δ ExtrTachy 20 bpm
Tachy Clamp 200 bpm 220 bpm 240 bpm
Δ ExtrBrady 20 bpm
Brady Clamp 40 bpm 50 bpm 40 bpm 60 bpm 80 bpm
ECG AL. OFF Inop Cyan
Fallback On
Alarms Off Enabled
Alarm Source Sel. Enabled
Va Lead V2
Vb Lead V5
SyncPulse Sensit Medium
SyncPulse Marker On
PulseAlarms Tele Enabled

334
ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

Arrhythmia Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Arrhythmia On Off Off
Pause Threshold 2.0 sec 1.5 sec
VTach HR 100 120 150
VTach Run 5
Vent Rhythm 14
SVT HR 180 200 210
SVT Run 5
PVCs/min 10 5 5
Non-Sustain On
Vent Rhythm On
Run PVCs On
Pair PVCs On Off
R-On-T PVCs On Off
V.Bigeminy On Off
V.Trigeminy On Off
PVCs/min On Off
Multif. PVCs On Off
Pacer N. Cap On
Pacer N. Pac On
Pause On Off
Missed Beat On Off
SVT On
Afib On
IrregularHR On Off
HR Alarms Short Yellow
TimeOut 1st 3 min
TimeOut 2nd 10 min
Arrhy Off Message Yes
SOME ECG... Inop On Off

Lead-independent ST Settings Factory Adult Factory Pedi Factory Neo

ST Alarm Mode Single ST
Alarms On

335
32 Default Settings Appendix ECG, Arrhythmia, ST and QT Default Settings

Lead-independent ST Settings Factory Adult Factory Pedi Factory Neo

ST Analysis On Off
ST-Index On
ISO Point -80 ms
J Point 48 ms
ST Point J+60

Lead I, II, III, V, aVR, aVL, aVF, V1-6,

Factory Adult Factory Pedi Factory Neo
MCL Settings
ST(Label) On Off
For Alarm Mode = Single-ST
ST(Label) High +2.0 mm
ST(Label) Low -2.0 mm
For Alarm Mode = Multi-ST
ST(Label) High +1.0 mm
ST(Label) Low -1.0 mm

QT Settings Factory Adult Factory Pedi Factory Neo

QT Lead All
QTc High Limit 500 ms 480 ms 460 ms
ΔQTc Limit 60 ms
QTc High Alarm On
ΔQTc High Alarm On
QT Analysis Off
QTc Formula Bazett

336
Pulse Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Pulse Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
Pulse Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms Source Auto Auto
Pulse (Label) On
System Pulse SpO2 Auto
Alarms Off Enabled
Alarm Source Sel. Enabled

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

Pulse Alarm Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Pulse (SpO2) On
Pulse Alarms Off
High Limit 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Low Limit 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
Δ Extr Brady 20 bpm
Brady Clamp 40 bpm 40 bpm 50 bpm 40 60 80
Δ Extr Tachy 20 bpm
Tachy Clamp 200 bpm 220 bpm 240 bpm

Pulse alarms use the settings of the currently selected Pulse alarm source.

Respiration Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
Respiration Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
High Limit 30 rpm 100 rpm
Low Limit 8 rpm 30 rpm
Apnea Time 20 sec
Alarms On
Resp On Off
Detection Auto (Trigger Mode)
Respiratory Speed 6.25 mm/s
Color Yellow White

337
32 Default Settings Appendix SpO2 Default Settings

SpO2 Default Settings

SpO2 Settings Factory Adult Factory Pedi Factory Neo

Alarms On
QRS Volume 1
Tone Modulation Yes
Tone Mod. Type Enhanced
Speed 25 mm/s
Perfusion On
Average 10 sec
NBP Alarm Suppr. On
Extd. Auto OnOff Disabled
Color light blue (cyan)
Average in Mon. No
Signal Quality On

SpO2 Alarm Default Settings

Setting adult pediatric neonatal

Desat Limit 80 80 80
Low Limit 90 90 85
High Limit 100 100 95
Desat delay 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec
High Alarm delay 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
Low Alarm delay 10 sec 10 sec 10 sec
Alarms On/Off on on on
Label SpO2 SpO2 SpO2
Pulse Settings
Pulse (SpO2) on on on
Pulse Alarms On/Off on on on
High Limit 120 bpm 160 bpm 200 bpm
Low Limit 50 bpm 75 bpm 100 bpm
Δ Extr Brady 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Brady Clamp 40 bpm 40 bpm 50 bpm
Δ ExtrTachy 20 bpm 20 bpm 20 bpm
Tachy Clamp 200 bpm 220 bpm 240 bpm

338
NBP Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

NBP Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
NBP Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Mode Auto Manual
Alarms from Sys.
High Limit 160/90 (110) 120/70 (90) 90/60 (70) 180/90 (110)
Low Limit 90/50 (60) 70/40 (50) 40/20 (24) 70/50 (65)
Alarms On
NBP On
Repetition Time 10 min 3 min
Pulse (NBP) On
Unit mmHg
Done Tone Off On
Start Time Synchronized NotSynchron.
VP Pressure 60 mmHg 40 mmHg 30 mmHg
Reference Auscultatory Invasive
Color Red Magenta

Temperature Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
Temp Settings
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Low Limit 36 35
High Limit 39
Alarms On
Unit °C
Range 35...43
Color Green Light Green

339
32 Default Settings Appendix Predictive Temperature Default Settings

Predictive Temperature Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
pTemp Settings1
Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Preferred Label pToral
Prompt Tones on
Value Lifetime 1 hour
Unit °C
Color Yellow

1.The settings for Prompt Tones, Unit and Color are label dependent

Invasive Pressure Default Settings

ABP, ART, Ao, BAP, Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)
FAP, P, P1, P2, P3,
P4, UAP Settings Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo

Alarms from Sys.

High Limit 160/90 (110) 120/70 (90) 90/60 (70) 180/90 (110)
Low Limit 90/50 (70) 70/40 (50) 55/20 (36) 70/50 (70)
Alarms On
Extreme Alarms Disabled
ΔExtreme High 15 10 5
ΔExtreme Low 15 10 5
High Clamp 190/100 (125) 140/80 (100) 105/75 (75)
Low Clamp 80/45 (65) 60/35 (45) 45/15 (30) 65/45 (65)
Scale 150 100 100
Speed 25 mm/s
Mean Only No
Filter 12 Hz
Mercury Cal. Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec
Unit mmHg
Color Red

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

CVP, RAP, LAP,
UVP Settings Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Alarms from Mean
High Limit 14/6 (10) 10/2 (4) 10/2 (4)
Low Limit 6/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0)
Alarms On

340
Invasive Pressure Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

CVP, RAP, LAP,
UVP Settings Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo
Extreme Alarms Enabled
ΔExtreme High 5 5 5
ΔExtreme Low 5 5 5
High Clamp 20/10 (15) 15/5 (10) 15/5 (10)
Low Clamp 0/-5 (-5) 0/-5 (-5) 0/-5 (-5)
Scale 30
Speed 25 mm/s
Mean Only Yes
Filter 12 Hz
Mercury Cal. Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec
Unit mmHg
Color light blue (cyan) Blue

PAP Settings Factory Defaults

Adult Pedi Neo

Alarms from Dia.
High Limit 34/16 (20) 60/4 (26) 60/4 (26)
Low Limit 10/0 (0) 24/-4 (12) 24/-4 (12)
Alarms On
Extreme Alarms Enabled Enabled Enabled
ΔExtreme High 5 5 5
ΔExtreme Low 5 5 5
High Clamp 45/20 (25) 65/5 (35) 65/5 (35)
Low Clamp 5/-5 (-5) 15/-5 (5) 15/-5 (5)
Scale 30
Speed 25 mm/s
Mean Only No
Filter 12 Hz
Mercury Cal. Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec
Unit mmHg
Color Yellow

341
32 Default Settings Appendix CO2 Default Settings

ICP, IC1, IC2 Factory Defaults

Settings
Adult Pedi Neo

Alarms from Mean

High Limit 14/6 (10) 10/2 (4) 10/2 (4)
Low Limit 6/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0) 2/-4 (0)
Alarms On
Extreme Alarms Enabled Enabled Enabled
ΔExtreme High 10 10 10
ΔExtreme Low 10 10 10
Low Clamp 20/10 (-5) 15/5 (-5) 15/5 (-5)
Mean High Clamp 0/-5 (0) 0/-5 (0) 0/-5 (0)
Scale 30
Speed 25 mm/s
Mean Only Yes
Filter 12 Hz
Mercury Cal. Yes
Artifact Suppr. 60 sec
Unit mmHg
Color Magenta

CO2 Default Settings

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

CO2 Settings Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo

etCO2 low 30 25
etCO2 high 50 60
imCO2 high 4
CO2 Alarms on
Unit mmHg
Scale 40 mmHg 50
ImCO2 on Off
Oxygen Corr 16%
Gas Corr Off
Humidity Corr BTPS
Max Hold Off
AwRR On
AwRR Alarms On

342
CO2 Default Settings 32 Default Settings Appendix

Factory defaults H10 / H20 / H40 H30 (deviations from H10/20/40)

CO2 Settings Adult Pedi Neo Adult Pedi Neo

AwRR high limit 30 100
AwRR low limit 8 30
Apnea time 20 secs
Color Yellow White

343
32 Default Settings Appendix CO2 Default Settings

344
 1Index
# adjusting ST measurement points 130 pausing 44
adjusting wave scale (pressure) 178 physiological 55
10-lead placement (ECG) 109 pleth as source 158
adjusting wave size (CO2) 190
12-lead placement (ECG) 109 recordings 53
admit
3-lead placement (ECG) 107 red 39
editing information 87
4-channel recorder 237 reminder 43
quick admit 87
restarting 45
5-lead placement (ECG) 107 admitting a patient 85 reviewing 50
A airway adapter reviewing messages 50
CO2, microstream accessory 189 reviewing window 51
AAMI ECG lead labels 106 alarm latching 52, 122 selftest 52
abdominal breathing alarm limits silencing 43
and Resp electrode placement 148 changing 47 SpO2 high and low limits 157
aberrantly conducted beats 116 checking 46 SpO2 specific 156
manually adjusting 47 ST 132
accessories
narrow 49 suspended symbol 44
10-electrode cable sets 282
report 253 switching on and off 44
3-electrode cable sets 282, 284
ST 132 temperature 173
5-electrode cable sets 282, 284
switching auto limits on/off 49 testing 52
5-electrode one piece cables 284
using automatic limits 49 tone configuration 41
6-electrode cable sets 282
wide 49 traditional 41
CO2 186, 189
window 46 volume, changing 42
CO2 (mainstream) 292
yellow 39
CO2 (microstream) 292 alarm recording 238
ECG 281 choosing recorded measurements 240 alphabetical listing of alarms 55
NBP alarm source selection, disabled 145 alternating current symbol 297
adult cuffs 286 alarm status area 14 analog interface symbol 297
comfort cuffs 285 analog output
alarms
disposable cuffs 285 ECG 298
acknowledging 43
multi-patient comfort cuff kits 285 annotating events 226
active 39
neonatal/infant cuffs
active SpO2 source 158 annotation
(disposable) 286
alphabetical listing 55 recording strip 241
reusable cuffs 285
apnea delay 191 apnea alarm delay
single-hose disposable cuffs 286
apnea delay time (Resp) 150 CO2 191
Nellcor 287
arrhythmia 39
pressure 286 apnea alarm delay time (RESP) 150
audible indicators 41
Pulsion 286 apnea alarms
awrr limits 192
recorder paper 293 and Resp detection modes 150
chaining 124
resp 281 arrhythmia
CO2 specific 191
set combiners and organizers 283, 284 aberrantly conducted beats 116
CO2, apnea delay 191
SpO2 287 analysis, how it works 115
CO2, awRR 191
Nellcor adhesive sensors atrial fibrillation and flutter 116
(disposable) 287 desat, SpO2 157
effect on pressure alarms during beat labels 118
Philips sensors (disposable) 287
zero 177 initiating learning 120, 121
Philips sensors (reusable) 287
extending pause time 45 intermittent bundle branch block 117
temperature 291
high priority 39 learning during ventricular rhythm 121
trunk cables 281, 283
INOP 39 levels of analysis 112, 115
active alarms 39 ISO/IEC standard 42 monitoring non-paced patients 116
address, Philips 296 limit, SpO2 314 monitoring paced patients 116
addressograph (printer configuration NBP source 166 options 115
setting) 252 patient messages 55 relearning 120

i
 relearning and lead fallback 121 battery status recording 273 changing Resp wave speed 150
status messages 119 battery status window 273 changing screen content 20
switching on/off 116 charge status 274 channels
understanding the display 117 conditioning 275 recorder 240
arrhythmia alarms 39, 121 conserving power 274
checking battery charge 274
adjusting alarm limits 122 indicators 271
malfunction symbols 272 checking paced status 100
all yellow on/off 122
chaining 124 power gauge 272 checklist
latching 122 recharging 271 delivery 2
multiple 124 replacing 274 installation 1
pvc-related alarms 125 safety information 275 cleaning
sinus and SV rhythm ranges 311, 314 symbol 297 infection control 267
switching on/off 122 battery performance method 268
timeout periods 123 optimizing 274 monitoring accessories 269
arrhythmia monitoring beat labels recommended substances 268
and defibrillation 114 arrhythmia 118 clock
arrhythmia options 112 bed information 32 displaying on main screen 263
arrhythmia relearning blood pressure. See also NBP (non-invasive) CO2
with EASI INOP 111 or PRESS (invasive) airway adapter 189
Brightness SmartKey 30 alarms, apnea delay 191
arterial pressure source 182, 183
alarms, awRR 191
arterial pulsation 153 brightness, adjusting 30
alarms, specific 191
artifact suppression (pressure) 179 awRR alarm limits 192
C
atrial fibrillation and flutter 116 correction, humidity 191
audlatching (arrhythmia alarms) 122 calculating corrections 190
auto alarm limits drug infusions 257 FilterLine 189
switching on/off 49 calculating cerebral perfusion 182 mainstream accessories 186
using 49 calculating pulse pressure variation 182 measuring mainstream 186
measuring microstream 189
auto detection mode (Resp) 148 calculating temperature difference 174
method, mainstream 185
auto ECG wave gain (recordings) 240 calculator 18 method, microstream 185
auto window (care groups) 96 on-screen 18 method, sidestream 185
autofilter 104 calibration microstream accessories 189
automatic arrhythmia relearn 121 interval, NBP 278 removing exhaust gases 189, 190
NBP 167 troubleshooting 190
automatic default setting 25
pressure 181 wave scale, adjusting 190
automatic NBP pressure transducer 181 CO2 (mainstream).
repeat time 165
carbon dioxide, see CO2 185 accessories 292
autosize
cardiac overlay CO2 (microstream).
ECG wave 103
and Resp detection modes 149 accessories 292
awRR alarm when measuring Resp 147 code
limits 192
cardiotach alarms 112 recording 241
awRR alarms
care groups combi-events 225
CO2 191
alarm notification 96 conditioning batteries 275
B other bed window 95
configuration
pop-up window 96
drug calculator 258
backlight cautions 9
maintenance interval 278 configuration mode 19
central recorder entering 6
baseline choosing 240
ST map, updating 136 conflict
cerebral perfusion 182 label 27
ST, updating 129
chaining 124 connecting power 3
basic arrhythmia option 112, 115
change screen menu 20 connecting temperature probe 173
basic event surveillance
Changing 20 connection direction symbol 297
setup 223
changing ECG lead sets 105 connector
battery
and display brightness 274 changing Resp detection mode 148 marker input 306
battery reports 273 changing Resp wave size 149 connectors 298

ii
continuous mode display settings 22 ECG wave
selecting 171 disposal autosize 103
controls gas cylinder 279 calibration bar 103
monitor 12 parts and accessories 279 ectopic status messages (arrhythmia
conventional 12-lead ECG 109 documenting events 226 monitoring) 120
correcting the NBP measurement 163 dosemeter (drug calculator) 259 electrical input symbol 297
CPAP (RESP) 149 drip table (drug calculator) 260 electrical output symbol 297
cuff drug calculator 257 electrode placement (ECG) 99
pressure, NBP 164 conventional 12-lead 109
dual Temp measurement 174
selection, NBP 163 modified 12-lead 109
dyshemoglobins
current view electrode placement (Resp) 147
intravascular (SpO2) 155
ST map 133 with abdominal breathing 148
E with lateral chest expansion 148
D electro-surgery
early systolic blood pressure, NBP 164 and ECG 114
damage EASI
mechanical 30 EMC interference
activating 105 Resp 150
damage claims 2 ECG monitoring 111
EMI filter for ECG 104
database lead placement 111
events 224 end case
EASI ECG lead labels 106
discharging a patient 88
date, setting 6, 30 ECG 99 report, printing 88
default profile 24 accessories 281
end case reports
default settings 327 alarms off (Config Mode) 113
setup 247
checking country-specific 6 changing lead sets 105
choosing electrode sites 105 enhanced arrhythmia option 112, 115
defibrillation
conventional 12-lead 109 equipotential grounding symbol 297
and arrhythmia monitoring 114
and ECG monitoring 114 external pacing electrodes 115 event
synchronization marks 100 filter settings 104 annotation 226
fusion beat pacemakers 115 combi-events 225
defibrillator input 306
intrinsic rhythm 114 event episode 221
defibrillator proof symbol 297 modified 12-lead 109 event episode recording 227
defibrillator synch New Lead Setup 105 event episode window 225
maintenance interval 278 pacemaker failure 114 event post-time 221
delay time rate adaptive pacemakers 115 event pre-time 221
recording 240 unfiltered 104 event retriggering 223
delayed recording 238 wave size 103 event review window 225
ECG analog output 298 event time 221
deleting events 224
ECG cable event triggers 222
demonstration mode 19 event values 226
for operating room 114
desat alarm, SpO2 157 manual event triggers 223
ECG display 100
detection modes (Resp) 148 recording 226
ECG electrode colors 106 setting up NER 223
diagnostic (ECG filter setting) 104
ECG electrode placement event database 224
disabling touch operation 14
during electro-surgery 114
discharging a patient 88 event episode reports 248
ECG gain
disconnect INOPs event report 229
in recordings 240
silencing 43 in reports 247 event review reports 248
disinfecting ECG lead labels 106 event surveillance 221
infection control 267 events pop-up keys 222
ECG lead placement
recommended substances 268 exclamation mark symbol 297
choosing EASI/Standard 105
display exhaust gases, removing 189, 190
ECG leads monitored 105
arrhythmia 117
ECG output 306 extension cable for SpO2 154
ECG 100
NBP 163 ECG report 255 external pacing electrodes
Resp 148 lead layout 247 and ECG monitoring 115
ST 128 ECG safety information 114 extreme bradycardia alarm 113, 145
display brightness 274 ECG source tracking 201 extreme pressure alarms 180

iii
extreme rate alarms 113, 145 CO2 191 alarms 52
extreme tachycardia alarm 113, 145 hypotension evaluation 235 alarms, behavior 52
latching arrhythmia alarms 122
F I
lateral chest expansion (neonates)
fallback (ECG) 106 IEC ECG lead labels 106 monitoring Resp 148
FAST If 201 lead fallback
Fourier artefact suppression and arrhythmia relearning 121
IIT 89
technology 153 lead fallback (ECG) 106
IMV (Resp) 149
filter (ECG filter setting) 104 lead labels (ECG) 106
infection control
filter (ECG) 104 cleaning 267 lead placement
FilterLine disinfecting 267 activating EASI/Standard 105
CO2, microstream accessory 189 sterilizing 267 for Resp measurement 147
flushing invasive pressure accessories 175 Information Center leads monitored (ECG) 105
freezing waves 26 central recording 237 Leads Off INOP (ECG) 106
functional arterial oxygen saturation 153 transferring patients 89 levels of arrhythmia analysis 115
transferring patients using IIT 89 loading paper 4
fusion beat pacemakers
and ECG monitoring 115 INOPs
indicators 39 M
G silencing 43
M3160A recorder 237
input
gas cylinder main screen overview 13
defibrillator 306
empty, disposing of 279 mains power
installation
gas input symbol 297 connecting to 3
checklist 1
gas output symbol 297 connectors 298 mainstream CO2
getting started 30 personnel 1 accessories 186
global trend time 215 measuring 186
Instructions for Use
graphic trend intended audience 9 maintenance
report 208 cables 277
intermittent bundle branch block 117
cords 277
graphic trends 208 intermittent mandatory ventilation measurements, schedule 278
graphic trends report 214 (Resp) 149
microstream CO2, calibration 278
interruption symbol 298 schedule 277
H
intravascular dyshemoglobins (SpO2) 155 visual inspection 277
help intrinsic rhythm 114 malfunction symbols
INOPS 50 introduction 9 battery 272
high resolution recording 238 ISO point (ST) 130 manual detection mode (Resp) 149
high-res trend event episodes 221 and apnea alarms 150
J manually triggering events 223
high-res trend waves
about 219 J point (ST) 130 manufacture date symbol 297
OxyCRG 219 manufacturer’s information 296
high-res waves K
map
in reports 219 ST 133
keyboard
list of available measurements 305 marker input connector 306
on-screen 17
recordings 220
keys Mason-Likar lead system 109
HiResTrnd
permanent 15 max hold setting (CO2) 185
see high-res trend 221
pop-up 17 measurement
horizon trend SmartKeys 15 adjusting a wave 25
trend time 215
preparation 30
HR = RR (Resp) 148 L
setting up 25
HR alarms label conflict resolution 27 wave speed, changing 25
when arrhythmia off 113 measurement labels 27
labels 27
HR alarms off (Config Mode) 113 changing 27 changing 27
HR and pulse alarm source selection 145 lactate measurement 234 measurement points, ST 130
HR from (heart rate source) 144 latching measurement settings 22
humidity correction

iv
measurements cuff, tightness 163 method 161
setting up 31 disposable cuffs 285 other bed window 95
switching on and off 25 how the measurement works 161 output
mechanical damage 30 measurement correction 163 ECG 306
merging patient data 92 measurement limitations 162
overlap
measurement methods, auto 162
methemoglobin (SpO2) 155 in recordings 240
measurement methods, manual 162
microstream CO2 measurement methods, sequence 162 overlapping screen trends 216
accessories 189 measurement methods, stat 162 oxyCRG 219
maintenance, calibration 278 measurement, starting 164 OxyCRG event episodes 221
measuring 189 measurement, stopping 164
mismatch neonatal cuffs (disposable) 286 P
patient data, resolving 90 numerics 163
pace pulse rejection (ECG)
modified 12-lead ECG 109 oscillometric method 161
about 100
modified screen history 20 pediatric cuffs 286
switching on/off 102
preparing to measure 162
modifying paced patients
repeat time 163
screens 20 arrhythmia monitoring 116
repeat time for automatic 165
monitor repetition time, setting 165 repolarization tails 102
inspecting before use 30 reusable cuffs 285 safety information 114
starting monitoring 31 single-hose disposable cuffs 286 setting status 114
switching on 31 site inspection 163 paced status
monitor (ECG filter setting) 104 time of last measurement 163 checking 100
monitor controls 12 units 163 pacemaker failure 114
monitor defaults 327 venous puncture 167 paper
monitor revision neonates loading 4
how to find 30 Resp electrode placement 148 paper size
monitor settings 22 NER setup 223 for reports 248
changing 29 network connection indicator 13 parameter scales
monitoring networked monitoring 32 trends 212
preparation 30 new features 35 passcode protection 19
starting 30 non-invasive blood pressure. See NBP patient
monitoring mode 19 non-paced patients admit 85
mounting information 3 arrhythmia monitoring 116 category, NBP 161
MP20 11 discharge 88
numerics
end case 88
MP20 Junior 11 explanation of NBP display 163
patient alarm messages 55
MP30 11 nurse call 45
patient demographics window 85
multi-lead ST alarming 132 nurse call relay connection symbol 297
patient mismatch 90
N O patient reports
contents 252
narrow alarm limits 49 on screen calculator 18
patient trends
navigating 13 operating 13
viewing 207
permanent keys 15 permanent keys 15
SmartKeys 15 SmartKeys, using 15 paused alarms 44
extending time 45
NBP operating mode 19
restarting 45
adult cuffs 286 operating modes 19
alarm source 166 performance specifications
configuration 19
ANSI/AAMI SP10-1992 161 pressure 309, 316
demonstration 19
automatic mode, enabling 165 monitoring 19 performance test 321
calibrating 167 passcode protection 19 perfusion indicator 153, 154, 158
calibration interval 278 service 19 permanent 15
comfort cuff kits 285 operating room ECG cable 114 Philips contact information 296
comfort cuffs 285
orange ECG cable 114 physiological alarms 39
cuff pressure 164
cuff, applying 163 organizers 283, 284 pleth alarm source 158
cuff, selecting 163 oscillometric NBP measurement pleth wave 157

v
pleth waveform 153 swapping a complete profile 24 drug calculations 260
Pop 17 swapping setting block 24 ECG gain 240
pop-up keys 17 protective earth symbol 297 extending 238
events 222 protocol log 236 high resolution 238
preventing fading ink 242
power ProtocolWatch 231
procedure 238
connecting 3 SSC sepsis 231
realtime 238
connection 3 pulse recording strip 241
disconnecting from alarms 144 recording strip code 241
mains power system pulse source 143 runtime 240
disconnecting from 32 pulse numerics for SpO2 154 setting the runtime 240
PPV 182 pulse pressure variation 182 setup menu 239
predictive mode PVC-related alarms 125 ST segments 130
selecting 171 starting and stopping 237
predictive temperature Q types 238
making a measurement 169 wave overlap 240
making measurements 169 QRS tone 145 wave scale 240
selecting labels 171 changing volume 29 waveforms recorded 242
preparing skin QRS tone pitch, SpO2 158 recording alarms 53
for ECG 99 QRS volume, changing 103 recording delay time 240
pressure QT alarms 140 recording events 226
alarms during zero 177 QT baseline 139 recycling 279
arterial source 182, 183 QT measurement algorithm 137 rejecting pace pulses 100
calibration pressure 181 QT monitoring
cerebral perfusion, calculating 182 relearning arrhythmia 120
limitations 138
performance specifications 309, 316 reminder, alarm 43
QT/QTc monitoring 137
wave scale 178 replacing batteries 274
wave size 178 quick admit 87
repolarization tails 102
zeroing the transducer 176 quick mount release symbol 297
report
pressure accessories 286 event review 229
R
pressure artifact suppression 179 reports
pressure of NBP cuff 164 radiated field immunity alarm limits 253
pressure transducer Resp 150 battery reports 273
calibration 181 rate adaptive pacemakers choosing paper size 248
zeroing 177 and ECG monitoring 115 contents 252
previous screen 20 ratemeter (drug calculator) 259 drip table 260
realtime recording 238 drug calculator 260
primary lead (ECG)
ECG 255
selecting 100 realtime report 253
end case 247
print job realtime reports patient trends 214
suspended 249 content 248 realtime report 253
printer recorder re-routing 249
disabling 249 4-channel 237 scheduled 247
settings 249 paper accessories 293 setting up 246
status messages 251 recorder status messages 243 ST map 136
unavailable 249 recording stopping printouts 246
printing alarm 238 titration table 260
event reports 226 annotation 241 trends 208
ST map reports 136 battery status 273 re-routing reports 249
status log 279 beat-to-beat 238 resolution
trends reports 214 central 237 trends 212
priority list for trends 212 changing recording type 240 resolving patient mismatch 90
probes channels 240
resp accessories 281
disposable temperature 173 choosing recorder 240
choosing recording speed 240 Resp alarms
profiles 22 apnea alarm delay time 150
default profile 24 context 238
creating templates 239 Resp detection level
patient category 23
delayed 238 and apnea detection 150

vi
Resp detection modes understanding 20 Philips sensors (disposable) 287
and cardiac overlay 149 visitor screen 21 Philips sensors (reusable) 287
changing 148 secondary lead (ECG) pleth as alarm source 158
Resp display 148 selecting 100 pleth wave 157
Resp monitoring selecting the primary lead (ECG) 100 pleth waveform 153
and cardiac overlay 147 pulse numerics 154
selecting the secondary lead (ECG) 100
QRS tone 158
Resp safety information 150 selftest signal quality 155
Resp wave alarms 52 site inspection 155
changing size 149 sensor site selection 153
changing speed 150 disposable SpO2 153 tone modulation 158
restarting paused alarms 45 sequence mode 165 SpO2 desat alarm 157
re-triggering events 223 service mode 19 SpO2 limit alarms 157
retrolental fibroplasia (SpO2) 157 set combiners 283, 284 SSC guidelines 231
reviewing alarm messages 50 setting up SSC sepsis 231
reviewing alarms 50 trends 210 ST
reviewing alarms window 51 setting up reports 246 adjusting alarm limits 132
rhythm status messages (arrhythmia setting up the sepuence 165 alarms 112, 132
monitoring) 119 settings 24 baseline, updating 129
rs-232 interface symbol 297 about 24 ensuring diagnostic quality 127
rule of six 258 default 327 filtering 127
measurement settings 24 measurement points, adjusting
runtime
monitor settings 24 adjusting 130
setting recording runtime 240
screen settings 24 multi-lead alarms 132
S synchronized telemetry and numerics in ECG wave 101
monitor 201 snippets 129
safety settings blocks 22 ST display 128
maintenance interval 278 ST map
setup menu 14
monitor 300 baseline, updating 136
Setup Recording menu 239
safety information current view 133
batteries 275 severe sepsis screening 231
report, printing
ECG 114 short yellow alarms on/off 122 printing
Resp 150 signal quality of SpO2 155 ST map report 136
safety test 321 sinus and SV rhythm ranges 311, 314 scale, changing
safety tests skin preparation scale
performance tests 3 ECG 99 ST map 136
power on test 3 task window 135
SmartKeys 15
system 4 trend view 134
source tracking trending interval, changing 136
visual inspection 3
ECG 201 trending priority 135
same patient data merge 92
specifications 295 ST maps 133
scale arrhythmia 309
ECG wave 103 ST point 130
speed
Resp wave 149 standard 10-lead placement 109
recording 240
scales wave speed, changing 25 standard 3-lead placement 107
for trends waveforms 212 standard 5-lead placement (ECG) 107
SpO2
scheduled reports 247 accessories 287 standardized rate 257
screen active alarm source 158 standby mode 19
adjusting brightness 30 alarms specific to 156 standby symbol 297
disabling touch operation 14 arterial pulsation 153
starting monitoring 31
elements 14 assessing suspicious reading 155
connecting the cables 154 status line 13
screen trend
trend time 215 disposable sensors 153 status log
extension cable 154 printing 279
screen trends 215
FAST technology 153 status messages
screens
Nellcor adhesive sensors printer 251
changing content 20
(disposable) 287 recorder 243
switching 20
perfusion indicator 153, 154, 158

vii
status messages (arrhythmia) 119 counting direction 262 V
ectopic 120 displaying on main screen 263
rhythm 119 notification 263 V electrode placement (ECG) 108
sterilizing selecting label 262 venous puncture 167
infection control 267 setting up 261 viewing arrhythmia waves 118
stopping reports printouts 246 viewing 261 viewing trends 207
surgical ECG cable 114 titration table (drug calculator) 260 visible waves report 248
surviving sepsis campaign 231 tone configuration, alarm 41 visitor screen 21
suspended alarm 44 tone mod (SpO2) 158 vislatching (arrhythmia alarms) 122
suspicious SpO2 reading 155 tone modulation 158 vital signs
Switching 20 touch tone volume 30 recording 208
switching on touchscreen report 208
monitor 31 disabling 14 vital signs report 214
switching screens 20 transducer voltage setting 3
pressure, zeroing 176 volume
symbols 296
battery 272 transferring centrally-monitored alarm 42
patients 89 touch tone volume 30
synchronization marks (defibrillator) 100 using IIT 89
system pulse 143 transport brightness setting 274 W
systolic blood pressure, NBP, early 164 trend time 215 warnings 9
T global 215
wave
trend view adjusting 25
tabular trends 209 ST map 134 changing speed 25
Tamb 174 trending interval scale (CO2) 190
task window for ST map 135 ST map 136 scale (pressure) 178
Tcereb 174 trends size (CO2) 190
technical alarms messages resolution 212 size (pressure) 178
see INOPs 61 screen trends 215 wave channel speed 26
setting parameter scales 212 wave group speed 25
telemetry alarms 199
setup 210
suspending at bedside 200 wave size
viewing 207
telemetry device Resp 149
trends pop-up keys 208
controlling from bedside 199 wave size (ECG)
silencing alarms at bedside 199 trends priority list 212 changing 103
unpairing 199 ST map 135
wave speed
temperature 169, 173 trigger conditions respiratory speed 25
accessories 291 events 223 wave speed
alarm settings 173 triggers global speed 25
connecting probe to monitor 173 for events 222 wave speed (Resp) 150
difference, calculating 174 troubleshooting waves
dual Temp measurement 174 CO2 190 freezing 26
extended label set 174 trunk cables measuring frozen 26
first 174 accessories 281, 283 releasing frozen 27
label 171, 173
Ttymp 174 what’s new 35
making a measurement 173
probe, disposable 173 Tvesic 174 wide alarms limits 49
probe, selecting 173 U wired network connection symbol 297
second 174
Understanding 22 Z
temperature probe
connecting 173 unfiltered ECG signal 104 zero
templates unpacking 2 effect on pressure alarms 177
creating for recordings 239 unpairing 199 zeroing
test blocks, how to perform 3 user interface settings pressure transducer 176
testing alarms 52 changing 29
time, setting 6, 30
timers

viii